Robotics user manual

Robotics user manual

ABB Robotics

Operating manual

RobotStudio

Trace back information:

Workspace Main version a9 (not checked in)

Published 2011-12-16 at 05:31:07

Skribenta version 785

Operating manual

RobotStudio

5.14

Document ID: 3HAC032104-001

Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.

Except as may be expressly stated anywhere in this manual, nothing herein shall be construed as any kind of guarantee or warranty by ABB for losses, damages to persons or property, fitness for a specific purpose or the like.

In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of this manual and products described herein.

This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB's written permission.

Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB.

The original language for this publication is English. Any other languages that are supplied have been translated from English.

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

ABB AB

Robotics Products

SE-721 68 Västerås

Sweden

Table of contents

Table of contents

Overview ...........................................................................................................................................

Product documentation, M2004 .......................................................................................................

Safety ................................................................................................................................................

11

16

18

1 Introduction

1.1

Terms and Concepts ..........................................................................................

1.1.1

Hardware concepts ..................................................................................

1.1.2

RobotWare concepts ...............................................................................

1.1.3

RAPID concepts ......................................................................................

1.1.4

Concepts of programming .........................................................................

1.1.5

Targets and paths ...................................................................................

1.1.6

Coordinate systems .................................................................................

1.1.7

Robot axis configurations .........................................................................

1.1.8

Libraries, geometries and CAD files ............................................................

1.1.9

VSTA as the IDE .....................................................................................

1.2

Installing and Licensing RobotStudio ....................................................................

1.3

The Graphical User Interface ...............................................................................

1.3.1

The Graphical User Interface .....................................................................

1.3.2

The Getting Started window ......................................................................

1.3.3

The Layout browser .................................................................................

1.3.4

The Paths & Targets browser ....................................................................

1.3.5

The Modeling browser ..............................................................................

1.3.6

The Offline and Online browsers ................................................................

1.3.7

The Output window ..................................................................................

1.3.8

The Controller Status window ....................................................................

1.3.9

The Operator Window ..............................................................................

1.3.10 The Document Manager window ................................................................

1.3.11 Using a mouse ........................................................................................

1.3.12 Selecting an item ....................................................................................

1.3.13 Attaching and detaching objects ................................................................

1.3.14 Keyboard shortcuts .................................................................................

19

56

58

60

67

47

49

50

53

68

69

70

44

44

45

46

32

34

37

38

19

19

21

23

24

25

26

2 How to build stations

2.1

Workflow for building a new station ......................................................................

2.2

Setting up a conveyor tracking station with two robots working on the same conveyor ....

2.2.1

Two robot systems sharing the same task frame position ...............................

2.2.2

Two robot systems having different task frame positions ................................

2.3

Creating a system with external axes automatically ................................................

2.4

Manually setting up a system with track motion ......................................................

2.4.1

Setting up a system with track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003 manually .........

2.4.2

Setting up a system with track motion of type IRBTx004 manually ...................

2.5

The VC ............................................................................................................

2.5.1

Starting a VC ..........................................................................................

2.5.2

Restarting a VC .......................................................................................

2.6

Station components ...........................................................................................

2.6.1

Importing a station component ..................................................................

2.6.2

Converting CAD formats ...........................................................................

2.6.3

Troubleshooting and optimizing geometries .................................................

2.7

Modeling .........................................................................................................

2.7.1

Objects .................................................................................................

2.7.2

Mechanisms ...........................................................................................

2.7.3

Tools and tooldata ...................................................................................

2.7.4

Setting the local origin of an object .............................................................

2.8

Placement .......................................................................................................

2.8.1

Placing objects .......................................................................................

2.8.2

Placing external axes ...............................................................................

73

87

89

90

92

83

83

85

87

79

81

81

82

73

75

75

77

92

94

95

96

97

97

98

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

5

Table of contents

2.8.3

Placing robots ........................................................................................

100

3 How to program robots 103

3.1

Workflow for programming a robot .......................................................................

3.2

Workobjects .....................................................................................................

3.3

Jogging mechanisms .........................................................................................

3.4

Targets ............................................................................................................

3.5

Paths ..............................................................................................................

3.6

Orientations .....................................................................................................

3.7

RAPID Instructions ............................................................................................

3.8

Testing positions and motions .............................................................................

3.9

Programming MultiMove systems .........................................................................

3.9.1

About programming MultiMove ..................................................................

3.9.2

Setting up the MultiMove ..........................................................................

3.9.3

Testing the MultiMove ..............................................................................

3.9.4

Tuning the motion behavior .......................................................................

3.9.5

Creating paths ........................................................................................

3.9.6

Programming external axes .......................................................................

3.10 Loading and saving programs and modules ...........................................................

3.11 Synchronization ................................................................................................

3.12 Using the RAPID editor ......................................................................................

122

124

124

126

127

128

130

131

103

104

105

106

108

111

115

133

134

135

4 How to simulate programs 139

4.1

Simulation Overview ..........................................................................................

4.2

Detecting collisions ...........................................................................................

4.3

Creating an event ..............................................................................................

4.4

Simulating I/O signals ........................................................................................

4.5

Enabling simulation monitoring ............................................................................

4.6

Measuring process time .....................................................................................

139

141

144

145

146

147

5 Deployment and distribution 149

5.1

Copying programs .............................................................................................

5.2

Pack & Go / Unpack & Work ................................................................................

5.3

Screen Capture .................................................................................................

149

150

151

6 Working online 153

6.1

Connecting a PC to the service port ......................................................................

6.2

Network settings ...............................................................................................

6.3

User Authorization .............................................................................................

6.4

The System Builder ...........................................................................................

6.4.1

System Builder Overview ..........................................................................

6.4.2

Viewing system properties ........................................................................

6.4.3

Building a new system .............................................................................

6.4.4

Modifying a system ..................................................................................

6.4.5

Copying a system ....................................................................................

6.4.6

Creating a system from backup ..................................................................

6.4.7

Downloading a system to a controller ..........................................................

6.4.8

Creating boot media ................................................................................

6.4.9

Examples using the System Builder Offline ..................................................

6.4.9.1 A MultiMove system with two coordinated robots ..............................

6.4.9.2 A system with support for one robot and one positioner external axis ....

6.4.9.3 Options settings for systems with positioners ...................................

6.5

Handle I/O .......................................................................................................

6.6

Configure systems ............................................................................................

6.7

Handle events ..................................................................................................

171

172

173

174

175

175

177

179

153

155

158

160

160

162

163

167

180

181

187

7 The File menu 191

7.1

Overview .........................................................................................................

191

6

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Table of contents

7.2

New Station .....................................................................................................

7.3

Screenshot ......................................................................................................

7.4

Pack and Go ....................................................................................................

7.5

Unpack and Work ..............................................................................................

7.6

Station Viewer ..................................................................................................

7.7

Options ...........................................................................................................

192

193

194

195

196

198

8 The Home Tab 205

8.1

Overview .........................................................................................................

8.2

ABB Library .....................................................................................................

8.3

Import Library ...................................................................................................

8.4

Robot System ...................................................................................................

8.4.1

Robot System .........................................................................................

8.4.2

External Axis Wizard ................................................................................

8.5

Import Geometry ...............................................................................................

8.6

Frame .............................................................................................................

8.6.1

Frame ...................................................................................................

8.6.2

Frame from Three Points ..........................................................................

8.7

Workobject ......................................................................................................

8.8

Tooldata ..........................................................................................................

8.9

Target .............................................................................................................

8.9.1

Teach Target ..........................................................................................

8.9.2

Create Target .........................................................................................

8.9.3

Create Jointtarget ....................................................................................

8.9.4

Create Targets on Edge ............................................................................

8.10 Empty Path ......................................................................................................

8.11 AutoPath .........................................................................................................

8.12 MultiMove ........................................................................................................

8.13 Teach Instruction ..............................................................................................

8.14 Move Instruction ...............................................................................................

8.15 Action Instruction ..............................................................................................

8.16 Instruction Template Manager .............................................................................

8.17 Settings ...........................................................................................................

8.17.1 Task .....................................................................................................

8.17.2 Workobject ............................................................................................

8.17.3 Tool ......................................................................................................

8.18 The Freehand Group ..........................................................................................

8.18.1 Move ....................................................................................................

8.18.2 Rotate ...................................................................................................

8.18.3 Jog Joint ...............................................................................................

8.18.4 Jog Linear ..............................................................................................

8.18.5 Jog Reorient ..........................................................................................

8.18.6 MultiRobot Jog .......................................................................................

8.19 The 3D View group ............................................................................................

8.20 Viewpoint ........................................................................................................

8.21 Markup ............................................................................................................

243

243

244

245

246

246

247

248

224

226

227

229

237

238

239

240

249

250

251

252

254

256

215

216

218

219

220

220

221

223

205

206

207

208

208

211

214

215

9 The Modeling Tab 257

9.1

Overview .........................................................................................................

9.2

Component Group .............................................................................................

9.3

Empty Part .......................................................................................................

9.4

Smart Component .............................................................................................

9.4.1

Smart Component ...................................................................................

9.4.2

Smart Component Editor ..........................................................................

9.4.3

The Compose tab ....................................................................................

9.4.4

The Properties and Bindings tab ................................................................

9.4.5

The Signals and Connections tab ...............................................................

9.4.6

The Design tab .......................................................................................

9.4.7

Basic Smart Components .........................................................................

257

258

259

260

260

261

262

265

268

271

272

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

7

Table of contents

9.4.8

Property Editor .......................................................................................

9.4.9

The Simulation Watch window ...................................................................

9.5

Solid ...............................................................................................................

9.6

Surface ...........................................................................................................

9.7

Curve ..............................................................................................................

9.8

Border .............................................................................................................

9.9

Intersect ..........................................................................................................

9.10 Subtract ..........................................................................................................

9.11 Union ..............................................................................................................

9.12 Extrude Surface or Curve ....................................................................................

9.13 Line from Normal ..............................................................................................

9.14 The Measure Group ...........................................................................................

9.15 Create Mechanism ............................................................................................

9.16 Create Tool ......................................................................................................

305

306

307

308

309

310

316

288

289

291

295

297

302

304

10 The Simulation Tab 319

10.1 Overview .........................................................................................................

10.2 Create Collision Set ...........................................................................................

10.3 Simulation Setup ...............................................................................................

10.4 Event Manager .................................................................................................

10.5 Station Logic ....................................................................................................

10.6 Activate Mechanical Units ...................................................................................

10.7 Simulation Control .............................................................................................

10.8 I/O Simulator ....................................................................................................

10.9 Monitor ............................................................................................................

10.10 Signal Analyzer .................................................................................................

10.10.1 Signal Setup ...........................................................................................

10.10.2 Signal Analyzer .......................................................................................

10.10.3 History ..................................................................................................

10.11 AutoPlace WorkObject .......................................................................................

10.12 Record Movie ...................................................................................................

10.13 Conveyor Tracking Mechanism ............................................................................

10.13.1 Conveyor Tracking ..................................................................................

10.13.2 Conveyor Simulation ................................................................................

335

336

336

338

341

342

344

345

345

346

319

320

321

324

330

331

332

333

11 The Online and Offline Tabs 349

11.1 Overview .........................................................................................................

11.2 Common features in Online and Offline tabs ..........................................................

11.2.1 Events ...................................................................................................

11.2.2 RAPID editor ..........................................................................................

11.2.3 RAPID File Management ...........................................................................

11.2.3.1 New Module ...............................................................................

11.2.3.2 Load Module ...............................................................................

11.2.3.3 Save Module As ..........................................................................

11.2.3.4 Load Program .............................................................................

11.2.3.5 Save Program As ........................................................................

11.2.4 Rapid Tasks ...........................................................................................

11.2.5 Adjust Robtargets ...................................................................................

11.2.6 RAPID Profiler ........................................................................................

11.2.7 Inputs / Outputs ......................................................................................

11.2.8 ScreenMaker ..........................................................................................

11.2.9 Restart ..................................................................................................

11.2.10 Backup and Restore ................................................................................

11.2.10.1 Backing up a system ....................................................................

11.2.10.2 Restoring a system from backup ....................................................

11.2.11 System Builder .......................................................................................

11.2.12 Configuration editor .................................................................................

11.2.13 Load Parameters .....................................................................................

11.2.14 Save Parameters .....................................................................................

357

358

359

362

364

365

367

369

349

350

350

352

354

354

355

356

370

370

372

373

374

379

380

8

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Table of contents

11.2.15 Safety Configuration ................................................................................

11.2.16 RAPID Watch window ..............................................................................

11.3 Online specific features ......................................................................................

11.3.1 Add Controller ........................................................................................

11.3.2 Request Write Access ..............................................................................

11.3.3 Release Write Access ..............................................................................

11.3.4 Authenticate ...........................................................................................

11.3.5 File transfer ............................................................................................

11.3.6 FlexPendant Viewer .................................................................................

11.3.7 Import Options ........................................................................................

11.3.8 Properties ..............................................................................................

11.3.9 Go Offline ..............................................................................................

11.3.10 Online Monitor ........................................................................................

11.3.11 User Accounts ........................................................................................

11.3.12 UAS Grant Viewer ...................................................................................

11.4 Offline specific features ......................................................................................

11.4.1 Synchronize to Station .............................................................................

11.4.2 Synchronize to VC ...................................................................................

11.4.3 Virtual FlexPendant .................................................................................

11.4.4 Run Mode ..............................................................................................

11.4.5 Control Panel .........................................................................................

11.4.6 Shutdown ..............................................................................................

11.4.7 Set Task Frames .....................................................................................

11.4.8 System Configuration ...............................................................................

11.4.9 Encoder Unit ..........................................................................................

387

389

390

391

394

395

396

401

381

382

383

383

384

385

386

405

405

406

407

408

409

410

411

412

414

12 The Add-Ins Tab 415

12.1 Overview .........................................................................................................

12.2 Visual Studio Tools for Applications ......................................................................

12.3 Gearbox Heat Prediction .....................................................................................

415

416

417

13 The Context Menus 421

13.1 Add to Path ......................................................................................................

13.2 Align Frame Orientation ......................................................................................

13.3 Align Target Orientation .....................................................................................

13.4 Attach to ..........................................................................................................

13.5 Configurations ..................................................................................................

13.6 Check Reachability ............................................................................................

13.7 Configurations ..................................................................................................

13.8 Convert Frame to Workobject ..............................................................................

13.9 Convert to Move Circular ....................................................................................

13.10 Copy / Apply Orientation .....................................................................................

13.11 Detach ............................................................................................................

13.12 Execute Move Instruction ...................................................................................

13.13 External Axis Interpolation ..................................................................................

13.14 Graphic Appearance ..........................................................................................

13.15 Interpolate Path ................................................................................................

13.16 Invert ..............................................................................................................

13.17 Jump to Target .................................................................................................

13.18 Linked Geometry ...............................................................................................

13.19 The Library Group .............................................................................................

13.20 Mechanism Joint Jog .........................................................................................

13.21 Mechanism Linear Jog .......................................................................................

13.22 Mirror Path .......................................................................................................

13.23 Mirror ..............................................................................................................

13.24 Modify Curve ....................................................................................................

13.25 Modify External Axis ..........................................................................................

13.26 Modify Instruction ..............................................................................................

13.27 Modify Mechanism ............................................................................................

439

440

441

442

444

445

446

447

452

453

454

430

431

432

433

434

435

437

438

421

422

423

424

425

427

428

429

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

9

Table of contents

13.28 Modify Tooldata ................................................................................................

13.29 Modify Workobject .............................................................................................

13.30 Move Along Path ...............................................................................................

13.31 Move to Pose ...................................................................................................

13.32 Place ..............................................................................................................

13.33 Remove Unused Targets ....................................................................................

13.34 Rename Targets ...............................................................................................

13.35 Reverse Path ....................................................................................................

13.36 Rotate .............................................................................................................

13.37 Rotate Path ......................................................................................................

13.38 Set Local Origin ................................................................................................

13.39 Set Normal to Surface ........................................................................................

13.40 Set Position .....................................................................................................

13.41 Tool Compensation ...........................................................................................

13.42 Translate Path ..................................................................................................

13.43 View Robot at Target .........................................................................................

13.44 View Tool at Target ............................................................................................

463

464

465

466

467

468

469

470

471

472

455

456

457

458

459

461

462

14 The ScreenMaker tab 473

14.1 Introduction to ScreenMaker ...............................................................................

14.1.1 Overview ...............................................................................................

14.1.2 Development environment ........................................................................

14.2 Managing ScreenMaker projects ..........................................................................

14.2.1 Overview ...............................................................................................

14.2.2 Managing ScreenMaker projects ................................................................

14.2.3 Application variables ................................................................................

14.2.4 Form designer ........................................................................................

14.2.5 Data binding ...........................................................................................

14.2.6 ScreenMaker Doctor ................................................................................

14.2.7 Screen navigation ...................................................................................

14.3 Tutorial ............................................................................................................

14.3.1 Overview ...............................................................................................

14.3.2 Designing the FlexArc operator panel .........................................................

14.3.3 Designing the screen ...............................................................................

14.3.4 Building and deploying the project ..............................................................

14.4 Frequently asked questions ................................................................................

493

496

499

501

502

502

503

505

511

512

473

473

476

486

486

487

492

Index 515

10

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Overview

Overview

About this manual

This manual describes how to create, program and simulate robot cells and stations using RobotStudio. For online programming, this manual describes how to supervise, install, configure and program a real robot controller. Terms and concepts related to offline and online programming are also explained.

RobotStudio offers the following installation options:

• Complete

• Custom, allowing user-customized contents and paths

• Minimal, running RobotStudio in Online mode only

Usage

Who should read this manual?

This manual is intended for RobotStudio users, proposal engineers, mechanical designers, offline programmers, robot technicians, service technicians, PLC programmers, Robot programmers, and Robot System integrators.

Prerequisites

This manual should be used when working with either the offline or online functions of RobotStudio.

The reader should have basic knowledge of:

• Robot programming

• Generic Windows handling

• 3D CAD programs

Organization of chapters

The operating manual is structured in the following chapters:

Chapter

1

2

3

4

5

Contents

Introduction Contains installation instructions, basic explanations of the terms and concepts related to robotics and programming, and a description of the GUI.

How to build stations Describes how to build stations in RobotStudio.

This includes importing and configuring the equipment to be simulated, as well as testing the reachability for finding the optimal station layout.

How to program robots

Describes how to create robot movements, I/O signals, process instructions and logics in a RAPID program for the robots. It also describes how to run and test the program.

How to simulate programs

Describes how to simulate and validate robot programs.

Deployment and distribution

Describes how to transfer systems between Robot-

Studio’s virtual controllers and real IRC5 controllers, how to copy programs, how to package an active station for moving between RobotStudio

PCs, and how to capture a screen.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

11

Overview

Continued

References

Revisions

Chapter

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

Working online

The File menu

The Home Tab

Contents

Covers the functionality of the Minimal Installation, describing such online functions as building systems (with offline examples), handling I/O and events, and configuring systems.

Describes the options to create new station, create new robot system, connect to a controller, save station as viewer, and RobotStudio options.

Describes the controls required for building stations, creating systems, programming paths and placing items.

The Modeling Tab

The Simulation Tab

The Online and Offline Tabs

The Add-Ins Tab

Describes the controls for creating and grouping components, creating bodies, measurements and

CAD operations.

Describes the controls for setting up, configuring, controlling, monitoring, and recording simulations.

Describes the controls in Online tab and Offline tab.

Online tab contains the controls for managing the real controllers

Offline tab contains the controls for synchronization, configuration and tasks assigned to the virtual controller (VC).

Describes the control for PowerPacs and the Visual

Studio Tools for Applications (VSTA).

The Context Menus Describes the options available from the context menus.

The ScreenMaker tab Describes the ScreenMaker development tool, how to manage projects in ScreenMaker and the various menus and commands used in the application.

Reference

Product manual - IRC5

Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant

Technical reference manual - RAPID overview

Technical reference manual - System parameters

Application manual - MultiMove

Application manual - Conveyor tracking

Revision

A

Document Id

3HAC021313-001

3HAC16590-1

3HAC16580-001

3HAC17076-1

3HAC021272-001

3HAC16587-1

Description

First revision, called RobotStudio 2008, released for Partner Days. Tne entire manual has been adapted to the new GUI, in which RobotStudio

Online has been integrated.

Continues on next page

12

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Overview

Continued

Revision

B

C

D

Description

Released with RobotStudio 5.12.

The following updates were made in the manual:

Conveyor Tracking on page 345

Create Conveyor mechanism on page 310

Conveyor Simulation on page 346

Two robot systems sharing the same task frame position on page 75

Two robot systems having different task frame positions on page 77

Creating a system with external axes automatically on page 79

Setting up a system with track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003 manually on page 81

Setting up a system with track motion of type IRBTx004 manually on page 82

The Operator Window on page 58

Station Viewer on page 196

Recording the simulation on page 344

Viewpoint on page 254

Linked Geometry on page 440

Released with RobotStudio 5.13.

• Merged chapters The Offline tab and The Online tab

• Added the missing information from RobotStudio Online manual.

• Integrated ScreenMaker. See

ScreenMaker on page 367

.

Added the following new contents:

Smart Component on page 260

The Simulation Watch window on page 289

The Document Manager window on page 60

Station Logic on page 330

Simulation Setup on page 321

Updated the changes related to handling Task Frames.

• Updated

Modifying Task frame on page 411

.

• Added

Placing robots on page 100 .

• Updated

Creating a system from layout on page 208 .

Released with RobotStudio 5.13.02

The ScreenMaker tutorial was updated. See

Tutorial on page 502

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

13

Overview

Continued

Revision

E

Description

Released with RobotStudio 5.14

• Added

The Controller Status window on page 56

.

• Updated the sections

Simulation Setup on page 321

and

Simulation

Control on page 332 .

• Moved

RAPID Watch window on page 382

to the chapter Common features in Online and Offline tabs.

• Updated

The Document Manager window on page 60

(added

Station mode).

• Updated

Creating and loading a Station Viewer on page 196

(Record to Viewer)

• Added

Jog Reorient on page 250 .

• Added

The 3D View group on page 252 .

• Updated

The Compose tab on page 262

(added Export to XML and updated Base Component menu).

• Updated

Coordinate systems on page 26

(improved task frame description).

• Updated

Supported CAD formats on page 35

(information on CAD

Converters)

Added the following new contents:

AutoPlace WorkObject on page 342

.

AutoPath on page 227

Online Monitor on page 395

Adjust Robtargets on page 362

RAPID Profiler on page 364

Markup on page 256

Signal Analyzer on page 336

External Axis Interpolation on page 434

Auto Configuration on page 425

The Design tab on page 271

The following are the ScreenMaker updates:

• Added

ScreenMaker Doctor on page 499 .

• Added new controls

VariantButton on page 484

and

Conditional-

Trigger on page 485

.

• Updated

Creating a new project on page 487

(added pre-defined templates).

• Updated

Controller object data binding on page 497

(added information on shared data).

Continues on next page

14

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Overview

Continued

Revision

F

G

Description

Released with RobotStudio 5.14.02

Added the following new contents:

Gearbox Heat Prediction on page 417

External Axis Wizard on page 211

Added the following new contents in Settings tab:

Selecting a Task on page 243

Selecting a Workobject on page 244

Selecting a Tool on page 245

Updated

Creating boot media on page 174

(added information on creating a new system).

Added information on Logic Expression in

Signals and Properties on page 272

.

Added a Note for Call .Net Method in

Form designer on page 493

of the

ScreenMaker tab.

Added information on I-start in

Result on page 170

for the Modifying a system section.

Added information on Offs in the Note for

Prerequisites on page 362

in

Using Adjust Robtargets.

Added a Note for the Execute button in

Using Adjust Robtargets on page 362

.

Added information on Always on top in Create Markup of the

Markup on page 256

section.

Updated Note for Using ScreenMaker Doctor in

ScreenMaker Doctor on page 499

.

Released with RobotStudio 5.14.02.01

Added

Using Network Licensing on page 40

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

15

Product documentation, M2004

Product documentation, M2004

Categories for manipulator documentation

The manipulator documentation is divided into a number of categories. This listing is based on the type of information in the documents, regardless of whether the products are standard or optional.

All documents listed can be ordered from ABB on a DVD. The documents listed are valid for M2004 manipulator systems.

Product manuals

Manipulators, controllers, DressPack/SpotPack, and most other hardware will be delivered with a Product manual that generally contains:

• Safety information.

• Installation and commissioning (descriptions of mechanical installation or electrical connections).

• Maintenance (descriptions of all required preventive maintenance procedures including intervals and expected life time of parts).

• Repair (descriptions of all recommended repair procedures including spare parts).

• Calibration.

• Decommissioning.

• Reference information (safety standards, unit conversions, screw joints, lists of tools ).

• Spare parts list with exploded views (or references to separate spare parts lists).

• Circuit diagrams (or references to circuit diagrams).

Technical reference manuals

The technical reference manuals describe the manipulator software in general and contain relevant reference information.

RAPID Overview: An overview of the RAPID programming language.

RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types: Description and syntax for all RAPID instructions, functions, and data types.

RAPID Kernel: A formal description of the RAPID programming language.

System parameters: Description of system parameters and configuration workflows.

Application manuals

Specific applications (for example software or hardware options) are described in

Application manuals. An application manual can describe one or several applications.

An application manual generally contains information about:

• The purpose of the application (what it does and when it is useful).

Continues on next page

16

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Product documentation, M2004

Continued

• What is included (for example cables, I/O boards, RAPID instructions, system parameters, DVD with PC software).

• How to install included or required hardware.

• How to use the application.

• Examples of how to use the application.

Operating manuals

The operating manuals describe hands-on handling of the products. The manuals are aimed at those having first-hand operational contact with the product, that is production cell operators, programmers, and trouble shooters.

The group of manuals includes (among others):

Emergency safety information

General safety information

Getting started, IRC5 and RobotStudio

Introduction to RAPID

IRC5 with FlexPendant

RobotStudio

Trouble shooting, for the controller and manipulator.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

17

Safety

Safety

Safety of personnel

A robot is heavy and extremely powerful regardless of its speed. A pause or long stop in movement can be followed by a fast hazardous movement. Even if a pattern of movement is predicted, a change in operation can be triggered by an external signal resulting in an unexpected movement.

Therefore, it is important that all safety regulations are followed when entering safeguarded space.

Safety regulations

Before beginning work with the robot, make sure you are familiar with the safety regulations described in the manual Operating manual - General safety information.

18

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.1.1 Hardware concepts

1 Introduction

1.1 Terms and Concepts

1.1.1 Hardware concepts

Overview

This section introduces the hardware in a typical IRC5 robot cell. For detailed explanations, see the manuals related to IRC5 robots specified in

on page 12 .

Standard hardware

The table below describes the standard hardware in an IRC5 robot cell.

Hardware

Robot manipulator

Control module

Drive module

FlexController

FlexPendant

Tool

Explanation

An ABB industrial robot.

Contains the main computer that controls the motion of the manipulator. This includes RAPID execution and signal handling. One control module can be connected to 1 – 4 drive modules.

A module containing the electronics that power the motors of a manipulator. The drive module can contain up to nine drive units, each controlling one manipulator joint. Since the standard robot manipulators have six joints, you usually use one drive module per robot manipulator.

The controller cabinet for the IRC5 robots. It consists of one control module and one drive module for each robot manipulator in the system.

The programming pendant, connected to the control module.

Programming on the FlexPendant is referred to as “online programming”.

A device usually mounted on the robot manipulator to allow it to perform specific tasks, such as gripping, cutting or welding.

The tool can also be stationary, see below for more information.

Optional hardware

The table below describes the optional hardware for an IRC5 robot cell.

Hardware

Track manipulator

Positioner manipulator

FlexPositioner

Stationary tool

Work piece

Explanation

A moving stand holding the robot manipulator to give it a larger work space. When the control module controls the motion of a track manipulator, it is referred to as a “Track External Axis”.

A moving stand normally holding a work piece or a fixture.

When the control module controls the motion of a positioner manipulator, it is referred to as an “External Axis”.

A second robot manipulator acting as a positioner manipulator.

It is controlled by the same control module as the positioner manipulator.

A device that stands in a fixed location. The robot manipulator picks up the work piece and brings it to the device to perform specific tasks, such as gluing, grinding or welding.

The product being worked on.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

19

1 Introduction

1.1.1 Hardware concepts

Continued

Hardware

Fixture

Explanation

A construction holding the work piece in a specific position so that the repeatability of the production can be maintained.

20

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.1.2 RobotWare concepts

1.1.2 RobotWare concepts

Overview

This section introduces terminology regarding RobotWare. For detailed explanations, see the manuals related to IRC5 robots specified in

on page 12 .

RobotWare

The table below describes the RobotWare terminology and concepts that can be useful when working with RobotStudio.

Concept

RobotWare

RobotWare DVD

RobotWare installation

RobotWare Key

RobotWare system

RobotWare version

Explanation

As a concept, refers to both the software used to create a RobotWare System and the RobotWare systems themselves.

Delivered with each control module. On the DVD you will find the RobotWare installation and some other useful software.

Check the Release Notes on your DVD for specifications.

When installing RobotWare on a PC, you install into the mediapool the specific versions of the files from which RobotStudio uses to create the RobotWare system.

When installing RobotStudio, only one version of RobotWare will be installed. To simulate a specific RobotWare system, the

RobotWare version used for this particular RobotWare system must be installed on your PC.

Used when you create a new RobotWare system or upgrade an existing system. The RobotWare keys unlock the RobotWare options included in the system, and determine the RobotWare version from which the RobotWare system will be built.

For IRC5 systems there are three types of RobotWare keys:

• The controller key, which specifies the controller and software options.

• The drive keys, which specify the robots in the system.

The system has one drive key for each robot it uses.

• Additional option keys, which specify additional options, like positioner external axes.

A virtual key allows you to select any RobotWare options you wish, but a RobotWare system created from a virtual key can only be used in a virtual environment such as RobotStudio.

A set of software files that, when loaded into a controller, enables all functions, configurations, data and programs controlling the robot system.

RobotWare systems are created in the RobotStudio software.

The systems can be stored and saved on a PC, as well as on the control module.

RobotWare systems can be edited by RobotStudio or the

FlexPendant.

Each RobotWare is released with a major and a minor version number, separated by a dot. The RobotWare version for IRC5 is 5.xx, where xx identifies the minor version.

When ABB releases a new robot model, a new RobotWare version will be released with support for the new robot.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

21

1 Introduction

1.1.2 RobotWare concepts

Continued

Concept

Mediapool

Explanation

The mediapool is a folder on the PC in which each RobotWare version is stored in a folder of its own.

The files of the mediapool are used to create and implement all the different RobotWare options. Therefore, the correct

RobotWare version must be installed in the mediapool when creating RobotWare systems or running them on virtual controllers.

22

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.1.3 RAPID concepts

1.1.3 RAPID concepts

Overview

This section introduces the basic terminology of RAPID. For detailed explanations, see the manuals related to RAPID and programming specified in

on page 12 .

Terminology of the RAPID structure

The table below describes the RAPID terminology that you may come across when working with RobotStudio. The concepts are listed by size, from most basic to increasingly large.

Concept

Data declaration

Instruction

Move instructions

Action instruction

Routine

Procedure

Function

Trap

Module

Program module (.mod)

System module (.sys)

Program files (.pgf)

Explanation

Used to create instances of variables or data types, like num or tooldata.

The actual code commands that make something happen, for example, setting data to a specific value or a robot motion. Instructions can only be created inside a routine.

Create the robot motions. They consist of a reference to a target specified in a data declaration along with parameters that set motion and process behavior. If inline targets are used, the position is declared in the move instructions.

Instructions that perform other actions than moving the robot, such as setting data or sync properties.

Usually a set of data declarations followed by a set of instructions implementing a task. Routines can be divided into three categories: procedures, functions and trap routines.

A set of instructions that does not return a value.

A set of instructions that returns a value.

A set of instructions that is triggered by an interrupt.

A set of data declarations followed by a set of routines. Modules can be saved, loaded and copied as files. Modules are divided into program modules and system modules.

Can be loaded and unloaded during execution.

Used mainly for common system-specific data and routines, for example, an arcware system module that is common for all arc robots.

In IRC5 a RAPID program is a collection of module files (.mod) and the program file (.pgf.) that references all the module files.

When loading a program file, all old program modules are replaced by those referenced in the .pgf file. System modules are unaffected by program load.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

23

1 Introduction

1.1.4 Concepts of programming

1.1.4 Concepts of programming

Overview

This section introduces the terminology regarding programming. For detailed explanations, see the manuals related to programming and IRC5 Robots specified in

on page 12

.

Programming concepts

The table below describes the terminology and concepts that are used in robot programming.

Concept

Online programming

Offline programming

Explanation

Programming connected to the control module. This expression also implies using the robot to create positions and motion.

Programming without being connected to the robot or the control module.

True offline programming

Refers to the ABB Robotics concept of connecting a simulation environment to a virtual controller. This enables not only program creation, but also program testing and optimizing offline.

Virtual controller

A software that emulates a FlexController to allow the same software (the RobotWare system) that is controlling the robots to run on a PC. This gives the same behavior of the robots offline as you get online.

MultiMove

Coordinate systems

Frame

Workobject calibration

Running multiple robot manipulators with the same control module.

Used to define positions and orientations. When programming a robot, you can take advantage of using different coordinate systems to more easily position objects relative to each other.

A synonym for coordinate system.

If all your targets refer to workobjects, you only need to calibrate the workobjects when deploying offline programs.

24

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.1.5 Targets and paths

1.1.5 Targets and paths

Overview

Targets (positions) and paths (sequences of move instructions to targets) are used when programming robot motions in RobotStudio.

When you synchronize the RobotStudio station to the virtual controller, RAPID programs are created from the paths.

Targets

A target is a coordinate that the robot shall reach. It contains the following information:

Information

Position

Orientation

Configuration

Description

The position of the target, defined in a workobject coordinate system, see

Coordinate systems on page 26

.

The orientation of the target, relative to the orientation of the workobject. When the robot reaches the target, it will align the

TCP’s orientation with the target’s orientation, see

Coordinate systems on page 26 .

Configuration values that specify how the robot shall reach the target. For more information, see

Robot axis configurations on page 32

.

Targets are converted to instances of the data type robtarget when synchronized to the virtual controller.

Paths

A sequence of move instructions, paths are used to make the robot move along a sequence of targets.

Paths are converted to procedures when synchronized to the virtual controller.

Move instructions

A move instruction consists of:

• a reference to a target

• motion data, such as motion type, speed and zone

• a reference to a tooldata

• a workobject reference

Action instructions

An action instruction is a RAPID string that can be used for setting and changing parameters. Action instructions can be inserted before, after or between instruction targets in paths.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

25

1 Introduction

1.1.6 Coordinate systems

1.1.6 Coordinate systems

Overview

This section provides an introduction to the coordinate systems used mostly for offline programming. In RobotStudio, you can either use the coordinate systems

(that are explained below) or the user-defined coordinated systems for co-relating elements and objects.

Hierarchy

The coordinate systems are co-related hierarchically. The origin of each coordinate system is defined as a position in one of its ancestries. The following are the descriptions of the commonly used coordinate systems.

Tool Center Point Coordinate system

The tool center point coordinate system, also called TCP, is the center point of the tool. You can define different TCPs for one robot. All robots have one predefined

TCP at the robot’s tool mounting point, called tool0.

When a program runs, the robot moves the TCP to the programmed position.

RobotStudio World Coordinate system

The RobotStudio world coordinate system represents the entire station or robot cell. This is the top of the hierarchy to which all other coordinate systems are related

(when using RobotStudio).

Base Frame (BF)

The base coordinate system is called the Base Frame (BF). Each robot in the station, both in RobotStudio and the real world has a base coordinate system which is always located at the base of the robot.

Task Frame (TF)

The Task Frame represents the origin of the robot controller world coordinate system in RobotStudio.

The following picture illustrates the difference between the base frame and the task frame.

Continues on next page

26

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.1.6 Coordinate systems

Continued

In the picture to the left, the task frame is located at the same position as the robot base frame. In the picture to the right, the taskframe has been moved to another position.

en1000001303_Taskframe_in_Same_and_Different_Positions

The following picture illustrates how a task frame in RobotStudio is mapped to the robot controller coordinate system in the real world. For example, on the shop floor.

BF

TCP

P

TF

Wobj en1000001304_Taskframe_mapped_to_RC_Coordinate_System in_Real_world

RS-WCS

RC-WCS

World coordinate system in RobotStudio

World coordinate system as defined in the robot controller.

It corresponds to the task frame of RobotStudio.

Robot Base Frame

Tool Center Point

Robot target

Task Frame

Workobject

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

27

1 Introduction

1.1.6 Coordinate systems

Continued

Stations with multiple robot systems

For a single robot system, RobotStudio’s task frame corresponds to the robot controller world coordinate system. When several controllers are present in the station, the task frame allows the connected robots to work in different coordinate systems. That is, the robots can be located independent of each other by defining different task frames for each robot.

RS-WCS

TCP(R1)

TCP(R2)

BF(R1)

BF(R2)

P1

P2

TF1

TF2

Wobj en1000001442_Station_with_Multiple_Robot_systems

World coordinate system in RobotStudio

Tool Center Point of robot 1

Tool Center Point of robot 2

Base Frame of robot system 1

Base Frame of robot system 2

Robot target 1

Robot target 2

Task Frame of robot system 1

Task Frame of robot system 2

Workobject

MultiMove Coordinated systems

The MultiMove functions helps you create and optimize programs for MultiMove systems where one robot or positioner holds the work piece and other robots operate on it.

Continues on next page

28

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.1.6 Coordinate systems

Continued

When using a robot system with the RobotWare option MultiMove Coordinated, it is important that the robots are working in the same coordinate system. As such,

RobotStudio do not allow task frames of the controller to be separated.

en1000001305_Coordinated_MultiMove en1000001306_Coordinated_MultiMove_OneRobot

RS-WCS

TCP(R1)

TCP(R2)

BF(R1)

BF(R2)

BF(R3)

World coordinate system in RobotStudio

Tool Center Point of robot 1

Tool Center Point of robot 2

Base Frame of robot 1

Base Frame of robot 2

Base Frame of robot 3

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

29

1 Introduction

1.1.6 Coordinate systems

Continued

P1

TF

Wobj

Robot target 1

Task Frame

Workobject

MultiMove Independent systems

For a robot system with the RobotWare option MultiMove Independent, robots operate simultaneously and independently while being controlled by one controller.

Even though there is only one robot controller world coordinate system, robots often work in separate coordinate systems. To allow this setup in RobotStudio, the task frames for the robots can be separated and positioned independent of each other.

P1

P2

TF1

TF2

Wobj

RS-WCS

TCP(R1)

TCP(R2)

BF(R1)

BF(R2) en1000001308_Independent_MultiMove

World coordinate system in RobotStudio

Tool Center Point of robot 1

Tool Center Point of robot 2

Base Frame of robot 1

Base Frame of robot 2

Robot target 1

Robot target 2

Task Frame 1

Task Frame 2

Workobject

Continues on next page

30

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.1.6 Coordinate systems

Continued

Workobject coordinate system

The workobject normally represents the physical work piece. It is composed of two coordinate systems: the User frame and the Object frame, where the latter is a child to the former. When programming a robot, all targets (positions) are related to the object frame of a workobject. If no other workobject is specified, the targets will be related to the default Wobj0, which always coincides with the base frame of the robot.

Using workobjects provides the chance to easily adjust robot programs with an offset, if the location of the work piece has been changed. Thus, workobjects can be used for calibrating offline programs. If the placement of the fixture or work piece relative to the robot in the real station does not completely match the placement in the offline station, you simply adjust the position of the workobject.

Workobjects are also used for coordinated motion. If a workobject is attached to a mechanical unit (and the system uses the option for coordinated motion), the robot will find the targets in the workobject even when the mechanical unit moves the workobject.

In the picture below the grey coordinate system is the world coordinate system, and the black ones are the object frame and the user frame of the workobject. Here the user frame is positioned at the table or fixture and the object frame at the workpiece.

xx0500001519

User coordinate systems

User coordinate systems are used for creating reference points of your choice.

For example, you can create user coordinate systems at strategic points in the work piece to simplify programming.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

31

1 Introduction

1.1.7 Robot axis configurations

1.1.7 Robot axis configurations

Axis configurations

Targets are defined and stored as coordinates in a WorkObject coordinate system.

When the controller calculates the position of the robot axes for reaching the target, it will often find more than one possible solution to configuring the robot axes.

configur

To distinguish between the different configurations, all targets have a configuration value that specifies the quadrant in which each axis shall be located.

Storing axis configurations in targets

For targets that are taught after jogging the robot to the position, the used configuration will be stored in the target.

Targets created by specifying or calculating positions and orientations get a default configuration value (0,0,0,0), which might not be valid for reaching the target.

Common problems related to robot axis configurations

It is most likely that targets created by other ways than jogging cannot be reached at their default configuration.

Even if all targets in a path have validated configurations, you might encounter problems when running the path if the robot cannot move from one configuration to the other. This is likely to occur where an axis shifts greater than 90 degrees during linear movements.

Repositioned targets keep their configuration, but the configurations are no longer validated. As a result, the problems described above might occur when moving targets.

Common solutions for configuration problems

To resolve the problems described above, you can assign a valid configuration to each target and verify that the robot can move along each path. You can also turn configuration monitoring off, which means that you ignore the stored configurations and let the robot find working configurations at runtime. If this is not done the proper way, you might get unexpected results.

In some cases there might not be any working configurations. Possible solutions might then be to reposition the work piece, reorient targets (if acceptable for the process) or add an external axis that either moves the work piece or the robot for increasing reachability.

Continues on next page

32 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

1 Introduction

1.1.7 Robot axis configurations

Continued

How configurations are denoted

The robot’s axis configurations are denoted by a series of four integers, specifying in which quadrant of a full revolution significant axes are located. The quadrants are numbered from zero for positive (counterclockwise) rotation and from -1 for negative (clockwise) rotation.

For a linear axis, the integer specifies the range (in meters) from the neutral position in which the axis is located.

A configuration for a six-axis industrial robot (like IRB 140) may look like:

[0-121]

The first integer (0) specifies the position of axis 1: somewhere in the first positive quadrant (between 0 and 90 degrees rotation).

The second integer (-1) specifies the position of axis 4: somewhere in the first negative quadrant (between 0 and -90 degrees rotation).

The third integer (2) specifies the position of axis 6: somewhere in the third positive quadrant (between 180 and 270 degrees rotation).

The fourth integer (1) specifies the position of axis x, a virtual axis used for specifying the wrist center in relation to other axes.

Configuration monitoring

When executing a robot program, you can choose whether to monitor configuration values. If configuration monitoring is turned off, configuration values stored with the targets are ignored, and the robot will use the configuration closest its current configuration for reaching the target. If turned on, it will only use the specified configuration for reaching the targets.

Configuration monitoring can be turned off and on for joint and linear movements independently and is controlled by the ConfJ and ConfL action instructions.

Turning configuration monitoring off

Running a program without configuration monitoring may result in different configurations each time a cycle is executed: When the robot returns to the start position after completing a cycle, it may choose a different configuration then the original.

For programs with linear move instructions this might cause a situation where the robot gets closer and closer its joint limits and eventually will not be able to reach the target.

For programs with joint move instructions this might cause sweeping, unpredictable movements.

Turning configuration monitoring on

Running a program with configuration monitoring forces the robot to use the configurations stored with the targets. This results in predictable cycles and predictable motions. In some situations, however, like when the robot moves to a target from an unknown position, using configuration monitoring may limit the robot’s reachability.

When programming offline, you must assign a configuration to each target if the program shall be executed with configuration monitoring.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

33

1 Introduction

1.1.8 Libraries, geometries and CAD files

1.1.8 Libraries, geometries and CAD files

Overview

For programming or simulating in RobotStudio, you need models of your work pieces and equipment. Models for some standard equipment are installed as libraries or geometries with RobotStudio. If you have CAD models of your work pieces and custom equipment, these can be imported as geometries to RobotStudio.

If you do not have CAD models, you can create them in RobotStudio.

Difference between geometries and libraries

The objects you import to a station can be either geometries or libraries.

Geometries are basically CAD files, which, when imported, are copied to the

RobotStudio station.

Libraries are objects that have been saved in RobotStudio as external files. When you import a library, a link from the station to the library file is created. Accordingly, the station file does not grow in the same way as when importing geometries.

Furthermore, besides the geometrical data, library files can contain

RobotStudio-specific data. For example, if a tool is saved as a library, the tool data is saved together with the CAD data.

How geometries are constructed

An imported geometry is displayed as one part in the Objects browser. From

RobotStudio’s Modeling tab, you can see the components of the geometry.

The top node of the geometry is called a Part. The part contains Bodies, which can be of the types solid, surface or curve.

Solid bodies are 3D objects, made up of Faces. You recognize a true 3D solid by this one body containing multiple faces.

Surface bodies are 2D objects of just one face. A part that contains several bodies with one face each that together constitute a 3D object is created from 2D surfaces, and is therefore not a true 3D solid. If these parts are not created correctly, they might cause problems both in their display and graphical programming. see

Troubleshooting and optimizing geometries on page 90 .

Curved bodies, represented by the body node alone in the Modeling browser, do not contain any child nodes.

From the Modeling tab, you can edit the parts by adding, moving, rearranging or deleting bodies. Thus, you can optimize existing parts by removing unnecessary bodies, as well as create new parts by grouping bodies.

Importing and converting CAD files

For importing geometries from single CAD files, you use RobotStudio’s import function, see

Importing a station component on page 87 .

If you need to convert CAD files to other formats or want to change the default settings for the conversion before making the import, you can use the CAD converter installed with RobotStudio before making the import, see

Converting CAD formats on page 89 .

Continues on next page

34

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.1.8 Libraries, geometries and CAD files

Continued

Supported CAD formats

Some of the CAD formats require a separate license for being imported or converted by RobotStudio. The table below shows the supported CAD formats and whether a license is required:

Format File extensions License requirement Default target formats

No Iges, Step, Vdafs Acis, reads/writes versions v6 to R21 sat

Iges, reads to version

5.3, writes version 5.3

igs, iges

Step, reads versions

AP203 and AP214

(geometry only), writes version AP 214 stp, step, p21 vda, vdafs Vdafs, reads to 2.0, writes 2.0

Catia V4, reads versions 4.1.9 to 4.2.4

model, exp

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Catia V5, reads versions R2 - R20

CATPart, CATProduct

Pro/Engineer, reads versions 16 to Wildfire

5 prt, asm

Inventor, reads versions 6 to 2011 ipt

Yes

Yes

Yes

Acis, Step, Vdafs

Acis, Step, Vdafs

Acis, Iges, Step

Acis, Iges, Step,

Vdafs

Acis, Iges, Step,

Vdafs

Acis, Iges, Step,

Vdafs

Vrml

Jupiter, up to 6.4

STL

PLY

3DStudio

wrl, vrml,vrml1, vrml2 jt stl ply

3ds

No

No

No

No

No

Acis, Iges, Step,

Vdafs

RsGfx

RsGfx

RsGfx

RsGfx

RsGfx

You need licenses for both the source format and the target format when converting licensed formats.

Mathematical versus graphical geometries

A geometry in a CAD file always has an underlying mathematical representation.

Its graphical representation, displayed in the graphics window, is generated from the mathematical representation when the geometry is imported to RobotStudio, after which the geometry is referred to as a part.

For this kind of geometry, you can set the detail level of the graphical representation, thus reducing the file size and rendering time for large models and improving the visual display for small models you might want to zoom in on. The detail level only affects the visual display; paths and curves created from the model will be accurate both with coarse and fine settings.

A part can also be imported from a file that simply defines its graphical representation; in this case, there is no underlying mathematical representation.

Some of the functions in RobotStudio,such as snap mode and creation of curves from the geometry, will not work with this kind of part.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

35

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

1 Introduction

1.1.8 Libraries, geometries and CAD files

Continued

To customize the detail level settings, see

Options on page 198 .

36

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.1.9 VSTA as the IDE

1.1.9 VSTA as the IDE

Overview

RobotStudio uses Microsoft Visual Studio Tools for Applications (VSTA) as its

Integrated Development Environment (IDE), enabling advanced users to extend and customize its functionality. You can, for example, write an add-in in C# or

VB.Net to create a toolbar or macro, debug code or inspect variable values during execution.

In addition, the Add-In browser acts as a single window for both VSTA add-ins and non-VSTA, RobotStudio-specific add-ins known as PowerPacs.

For a procedure, see

Visual Studio Tools for Applications on page 416 .

Types of add-ins

The following add-ins may be available in the Add-In browser:

Object

PowerPac

VSTA Station Add-In

VSTA User Add-In

Description

An add-in that accords with RobotStudio specifications, but is not part of the VSTA system itself.

A VSTA add-in that has been attached to a station, and saved to the station file.

A VSTA add-in that has not been attached to a station and is active only on the current user’s computer.

Using the shortcut menus of the Add-In browser, PowerPacs may be loaded or autoloaded, while VSTA add-ins may be added, loaded, unloaded, reloaded, autoloaded, edited, deleted, or removed from the station.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

37

1 Introduction

1.2 Installing and Licensing RobotStudio

1.2 Installing and Licensing RobotStudio

Installing RobotStudio

NOTE! You should have administrator privileges on the PC before installing

RobotStudio.

RobotStudio is categorized into the following two feature levels:

Basic - Offers selected RobotStudio functionality to configure, program, and run a virtual controller. It also includes online features for programming, configuring, and monitoring a real controller connected over Ethernet.

Premium - Offers full RobotStudio functionality for offline programming and simulation of multiple robots. The Premium level includes the features of the

Basic level and requires activation.

In addition to the Premium functionality, there are add-ins like PowerPacs and options for CAD converters available.

• PowerPacs provides enhanced features for selected applications.

• Options for CAD converters allows import of different CAD formats.

RobotStudio offers the following installation options:

Minimal - Installs only the features required to program, configure, and monitor a real controller connected over Ethernet. If installed with this option, only the Online tab is available.

Complete - Installs all the features required to run the complete RobotStudio.

If installed with this option, additional features of Basic and Premium functionality are available.

Custom - Installs user-customized features. This option allows excluding unwanted robot libraries and CAD converters.

How to install RobotStudio on a PC

1

4

5

6

7

2

3

8

Action

Insert the robot software DVD in the PC.

• If a menu for the DVD is opened automatically, continue with step 5.

• If no menu for the DVD is opened, continue with step 2.

On the Start menu, click Run.

In the Open box, type the drive letter for your DVD drive followed by:

:\launch.exe

If your DVD drive has the letter D, then type:

D:\launch.exe

Click OK.

Select language for the DVD menu.

On the DVD menu, click Install.

On the installation menu, click RobotStudio. This opens the installation wizard, which guides you through the rest of the software installation.

Select the options Minimal, Complete, or Custom and follow the instructions in the installation wizard.

Continues on next page

38

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.2 Installing and Licensing RobotStudio

Continued

9

10

11

12

Action

Now, install RobotWare.

On the installation menu, click RobotWare. This opens an installation wizard, which guides you through the rest of the RobotWare installation.

NOTE! Steps 10 and 11 are optional. Proceed with installing the Track mediapool.

On the Install products menu, click Additional Options. This opens a file browser that displays the Track mediapool installation and other available options.

Double-click the TrackMotion folder and then the file setup.exe to start the installation wizard and proceed.

After installing RobotStudio, proceed with activating RobotStudio.

NOTE! Activation is not required for Minimal installation, or for Basic functionality of the Complete or Custom installation.

Activate RobotStudio

To continue using the product with all of its features, you must activate it.

RobotStudio Product Activation is based on Microsoft anti-piracy technology and designed to verify that software products are legitimately licensed.

Activation works by verifying that the Activation Key is not in use on more personal computers than are permitted by the software license.

How do I activate RobotStudio?

When you start RobotStudio for the first time after installation, you are prompted to enter your 25-digit Activation Key (xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx).

Basic Functionality mode

The software reverts to Reduced Functionality mode unless you have entered a valid Activation Key. In Basic functionality mode, RobotStudio allows only the use of the Online and basic Virtual Controller features. No existing files or stations are harmed in Reduced Functionality mode. After activating your software, you will have full functionality for the features you have purchased.

Note

Activation is not required for the Online features for programming, configuring, and monitoring a real controller connected over Ethernet.

Activate automatically over the Internet or manually

The Activation Wizard gives you two choices on how to proceed.

Automatic activation by using the Internet (recommended)

Once you have selected the option I want to activate RobotStudio over the Internet, the Activation Wizard automatically contacts the ABB licensing servers over your

Internet connection. If you are using a valid Activation Key that has not exceeded the number of installations allowed, your product is activated immediately.

When you activate over the Internet, your activation request is sent to ABB. Your license will then be automatically installed and your product ready for use. If you choose to activate over the Internet but are not currently connected, the wizard alerts you that there is no connection.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

39

1 Introduction

1.2 Installing and Licensing RobotStudio

Continued

Manual activation

If the computer does not have an Internet connection, you must create a license file by selecting the option Create a license request file. Proceed through the wizard, enter your Activation Key and save the License Request File to your computer. Use a removable medium, such as a USB stick or floppy disk, to transfer the file to a computer with an Internet connection. Open a web browser, go to http://www101.abb.com/manualactivation/and follow the instructions. The result will be a License File that should be saved and transferred back to the computer holding your product. Relaunch the Activation Wizard and select the option Install

a license file. Proceed through the wizard, selecting the License File when requested. Upon completion, RobotStudio is activated and ready for use.

How do I activate later?

If you do not want to activate your copy of the software at installation, you can do so later. The following steps will launch the Activation Wizard.

If you have a problem with your activation, contact your local ABB customer support representative at the e-mail address or telephone number provided at www.abb.com/robotics.

1

2

3

Action

On the File menu, click Options and select General:Licensing.

On the Licensing page to the right, select Activation wizard to launch the activation wizard.

If the RobotStudio installation is activated, you will have valid licenses for the features covered by your subscription.

Which RobotStudio version is installed?

The version number of RobotStudio is displayed on the start page that appears when RobotStudio is started.

How can I tell if my RobotStudio installation is activated?

1

2

3

Action

On the File menu, click Options and select General:Licensing.

On the Licensing page to the right, select View Installed License Keys to see the status of your current license.

If the RobotStudio installation is activated, you will have valid licenses for the features covered by your subscription.

Using Network Licensing

Network licensing allows you to centralize license management by installing licenses on single server rather than on each individual client machine. The server administers the licenses to the clients as required. A single network license enables an arbitrary number of clients to use the software.

Network Licensing is set up in the following stages:

1 Install the server for network licensing (See

Installing the Network Licensing

Server on page 41 )

Continues on next page

40

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.2 Installing and Licensing RobotStudio

Continued

2 Activate the licenses for network licensing (See

Using the SLP Server Web

Interface on page 41 )

3 Set the client for network licensing (See

Setting up Network Licensing in the client on page 42

)

Tip

Network licenses are displayed as Floating in the View Installed License Keys link of the Licensing page.

Installing the Network Licensing Server

Network licensing in RobotStudio uses the SLP Distributor server as the network licensing server. It manages the allocation of network license keys to the clients.

You can install the SLP Distribution server from the Utilities\SLP Distributor directory of the RobotStudio distribution.

Note

You require administrative privileges for installing and configuring the SLP

Distribution server.

The installer requires the following:

• Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008

• .NET Framework 3.5 SP1

The SLP Distribution server is installed as a service that starts automatically with

Windows. It requires two open TCP ports, by default 2468 (for the web interface) and 8731 (for licensing). The installer opens these ports in the standard Windows

Firewall, but any third-party firewall must be configured manually by the system administrator.

Tip

For more information about configuring the SLP server, see http://www.inishtech.com/Products-SLP-Online-aspx/SLP-Server.aspx

Using the SLP Server Web Interface

Once the SLP server is online, you can access its web interface on the address http://<server>:2468/web.

The following table shows how to use the server's web interface.

To...

Activate new network licenses

Use...

The Activation tab. Submit the activation key provided by ABB.

Note that the server must have a working internet connection as manual activation is not supported. The number of network licenses activated depends on the activation key provided.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

41

1 Introduction

1.2 Installing and Licensing RobotStudio

Continued

To...

View the installed licenses

View the usage of licenses

Use...

The Home tab. Under Dashboard, click Details.

Alternatively, click the Products tab.

Both these open the Product details for RobotStudio page, where details about the installed licenses are displayed.

The Home tab. Under Dashboard, click Usage.

Alternatively, click the Usage tab.

Both these open the Current usage of RobotStudio page, which lists the following in a table:

• Licenses which are currently allocated

• Client to which each license is allocated to

• Number of remaining licenses available for use

Each table row corresponds to one client system.

Note

Certain proxy issues upon activation in the SLP server's web interface may produce a messages which only states Activation failed. Such a case may happen when the system account that the SLP-Distributor-service is executed in, does not have the rights to read the user profile. As a workaround, follow this procedure:

1 Open the Services control panel (services.msc)

2 Open properties for InishTech SLP Distributor Service

3 Change Log on as to an actual named user, preferably the currently logged on user

4 Restart the service and re-attempt an activation.

5 After your re-attempt, change Log on as back to Local System account and restart the service.

Setting up Network Licensing in the client

Note

You require Administrative privileges to store this configuration.

Use this procedure to set up Network Licensing for a client system.

Action

1 On the RobotStudio File menu, click Options and select General: Licensing

2 On the Licensing page, click Network License to launch the dialog for setting the client parameters for network licensing.

3 Specify the name or IP address of the License Server, and then click Set Server.

If Windows UAC is enabled, a confirmation dialog appears on clicking the Set Server button. This prompts you to restart RobotStudio in order to start using the specified server.

4 To go to the SLP Distributor server web interface, click the Server Dashboard link.

For information about using the server dashboard, see

Using the SLP Server Web Interface on page 41

.

5 Changes made are not applied until RobotStudio is restarted. To restart RobotStudio, click Restart now.

Continues on next page

42

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.2 Installing and Licensing RobotStudio

Continued

Note

For Network Licensing to work, the client system should be online with the server.

For information about enabling licensing while working offline, see

Using

Commuter Licenses on page 43

.

Using Commuter Licenses

Commuter licenses allow a client system to work offline from the license server.

You can check out a license from the server for a specified number of days (up to

30 days for School licenses, and 90 days for Partner licenses). During this period the checked out license is unavailable to other users. The commuter license is made available for other clients only when it is manually checked in back to the server.

The commuter license in the client system expires when the check out time expires.

In this case, on starting RobotStudio in the client system, the Network License dialog opens automatically and prompts you to check in the license back to the server.

Note

It is not possible to check out specific features in the license. All features in a license are included when it is checked out.

Use this procedure to check in/check out a commuter license.

Action

1 On the File menu, click Options and select General: Licensing

2 On the Licensing page, click Network License to launch the network license dialog

3 Under Commuter License, specify the number of days for which you wish to keep the license. Click Check out to check out the license

If a commuter license is already checked out, then the Check in button is enabled and the expiration time of the license is displayed.

Tip

Network licenses checked-out as commuter licenses are displayed as Floating

(checked out) in the View Installed License Keys link of the Licensing page.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

43

1 Introduction

1.3.1 The Graphical User Interface

1.3 The Graphical User Interface

1.3.1 The Graphical User Interface

Overview

This section provides an introduction to the diffrent parts of the Graphical User

Interface.

en0900000215_GUI_introduction

1

Parts

File menu

2 Home tab

3 Modeling tab

4 Simulation tab

5 Offline tab

6 Online tab

7 Add-Ins tab

Description

Contains the options to create new station, create new robot system, connect to a controller, save station as viewer, and

RobotStudio options. For more information, see

The File menu on page 191 .

Contains the controls required for building stations, creating systems, programming paths and placing items. For more information, see

The Home Tab on page 205

.

Contains the controls for creating and grouping components, creating bodies, measurements and CAD operations. For more information, see

The Modeling Tab on page 257 .

Contains the controls for setting up, configuring, controlling, monitoring and recording simulations. For more information, see

The Simulation Tab on page 319 .

Contains the controls for synchronization, configuration and tasks assigned to the Virtual Controller (VC). For more information, see

The Online and Offline Tabs on page 349 .

Contains the controls for managing the real controller. For more information, see

The Online and Offline Tabs on page 349 .

Contains the control for PowerPacs and the VSTA. For more information, see

The Add-Ins Tab on page 415

.

44

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.3.2 The Getting Started window

1.3.2 The Getting Started window

Overview

The Getting Started window contains the following tabs:

Tab

Recent Stations

Offline

Recent Controllers

Online

Information

Description

Use this tab to open recent stations (which are previewed), a new station or any saved station.

Use this tab to open a recent controller, connect to a controller with one click or add a controller.

Use this tab to access help files, browse tutorials, connect to the online community, manage your licenses or browse Robot-

Studio news.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

45

1 Introduction

1.3.3 The Layout browser

1.3.3 The Layout browser

Overview

The layout browser is a hierarchical display of physical items, such as robots and tools.

Icons

Icon

xx050000

Node

Robot

Tool

Description

The robot in the station. The red lock in the lower right corner of the icon indicates that the object is connected to a library.

A tool.

xx050001

Link collection

Contains all the links of the objects.

xx050002

Link

A physical object in a joint connection. Each link is made up of one or several parts.

xx050003

Frames

Contains all the frames for an object.

xx050004 xx050005 xx050006

Component group

Part

Collision set

A grouping of parts or other assemblies, carrying its own coordinate systems. It is used to structure a station.

A physical object in RobotStudio. Parts with geometric information are made up of one or more 2D or 3D entities. Parts without geometric information (such as imported .jt files) are empty.

Contains all collision sets. Each collision set includes two groups of objects.

xx050007

Objects group

Contains references to the objects that are subject to collision detection.

xx050008

Collision set mechanisms

The objects in the collision set.

xx050009

Frame

The frames in the station.

xx050010

46

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.3.4 The Paths & Targets browser

1.3.4 The Paths & Targets browser

Overview

The paths & targets browser is a hierarchical display of non-physical items.

Icons

Icon Node

Station

Description

Your station in RobotStudio.

xx050011

Virtual Controller

The system for controlling the robots, just like a real IRC5 controller.

xx050012 xx050013

Task

Tooldata Collection

Contains all logical elements in the station, such as targets, paths, workobjects, tooldata and instructions.

Contains all tooldata.

xx0500001376

Tooldata

A tooldata for a robot or a task.

xx050014

Workobjects & Targets

Contains all workobjects and targets for the task or robot.

xx050015

Jointtarget Collection and

Jointtarget

A specified position of the robot axes.

xx050016

Workobject Collection and

Workobject

The workobject collection node and the workobjects it contains.

xx050017

Target

A defined position and rotation for a robot. A target equals a RobTarget in a RAPID program.

xx050018 xx050019

Target without assigned configuration

A target for which no axis configuration has been assigned, for example, a repositioned target or a new target created by means other than teaching.

Target without found configuration

An unreachable target, that is, for which no axis configuration has been found.

xx050020

Path Collection

Contains all paths in the station.

xx050021

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

47

1 Introduction

1.3.4 The Paths & Targets browser

Continued

Icon Node

Path

xx050022

Description

Contains the instructions for the robot movements.

Linear Move Instruction

A linear TCP motion to a target. If the target has no valid configuration assigned, the move instruction gets the same warning symbols as the target.

xx050023 xx050024

Joint Move Instruction

Action Instruction

A joint motion to a target. If the target has no valid configuration assigned, the move instruction gets the same warning symbols as the target.

Defines an action for the robot to perform at a specified location in a path.

xx050025

48

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.3.5 The Modeling browser

1.3.5 The Modeling browser

Overview

The modeling browser is a display of editable objects and their building blocks.

Icons

Icon Node

Part

Description

Geometric items corresponding to the objects in the Layout browser.

modeling modelin0

Body

Face

Geometric building blocks that comprise the parts. 3D bodies contain several faces, 2D bodies one face, and curves no faces.

The faces of the bodies.

modelin1

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

49

1 Introduction

1.3.6 The Offline and Online browsers

1.3.6 The Offline and Online browsers

Overview

The offline and online browsers is a hierarchical display of controller and configuration elements.

Icons

Icon Node

Controllers

Description

Contains the controllers that are connected to the Robot View.

controll

Connected Controller

Represents a controller with a working connection.

control0

Connecting Controller

Represents a controller which is currently being connected.

control1

Disconnected Controller

Represents a controller that has lost its connection. It might have been turned off or disconnected from the network.

control2 control3

Denied login

Configuration

Represent a controller that denies you access to login. Possible reasons for denied access:

• The user lacks grant to login

• Too many clients connected to the controller

• The RobotWare version of the system running on the controller is newer than the version of RobotStudio

Online

Contains the configuration topics.

configu0 configu1

Topic

Event Log

Each parameter topic is represented by a node:

• Communication

• Controller

• I/O

• Man-machine communication

• Motion

With the Event Log you can view and save controller events.

eventrec

I/O System

Represents the controller I/O system. The I/O system consists of I/O buses and units.

io

Continues on next page

50

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.3.6 The Offline and Online browsers

Continued

An I/O bus is a connector for one or several I/O units.

I/O Bus

io-node

I/O Unit

An I/O Unit is a board, panel or any other device with ports through which the I/O signals are sent.

io-devic

RAPID Tasks

Contains the active tasks (programs) of the controller.

rapid16t prgintas

Task

Modules

A task is a robot program, which executes alone or together with other programs. A program is composed of a set of modules.

A container for either program modules or system modules.

modules programsys-modu

Program Module

System Module

Encrypted Module

A program module contains a set of data declarations and routines for a specific task. Program modules contains data specific for this program.

A system module contains a set of type definitions, data declarations and routines. System modules contains data that applies to the robot system, regardless which program modules that are loaded.

A module that is locked for editing and viewing.

module_e nostepin

Nostepin Module

Procedure

A module that cannot be entered during step-by-step execution. That is all instructions in the module are treated as one if the program is executed step-by-step.

A routine that does not return any value. Procedures are used as subprograms.

procedur

Function

A routine that returns a value of a specific type.

function

Trap

A routine that provides a means of responding to interrupts.

trap16tr

Documents Folder

Folder for links to documents and files.

folder16

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

51

1 Introduction

1.3.6 The Offline and Online browsers

Continued

Document Link

document

Link to a document. The icon for the document is the same as the Window icon for the document type.

52

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.3.7 The Output window

1.3.7 The Output window

Overview

Layout of the Output tab

The Output tab contains two columns: the first states the event, the second the time the message was generated. Each row is a message.

Event types

The output window displays information about events that occur in the station, such as when simulations are started or stopped. This information is useful when troubleshooting stations.

The three event types indicate the severity of the event:

Event type

Information

Warning

Error

Description

An information message is a normal system event, for example, starting and stopping programs, changing the operational mode, and turning motors on and off.

Information messages never require an action from you. They can be useful for tracking errors, collecting statistics or monitoring user-triggered event routines.

A warning is an event of which you should be aware, but it is not so severe that the process or RAPID program needs to be stopped.

Warnings must occasionally be acknowledged. Warnings often indicate underlying problems that at some point will need to be resolved.

An error is an event that prevents the robot system from proceeding. The running process or RAPID program cannot continue and will be stopped.

An error must occasionally be acknowledged. Some errors require some immediate action from you in order to be resolved.

Double-click an error to display a detailed information box.

Some of the events are active. These are linked to an action for resolving the problem that generated the event. To activate the linked action, double-click the message.

Handling messages in the Output window

Goal

To clear the Output window...

Procedure

To filter messages...

Right-click in the Output window and then click Show messages. From the options All Errors, information, Warningsand

Warnings and Errors, select the type of messages you want to display.

To save a message to file...

Select it, right-click and then click Save to file. Choose a name and location in the dialog box. Multiple messages can be selected by pressing SHIFT while clicking each.

Right-click in the Output window and then click Clear.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

53

1 Introduction

1.3.7 The Output window

Continued

The Controller tab

The controller status window shows the operational status of the controllers in your robot view.

1 The System Name column

This column shows the name of the system that is running on the controller.

2 The Controller Name column

This column shows the name of the controller.

3 The Controller State column

This column shows the state of the controller:

When the controller is in state...

the robot is...

Initializing

Motors off starting up. It will shift to state motors off when it has started.

in a standby state where there is no power to the robot's motors. The state has to be shifted to motors on before the robot can move.

Motors on

Guard Stop ready to move, either by jogging or by running programs.

stopped because the safety runchain is opened. For instance, a door to the robot's cell might be open.

Emergency Stop

Waiting for motors on after e-stop

System Failure stopped because emergency stop was activated.

ready to leave emergency stop state. The emergency stop is no longer activated, but the state transition isn't yet confirmed.

in a system failure state. A warm start is required.

4 The Program Execution State column

This column shows if the robot is running any program or not:

When the controller is in state...

the robot...

Running is running a program.

Ready

Stopped

Uninitialized has a program loaded and is ready to run it when a PP

(starting point in the program) has been set.

has a program loaded, with a PP, and is ready to run it.

has not initialized the program memory. This indicates an error condition.

5 The Operating Mode column

This column shows the operating mode of the controller:

When the controller is in mode...

the robot is...

Initializing

Auto starting up. It will shift to the mode selected on the controllers cabinet when it has started.

ready to run programs in production.

In Auto mode it is possible to get remote Write access to the controller, which is necessary for editing programs, configurations and other things with RobotStudio Online.

Continues on next page

54

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.3.7 The Output window

Continued

When the controller is in mode...

the robot is...

Manual

Manual full speed

Waiting for acknowledge only able to move if the enabling device on the FlexPendant is activated. Furthermore, the robot can only moved with reduced speed in manual mode.

In manual mode it is not possible to get remote Write access to the controller, unless it is configured for this and the remote Write access granted on the FlexPendant.

only able to move if the enabling device on the FlexPendant is activated.

In manual mode it is not possible to get remote Write access to the controller, unless it is configured for this and the remote Write access granted on the FlexPendant.

about to enter Auto mode, but the mode transition has not yet been acknowledged.

6 The Logged on as column

This column shows the user name the PC is logged on to the controller with.

7 The Access column

This column shows who has write access to the controller, or if it is available.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

55

1 Introduction

1.3.8 The Controller Status window

1.3.8 The Controller Status window

Overview

The Controller Status window shows the operational status of the controllers in your robot view.

Layout of the Controller Status window

The Controller Status window has the following columns:

1 System Name : Displays the name of the system running on the controller.

2 Controller Name : Displays the name of the controller.

3 Controller State : Displays the state of the controller.

When the controller is in state...

the robot is...

Initializing

Motors off starting up. It will shift to state motors off when it has started.

in a standby state where there is no power to the robot's motors. The state has to be shifted to motors on before the robot can move.

Motors on

Guard Stop ready to move, either by jogging or by running programs.

stopped because the safety runchain is opened. For instance, a door to the robot's cell might be open.

stopped because emergency stop was activated.

Emergency Stop

Waiting for motors on after e-stop

System Failure ready to leave emergency stop state. The emergency stop is no longer activated, but the state transition isn't yet confirmed.

in a system failure state. A warm start is required.

4 Program Execution State : Displays if the robot is running any program or not.

When the controller is in state...

the robot...

Running

Ready is running a program.

has a program loaded and is ready to run it when a PP

(starting point in the program) has been set.

Stopped

Uninitialized has a program loaded, with a PP, and is ready to run it.

has not initialized the program memory. This indicates an error condition.

5 Operating Mode : Displays the operating mode of the controller.

When the controller is in mode...

the robot is...

Initializing

Auto starting up. It will shift to the mode selected on the controllers cabinet when it has started.

ready to run programs in production.

In Auto mode it is possible to get remote Write access to the controller, which is necessary for editing programs, configurations and other things with RobotStudio Online.

Continues on next page

56 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

1 Introduction

1.3.8 The Controller Status window

Continued

When the controller is in mode...

the robot is...

Manual

Manual full speed

Waiting for acknowledge only able to move if the enabling device on the FlexPendant is activated. Furthermore, the robot can only moved with reduced speed in manual mode.

In manual mode it is not possible to get remote Write access to the controller, unless it is configured for this and the remote Write access granted on the FlexPendant.

only able to move if the enabling device on the FlexPendant is activated.

In manual mode it is not possible to get remote Write access to the controller, unless it is configured for this and the remote Write access granted on the FlexPendant.

about to enter Auto mode, but the mode transition has not yet been acknowledged.

6 Logged on as: Displays the user name the PC is logged on to the controller with.

7 Access : Displays the users having write access to the controller, or if it is available.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

57

1 Introduction

1.3.9 The Operator Window

1.3.9 The Operator Window

Overview

Operator Window is an alternative to the corresponding feature in the Virtual

FlexPendant for communicating with the user during RAPID program execution.

It displays the same output as displayed on the Virtual FlexPendant Operator

Window.

When running in a Virtual Controller, the RAPID program communicates with the operator via messages on the FlexPendant screen. The Operator Window integrates this functionality and allows the user to run interactive RAPID programs without starting the Virtual FlexPendant.

Enabling Operator Window

To enable an operator window:

1 On the File menu, click Options.

2 On the Navigation pane to the left, select Robotics:Virtual Controller.

3 On the Virtual Controller page to the right, select Show virtual Operator

Window option.

4 Click Apply.

Note

When the Show virtual Operator Windowfeature is enabled, an Operator Window is automatically created for each controller in the station. By default, the window is located in the tab area below the graphics window.

RAPID Instructions

List of RAPID instructions supported by the Operator Window:

• TPErase

• TPReadFK

• TPReadNum

• TPWrite

• UIAlphaEntry

• UIMsgBox

• UINumEntry

NOTE! When these instructions are executed, the behavior is similar to that of

Virtual FlexPendant.

List of RAPID instructions not supported by the Operator Window:

• TPShow

• UIShow

• UINumTune

• UIListView

NOTE! When these instructions are executed, an error message is displayed in the Operator Window prompting you to use the Virtual Flexpendant instead.

Continues on next page

58 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

1 Introduction

1.3.9 The Operator Window

Continued

Note

You should not run both the Virtual Flexpendant and Operator Window simultaneously.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

59

1 Introduction

1.3.10 The Document Manager window

1.3.10 The Document Manager window

Overview

The Document Manager window allows you to search and browse the RobotStudio documents like libraries, geometry and so on in large numbers and from different locations. You can also add associate documents with a station, either as a link or by embedding a file in the station.

Opening a Document Manager window

1 On the Home tab, click Import Library and select Documents from the dropdown menu.

The Documents window appears.

Layout of the Document Manager window

The Documents window is a docked area that by default takes the right-hand corner.

The upper part of the window contains controls for searching and browsing the document locations. The lower part consists of a list view that displays the documents and folders and a status area.

Control

Station

Search

Browse

Location

Description

Allows to add documents associated with the station, either by adding the file/folder as a reference (link) or by embedding the file in the station. See

Using the Station mode on page 60 .

Allows to search for keywords or query. See

Using the Search mode on page 61 .

Displays a folder structure of the document locations. See

Using the Browse mode on page 63

.

Allows to configure the document location. See

Document

Locations window on page 65

.

Using the Station mode

Use this procedure to add documents associated with the current station:

1 Click Station from the Document Manager.

2 Click Add button and select what to add to the current station:

• File Reference

• Folder Reference

• Embedded File

• New Text Document

Note

• The referenced file/folder is displayed with an arrow icon

• The embedded file and new text document are displayed with a diskette icon

3 In the Documents window, right-click the document.

Continues on next page

60

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.3.10 The Document Manager window

Continued

The following context menu items appears depending on the document type selected:

Item

Open

Description

Opens the document in the program associated with its file type. For example, a .docx file is opened in Microsoft Word.

NOTE! An embedded file is saved to a temporary location before opening. If RobotStudio detects that the temporary file has changed, you will be asked to update the embedded file.

Open containing folder Opens the folder containing the file in Windows Explorer.

NOTE! This option is not available in embedded files.

Copy to Station Converts a referenced file to an embedded file.

Save as Saves an embedded file to disk.

Include in Pack and Go Specifies if a referenced file/folder should be included when a Pack and Go file is created.

For a referenced folder, all files in the folder will be included.

NOTE!

• To use this option, the file must be located in the parent folder of the station file. For example, if the station file is D:\Documents\Stations\My.rsstn, the reference must be located in D:\Documents to be included in Pack and Go.

Embedded files are always included when a Pack and Go file is created, since they are part of the station file.

Include Subfolders

Remove

Specifies that subfolders of a referenced folder should be included in Pack and Go.

Removes the selected document.

Note

Some context menu items can be disabled and the document marked as

Locked in the API.

Using the Search mode

1 Click the option Search and enter a query or syntax in the text box.

For more information about the available syntaxes, see

Search syntax on page 62

.

Note

The drop-down list contains the search history of the previous ten queries between sessions.

2 Click the Expand button to access additional controls.

This allows you to specify if the search should cover all the enabled locations or one specific location.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

61

1 Introduction

1.3.10 The Document Manager window

Continued

3 Select Search in results check box to search for the resulting documents of the previous search.

Note

The search is performed automatically, after you stop typing in the text box or manually, by clicking the glass icon. During the search, this icon is changed to a cross and clicking this cancels the search operation.

Search syntax

The search field supports certain keywords and operators which allows you to specify an advanced search query.

NOTE! Keywords are not localised.

The following table displays the keywords that specifies an advanced search query:

Keywords

filename title

Description

matches the filename of the documents.

matches the title field of the document metadata.

type matches the type field of the document metadata.

For library (.rslib) files, this is a user-defined string. For example, Robot.

For other files, this is the Windows description of the file type.

For example, Text Document.

matches the author field of the document metadata.

matches the comment field of the document metadata.

author comments revision date matches the revision field of the document metadata.

matches the last time the file was modified.

For the colon operator, the match is done against a string representation of the modified date.

For other operators, the search string should interpret as a date according to .NET standards.

size matches the file size (in KB).

and, or, parentheses (), not used to group or invert queries.

The following table displays the operators that specifies an advanced search query

<

>

Operator

:

=

Description

matches if the field contains the search string.

matches if the field equals the search string.

matches if the field is smaller than the search string.

matches if the field is greater than the search string.

Continues on next page

62

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.3.10 The Document Manager window

Continued

Note

• Quotation marks can be used to specify a string with whitespace. An empty string is specified by "".

• All search strings are case insensitive.

• Text without a preceding keyword is matched against the filename and all metadata.

• If queries are specified without a grouping keyword, "and" is implied.

• Some metadata (title, author, comments and revision) is not available for all file types.

Examples

1400 - Matches documents with the string 1400 in the filename or any metadata.

not author:ABB - Matches documents where the author field does not contain the string ABB.

size>1000 and date<1/2009 - Matches documents larger than 1000KB and modified before 1/1/2009.

IRBP comments="ABB Internal" - Matches documents with the string IRBP in the filename or any metadata, and where the comment field equals ABB

Internal.

Using the Browse mode

1 Click the option Browse from the Document Manager.

A folder structure of the document location is displayed.

Note

The top level of the folder structure lists the configured locations. If a location is unavailable (for example, an offline network path) it is marked as Unavailable and cannot be opened. The text box displays the path of the current folder relative to the location root.

2 You can open a folder in either of the two ways:

• Double-click the document location.

• Right-click the document location and select Open from the context menu.

3 You can navigate through the folders in either of the two ways:

• Click the folder icon at the top-right corner.

• Select the parent folder from the dropdown list.

Note

You can browse and add component xml files (*.rsxml) to your station.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

63

1 Introduction

1.3.10 The Document Manager window

Continued

4 Click Refresh icon in the text box to manually refresh the contents of the folder.

Note

The refresh operation can be time consuming, if a folder resides in a network location or contains many documents. During this time, the refresh icon changes to a cross icon allowing you to cancel the operation.

Results view

In the Browse mode, items are grouped into folders and documents. The resulting folders and documents are displayed in a list view.

The search result appears in the status bar at the bottom, displaying the number of items found, and progress made during the search. The Search results are grouped beneath headers according to their location.

Each document is represented by an image, the document title or filename in black text, and the metadata and file information in grey text. For library files, the image can be a screenshot or other custom image. For other document types, the image is the icon associated with the file type.

Using the Context menu

In the results view, right-click a document or folder. The following context menu items appears:

Item

Open

Open containing folder

Properties

Description

Opens the selected folder, library or geometry files, station files, and document.

• For folders, browses into the selected folder.

• For library or geometry files, imports the file into the station. (If no station is open ,a new empty station is first created.)

• For station files, opens the station.

• For other documents, attempts to open the selected document according to its file association. For example,

Microsoft Word starts when a .doc file is opened.

Opens the folder containing the document or the folder in the

Windows Explorer.

Opens a dialog that displays complete metadata and file information about the selected document.

NOTE! This is disabled for folders.

NOTE! Double-click an item to import the library and geometry files and open the other documents.

Continues on next page

64

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.3.10 The Document Manager window

Continued

In the results view, right-click an empty area. The following context menu appears that controls how the documents are grouped and sorted:

Items

Group by:

Sort by:

Description

Controls how the documents are arranged in groups.

The following options are available:

• Location

• Folder

• Type

Controls how the documents are sorted within the group.

The following options are available:

• Name

• Date

• Size

Ascending and Descending Items are sorted in the ascending and descending order.

Using the drag and drop feature

You can import a library or a geometry file into the station by dragging it from the results view into either the graphics window, or onto a object node in the Layout browser.

• When dragging into the Layout browser, the component will be placed as a child object under the station, component group or smart component.

• When dragging into the graphics window, the component will be positioned at the point on the station floor where you drop it. You can snap the point to the UCS grid by enabling the Snap Grid or by holding down the ALT key while dragging.

Document Locations window

You can launch the Document Locations window in any one of the following ways:

1 Select Locations from the Documents window.

2 On the File menu, click Options and select Files & Folders in the navigation pane. Click Document Locations on the right side.

3 On the Home tab, click Import Library and select Locations from the dropdown menu.

Layout of the Document Locations window

It consists of a menu bar and a list displaying the configured locations. The list displays general information about the locations. The menu bar contains the following controls:

Controls

Locations

Description

The following options are available from the dropdown menu:

Import : Opens a dialog box to import document locations from an xml file. If a location with the same URL already exists, you have the option to retain or delete the existing location.

Export : Opens a dialog box to export all the configured locations to an xml file.

Reset to Default : Loads the default locations (ABB

Library, User Library, and User Geometry).

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

65

1 Introduction

1.3.10 The Document Manager window

Continued

Controls

Add Location

Remove

Edit

Description

Opens a dialog box to add a document location. By default, there is one location type available.

For more information, see

File System location on page 66 .

Deletes the selected location.

Opens a dialog box to modify the selected location. For more information, see

File System location on page 66

.

File System location

1 Click Add Locations and select File System from the dropdown menu. The

File System dialog box appears.

The File System dialog box contains the following controls:

Control

Location Name

Path

Filter

Description

Specifies a name associated with the location.

Specifies the file system directory that corresponds to the root folder of the location. This can be on a local or network disk.

Specifies a filename filter to include only certain files when searching and browsing. Multiple filters are separated by a semicolon. If the filter is empty all files are included.

Cache files from network

Directory

Specifies that the library and geometry files from a network location should be copied to a local directory and imported from there, rather than directly from the network path.

This will ensure that a station containing such files can be opened even if the network location is unavailable. This option is only available for network locations.

Specifies the directory where to store the local copies. This must be on a local disk.

Show as gallery

Style

Specifies that the contents of the location should be displayed as a gallery in the specified ribbon menu.

• Flat - Specifies that all documents are displayed in a single gallery with subfolder names as headers.

• Recursive - Specifies that the documents are displayed in submenus corresponding to the folder structure.

Include when searching all locations

Specifies if the search should cover all the enabled locations.

66

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.3.11 Using a mouse

1.3.11 Using a mouse

Navigating the graphics window using the mouse

The table below shows how to navigate the graphics window using the mouse:

To Use the keyboard

/mouse combination

Description

Select items Just click the item to select. To select multiple items, press CTRL key while clicking new items.

left-cli selectio

Rotate the station CTRL + SHIFT + rotate

Pan the station left-cli

CTRL +

Press CTRL + SHIFT + the left mouse button while dragging the mouse to rotate the station.

With a 3-button mouse you can use the middle and right buttons, instead of the keyboard combination.

Press CTRL + the left mouse button while dragging the mouse to pan the station.

pan

Zoom the station left-cli

CTRL + zoom right-cl

Zoom using window SHIFT +

Press CTRL + the right mouse button while dragging the mouse to the left to zoom out.

Dragging to the right zooms in.

With a 3-button mouse you can also use the middle button, instead of the keyboard combination.

Press SHIFT + the right mouse button while dragging the mouse across the area to zoom into.

right-cl window_z

Select using window SHIFT + Press SHIFT + the left mouse button while dragging the mouse across the area to select all items that match the current selection level.

left-cli window_s

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

67

1 Introduction

1.3.12 Selecting an item

1.3.12 Selecting an item

Overview

Each item in a station can be moved to achieve the required layout, so you first have to determine its selection level. The selection level makes it possible to select only specific types of items, or specified parts of objects.

The selection levels are curve, surface, entity, part, mechanism, group, target/frame and path. The target/frame and path selection can be combined with any of the other selection levels.

Objects may also be grouped together as component groups, see

Component

Group on page 258

.

Selecting an item in the graphics window

To select items in the graphics window, follow these steps:

1 At the top of the graphics window, click the desired selection level icon.

2 Optionally, click the desired snap mode icon for the part of the item you wish to select.

3 In the graphics window, click the item. The selected item will be highlighted.

Multiple selection of items in the graphics window

To select multiple items in the graphics window, do the following:

1 Press the SHIFT key, and in the graphics window drag the mouse diagonally over the objects to select.

Selecting an item in the browsers

To select items in a browser, do the following:

1 Click the item. The selected item will be highlighted in the browser.

Multiple selection of items in the browsers

To select multiple items in a browser, follow these steps:

1 Make sure that all the items to be selected are of the same type and located in the same branch of the hierarchical structure; otherwise, the items will not be operable.

2 Do one of the following:

• To select adjacent items: In the browser, hold down the SHIFT key and click the first and then the last item. The list of items will be highlighted.

• To select separate items: In the browser, hold down the CTRL key and click the items you want to select. The items will be highlighted.

68

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

1 Introduction

1.3.13 Attaching and detaching objects

1.3.13 Attaching and detaching objects

Overview

You can attach an object (child) to another object (parent). Attachments can be created on part level and on mechanism level. When an object has been attached to a parent, moving the parent also moves the child.

One of the most common attachments is to attach a tool to a robot. For procedures, see

Attach to on page 424

and

Detach on page 432

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

69

1 Introduction

1.3.14 Keyboard shortcuts

1.3.14 Keyboard shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts

The following table lists the keyboard shortcuts.:

Command

General

Activate menu bar

Open API Help

Open Help

Open Virtual FlexPendant

Switch between windows

Key Combination

F10

ALT + F1

F1

CTRL + F5

CTRL + TAB

General Commands

Add Controller System

Open Station

Take Screenshot

Teach Move Instruction

Teach Target

Toggle View Representation

General Editing

Copy

Cut

Paste

Redo

Refresh

Rename

Select All

Undo

Import Geometry

Import Library

New Station

Save Station

Program Editor Intellisense

Complete Word

Parameter Info

PickList

Program Editor Commands

Start Program Execution

Step In

F4

CTRL + O

CTRL + B

CTRL + SHIFT + R

CTRL + R

F7

CTRL + C

CTRL + X

CTRL + V

CTRL + Y

F5

F2

CTRL + A

CTRL + Z

CTRL + G

CTRL + J

CTRL + N

CTRL + S

CTRL + SPACEBAR

CTRL + I

CTRL + SHIFT + SPACEBAR

F8

F11

Continues on next page

70

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Key Combination

SHIFT + F11

F12

SHIFT + F8

F9

CTRL + SHIFT + S

CTRL + P

1 Introduction

1.3.14 Keyboard shortcuts

Continued

Command

Step Out

Step Over

Stop

Toggle Breakpoint

Apply Changes

Print

Program Editor Hotkeys

Copy

Cut

Cut marked lines

Delete marked lines

Delete to beginning of word

Delete to end of word

Indent

Make the selected text lowercase

Make the selected text uppercase

Move to beginning of document

Move to beginning of line

Move to end of document

Move to end of line

Move to next word

Move to previous word

Move to visible bottom

Move to visible top

Open line above

Open line below

Outdent

Paste

Redo

Scroll down

Scroll up

Select block down

Select block left

Select block right

Select block to next word

Select block to previous word

Select block up

CTRL + Insert

SHIFT + Delete

CTRL + L

CTRL + SHIFT + L

CTRL + BACKSPACE

CTRL + Delete

Tab

CTRL + U

CTRL + SHIFT + U

CTRL + Home

Home

CTRL + End

End

CTRL + Right

CTRL + Left

CTRL + Page Down

CTRL + Page Up

CTRL + Enter

CTRL + SHIFT + Enter

SHIFT + TAB

SHIFT + Insert

CTRL + SHIFT + Z

CTRL + Down

CTRL + Up

ALT + SHIFT + Down

ALT + SHIFT + Left

ALT + SHIFT + Right

CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + Right

CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + Left

ALT + SHIFT + Up

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

71

1 Introduction

1.3.14 Keyboard shortcuts

Continued

Command

Select down

Select left

Select page down

Select page up

Select right

Select to beginning of document

Select to beginning of line

Select to end of document

Select to end of line

Select to next word

Select to previous word

Select to visible bottom

Select to visible top

Select up

Select word

Toggle overwrite mode

Transpose characters

Transpose lines

Transpose words

Key Combination

SHIFT + Down

SHIFT + Left

SHIFT + Page Down

SHIFT + Page Up

SHIFT + Right

CTRL + SHIFT + Home

SHIFT + Home

CTRL + SHIFT + End

SHIFT + End

CTRL + SHIFT + Right

CTRL + SHIFT + Left

CTRL + SHIFT + Page Down

CTRL + SHIFT + Page Up

SHIFT + Up

CTRL + SHIFT + W

Insert

CTRL + T

CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + T

CTRL + SHIFT + T

72

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.1 Workflow for building a new station

2 How to build stations

2.1 Workflow for building a new station

Overview

This is an overview of how to build a station by including the equipment necessary to create and simulate robot programs.

The first part of this overview describes the alternatives for creating a station with a system. The second part describes importing or creating the objects to work with. The third part describes the workflow for optimizing the station layout by finding the best placement of robots and other equipment.

In most cases, following the workflows from start to finish is recommended, even if other sequences are also possible.

Creating a station with a system

The table below shows the alternatives for creating a station with a system.

For procedures, see

New Station on page 192 .

Activity

Create a station with a template system

Create a station with an existing system

Create a station with no system

Description

This is the simplest way to create a new station containing a robot and a link to a rudimentary system template.

This creates a new station containing one or more robots in accordance with an existing, built system.

An advanced user can build a station from scratch and then add a new or existing system to it.

Manually starting the VC

The table below shows the alternatives for manually starting with a system. Perform only those steps applicable to your station.

Activity

Manually connecting a library to the VC

Restarting the VC

Description

See

Starting a VC on page 83 .

See

Restarting a VC on page 85

.

Importing station components

The table below shows the workflow for importing station components. Perform only those steps applicable to your station.

For procedures, see

Importing a station component on page 87 .

Activity

Import a robot model

Import a tool

Import a positioner

Import a track

Description

See

Robot System on page 208 .

See

Import Library on page 207 .

See

ABB Library on page 206

.

See

Import Library on page 207 .

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

73

2 How to build stations

2.1 Workflow for building a new station

Continued

Activity

Import other equipment

Add work piece

Description

If you have CAD models of the equipment, you can import them, see

Import Library on page 207 . Otherwise, you can create

models in RobotStudio, see

Mechanisms on page 94 .

If you have CAD models of the work piece, you can import them, see

Workobject on page 218 . Otherwise, you can create

models in RobotStudio, see

Objects on page 92 .

Placing objects and mechanisms

The table below shows the workflow for placing the objects in the station.

Activity

Place objects

Attach tools

Attach robots to tracks

Description

If you are building a model of a real station, start by placing all objects with known positions. For objects without known positions, find a suitable placement, see

Placing objects on page 97

and

Placing external axes on page 98 .

Attach the tools to the robot, see

Attach to on page 424

.

If track external axes are used, attach the robots to the tracks, see

Attach to on page 424 .

Attach work pieces to positioners

If positioner external axes are used, attach the work pieces to the positioners, see

Attach to on page 424 .

Test reachability

Test if the robot can reach critical positions on the work piece.

If you are satisfied with how the robot reaches the positions, your station is ready for programming. Otherwise, continue adjusting the placement or trying other equipment as described below, see

Testing positions and motions on page 122 .

74

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.2.1 Two robot systems sharing the same task frame position

2.2 Setting up a conveyor tracking station with two robots working on the same conveyor

2.2.1 Two robot systems sharing the same task frame position

Overview

This section describes what happens when both the robot systems share the same task frame position. The baseframes of the mechanical units in both the robot systems have the same task frame position.

Prerequisite

• Two robot systems with conveyor tracking option (system 1 and system 2)

• A conveyor mechanism saved as library

NOTE! See

Create Conveyor mechanism on page 310

to create conveyor tracking systems.

Setting up the conveyor tracking station

1 Add the existing system (system 1) to the station. See

Robot System on page 208 .

NOTE! After starting the system, when asked to select the library, browse and select the already saved conveyor mechanism library.

2 Modify the baseframe positions of conveyor and robot.

a Move the mechanical unit (conveyor/robot) to its new location.

b See

Updating the baseframe position on page 412

to update the baseframe position of the conveyor/robot.

c Repeat steps 1 and 2to modify the baseframe position of the robot.

d In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes. Close the System

Configuration window.

3 Add the existing system (system 2) to the station. See

Robot System on page 208 .

NOTE! After starting the system, when asked to select the library, browse and select the same library as the one selected for system 1 or any other library. Later, this conveyor library will be removed from the station since system 2 shall use the same conveyor library as system 1.

4 Refer both systems (system 1 and system 2) to the same conveyor library.

a In the Offline browser, click System Configuration to bring up a dialog box for system 2.

b Select the library node in the hierarchical tree.

c Select the option Select from Station. Click Change. The Select Library dialog box appears.

d Select the same conveyor library as the one selected for system 1.

Click OK.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

75

2 How to build stations

2.2.1 Two robot systems sharing the same task frame position

Continued

NOTE! Now both systems (system 1 and system 2) use the same conveyor library and the library previously referenced by system 2 is removed from the station.

5 Modify the baseframe positions of robot (system 2).

a Move the mechanical unit (robot) to its new location.

b See

Updating the baseframe position on page 412 to update the

baseframe position of the robot.

c Repeat steps 1 and 2 to modify the baseframe position of the robot.

d In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes. Close the System

Configuration window.

76

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.2.2 Two robot systems having different task frame positions

2.2.2 Two robot systems having different task frame positions

Overview

This section describes what happens when two robot systems have different task frame positions but uses the same sync switch. This means the Baseframes of the conveyor mechanical units in both the robot systems have different values.

Prerequisites

Two robot systems with conveyor tracking option (system 1 and system 2)

NOTE! See

Create Conveyor mechanism on page 310

to create conveyor tracking systems.

Setting up the conveyor tracking station

1 Add the existing system (system 1) to the station. See

Robot System on page 208 .

NOTE! After starting the system, when asked to select the library, browse and select the already saved conveyor mechanism library.

2 Modify the baseframe positions of conveyor and robot.

a Move the mechanical unit (conveyor/robot) to its new location.

b See

Updating the baseframe position on page 412

to update the baseframe position of the conveyor/robot.

c Repeat steps 1 and 2 to modify the baseframe position of the robot.

d In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes. Close the System

Configuration window.

3 Add the existing system (system 2) to the station. See

Robot System on page 208 .

NOTE! After starting the system, when asked to select the library, browse and select the same library as the one selected for system 1 or any other library. Later, this conveyor library will be removed from the station since system 2 shall use the same conveyor library as system 1.

4 Update both systems (system 1 and system 2) to use the same conveyor library.

a In the Offline browser, click System Configuration to bring up a dialog box for system 2.

b Select the library node in the hierarchical tree.

c Select the option Select from Station. Click Change. The Select Library dialog box appears.

d Select the same conveyor library as the one selected for system 1.

Click OK.

NOTE! Now both systems (system 1 and system 2) use the same conveyor library and the library previously referenced by system 2 is removed from the station.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

77

2 How to build stations

2.2.2 Two robot systems having different task frame positions

Continued

5 Modify the task frame position of the conveyor mechanism. See

Set Task

Frames on page 411 .

NOTE! Before modifying the task frame, make a note of the current conveyor position in world coordinates. After modifying the task frame, move the conveyor back to the position it was before modifying the task frame.

6 Modify the baseframe positions of robot (system 2).

Repeat step 2 to modify the baseframe position of the robot (system 2) a Move the mechanical unit (robot) to its new location.

b See

Updating the baseframe position on page 412

to update the baseframe position of the robot.

c Repeat steps 1 and 2 to modify the baseframe position of the robot.

d In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes. Close the System

Configuration window.

7 Modify the baseframe position of the conveyor (system 2).

a In the Offline browser, click System Configuration to bring up a dialog box for system 2.

b Select the conveyor in the hierarchical tree. The BaseFrame property list for the conveyor is now displayed.

c Select the option Use Current Station Values to update the baseframe value of the robot in the controller.

d Deselect the option Check BaseFrame on Startup.

e In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.

NOTE! By deselecting the option Check BaseFrame on Startup, RobotStudio will not compare the BaseFrame values in the station and the controller every time the controller is started. This avoids repositioning the conveyor library.

NOTE! If the two robot systems use the same part on the conveyor, the relation between the part and the two conveyor workobjects should be the same.

78

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.3 Creating a system with external axes automatically

2.3 Creating a system with external axes automatically

Automatically create a system with external axes

1 Import the desired robots, positioners, and track libraries into the RobotStudio station. See

Import Library on page 207 .

NOTE! If a robot and track are selected, attach the robot to the track. See

Attach to on page 424

.

Note

Robot system supports the following tracks with lengths 1.7 m to 19.7 m in a separate task or same robot task. Depending on the manipulator type, the system allows one to three tracks per task. However with IRBTx004, only one track of this type can be used per system.

• IRBT4003

• IRBT4004

• IRBT6003

• IRBT6004

• IRBT7003

• IRBT7004

• RTT_Bobin

• RTT_Marathon

• Paint Rail

2 Create a robot system from layout. See

Robot System on page 208

.

Note

To create a robot system with IRBT4004, IRBT6004, or IRBT7004, the

TrackMotion mediapool must be installed. For more information, see

Installing and Licensing RobotStudio on page 38 .

Supported external axes configuration

The following table shows a combination of different external axes configurations:

Combination

A

One IRB (Positioner in same task)

Y

Positioner type

B

Y

C

Y

Y Y One IRB (Positioner in separate task)

Y

Two IRB (Positioner in separate task)

Y

One IRB on Track Motion

(Positioner in same task)

Y

One IRB on Track Motion

(Positioner in separate task)

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

D

Y

Y

Y

N

N

K

Y

Y

Y

YX

YX

L

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

2xL

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

R

Y

Y

Y

N

N

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

79

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

2 How to build stations

2.3 Creating a system with external axes automatically

Continued

Combination

A

Two IRB on Track Motion

(Positioner in separate task)

Y

Positioner type

B

N

C

N

D

N

K

YX

L

Y

2xL

N

R

N

• Y - Combination is supported

• N - Combination is not supported

• YX - Combination is supported and manual mapping of mechanical units and joints required

Note

Creating a system from layout only supports tracks of type RTT and IRBTx003 in combination with positioners. i.e. IRBTx004 is not supported in combination with the positioners.

Manual mapping of mechanical units and joints

If the system contains more than one mechanical unit, the number of tasks and base frame positions of the mechanism should be verified in the System

Configuration.

1 In the Offline browser, click System Configuration to bring up a dialog box.

2 Select the robot from the node in the hierarchical tree.

The property page of this node contains controls for mapping and setting axes and joints.

3 Click Change to open a dialog box.

4 Manually map the mechanical unit and mechanism joints. Click Apply.

5 Modify the baseframe positions of the mechanical unit. See

Updating the baseframe position on page 412 .

80

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.4.1 Setting up a system with track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003 manually

2.4 Manually setting up a system with track motion

2.4.1 Setting up a system with track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003 manually

Manually set up a system with track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003

Use this procedure to manually set up a system with track motion type RTT Bobin,

RTT Marathon or IRBT4003, IRBT6003, or IRBT7003.

1 Build and start a new system. See

Building a new system on page 163

.

1

2

3

Action Description

Select the desired robot variant

(IRB6600).

In the New Controller System wizard of the

System Builder, naviagte to Modify Options page and scroll down to Drive Module 1 >

Drive module application group and expand

ABB Standard manipulator option and select

Manipulator type (IRB6600).

Select the Additional axes configuration.

Click Finish.

In the New Controller System wizard of the

System Builder, naviagte to Modify Options page of the System Builder, scroll down to

Drive Module 1> Additional axes configura-

tion group and expand the Add axes IRB/drive

module 6600 option and select the 770-4 Drive

W in pos Y2 option.

NOTE! The option 770-4 Drive W in pos Y2, the Drive module, and the Position varies depending on the Additional axes configuration selected. Make sure to select at least one drive in any position.

Close the Modify Options page.

2 Add the system to the station. See

Adding a system on page 83

3 Add the corresponding track configuration file of the desired robot variant

(IRB 6600) and the desired track model to the station. See

Adding the track to the system on page 87

.

NOTE! In the Select Library group, select either the existing track or import a different track.

NOTE! The system may fail unless the correct additional axes configuration is selected.

4 Specify whether the baseframe is moved by another mechanism.

a In the Offline browser, click System Configuration to bring up a dialog box.

b Select ROB_1 node from the hierarchical tree.

c Select the option Track from the BaseFrame moved by list.

d Click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.

Close the System Configuration window.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

81

2 How to build stations

2.4.2 Setting up a system with track motion of type IRBTx004 manually

2.4.2 Setting up a system with track motion of type IRBTx004 manually

Overview

For configuration of tracks of type IRBT4004, IRBT6004, or IRBT7004, the

TrackMotion mediapool must be installed. For more information, see

Installing and

Licensing RobotStudio on page 38 .

Manually set up a system with track motion of type IRBTx004

1 Build and start a new system. See

Building a new system on page 163

.

1

2

3

4

5

Action

Add additional options for IRB-

Tx004.

Description

See

Adding additional options on page 164 .

NOTE! Browse and select the key file (.kxt) located in the mediapool Track 5.XX.YYYY where 5.XX indicates the latest RobotWare version being used.

Select the desired robot variant

(IRB6600).

On the Modify Options page of the System

Builder, scroll down to Drive Module 1 > Drive

module application group and expand ABB

Standard manipulator option and select Ma-

nipulator type (IRB6600).

Select Additional axes configur-

ation.

On the Modify Options page of the System

Builder, scroll down to Drive Module 1> Addi-

tional axes configuratin group and expand the Add axes IRB/drive module 6600 option and select the 770-4 Drive W in pos Y2 option.

NOTE! The option 770-4 Drive W in pos Y2, the Drive module, and the Position varies depending on the Additional axes configura-

tion selected. Make sure to select at least one drive in any position.

Select the desired track motion

(IRBT 6004).

Click Finish.

On the Modify Options page of the System

Builder, scroll down to the TRACK and expand the Drive module for Track motion group. Select Drive Module 1 >Track Motion

type >IRBT 6004 > Irb Orientation on Track

> Standard carriage In Line > Select Track

Motion Length > 1.7m (or any other variant).

Close the Modify Options page.

2 Add the system to the station. See

Adding a system on page 83 .

3 Add the desired track model to the station. See

Adding the track to the system on page 87 .

NOTE!

a In the Select Library group, click Other to import a different track motion library.

b Click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.

Close the System Configuration window.

82

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.5.1 Starting a VC

2.5 The VC

2.5.1 Starting a VC

Overview

RobotStudio uses virtual controllers for running the robots. Virtual controllers can run both systems for real robots and specific virtual systems for testing and evaluation purposes. A virtual controller uses the same software as the controller to execute the RAPID program, to calculate robot motions and to handle I/O signals.

When starting a virtual controller, point out which system to run on it. Since the system contains information about the robots to use and important data such as robot programs and configurations, it is important to select the right system for the station.

Starting a VC

The table below describes the different ways a virtual controller may start:

Startup

Automatic, when creating a station

Description

In most cases, a VC is automatically started when you create a new station. Library files for the robots used by the system are then imported to the station.

Automatic, when adding a system to an existing station

If your station uses several systems or if you started with an empty station, you can add systems to an open station. Library files for the robots used by the the systems are then imported to the station.

Manually, when connecting to an imported library

If you have manually imported a robot library you want to use with a system, instead of importing a new library at startup, you can connect this library to a controller.

If you have manually imported a robot library you want to use with a system, instead of importing a new library at startup, you can connect this library to a controller.

A library may only be connected to a single-robot system and may not be already connected to another VC.

Adding a system

To start a system in a new virtual controller and automatically import the robots used by the system, follow these steps:

1 • If you have the Select system dialog box open, continue with the next step.

• If you do not have the Select system dialog box open, go to the

Controller menu and click Add System.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

83

2 How to build stations

2.5.1 Starting a VC

Continued

2 Depending on whether the system to start on the virtual controller is ready or not, do one of the following:

Activity Description

Create and start a copy of an existing system

This is recommended when you plan to add station-specific configurations or programs.

From the Select system pool list, select the folder on your PC that contains the system to use. Select the system to copy from the Systems Found list and click

Copy. In the Copy System dialog box, enter a name for the system and click OK.

Start an existing system as is

This is useful when you already have created a specific system for the station.

It is also useful if you do not plan to create station-specific configurations or programs and want a quick start.

From the Select system pool list, select the folder on your PC that contains the system to use.

Modify and start an existing system

This is the way to add or change options in the systems, for example, adding or replacing robots and external axes.

From the Select system pool list, select the folder on your PC that contains the system to modify. Select the system to modify from the Systems Found list and click Modify. This starts the System

Builder from which you make the modifications. For detailed information, see

Modifying a system on page 167 .

Build and start a new system

This option is used for building and starting a completely new system, either from

RobotWare keys or from virtual keys.

Click Create to start the System Builder from which you build the new system. For detailed information about creating the system, see

Building a new system on page 163 .

3 From the Systems Found list, select the system to use and click Start.

84

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.5.2 Restarting a VC

2.5.2 Restarting a VC

Overview

This section describes when and how to restart a VC in RobotStudio. See also

Restart on page 369

.

Prerequisites

The following are the prerequisites for restarting a controller:

• You must have Write access to the controller you are restarting.

• For the advanced restart methods X-start and C-start, you must have access to the controller's FlexPendant.

When to restart a virtual controller

Some operations require a restart of the controller to take effect. When working in

RobotStudio, you will be notified when a restart is necessary.

Warm restart

Typically, you need to make an ordinary warm restart of a virtual controller when:

• you have changed the baseframe of any of the robots belonging to that virtual controller.

• you have changed the robot's configuration, either with the Configuration

Editor or by loading new configuration files.

• you have added new options or hardware to the system.

• A system failure has occurred.

Cold restart

A cold restart is useful for restoring the system running on a virtual controller to the state it was created in. The cold restart deletes all RAPID programs, data and custom configurations that have been added to the system.

Advanced restarts

In addition to warm and cold restarts, several advanced restarts are available. See

Advanced restart options on page 85

.

Advanced restart options

The controller can be restarted with the following advanced restart options:

Option

I-Start

P-Start

Description

Restarts the controller with the current system and the default settings.

This method discards the changes made to the robot's configuration. It reverts the current system to the state it had when it was installed on the controller (an empty system).

Restart the controller with the current system and reinstall

RAPID.

This method deletes all RAPID program modules. It can be useful if the system has changed in such a way that the programs no longer are valid, for instance if system parameters used by the program are changed.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

85

2 How to build stations

2.5.2 Restarting a VC

Continued

Option

X-Start

C-Start

B-Start

Description

Saves the current system and starts the boot application.

This method saves the current system, with the current settings, and starts the boot application from which you can choose a new system to start with. You can also configure the controller's network settings from the boot application.

Deletes current system and starts the boot application.

This method deletes the current system and starts the boot application from which you can choose a new system to start with. You can also configure the controller's network settings from the boot application.

Restarts the controller with the current system and the last known good settings.This method restores changes made to the robot's configuration to a previously good state.

86

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.6.1 Importing a station component

2.6 Station components

2.6.1 Importing a station component

Importing a robot model

This is how to import a robot model without a controller to your station.

A robot which is not connected to a controller cannot be programed. To import a robot connected to a virtual controller, configure a system for the robot and start it in a virtual controller, see

Building a new system on page 163

and

Starting a VC on page 83 , respectively.

To import a robot model, in the Home tab, click Robot System and then select a robot model from the gallery.

Importing a tool

A tool is a special object, for example, an arc weld gun or a gripper, that operates on the work piece. For achieving correct motions in robot programs, the parameters of the tool have to be specified in the tool data. The most essential part of the tool data is the TCP, which is the position of the tool center point relative to the wrist of the robot (which is the same as the default tool, tool0).

When imported, the tool will not be related to the robot. So in order for the tool to move with the robot, you must attach it to the robot.

To import a tool, in the Home tab, click Tool and then select a tool from the gallery.

Importing a positioner

To import a tool, in the Home tab, click Positioner and then select a positioner from the gallery.

Adding the track to the system

To select the model of the external axis to use, follow these steps:

Note

This procedure is not applicable for a robot system with track motions IRBT4004,

IRBT6004, or IRBT7004. They are configured by the TrackMotion mediapool and not by adding separate configuration files. For information on installation instructions, see

Installing and Licensing RobotStudio on page 38

.

1 Start the system in a virtual controller, either in a new empty station or in an existing station, see

Robot System on page 208 .

2 In the Layout browser, select the system to add the track to.

3 On the Offline tab, click System Configuration.

4 Click Add to add parameters for the track to the system. Browse to the parameter file (.cfg) for the track to add and click Open.

If you have a specific parameter file for you track, use that one. Otherwise, parameter files for some standard tracks are delivered with the RobotStudio installation. These can be found in the folder ABB Library/ Tracks in

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

87

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

2 How to build stations

2.6.1 Importing a station component

Continued

RobotStudio’s installation folder. The ABB Library folder can also be opened from the Quick access pane at the left of the Open dialog box used for adding parameter files.

The file name of each parameter file tells which tracks it supports. The first part tells the length of the track and the second the number of tasks.

For example, the file TRACK_1_7.cfg supports all tracks with the length 1.7

meters in systems with one single task. For Multimove systems or other systems with several tasks, use the configuration file with the matching number of tasks.

For example, if the track length is 19.9 m and the robot attached to the track is connected to task 4 of the MultiMove system, then select

TRACK_19_9_Task4.cfg file.

5 In the System Configuration window, click OK. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.

6 During the restart a list of all tracks compatible with the configuration file is displayed. Select the one to use and click OK.

After the restart the track appears in the station. Continue with attaching the robot to the track.

Importing a library, geometry or piece of equipment

A library component is a RobotStudio object that has been saved separately.

Normally, components in a library are locked for editing.

A geometry is CAD data which you can import to use in RobotStudio. For a list of importable CAD formats, see

Libraries, geometries and CAD files on page 34

.

To import a library, geometry or piece of equipment, see

Import Library on page 207 .

88

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.6.2 Converting CAD formats

2.6.2 Converting CAD formats

Overview

A CAD converter is installed together with RobotStudio by default. In most cases you do not have to convert CAD files before importing them to RobotStudio, but the CAD converter might be useful for converting several files at once, or for converting with custom settings.

Prerequisites

Most of the file formats require separate licenses, see

Libraries, geometries and

CAD files on page 34

for more information.

Starting the CAD converter

Click Start menu, point to Programs, ABB Industrial IT, Robotics IT, RobotStudio

5.xx and click CAD Converter.

Converting CAD files

To convert CAD files, follow these steps:

1 Click Add files and select the files to convert. Optionally, click Add files, again to add more files from another location.

Each file is now added to a row in the grid.

2 Optionally, change the suggested file name or target format by clicking that column for the file to change.

3 In the Target directory box, specify the folder in which to save the new files.

4 Optionally, click Settings and change the settings for the conversion. For details about the conversion settings, see

Conversion settings on page 89

.

5 Click Convert Files.

Conversion settings

The table below describes the settings for the conversion:

Setting

Acis save file format

Enable Healing

Description

Select which version of ACIS to save to when using ACIS as target format.

Controls whether the conversion engine attempts to heal geometric entities. Only supported for specified formats.

Translate hidden/no-show entities

Controls whether the hidden entities are translated or discarded. Only supported for specified formats.

VRML/STL Scale factors

VRML and STL are often created in units that RobotStudio does not expect; they thus need to be resized.

Delete all generated log files on exit

Makes the CAD converter delete log files when exiting.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

89

2 How to build stations

2.6.3 Troubleshooting and optimizing geometries

2.6.3 Troubleshooting and optimizing geometries

Overview

The characteristics of the geometries and CAD models in the station may have great effect on your work in RobotStudio, both in aspects of making the objects easier to program as well as enhancing simulation performance.

Below are some guidelines for troubleshooting geometries.

Trouble Information

The pointer snaps to the wrong parts of the objects when selecting in the graphics window

This problem might be caused by wrong snap mode settings, imprecise selecting, hidden or lack of geometrical information.

To resolve these problems, do the following:

• Check the selection level and snap mode settings. For more information, see

Selecting an item on page 68

.

• When making the selection, zoom and rotate the object so that you are sure to click inside the object.

• Check if the object has hidden details that might affect the snapping. Remove details that are not necessary for your programming or simulation. For more information, see

Modifying a part on page 93

.

• Some file formats only contain a graphical representation and no geometrical data. Import the geometry from a file format that also contains geometrical data. For more information, see

Libraries, geometries and CAD files on page 34 .

The graphics window redraws or updates slowly

This might be due to the performance of your computer not being high enough for the size of the geometry files in your station.

To reduce the size of the geometry files, do any of the following:

• Use a lower detail level for rendering the geometry. For more information, see

Graphic Appearance on page 435 .

• Blends, chamfers and holes can be automatically simplified by using the Defeature function. This can greatly reduce graphic complexity, speed up simulations and reduce memory usage.

• Check if the object has unnecessary details. Remove details that are not necessary for your programming or simulation. For more information, see

Modifying a part on page 93

.

Continues on next page

90

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.6.3 Troubleshooting and optimizing geometries

Continued

Trouble

Parts of the geometry are not visible

Information

If parts of the geometry are not visible from some views, a probable cause is that the object is made up of 2D surfaces and the option Backface culling is on.

Backface culling means that the faces of the object are only visible from the front, and if the object (or any of its faces) is oriented differently, they will not be visible.

To correct the problem, do one of the following:

• Switch to modeling mode and invert the direction of the face that is not displayed correctly. This not only corrects the display, it also decreases the chance of faulty orientations during graphical programming. For more information, see

Invert on page 438

or

To invert the direction of all faces of a part on page 91 .

• Turn backface culling off for the specific object. This makes the object display correctly, but does not affect the direction of the face, which might cause problems if the face will be used for graphical programming. For more information, see

To deactivate backface culling for a single object on page 91 .

• Turn backface culling off for all objects in the station.

This makes the objects display correctly, but does not affect the direction of the face, which might cause problems if the face will be used for graphical programming. It also decreases the performance of the graphic handling. For more information, see

To change the generic setting for backface culling on page 91 .

To invert the direction of all faces of a part

To invert the direction of all faces of a part, follow these steps:

1 Select the part on which faces you want to invert the directions.

2 On the Modify menu, click Graphic Appearance.

3 On the Rendering tab, click Flip normals and then click OK.

To deactivate backface culling for a single object

To change the backface culling setting for a single object, follow these steps:

1 Select the part for which you want to change the backface culling setting.

2 On the Modify menu, click Graphic Appearance.

3 On the Rendering tab, clear the Backface culling check box and then click

OK. The faces of the object will now be displayed even if the generic setting for backface culling is on.

To change the generic setting for backface culling

The generic setting for backface culling affects all new objects and existing objects that do not have backface culling specifically deactivated.

1 On the File menu, click Options.

2 On the Navigation pane .to the left, select Graphics: Performance.

3 On the Performance page to the right, select or clear the Cull back-facing

triangles check box and then click OK.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

91

2 How to build stations

2.7.1 Objects

2.7 Modeling

2.7.1 Objects

Overview

This section describes how to create or modify geometrical objects.

Creating a frame

A frame is a generic coordinate system that you can use as reference when positioning objects. Generic frames can also be converted to special kinds of coordinate systesm, like workobjects or tool center points.

For procedures, see

Frame on page 215

and

Frame from Three Points on page 216 .

Creating a solid

With the create solids commands you can create and build models of objects you do not have CAD files or libraries for. With the create solids commands you create primitve solid bodies; these can later be combined to more complex bodies.

For procedures, see

Solid on page 291

.

Creating a surface

For procedures, see

Surface on page 295 .

Creating a curve

When creating paths with targets based on the object geometries, curves are the geometrical objects that RobotStudio uses. For example, if you want the robot to run along the edge of an object, you can first create a curve along the border and then generate a complete path along that curve, instead of manually finding and creating the necessary targets.

If the CAD model/geometry of the work piece does not already contain curves, you can create the curves i RobotStudio.

For procedures, see

Curve on page 297 .

Modifying a curve

When creating paths with targets based on the objects geometries, curves are the geometrical objects that RobotStudio uses. By optimizing the curves before starting programming, you reduce the touch-up of the generated paths.

For procedures, see

Modify Curve on page 447

.

Creating a border

For procedures, see

Border on page 302

.

Creating a line from normal

A line can be created as a new part and body perpendicular to a surface.

For a procedure, see

Line from Normal on page 308 .

Continues on next page

92

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.7.1 Objects

Continued

Extruding a surface or curve

Curves and surfaces and curves can also be extruded to 3D objects, which may then be converted to solids. You can extrude along either a vector or a curve.

For procedures, see

Extrude Surface or Curve on page 307

.

Modifying a part

When you import a geometry or create an object, it will be one part. A part can, however, contain several bodies. In RobotStudio’s modeling mode you can modify the parts by adding, moving and deleting the bodies.

To modify a part, follow this step:

1 In the Modeling browser, expand the node for the part to modify. Then modify the part by doing any of the following:

To

Delete a body

Move a body from one part to another

Move one body relative to the others

Do this

Select the body and press the DEL key.

Drag the body or use the Copy and Paste commands on the Edit menu.

Select the body and then move it using any of the ordinary commands for moving objects, see

Placing objects on page 97

.

Modifying a library component

As external files, libraries are merely linked from a station. Therefore, to modify an imported library component, the link must first be broken and later reestablished.

For procedures, see

The Library Group on page 441

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

93

2 How to build stations

2.7.2 Mechanisms

2.7.2 Mechanisms

Workflow

This information topic describes how to create a new mechanism, that is, a graphical representation of a robot, tool, external axis or device. The various parts of a mechanism move along or around axes.

Creating a mechanism is dependent upon skillful construction of the main nodes of the tree structure. Four of these—links, joints, frames/tools and calibration—are initially marked red. As each node is configured with enough subnodes to make it valid, the marking turns to green. As soon as all nodes have become valid, the mechanism will be considered compilable and can be created. For additional validity criteria, see the table below.

Node

Links

Joints

Frame/tool Data

Calibration

Validity critera

• It contains more than one subnode.

• The BaseLink is set.

• All link parts are still in the station.

• At least one joint must be active and valid.

• At least one frame/tool data exists.

• For a device, no frames are needed.

• For a robot, exactly one calibration is required.

• For an external axis, one calibration is required for each joint.

• For a tool or device, calibrations are accepted, but not required.

• None.

Dependencies

The modify mode of the Mechanism Modeler has two purposes: to enable modification of an editable mechanism in its tree structure, and to complete the modeling of a new or modified mechanism.

It is recommended to configure each main node in the tree structure from the top down. Depending on its current status, right-click or double-click a node or subnode to add, edit or remove it.

For procedures, see

Create Mechanism on page 310 .

94

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.7.3 Tools and tooldata

2.7.3 Tools and tooldata

Overview

To simulate the robot tool, you need tooldata for the tool. If you import a predefined tool or if you create a tool using the Create Tool Wizard, the tooldata is automatically created; otherwise, you have to create the tooldata yourself.

The tooldata simplifies the programming work with respect to the different tools that may come in use. Defining separate sets of tooldata for different tools makes it possible to run the same robot program with different tools: only the new tooldata has to be defined. The tooldata contains the information required for moving and simulating the tool.

Two methods for manipulating tooldata in RobotStudio are as follows:

• Create or modify tooldata, see

Tooldata on page 219

and

Modify Tooldata on page 455 , respectively. This will create all data necessary for programming,

but there will be no visual tool during the simulation.

• Create tooldata for an existing geometry,

Create Tool on page 316 .

Creating and setting up a stationary tool

This information topic describes how to create a stationary tool. For information about creating a robot hold tool, see

Create Tool on page 316 .

Using a stationary tool, the robot holds and moves the work piece in relation to the tool. Thus, both the tooldata and the workobject must be set up correctly.

To create the tooldata for a stationary tool, follow these steps:

1 Import the geometry or library that represents the tool, see

Import Geometry on page 214

.

If you do not have the geometry or library at hand but know the position, you can skip this step. The tool will be programable, but not visible in the station.

2 Create the tooldata for the tool, see

Tooldata on page 219 .

Make sure to set the Robot holds tool option to false.

3 Create a workobject that is moved by the robot. see

Workobject on page 218 .

Make sure to set the Robot holds workobject option to true.

4 If you have a geometry or library component for the work piece, attach it to the robot, see

Attach to on page 424 .

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

95

2 How to build stations

2.7.4 Setting the local origin of an object

2.7.4 Setting the local origin of an object

Overview

Each object has a coordinate system of its own called local coordinate system in which the object dimensions are defined. When the object’s position is referred from other coordinate system, it is the origin of this coordinate system that is used.

With the Set Local Origin command you reposition the object’s local coordinate system, not the object itself.

For a procedure, see

Set Local Origin on page 466 .

96

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.8.1 Placing objects

2.8 Placement

2.8.1 Placing objects

Overview

To achieve the required layout of your station, you need to import or create objects, place them accordingly and, if applicable, attach them to other objects.

Placing objects means setting their position and rotation. If the objects are to be attached to robots or other mechanisms, they will be placed at their attachment point automatically.

The following table describes the actions relating to placement:

Actions

Placing an object

Rotating an object

Description

To place an object is to put the object in the required position in the station, see

Place on page 459

and

Set Position on page 468 .

The objects in the station can be rotated to achieve the required layout, see

Rotate on page 464 .

Measuring distance or amgles

The measurement functions calculates distances, angles and diameters between points you select from the graphics window.

When using measurements, results and instructions on how to proceed are displayed in the Output window, see

The

Measure Group on page 309 .

Creating a component group

A component group groups related object in the browser, see

Component Group on page 258

.

Attaching or detaching an object

Objects that are to be used by the robots in any way, such as tools, need to be attached to the robot, see

Attach to on page 424

and

Detach on page 432

.

Jogging a robot

Robots can be placed by jogging. The robot axes can also be postioned by jogging, see

Jogging mechanisms on page 105

.

Modifying the task frame

Modifying the task frame repositions a controller and all its robots and equipment in the station.

By default the controller world and the station world coordinate system coincide. This is convenient when building a station with one single controller. For a procedure, see

Set Task

Frames on page 411

.

However, when you have several controllers in one station, or need to reposition a controller in an existing station, you need to modify the

System Configuration on page 412

.

Modifying the baseframe position

Modifying the baseframe position sets an offset between the controller’s world coordinate system and the baseframe of the mechanical unit.This is necessary when having several mechanical units belonging to one controller, for example, several robots in MultiMove systems or when using positioner external axes. For a procedure, see

System Configuration on page 412 .

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

97

2 How to build stations

2.8.2 Placing external axes

2.8.2 Placing external axes

Overview

When starting a system with a track or positioner external axis in a RobotStudio station, you have to set up the system to load a model for the track or positioner and get the motions to work properly.

Prerequisites

The system shall be created with support for track or positioner external axes, see

A system with support for one robot and one positioner external axis on page 177 .

Attaching the robot to the track

To attach the robot to the track, follow these steps:

1 In the Layout browser, drag the robot icon and drop it on the track icon.

2 To the question Should the robot be coordinated with the track?, answer

Yes to be able to coordinate the track’s position with that of the robot in robot programs.

To program the track and the robot independently, answer No.

3 When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.

The track is now added to the system and ready to be programmed, see

Programming external axes on page 131

for more information on how to program the track.

CAUTION

If the system is cold started , the setup is deleted and the procedures described here must be performed again.

Placing the positioner in the station

To place the positioner in the station, follow these steps:

1 Move the positioner to the desired position using any of the ordinary functions for placing and moving objects, see

Placing objects on page 97 .

2 Modify the baseframe position of each mechanical unit of the positioner except the INTERCH unit, if it exists. When asked if you want to restart the system, answer Yes.

After the restart the system is updated with the positioner’s new location.

Continue attaching fixtures and workobjects to the positioner.

Attaching objects to the positioner

To program robot motions on an object that is held by the positioner, the targets must be created in a workobject that is attached to the positioner. For a complete visual simulation, CAD models that are moved by the positioner should also be attached. To attach the objects, follow these steps:

1 Import the models of the fixture and the work piece if you do not have them in the station already, see

Importing a station component on page 87 .

Continues on next page

98

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.8.2 Placing external axes

Continued

2 Attach the fixture to the positioner, see

Attaching and detaching objects on page 69

. When asked whether to keep the current position, answer No.

If the positioner has several stations, you will be asked which one to attach the object to.

3 Attach the work piece to the fixture. When asked whether to keep the current position, answer No.

4 Attach the workobject in which you will program the work piece to either the fixture, the work piece or the positioner. If you have defined calibration positions on either the work piece or the fixture, it is a good practice to use that object. When asked whether to keep the current position, answer No.

The positioner is now set up and ready to be programed, see

Programming external axes on page 131

for more information.

Tip

If the positioner is of an interchangeable type with several stations, you can either attach individual fixtures, work pieces and workobjects to each station flange, or you can use one set of objects that you attach and detach to the different flanges by events.

CAUTION

If the system is cold started, the setup is deleted and the procedures described here must be performed again.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

99

2 How to build stations

2.8.3 Placing robots

2.8.3 Placing robots

Overview

When modifying the position of a robot connected to a VC there is a possibility to modify the related task frame or any stationary RAPID objects (tooldata, workobjects) connected to the robot.

Prerequisites

A robot library must be present in the station and connected to a VC, see

Creating a station with a system on page 73 .

Modifying the robot position using a positioning tool

1 Modify the baseframe position of a robot connected to a VC using any of the following options:

• Set Position. See

Positioning an item on page 468

.

• Place object by One Point, Two Points, Three Points, Frame, and Two

Frames. See

Placing an item on page 459 .

• Rotate. See

Rotating an item on page 464 .

2 Click Apply.

To the question, Do you also want to move the Task Frame?. Click Yes or

No.

• Click Yes to move the task frame, but the base frame keeps its relative placement to the task frame.

• Click No to move the base frame and the placement relative to the task frame will change.

Note

If there are any stationary RAPID objects (tooldata, workobjects) in the corresponding task, the following question appears Do you want to keep the

positioning of all stationary RAPID objects?

• Click Yes to keep all the stationary RAPID objects in their global coordinates.

• Click No to move all the stationary RAPID objects along with the base frame

(same coordinates relative to base frame). Workobjects attached to any other object in the station will not be affected. Workobjects attached to any other object in the station will not be affected.

If the base frame configuration of the VC is updated, the VC has to be restarted for the changes to take effect. i.e. if the base frame changes its placement relative to task frame, the following question appears Do you want to update the

controller configuration and restart?

• Click Yes to restart the controller and update the base frame configuration of the connected VC.

• Click No if the base frame is not in accordance with the controller.

Continues on next page

100

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

2 How to build stations

2.8.3 Placing robots

Continued

Modifying the robot position using Freehand move or rotate

1 Modify the baseframe position of a robot connected to a VC using the following Freehand options:

• Move. See

Moving an item on page 246 .

• Rotate. See

Rotating an item on page 247 .

For information on updating the robot baseframe, see

Updating the baseframe position on page 412

.

2 A warning message is displayed in the Output window.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

101

This page is intentionally left blank

3 How to program robots

3.1 Workflow for programming a robot

3 How to program robots

3.1 Workflow for programming a robot

Overview

In most cases, going through the workflow from start to finish is recommended, even if it possible to work in other sequences as well.

Synchronizing will save and load text files containing RAPID modules, and create

RAPID programs from your station.

Prerequisites

Before creating a program for your robot, you should set up the station, including robots, work pieces and fixtures, in which your robot will work.

Programming a robot

The table below describes the workflow for programming a robot to perform the task you require.

Task

Create targets and paths

Description

Create the targets and paths the robot requires to perform the work tasks.

To create targets and paths, do one of the following:

• Create a curve to match your required shape. Then use the Create path from curve command to generate a path, complete with targets, along the shape you have created. See

Curve on page 297

and

AutoPath on page 227

.

• Create targets at the requested positions, then create a path and insert the created targets into it. See

Create

Target on page 221

,

Teach Target on page 220

and

Empty

Path on page 226

.

Check the target orientations

Check reachability

Make sure that the targets are oriented in the most efficient way for the tasks to be performed. If not, reorient the targets until you are satisfied. See

Orientations on page 111 .

Check that the robot and tool reach all targets in the path. See

Testing positions and motions on page 122

.

Synchronize the program to the virtual controller

Generates RAPID code from the RobotStudio items and enables the program to be simulated.

Perform text-based editing

If you need to edit the instructions or data created by RobotStudio, you can start the Program Editor. See

Using the RAPID editor on page 135 .

Collision detection

Check that the robot or tool does not collide with the surrounding equipment or the fixtures. If it does, adjust the placements or orientations until no collisions occur. See

Detecting collisions on page 141

.

Test the program

Test the program by moving along the paths. See

Testing positions and motions on page 122

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

103

3 How to program robots

3.2 Workobjects

3.2 Workobjects

Creating a workobject

A workobject is a coordinate system used to describe the position of a work piece.

The workobject consists of two frames: a user frame and an object frame. All programed positions will be related to the object frame, which is related to the user frame, which is related to the world coordinate system.

xx050000

For a procedure, see

Workobject on page 218

.

Modifying a workobject

For a procedure, see

Modify Workobject on page 456 .

Converting a frame to a workobject

You can create a new workobject from an existing frame. The converted workobject gets the same name and position as the selected frame.

For a procedure, see

Convert Frame to Workobject on page 429 .

Creating a frame by points

You can create a frame by specfiying points on the axes of the coordinate system and letting RobotStudio calulate the placement and orientation of the frame’s origin.

For a procedure, see

Frame from Three Points on page 216

.

104

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.3 Jogging mechanisms

3.3 Jogging mechanisms

Jogging a robot

To check if the robot can reach all positions on the work piece, you can jog the

TCP or the joints of the robot, either with the freehand commands of through dialog boxes. Jogging the robot close to its boudaries is best done with the latter method.

To

Jog the joints of a robot

Jog the TCP of a robot

Procedure

For freehand, see

Jog Joint on page 248

. For a dialog box, see

Mechanism Joint Jog on page 442

.

For freehand, see

Jog Linear on page 249

. For a dialog box, see

Mechanism Linear Jog on page 444 .

Prerequisites

To jog the TCP of a robot, the robot’s VC must be running.

Jogging several mechanisms

Function

Mutlirobot jog

Jogging with locked TCP

Description

When using multirobot jog, all selected mechanisms will follow the TCP of the one being jogged.

Multirobot jog is available for all kinds of jogging.

See

MultiRobot Jog on page 251

.

When jogging a mechanism that moves a robot (like a track external axis) with locked TCP, the robot will reposition so that the position of the TCP does not change, even though its baseframe is moved.

When jogging an external axis that moves the work object with locked TCP, the robot will reposition so that its TCP follows the work object in the same way as when using multirobot jog.

Locked TCP is available when jogging a mechanism that belongs to the same task as a robot.

See

Mechanism Joint Jog on page 442

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

105

3 How to program robots

3.4 Targets

3.4 Targets

Creating a target

You can create a new target manually either by entering the position for the target in the Create Target dialog box or by clicking in the graphics window.

The target will be created in the active workobject.

For a procedure, see

Create Target on page 221 .

Creating a jointtarget

A jointtarget is a specification of the position for the robot axes.

For a procedure, see

Create Jointtarget on page 223 .

Teaching targets

You can create a new target by jogging the robot and teaching a target at the active

TCP. Taught targets will be created with the axis configuration used when jogged to the target.

The target will be created in the active workobject.

For a procedure, see

Teach Target on page 220

.

Modifying a target position

By using the modify position command you can modify the position and rotation of a target.

For procedures, see

Set Position on page 468

and

Rotate on page 464 , respectively.

Modifying a target with ModPos

The position of an existing target can be modified by jogging the robot to a new, preferred position. By selecting a move instruction for the target in a path, the

ModPos command can be used to move the target to the TCP of the active tool.

When ModPos is executed, the target, referenced to by the move instruction, will be updated with the following information:

• position and orientation corresponding to the TCP of the active tool

• the current configuration of the active robot

• the current position and orientation values of all active external axes for the active robot

NOTE: To jog a robot linearly, a virtual controller must be running for that robot.

For detailed information, see

Starting a VC on page 83

.

Renaming targets

With this command you can change the name of several targets at once. You can either rename targets individually, or you can rename all targets in one or several paths at once.

The new target names will consist of an optional prefix, an incremental number and an optional suffix.

For a precedure, see

Rename Targets on page 462 .

Continues on next page

106 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3 How to program robots

3.4 Targets

Continued

When renaming targets, make sure that the new targets conform to the naming rules. The target names must:

• start with an alphabetical character in the ISO 8859-1 encoding (that is, an ordinary letter from the English alphabet)

• be shorter than 16 characters

• not be empty strings

• not contain any characters illegal in RAPID. See RAPID reference manual for details.

Removing unused targets

If deleting or changing paths or move instructions during programming, you might end up with large numbers of targets that are no longer used in any instructions.

To make the workobjects and their targets easier to grasp, you can delete all unused targets.

For a procedure, see

Remove Unused Targets on page 461

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

107

3 How to program robots

3.5 Paths

3.5 Paths

Creating an empty path

A path is a sequence of targets with move instructions that the robot follows. An empty path will be created in the active task.

For a procedure, see

Empty Path on page 226 .

Creating a path from curve

If the work piece has curves or contours that correspond to the path to be created, you can create the paths automatically. The create path from curve command generates paths, complete with targets and instructions along existing curves.

The path will be created in the active task.

The orientation of the targets that will be created will be according to the settings of the approach/travel vectors in the Options dialog box.

To create a path from a curve, the curve must have first been created in the station.

See

AutoPath on page 227

.

Setting robot axis configuration for paths

The robot axis configuration specifies the position of the axes as the robot moves from target to target, when multiple solutions are possible. This is necessary for executing move instructions using configuration monitoring.

Taught targets have validated configurations, but targets created in any other way do not. Also, targets that are repositioned lose their configuration. In RobotStudio, targets without a valid configuration are marked with a yellow warning symbol. See

Robot axis configurations on page 32

for more information about configurations.

To set a configuration for all targets in a path, see

Configurations on page 425 .

To set a configuration for a single target, see

Configurations on page 428

.

Reversing paths

The reverse path commands change the sequence of targets in the path so that the robot moves from the last target to the first. When reversing paths, you can reverse either the target sequence alone or the entire motion process.

For procedures, see

Reverse Path on page 463

.

Note

When reversing paths, the original paths are deleted. If you want to keep them, make copies before reversal.

Note

When reversing paths, only move instructions are handled. Action instructions, if any exist, have to be inserted manually after the reversal.

Continues on next page

108

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.5 Paths

Continued

Rotating paths

With the rotate path command you can rotate complete paths and move the targets used by the paths accordingly. When rotating paths, the included targets will lose their axis configurations, if any have been assigned.

A frame or target must exist at the position to rotate around before starting the rotate path command.

For a procedure, see

Rotate Path on page 465

.

Translating a path

The translate path function moves a path and all included targets.

For a procedure, see

Translate Path on page 470

.

Compensating paths for tool radius

You can offset a path so that it compensates for the radius of a rotating tool. Since the targets in the path are moved, they will lose their axis configurations, if any have been assigned.

For a procedure, see

Tool Compensation on page 469 .

Interpolating a path

The interpolate functions reorient the targets in a path so that the difference in orientation between the start and end targets is distributed evenly among the targets in between. The interpolation can be either linear or absolute.

Linear interpolation distributes the difference in orientation evenly, based on the targets’ positions along the length of the path.

Absolute interpolation distributes the difference in orientation evenly, based on the targets’ sequence in the path.

Below are examples of the difference bewteen linear and absolute interpolation.

The interpolate functions reorient the targets in a path so that the difference in orientation between the start and end targets is distributed evenly among the targets in between. The interpolation can be either linear or absolute.

For a procedure, see

Interpolate Path on page 437 .

No interpolation

This is the path before any interpolation. Note that the last target is oriented differently than the others.

xx050026

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

109

3 How to program robots

3.5 Paths

Continued

Linear interpolation

This is the same path after linear interpolation.

xx050027

Note that the targets are oriented based on their placement relative to the start and end targets.

If a target were moved and you reran the linear interpolation, it would be reoriented according to its new position.

If new targets were inserted between the existing ones and you reran the linear interpolation, it would not affect the orientation of the existing targets.

Absolute interpolation

This is the same path after absolute interpolation xx050028

Note that the targets are orientated based on their sequence in the path: each target has been reoriented equally, regardless of its place.

If a target were moved and you reran the absolute interpolation, it would not affect the orientation.

If new targets were inserted between the existing ones and you reran the absolute interpolation, it would change the orientation of all targets.

Mirroring a path

The mirror path function mirrors all motions instructions and their targets to a new path.

For a procedure, see

Mirror Path on page 445 .

110

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.6 Orientations

3.6 Orientations

Overview

This is an overview of the tools for automating the modification of target orientations.

When creating paths from curves in RobotStudio, the orientation of the targets depends on the characteristics of the curves and the surrounding surfaces. Below is an example of a path with unordered target orientations and examples of how the different tools have affected the targets.

Unordered orientations

In the path below, the target orientations are unordered. The function View tool at target has been used for illustrating how the targets point in different directions.

xx050029

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

111

3 How to program robots

3.6 Orientations

Continued

Effect of target normal to surface

In the picture below, the targets, which previously were orientated randomly, have been set normal to the flat round surface at the right side of the path. Note how the targets’ Z axis has been orientated normal to the surface; the targets have not been rotated in the other directions.

xx050030

Setting a target normal to surface

To set a target orientation normal to a surface is to make it perpendicular to the surface. The target can be oriented normal to the surface in two different ways:

• The entire surface can be used as a reference for the normal. The target will be oriented as the normal to the closest point at the surface. The entire surface is the default surface reference.

• A specific point on the surface can be used as the reference for the normal.

The target will be orientated as the normal to this point, regardless of whether the normal to the closest point at the surface has another orientation.

Objects imported without geometry (for example, .jt files) can only refer to specific points on the surface.

For a procedure, see

Set Normal to Surface on page 467

.

Continues on next page

112

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.6 Orientations

Continued

Effect of align target orientation

In the picture below, the targets, which were previously orientated with the Z axis normal to the surface but with the X and Y axes orientated randomly, have been organized by aligning the targets’ orientation around the X axis with the Z axis locked. One of the targets in the path has been used as reference.

xx050031

Aligning a target orientation

With the align target orientation command you align the rotation of selected targets around one axis without changing the rotation around the others.

For a procedure, see

Align Target Orientation on page 423 .

Tip

You can also align ordinary frames in the same way.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

113

3 How to program robots

3.6 Orientations

Continued

Effects of copy and apply orientation

In the picture below, the targets, which were previously oriented randomly, have been organized by copying the exact orientation of one target to all the others.

This is a quick way to fix workable orientations for processes where variations in approach, travel, or spin directions either do not matter or are not affected, due to the shape of the work piece.

xx050032

Copying and applying an orientation for objects

To transfer an orientation from one object to another is an easy way to align different frames for simplifying the programming of the robot. Target orientations may also be copied.

For procedures, see

Copy / Apply Orientation on page 431 .

114

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.7 RAPID Instructions

3.7 RAPID Instructions

Move and action instructions

For RAPID programming, RobotStudio’s main advantage is in the area of motion programming.

A move instruction is an instruction for the robot to move to a specified target in a specified manner. With RobotStudio, you can create move instructions in three ways:

Method Description

Create a move instruction based on an existing target

Creates move instructions based on one or several targets selected in the Paths&Targets browser. For a procedure, see

Add to Path on page 421 .

Create a move instruction and a corresponding target

Creates a move instruction and a corresponding target at once. The position of the target can either be selected from the graphics window or typed numerically. For a procedure, see

Move Instruction on page 238

.

Teach a move instruction Teaching a move instruction creates a move instruction and a corresponding target at the robot’s current position.

Teaching a move instruction also stores the current configuration with the target. For a procedure, see

Teach Instruction on page 237 .

In addition to move instructions, you can also create and insert action instructions from RobotStudio. An action instruction is an instruction other than a move instruction that can, for example, set parameters, or activate or deactivate equipment and functions. The action instructions available in RobotStudio are limited to those commonly used for affecting the robot’s motions. For inserting other action instructions or another kind of RAPID code in the program, use the

Program Editor. For a procedure, see

Action Instruction on page 239 .

The table below lists the action instructions that can be created. For details, see the RAPID Reference Manual.

Action instruction

ConfL On/Off

ConfJ On/Off

Actunit UnitName

DeactUnit UnitName

ConfJ On/Off

Actunit UnitName

Description

ConfL specifies whether to monitor the robot’s configurations during linear movements. When ConfL is set to Off, the robot may use another configuration than the programed one for reaching the target during program execution.

ConfJ specifies whether to monitor the robot’s configurations during joint movements. When ConfJ is set to Off, the robot may use another configuration than the programed one for reaching the target during program execution.

Actunit activates the mechanical unit specified by UnitName.

Deactunit deactivates the mechanical unit specified by Unit-

Name.

ConfJ specifies whether to monitor the robot’s configurations during joint movements. When ConfJ is set to Off, the robot may use another configuration than the programed one for reaching the target during program execution.

Actunit activates the mechanical unit specified by UnitName.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

115

3 How to program robots

3.7 RAPID Instructions

Continued

Action instruction

DeactUnit UnitName

Description

Deactunit deactivates the mechanical unit specified by Unit-

Name.

Modifying an instruction

Most instructions have arguments that specify how the instruction shall be carried out. For example, the MoveL instruction has arguments that specify the speed and accuracy with which the robot moves to the target.

For a procedure, see

Modify Instruction on page 453 .

Note

Some arguments are read from the virtual controller. If the virtual controller has not been started, only the arguments stored in the station can be modified.

Converting to move circular

To create a circular motion to an instruction target, you must convert the motion type to circular motion (that is, MoveC in RAPID).

A circular motion is defined by two motion instructions, where the first is the via-point and the second contains the end point of the circular motion.

The circular motion can only be used for open circular arcs, not for closed circles.

To create a path for a closed circle, use two circular motions.

For a procedure, see

Convert to Move Circular on page 430

.

Creating RAPID instructions for setting I/O signals

For controlling I/O signals in the robot program, you use RAPID commands that set the signals. These require that you first create instruction templates for the instructions that set the signals. See RAPID reference manual for details about the instructions that control I/O signals.

To add RAPID instructions that set I/O signals, follow these steps:

1 Synchronize the system in which you want to add the instructions to the virtual controller, see

Synchronization on page 134

.

2 In programming mode, select the module for editing, right-click it and then click Edit program.

3 In the program editor, add the instructions for setting the signals.

4 When you are done adding instructions, synchronize the task and paths from the Virtual Controller back to the station.

Using cross-connections and groups for setting I/O signals

You can also create cross-connections and signal groups, which make one signal set the value of several other signals. See System parameters reference manual for details about cross-connections and groups.

Continues on next page

116

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.7 RAPID Instructions

Continued

To make one signal set several others, follow these steps:

1 Request write access, and then open the configuration topic I/O in the configuration editor. Add configure instances for the cross-connections and groups to create.

Instruction templates

Instruction templates contain predefined sets of argument values that are applied to the instructions you create using the template. You can create templates for all instructions in the system running on the virtual controller. To see which instructions are available and what their arguments do, see the RAPID reference manual for your RobotWare version and the reference sections in manuals for software options, if you have any installed on the system.

Move instruction templates are always part of process templates. The process templates contain one instruction template for each type of move instruction that might be used by the process.

The process templates are instances of process definitions, which define the types of move instructions (move instruction definitions) that might be used by the process.

To create new move instruction templates, start by creating a new process template for a process that uses the type move instructions you want to create templates for. If such a process does not exist, you first have to create a new process definition.

If no move instruction definition for the type of instruction you want to create a template for exists, you must create it first.

When creating instruction descriptions, the virtual controller must be running, since the available instruction types are read from the system.

Method Description

Creating a process template with move instruction templates on page 118

Move instructions are always related to processes.

Creating a move instruction description on page 119

To create templates for other instructions than the one that already exists in the tree view, you first have to create an instruction description that defines the arguments that belong to the instruction.

Editing an instruction template on page 119

XXX

Creating a process definition on page 120

XXX

Creating an action instruction template on page 120

XXX

Creating an action instruction description on page 120

To create templates for other instructions than the one that already exists in the tree view, you first have to create an instruction description that defines the arguments that belong to the instruction.

Templates can be imported and exported on four levels: tasks, move instruction descriptions, action instruction descriptions and process definitions. The default directory for imported and exported template files is My Documents/RobotStudio.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

117

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3 How to program robots

3.7 RAPID Instructions

Continued

Simply choosing another directory will then make that directory default. The default file format is .xml.

The validation procedure checks for duplicate names, incomplete process definitions and virtual controller equality. It is performed automatically, after a template file has been imported or a node renamed or deleted.

For procedures, see

Instruction Template Manager on page 240

.

Instruction Template Manager

The Instruction Template Manager is used to add support for instructions other than the default set that comes with the RobotStudio.

For example, a robot controller system with the RobotWare Dispense option has specialized move instructions related to glueing like DispL and DispC. You can manually define the instruction templates for these using the Instruction Template

Manager. The instruction templates are exported to XML format and reused later.

The instruction template supports the following Robotware options:

• Cap (Continuous Application Process)

• Disp (Dispense)

• Trigg (Fixed Position Events)

• Spot Pneumatic

• Spot Servo

• Spot Servo Equalizing

• Paint

RobotStudio has pre-defined XML files that are imported and used for robot controller systems with the appropriate RobotWare options.These XML files has both the Move and Action instructions.

NOTE! It is recommended to use RobotStudio ArcWelding PowerPac while using

RobotWare Arc.

Creating a process template with move instruction templates

1 On the Home tab, from the active Task list, select the task for the robot for which you want to create the instruction template.

2 On the Create menu, click Instruction Template Manager. This opens the

Instruction templates page in the work space.

3 In the Instruction Templates tree to the left, make sure there are move instruction definitions for the types of move instructions you want to create templates for. If not, follow the procedure in

Creating a move instruction description on page 119

for creating them.

4 Make sure there is a process definition that uses the types of move instructions you want to create templates for. If not, follow the procedure in

Creating a process definition on page 120

for creating it.

5 Right-click the process definition for which you want to create a new templates and click Create Process Definition.

Continues on next page

118

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.7 RAPID Instructions

Continued

6 In the Create Process Definition dialog box, enter a name, with characters from ASCII set, for the new template and click Create. A new process template node with a set of move instruction templates is now created.

7 Select each new template one at a time, and in the arguments grid to the right of the tree view, set the argument values that shall be applied when you create new instructions based on the template. Finish for each template by clicking Apply changes at the bottom of the grid.

For details about available arguments and what they do, see the RAPID reference manual for ordinary RAPID instructions and the option manual for software option instructions.

Creating a move instruction description

To create the instruction description, follow these steps:

1 Right-click the Move Instructions node and click Create Move Instruction

Description. This opens the Create Move Instruction Description dialog box.

2 In the Controller Description list, select the instruction you want to make a description for. All action instructions installed on the controller, both through

RobotWare and software options, are available.

3 In the Motion type list, select the motion type for the instruction.

4 Optionally, in the Information text box, enter a comment to the instruction.

5 Click Create. The instruction description appears in the tree view and its settings are displayed in the grid.

6 In the instruction grid, set the point type values. If necessary, also change the other settings.

7 After changing the settings, click Apply Changes in the bottom of the grid view.

Editing an instruction template

To edit an instruction template, follow these steps:

1 In the active task list, select the task for the robot for which you want to edit the instruction template.

2 On the Create menu, click Instruction Template Manager. This opens the

Instruction templates page in the work space.

3 In the Instruction Templates tree to the left, browse to and select the template to edit.

4 In the arguments grid to the right of the tree view, set the argument values that shall be applied when you create new instructions based on the template.

Finish by clicking Apply changes at the bottom of the grid.

For details about available arguments and what they do, see the RAPID reference manual for ordinary RAPID instructions and the option manual for software option instructions.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

119

3 How to program robots

3.7 RAPID Instructions

Continued

Creating a process definition

To create a process definition, follow these steps:

1 Make sure there are move instruction definitions for the types of move instructions you want to create templates for. If not, follow the procedure above for creating them.

2 Right-click the Process definitions node and click Create Process Definition.

This opens the Create Process Description dialog box.

3 In the Create Process Definitions dialog box, enter a name for the process definition, a name for its first process template and then select the move instruction types to use. Finish by clicking Create.

Creating an action instruction template

To create a template for an action instruction, follow these steps:

1 In the active task list, select the task for the robot for which you want to create the instruction template.

2 On the Home menu, click Instruction Template Manager.

3 In the Instruction Templates tree to the left, right-click the instruction description (corresponding to the instructions as described in the RAPID reference manual) for which you want to create a new template and click

Create Action instruction Template.

If the instruction description does not exist in the tree, create it by following the procedure described in

Creating an action instruction description on page 120 .

4 In the Create Action Instruction Template dialog box, enter a name for the new template and click Create. The new template is now created under the instruction description node it belongs to.

5 Select the new template and in the arguments grid to the right of the tree view, set the argument values that shall be applied when you create new instructions based on the template. Finish by clicking Apply changes at the bottom of the grid.

For details about available arguments and what they do, see the RAPID reference manual for ordinary RAPID instructions and the option manual for software option instructions.

Creating an action instruction description

To create the instruction description, follow these steps:

1 Right-click the Action Instructions node and click Create Action Instruction

Description. This opens the Create Instruction Description dialog box.

2 In the Controller Description list, select the instruction you want to make a description for. All action instructions installed on the controller, both through

RobotWare and software options, are available.

3 Optionally, in the Information text box, enter a comment to the instruction.

4 Click Create. The instruction description appears in the tree view, and its settings are displayed in the grid.

Continues on next page

120

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.7 RAPID Instructions

Continued

After changing the settings (if necessary), click Apply Changes in the bottom of the grid view.

5 Continue with creating templates for the instruction description, as described in

Creating an action instruction template on page 120

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

121

3 How to program robots

3.8 Testing positions and motions

3.8 Testing positions and motions

Overview

Checking reachability

The check reachability function displays whether the robot can reach selected targets and motion instructions by changing the frames’ colors in the graphic view.

Reachable frames are colored green, unreachable red, and frames with reachable positions but not with current orientation are colored yellow.

The reachability check is useful when building the station, since the reachability of several targets are displayed at once. For a procedure, see

Check Reachability on page 427 .

Jumping to target

RobotStudio has several functions for testing how robots reach and move to targets.

They are useful both for finding the optimal layout when building a station and during programming.

Below are brief descriptions of the functions for testing reachability and motions.

Jump to target tests whether the robot can reach a specific position. This is useful when building the station: by creating targets at critical positions on the work piece and jumping the robot to them, you get an early indication of whether the items are positioned correctly or not. For a procedure, see

Jump to Target on page 439 .

Viewing a robot at target

When View robot at target is activated, the robot is automatically positioned with the tool at the target when one is selected. If several robot axis configurations are possible for reaching the target, the robot will use the one nearest the configuration it had before jumping to the target. For a procedure, see

View Robot at Target on page 471

.

Viewing tool at target

View tool at target displays the tool at target, without checking that the robot can reach it. This test is useful both when building the station and when programming the robot, since the orientation of targets both affects the reachability and the process performance. For a procedure, see

View Tool at Target on page 472 .

Executing move instructions

Execute move instruction tests if the robot can reach a specific position with the programed motion properties. This is useful for testing motions during programming.

For detailed information, see

Execute Move Instruction on page 433

.

Moving along path

Move along path executes all move instructions in a path. It is thereby a more complete test than Execute move instructions, but not as complete as a full simulation, since it ignores RAPID code that is not move instructions. For a procedure, see

Move Along Path on page 457 .

Continues on next page

122

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.8 Testing positions and motions

Continued

Moving to a pose

Moving to a pose moves a mechanism to a predefined joint value at a predefined time without using the Virtual Controller. This is useful when movement of the external equipment (such as a clamp or conveyer) must be simulated. For a procedure, see

Move to Pose on page 458

.

Simulating programs

Simulating programs involves running a program on the virtual controller as it is run on a real controller. It is the most complete test whereby you can see how the robot interacts with external equipment through events and I/O signals. For a procedure, see

Simulation Setup on page 321 .

Improving the reachability

If the robot cannot reach the target, or if you are not satisfied with the motions, try the following for improving the reachability:

1 Set ConfL or ConfJ to Off for enabling the robot to use new configurations for reaching the target.

2 Change the orientation of the target.

3 Change the position of either the robot or the work piece.

4 Use a system with a track external axis for increasing the robot’s range.

5 Use a system with a positioner external axis for enabling different work piece positions for different targets.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

123

3 How to program robots

3.9.1 About programming MultiMove

3.9 Programming MultiMove systems

3.9.1 About programming MultiMove

About MultiMove

The MultiMove functions helps you create and optimize programs for MultiMove systems where one robot or positioner holds the work piece and other robots operate on it. Below is an outline of the main workflow for programming MultiMove systems with RobotStudio, with references to detailed instructions further down in the section.

Prerequisites

For using the MultiMove functions you must first have the following:

• A virtual controller running a MultiMove system started in RobotStudio, see

A MultiMove system with two coordinated robots on page 175

for an example.

• All coordinate systems and tools used by the system.

• The paths along which the tool shall move. The paths must be created in a workobject that belongs to a tool robot and is attached to the work piece robot. A wizard will guide you through attaching the workobjects if this has not been done before starting the MultiMove functions.

For detailed information about MultiMove in RobotWare systems and RAPID programs, see MultiMove application manual.

Normal workflow

This is the typical workflow for creating MutliMove programs using the MultiMove function:

Action

Setting up the MultiMove

Testing the MultiMove

Tuning the motion behavior

Creating the program

Description

Select the robots and paths to use in the program, see

Setting up the MultiMove on page 126

.

Execute the motion instructions along the paths, see

Testing the MultiMove on page 127

.

Tune motion behavior, such as tolerances and constraints for TCP motions, see

Tuning the motion behavior on page 128 .

Generate the tasks for the robots, see

Creating paths on page 130 .

Additional actions

In addition to using the functions that calculate and create optimized MulitMove paths, you can program MulitMove manaully using a combination of the ordinary programming tools in RobotStudio and a set of tools specific for MultiMove programming.

Continues on next page

124

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.9.1 About programming MultiMove

Continued

The main actions for programming MulitMove manually are outlined below. Not all actions might be necessary, but the order in which they shall be carried out depends on the contents of the station and your goals.

Action

Creating Tasklists and Syncidents

Description

This data specifies the tasks and paths that shall be synchronized with each other. See

The Create Tasklist tool on page 236

and

The Create Syncident tool on page 236 , respectively.

Adding and updating ID arguments to the instructions to synchronize

To add IDs to the intructions, you can use one of the following methods:

Using

The Recalculate ID tool on page 235

to add and update IDs for instructions in paths that already are synchronized.

Using

The Convert path to MultiMove path tool on page 235

to add IDs to instructions in paths that have not yet been synchronized.

Adding and adjusting Sync instructions to the paths.

Add

SyncMoveon/Off or

WaitSyncTask instructions to the paths to synchronize and set their tasklist and

Syncident parameters. See

Creating an action instruction on page 239

.

Teaching MultiMove instructions It is also possible to jog all robots to the desired positions and then teach instructions to new synchronized paths.

See

MultiTeach tab on page 232

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

125

3 How to program robots

3.9.2 Setting up the MultiMove

3.9.2 Setting up the MultiMove

Selecting robots and paths

This procedure is for selecting the robots and paths in the station that shall be used for the MutliMove program. All robots for the MultiMove program must belong to the same system.

1 On the Home tab, click MultiMove. Click the Setup tab below the MutliMove work area.

2 In the work area, click the System config bar for expanding the system config section.

3 In the Select System box, select the system that contains the robots to program.

The robots of the selected system are now displayed in the System grid below the Select system box.

4 For each robot that shall be used in the program, select the check box in the

Enable column.

5 For each robot that shall be used in the program, specify whether it carries the tool or the work piece using the options in the Carrier column.

6 In the work area, click the Path config bar for expanding the path config section.

7 Select the Enable check box for the tool robot and click the expand button.

This displays the paths of the robot.

8 Select the order of the paths to execute by specifying them in right order using Path name column.

9 For each path that shall be included in the program, select the check box in the Enable column.

10 When you have set up the robots and paths, continue testing the Multimove and then tune the motion properties, if necessary.

126

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.9.3 Testing the MultiMove

3.9.3 Testing the MultiMove

Overview

Testing the MultiMove executes the motion instructions along the paths according to the current settings on the setup and motions properties pages.

Testing Paths

This procedure is for setting the robots start position and testing the resulting movements along the path sequence.

1 Jog the robots to what seems to be a good start position.

2 On the Home tab, click MultiMove. Click the Test tab at the bottom of the

MultiMove work area for displaying the test area.

3 Optionally, select the Stop at end check box to make the simulation stop after moving along the paths. Clearing this check box makes the simulation continue in a loop until you click Pause.

4 Click Play to simulate the motions along the paths based on the current start position.

If you are satisfied with the motions, continue generating multimove paths.

If the simulation cannot complete or if you are not satisfied with the motions, pause the simulation and perform any of the actions below to adjust the motions:

Action

Examine the robots’ positions for critical targets.

Description

Click Pause and then use the arrow buttons to move to one target a time.

Jog the robots to new start positions.

New start positions might result in changed motions, since the robots will use different configurations. In most cases, positions near the robots’ joint limits shall be avoided.

Go to the Motion Behavior tab and remove constraints.

The default setting for the motion properties is no constraints. If this has been changed, constraints might exist that limit motions more than necessary.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

127

3 How to program robots

3.9.4 Tuning the motion behavior

3.9.4 Tuning the motion behavior

Overview

Tuning the motion behavior means to set up rules for the robot’s motions, for example, constraints on the position or orientation of the tool. Generally, the

MultiMove program will obtain the smoothest motions with the fastest cycle and process times with as few constraints as possible.

For procedures, see

Motion Behavior tab on page 229 .

Modifying the joint influences

The joint influence controls the balance of how much the robots will use their joints.

Decreasing the weight value for one axis will restrict the motion for this axis, while increasing it will promote motion on this axis relative to alternative axes.

1 On the Home tab, click the Motion Behavior tab.

2 Expand the Joint Influence group by clicking its title bar.

3 In the Select Robot box, select the robot whose joint influence you want to modify.

The weight values for the robot axes are now displayed in the grid.

4 For each axis whose motion you want to restric or promote, adjust the Weight value. A lower value restricts, and a higher value promotes, motions on that axis.

Modifying the TCP constraints

The joint influence controls the balance of how much the robots will use their joints.

Decreasing the weight value for one axis will restrict the motion for this axis, while increasing it will promote motion on this axis relative to alternative axes.

1 On the Simulation tab, click the Motion Behavior tab.

2 Expand the TCP Constraints group by clicking its title bar.

The directions and rotations in which you can constrain the TCP’s motion are now displayed in the grid

3 For each pose you want to constrain, select the Enable check box and specify the constraint values (location in the TCP coordinate system). To use the values from the current TCP position, click Pick from TCP.

4 Optionally, adjust the Weight value for the constraint. A low value results in a harder constraint, while a high value allows a larger deviation.

Modifying the tool tolerance

The joint influence controls the balance of how much the robots will use their joints.

Decreasing the weight value for one axis will restrict the motion for this axis, while increasing it will promote motion on this axis relative to alternative axes.

1 On the Simulation tab, click the Motion Behavior tab.

2 Expand the Tool Tolerance group by clicking its title bar.

The directions and rotations in which you can enable tolerances are now displayed in the grid

Continues on next page

128

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.9.4 Tuning the motion behavior

Continued

3 For each offset you want to set, select the Enable check box.

4 In the Value column, specify the allowed deviation.

5 Optionally, adjust the Weight value for the tolerance. A low value increases the use of the tolerance, while a high value promotes motions that do not use the tolerance.

Modifying the tool offset

The tool offset sets a fixed distance between the tool and the paths.

1 On the Simulation tab, click the Motion Behavior tab.

2 Expand the Tool Offset group by clicking its title bar.

The directions and rotations in which you can set offsets are now displayed in the grid.

3 For each offset you want to set, select the Enable check box.

4 In the Offset column, specify the offset distance.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

129

3 How to program robots

3.9.5 Creating paths

3.9.5 Creating paths

Overview

When you are satisfied with the motions displayed when testing the Multimove program, the next step is to convert the temporary move instructions used by the

MultiMove function to ordinary paths in RobotStudio.

Creating the paths

To create paths for the MultiMove program in RobotStudio, follow these steps:

1 On the Home tab, click Create Paths tab.

2 Expand the Settings group by clicking on the its title bar.

3 Optionally, change the naming settings in the following boxes:

Box

Start ID

ID step index

Sync ident prefix

Task list prefix

Description

Specify the first ID number for the synchronization of the instructions for the robots.

Specify the increment between ID numbers.

Specify a prefix for the syncident variable, which connects the sync instructions in the tasks for the tool robot and the work piece robot with each other.

Specify a prefix for the tasklist variable, which identifies the tasks for the tool robot and the work piece robot to synchronize.

4 Expand the WP Robot Settings group by clicking on its title bar and then check the settings in the following boxes:

Box

WP Workobject

WP TCP

Path prefix

Target prefix

Description

Specify the workobject to which the targets generated for the workpiece robot shall belong.

Specify which tooldata the workpiece shall use when reaching its targets.

Specify a prefix for the generated paths.

Specify a prefix for the generated targets.

5 Expand the Generate path group by clicking on its title bar and then click

Create Paths.

130

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.9.6 Programming external axes

3.9.6 Programming external axes

Overview

This is a brief overview of the functions and commands for programming external axes in RobotStudio. For a more detailed description of external axes and how to program them, see the product manual for the external axis to use and the RAPID reference manual.

Coordinated motions

Normally, external axes are used to move the workpiece, the robot or any other mechanism. The motions of an external axis can be coordinated with those of a robot in two ways, depending on the task in which the external axis is defined.

Task for external axis

Same task as the robot´s

Coordination method

If the external axis is in the same task as the robot, the current position of active external axes is stored with each target that is created. When the robot then moves to the target, the external axis will move to the stored position as well.

Modifying and optimizing the position of positioner external axes can be automated using the MultiMove function, or be performed manually for selected targets. Positions of track external axes can only be modifed manually.

For information about using the MultiMove function, see

About programming MultiMove on page 124

. For information about how to modify the position of external axes manually, see below.

Other task than the robot’s If the external axis is in another task than that of the robot it shall be coordinated with, the motions of the external axis are created by MoveExt instructions, and the coordination is made by sync instructions.

For positioner external axes creating or optimizing MoveExt and sync instructions can be automated way using the MultiMove function, or be performed manually by creating a path with MoveExt instructions for the positioner and then adding sync instructions to the path for the robot and the external axis.

Track external axes can only be programed manually.

For information about using the MultiMove function see

About programming MultiMove on page 124

. For information about how to use the sync instructions, see RAPID reference manual and MultiMove application manual.

Modifying positions of external axes

When programming external axes, you often need to adjust the position of the external axis for some targets. For example, if you create a path from curves on a work piece that is attached to a positioner, the positioner will initially have the same position for all targets. By repositioning the work piece for some of the targets you might improve process time and reachability.

When targets are created in stations with a coordinated external axis, the position values of the external axis are stored in the target. With the Modify External Axis function you can reposition the external axis, thus making it possible for the robot to reach the target in new ways. For a procedure, see

Modify External Axis on page 452

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

131

3 How to program robots

3.9.6 Programming external axes

Continued

To modify the external axis values for a target, the following conditions must be met:

• The external axis must be added to the system and set up correctly. For examples of how to add support for an external axis to a system, see

A system with support for one robot and one positioner external axis on page 177 . For information about how to set up an external axis in a RobotStudio

station, see

Placing external axes on page 98 .

• The external axis must be defined in the same task as the robot.

• The external axis must be activated.

Activation and deactivation

Activating a mechanical unit makes it controlled and monitored by the controller.

Consequently, the mechanical unit must be activated before programming or running programs. If a system uses several external axes or interchangeable models with several work stations, several mechanical units might share common drive units. If this is the case, you must make sure to set the mechanical unit as active.

For more information about activating and deactivating mechanical units, see

RAPID reference manual on the instructions ActUnit and DeactUnit.

Activating and deactivating mechanical units can be done either manually, see

Activate Mechanical Units on page 331 , or programmatically by RAPID instructions,

see below.

To activate or deactivate mechanical units programmatically

To set the mechanical units to be active programmatically by RAPID instructions, follow these steps:

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, browse down to the path in which you want to insert the activation or deactivation instruction. To insert it as the first instruction in the path, select the path node and to insert it between existing instructions, select the instruction before the intended insertion point.

2 On the Home tab, click Action Instruction to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the Instruction Templates list, select one of the ActUnit or DeactUnit instructions.

4 In the Instruction Arguments grid and the MechUnit list, select the unit to activate or deactivate.

5 Click Create. When the path is executed either through the Move along path command, or running the RAPID program, the instruction will be carried out.

132

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.10 Loading and saving programs and modules

3.10 Loading and saving programs and modules

Overview

RAPID programs and modules are normally stored in the RobotWare systems, as they are created. You can also save the programs to files on the PC, which makes it possible to load them to other controllers, either other virtual controllers or real

IRC5 controllers.

Programs are saved from the VC

When saving a program to files on the PC from RobotStudio, it is the RAPID program stored in the system of the VC that is saved. This program is created and updated by synchronizing the station to the VC, see

Synchronize to VC on page 406 .

Procedures

To create or load a module or load a program, see:

New Module on page 354

.

Load Module on page 355

.

Load Program on page 357 .

To save a module or program, see:

Save Module As on page 356 .

Save Program As on page 358

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

133

3 How to program robots

3.11 Synchronization

3.11 Synchronization

Overview

To synchronize is to make sure that the RAPID program in the system running on the virtual controller corresponds to the programs in RobotStudio. You can synchronize both from RobotStudio to the virtual controller and from the virtual controller to RobotStudio.

In a RobotStudio station, robot positions and movements are defined by targets and move instructions in paths. These correspond to data declarations and RAPID instructions in the modules of the RAPID program. By synchronizing the station to the virtual controller, you create RAPID code out of the data in the station. By synchronizing the virtual controller to the station, you create paths and targets out of the RAPID program in the system running on the virtual controller.

When to synchronize the station to the VC

Synchronizing the station to the VC updates the RAPID program of the virtual controller with the latest changes in the station. This is useful to do before:

• Performing a simulation.

• Saving a program to files on the PC.

• Copying or loading RobotWare systems.

To synchronize a station to the VC, see

Synchronize to VC on page 406 .

When to synchronize the VC to the station

Synchronizing the VC to the station creates paths, targets and instructions that correspond to the RAPID program in the system running on the virtual controller.

This is useful to do when you have:

• Started a new virtual controller which system contains existing programs.

• Loaded a program from a file.

• Text-edited the program.

To synchronize the VC to a station, see

Synchronize to Station on page 405 .

134

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.12 Using the RAPID editor

3.12 Using the RAPID editor

Overview

The integrated RAPID program editor is useful for editing all robot tasks other than robot motion. This section provides instructions on launching the editor and case examples illustrating several useful functions, such as keyboard shortcuts,

IntelliSense, code snippets and the watch window.

Opening the program editor

To access the program editor, perform the following steps:

1 Click the Offline tab.

2 In the Program browser, select a module for editing and then click RAPID

Editor.

The RAPID code of the program appears as a tabbed document window.

Tip

The graphical layout can be consulted without closing the editor by clicking the graphics window tab.

Searching: a case example

Assume that you have programed targets and motion instructions and sychronized them to the controller. The number of targets is large, so you decide to distribute them among several modules.

You may have forgotten in which module your main procedure is found.

1 Press CTRL + F to bring up the Search and Replace dialog box.

2 In the Search Pattern box, type "PROC main". Since no modules are open, in the Search In list, select Current System, and then click Search All.

The search result is displayed in the Find Results window.

3 Double-click the line matching your search to launch the program editor.

The entire RAPID program is then checked for errors.

Code Snippets

Code Snippets are pieces of code inserted in the RAPID Editor. The editor integrates these codes with the pick list. The following are the predefined code snippets in

RobotStudio:

• array2x2x4.snippet

• array2x4.snippet

• array2x4x2.snippet

• array4x2.snippet

• function with return value bool.snippet

• module header.snippet

• procedure parameters.snippet

• procedure with error handler.snippet

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

135

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3 How to program robots

3.12 Using the RAPID editor

Continued

• robtarget.snippet

• tooldata.snippet

• TRAP routine example.snippet

• wobjdata.snippet

You can create customized code snippets and add to the existing list.

Note

Code Snippets can be edited in an XML editor such as Microsoft Visual Studio.

The RobotStudio .snippet files are saved in the folder C:\<Documents and

Settings>\<user name>\RobotStudio\Code Snippets. The folder <Documents and Settings> may be configured with different names, for example, Data. It may also be translated on localized versions of Windows.

For information on creating customized code snippets, see http://msdn.microsoft.com/.

Editing: a case example

Assume that you wish to create an infinite loop whereby the controller receives commands from a line PLC. The controller communicates with the PLC using digital

I/O signals, but you have forgotten the exact name of the function that reads an input signal.

1 Using code snippets, create a new procedure.

2 Press CTRL + SHIFT + SPACE to open the pick list.

3 Double-click the I/O folder, and then double-click the DOutput instruction to insert it at the insertion position.

4 Press the spacebar to display the parameter information ToolTip. As you enter parameters, the ToolTip is updated, displaying the current argument in bold. The ToolTip is closed either by concluding the instruction with a semicolon (;), or by pressing ESC.

Tip

At any time you may press CTRL + SHIFT to complete what you have begun typing. This will either bring up a narrowed-down list of selectable parameters, or, if only one selection remains, will automatically complete your text.

Adding breakpoints: a case example

Now that you have finished editing, you may want to test your loop and add some breakpoints.

1 Place the insertion on the new statement and press F9 to set a breakpoint.

The breakpoint, indicated by a grey circle, is stored in the editor until changes are applied, whereupon it turns red.

2 Ensure that the Ignore breakpoints button in the Program editor toolbar is not clicked, and click the Play button on the Simulation toolbar.

The program will run and then stop at the breakpoint.

Continues on next page

136

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

3 How to program robots

3.12 Using the RAPID editor

Continued

3 To run the program statement by statement, click the Step over button in the Program editor toolbar.

Applying and verifying the edits

To apply and verify your edits, follow these steps:

1 To apply your edits, click the Apply icon in the editor toolbar.

The statement is highlighted, and breakpoint locations are adjusted, if necessary.

2 To verify the syntactic and semantic correctness of the modules, click the

Check Program icon in the editor toolbar.

Executing: a case example

You might want to debug your loop or monitor a specific variable.

1 In the program editor browser, right-click the procedure you want to set as entry point, and then click Set Entry.

The icon is marked in red.

2 In the Simulation tab, click the Play button.

The program will run and then stop at the next breakpoint.

3 Select a variable for monitoring and drag it to the watch window.

4 Restart the loop and monitor the variable at each iteration.

Note

To manually refresh the variable list, click Refresh from the context menu.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

137

This page is intentionally left blank

4 How to simulate programs

4.1 Simulation Overview

4 How to simulate programs

4.1 Simulation Overview

About this chapter

This chapter describes how to simulate and validate robot programs. Below are short introductions to the simulation functions in RobotStudio.

Function

Play simulations

Collision detection

Description

Simulations run entire robot programs on a virtual controller.

Before you run a simulation you need to decide which paths are to be simulated. To set up a simulation, see

Simulation

Setup on page 321

. To run a simulation, see

Simulation Control on page 332

.

Collision detection displays and logs collisions and near-misses for specified objects in the station. Normally used during simulation of robot programs, it can also be used when building the station.

For more information, see

Detecting collisions on page 141

.

Event handling

I/O Simulation

Simulation Monitoring

Events can be used to connect an action to a trigger. For example, you can attach one object to another when they collide or a signal is set. For more information, see

Creating an event on page 144

.

In simulations I/O signals are normally set either by the robot program or by events. With the I/O simulator you can set signals manually, which provides a quick test of specific conditions.

For more information, see

Simulating I/O signals on page 145 .

With the simulation monitoring functions you enhance the simulation by adding traces along the TCP movements or alerts triggered by defined speeds or motions. For more information, see

Enabling simulation monitoring on page 146

.

Process time measurement With the process timer you measure the time for a process to complete. For more information, see

Measuring process time on page 147

.

Time handling during simulation

When simulating stations with events or several controllers, or other time managing equipment, time can be managed in two modes: either as free runtime or as time slices. RobotStudio uses time slice mode by default, but you can switch to free runtime, if required.

Free runtime

Since all controllers use the same computer resources, their synchronization might not be exactly as in the real world if they run independently of each other (called free run mode). The cycle time will be correct, but the timing for setting signals and triggering events might be inaccurate.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

139

4 How to simulate programs

4.1 Simulation Overview

Continued

Time Slice

Time slices can be used to ensure that the timing for signals and other interaction between controllers is accurate. In this mode, RobotStudio synchronizes the controllers by dividing a time segment into small slices and waiting for all controllers to complete a current time slice before any controller can start anew. Thus, the controllers are synchronized, and the cycle time will be calculated correctly. The drawbacks are that the virtual FlexPendant cannot be open, and that the simulation might be somewhat slow and jerky, depending on the complexity of the simulation and the performance of the computer.

Note

If the simulation uses events or involves several different controllers, the virtual time mode Time Slice shall be used to make sure that the timing between the controllers is correctly simulated.

140

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

4 How to simulate programs

4.2 Detecting collisions

4.2 Detecting collisions

Overview

With RobotStudio you can detect and log collisions between objects in the station.

The basic concepts of collision detection are explained below.

Collision sets

A collision set contains two groups, Objects A and Objects B, in which you place the objects to detect any collisions between them. When any object in Objects A collides with any object in Objects B, the collision is displayed in the graphical view and logged in the output window. You can have several collision sets in the station, but each collision set can only contain two groups.

A common use of collision sets is to create one collision set for each robot in the station. For each collision set you then put the robot and its tool in one group and all objects you do not want it to collide with in the other. If a robot has several tools, or holds other objects, you can either add these to the robot’s group as well or create specific collision sets for these setups.

Each collision set can be activated and deactivated separately.

Collisions and near-misses

In addition to collisions, the collision detection can also watch for near-misses, which is when an object in Objects A comes within a specified distance from an object in Objects B.

Recommendations for collision detection

In general, the following principles are recommended to facilitate collision detection:

• Simplify and defeature your models by removing everything that is not necessary for simulation purposes.

• Use as small collision sets as possible, splitting large parts and collecting in the collision sets only relevant parts.

• Enable coarse detail level when importing geometry.

• Limit the use of near-miss.

• Enable last collision detection, if the results are acceptable.

Results of creating a collision set

After you have created a collision set, see

Create Collision Set on page 320 ,

RobotStudio will check the positions of all objects and detect when any object in

ObjectsA collides with any object in ObjectsB.

Activation of detection and displayal of collisions depend on how the collision detection is set up.

If the collision set is active, RobotStudio will check the positions of the objects in the groups, and indicate any collision between them according to the current color settings.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

141

4 How to simulate programs

4.2 Detecting collisions

Continued

Collision detection

Collision detection checks whether robots or other moving parts collide with equipment in the station. In complex stations, you can use several collision sets for detecting collisions between several groups of objects.

After collision detection has been set up, it does not need to be started, but automatically detects collisions according to the setup.

Setting when to check for collisions

To set whether to detect collisions always or only during simulation, follow these steps:

1 On the File menu, click Options.

2 On the Navigation pane to the left, select Simulation: Collision.

3 On the Collision page to the right, select one of the following options from the Perform collision detection:

Option

During simulation

Always

Description

Collision detection is active only during simulation (when running RAPID programs in the virtual controller).

Collision detection is always active, even when moving objects manually or testing reachability.

Setting the objects for collision detection

To set the objects for collision detection, follow these steps:

1 Make sure that the objects for collision detection are placed correctly in collision sets.

2 Make sure that the collision set for the objects is activated, which is indicated by an icon in the Layout browser:

Icon Description

Active. Collisions between objects in this set will be detected.

xx050033

Not active. Collisions between objects in this set will not be detected.

xx050007

To activate or deactivate collision sets, continue with the following steps:

3 Right-click the collision set to change and then click Modify Collision set to bring up a dialog box.

4 Select or clear the Active check box and then click Apply.

Setting near-miss detection

Near-misses occur when objects in collision sets are close to colliding. Each collision set has its own near-miss settings. For setting near-miss detection, follow these steps:

1 In the Layout browser, right-click the collision set to change and then click

Modify Collision set to bring up a dialog box.

Continues on next page

142 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

4 How to simulate programs

4.2 Detecting collisions

Continued

2 In the Near miss box, specify the maximum distance between the objects to be considered a near-miss and then click Apply.

Setting logging options

In addition to the graphical display of collisions, you can also log the collisions to the output window or a separate log file:

1 On the File menu, click Options.and under Simulation, click Collision.

2 On the Navigation pane to the left, select Simulation: Collision.

3 On the Collision page to the right, select Log collisions to Output window check box.

The collision log is displayed in the output window.

4 On the Collision page to the right, select Log collisions to file check box and enter the name and path to the log file in the box.

A separate file for logging collisions is created below the check box.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

143

4 How to simulate programs

4.3 Creating an event

4.3 Creating an event

Overview

Events enhance your simulations by defining actions that are carried out when specific trigger conditions are fulfilled. You can use events to:

• Attach one object to another, for example, a work piece to a gripper when simulating material handling, see

Attaching and detaching objects on page 69 .

• Set signals, for example, when simulating signals set by equipment other than the controller, see

Simulating I/O signals on page 145

.

• Start or stop the process timer, see

Measuring process time on page 147

.

Used for creating new events, the Create New Event Wizard is launched from the

Event manager, see

Event Manager on page 324 .

Prerequisites

Before creating the event, make sure that the station contains all signals and objects that are planned to be used as triggers or affected by the action.

144

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

4 How to simulate programs

4.4 Simulating I/O signals

4.4 Simulating I/O signals

Procedures

When simulating I/O signals you can either create events that set signal values when specified trigger conditions are fulfilled, or you can set signal values manually.

For procedures using the event manager, see

Event Manager on page 324 .

For procedures using the I/O simulator, see

I/O Simulator on page 333

.

Related information

For information about controlling I/O signals from the RAPID program, see

Creating

RAPID instructions for setting I/O signals on page 116 .

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

145

4 How to simulate programs

4.5 Enabling simulation monitoring

4.5 Enabling simulation monitoring

Overview

The simulation monitor commands are used to visually detect critical robot movements during simulation by drawing a colored line that follows the TCP.

To enable TCP tracing

To enable TCP tracing, follow these steps:

1 On the Simulation tab, click Monitor to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the left pane, select the appropriate robot.

3 On the TCP Trace tab, select the Enable TCP Trace check box. This activates

TCP tracing for the selected robot.

4 Optionally, change the length and color of the trace. For detailed information, see

Monitor on page 335 .

To enable simulation alerts

To enable simulation alerts, follow these steps:

1 On the Simulation menu, click Monitor to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the left pane, select the appropriate robot.

3 On the Alerts tab, select the Enable Simulation Alerts check box. This activates simulation alerts for the selected robot.

4 In the threshold value boxes, specify the threshold for the alerts. Setting the threshold to 0 is equivalent to disabling the alert. For detailed information, see

Monitor on page 335 .

146

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

4 How to simulate programs

4.6 Measuring process time

4.6 Measuring process time

Overview

The process timer measures the time it takes for robots to run a simulation or move along a path. When the timer is activated, the clock will start as soon as a process is started. If two processes are started at the same time, the timer will not stop until the last one has stopped.

To measure the process time

To measure the process time, follow these steps:

1 On the Simulation tab, click Enable Process Timer to activate the timer.

2 Play the simulation or move along path.

The timer stops when the last process is stopped. If you start another process without deactivating the clock, the timer will continue.

3 To reset the clock to zero, click Reset Process Timer.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

147

This page is intentionally left blank

5 Deployment and distribution

5.1 Copying programs

5 Deployment and distribution

5.1 Copying programs

Overview

RAPID programs are normally stored in the systems that run on the virtual controllers of your station. To copy programs to systems on other controllers, save the programs to file on the PC and then load these files to the destination controllers. You can save either entire programs or specific modules.

Copying a program

To copy a program from one controller to another, follow these steps:

1 In the Offline browser, select the controller that contains the program to copy.

2 Save the program to file on the disc. For details, see

Saving a program on page 358 .

3 If necessary, copy the files to a location that is accessible to the other controller.

4 For instructions on loading the program to a system on a virtual controller, a FlexController or a non-running system, see the table below.

System location Do this

Virtual controller, running in RobotStudio

See

Saving a module on page 356 .

FlexController

A non-running system stored on the PC

Connect to the FlexController and load the program.

Start the system in a virtual controller, then load the program, see

Adding a system on page 83

and

Saving a module on page 356 , respectively.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

149

5 Deployment and distribution

5.2 Pack & Go / Unpack & Work

5.2 Pack & Go / Unpack & Work

Overview

The Pack & Go / Unpack & Work feature makes it possible to create a package

(zip file) of an active station that can be unpacked on another computer. The package contains all necessary files, except media pools, but additional, option-based media pools are included.

For procedures, see

Pack and Go on page 194

and

Unpack and Work on page 195 .

150

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

5 Deployment and distribution

5.3 Screen Capture

5.3 Screen Capture

Overview

Screen capture entails two functions useful for demonstrations and training purposes:

• The screenshot function allows you to capture an image of the application, see

Screenshot on page 193

.

• The recorder allows you to make a recording of your work in RobotStudio, either of the entire GUI or just the graphics window, see

Record Movie on page 344 .

Prerequisites

Recording a movie requires that Windows Media Encoder (WME) 9 is installed on your computer.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

151

This page is intentionally left blank

6 Working online

6.1 Connecting a PC to the service port

6 Working online

6.1 Connecting a PC to the service port

Note

The service port shall only be used for direct connection to a PC as described in this procedure. It must not be connected to a LAN (Local Area Network), since it has a DHCP server that automatically distributes IP addresses to all units connected to the LAN.

Contact your network administrator for more information.

Note

The maximum number of connected network clients using robapi is:

• LAN: 3

• Service: 1

• FlexPendant: 1

The total max. number of applications using robapi running on the same PC connected to one controller has no built-in maximum; however, UAS limits the number of logged-on users to 50.

The total max. number of concurrently connected FTP clients is 4.

Ports DSQC639

The illustration below shows the two main ports on the computer unit: the Service

Port and the LAN port. Make sure the LAN (factory network) is not connected to any of the service ports!

connecti

A

B

Service port on the computer unit

LAN port on computer unit (connects to factory LAN)

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

153

6 Working online

6.1 Connecting a PC to the service port

Continued

Connecting a PC to the service port

1

2

3

Action

Make sure the network setting on the PC to be connected is correct.

Illustration

Refer to the system documentation for your

PC, depending on the operative system you are running.

The PC must be set to “Obtain an IP address automatically” or set as described in Service PC Information in the Boot Application.

Use the delivered category 5 Ethernet crossover boot cable with RJ45 connectors.

Connect the boot cable to the network port of your PC.

The cable is delivered in the RobotWare product box.

4 Connect the boot cable to the service port on the computer unit.

xx040000

• A: network port

The placement of the network port may vary depending on the PC model.

154

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.2 Network settings

6.2 Network settings

Overview

This topic describes the network settings for a PC connected to a controller, which is a prerequisite for working online.

You can connect the PC to the controller through an Ethernet network in the following ways:

• Local network connection

• Service port connection

• Remote network connection

Local network connection

You can connect your PC to the same Ethernet network that the controller is connected to. When the PC and the controller are connected correctly and to the same subnet, the controller will be automatically detected by RobotStudio.

The network settings for the PC depend on the network configuration. For setting up the PC, contact the network administrator.

Service port connection

When connecting to the controller's service port, you can either obtain an IP address for the PC automatically, or you can specify a fixed IP address.

If you are not sure how to set up the service port connection, contact the network administrator.

Automatic IP address

The controller's service port has a DHCP server that will automatically give your

PC an IP address if it is configured for this. For detailed information see Windows help on configuring TCP/IP.

Fixed IP address

Instead of obtaining an IP address automatically, you can also specify a fixed IP address on the PC you connect to the controller.

Use the following settings for a fixed IP address:

Property

IP address

Subnet mask

Value

192.168.125.2

255.255.255.0

For detailed information about how to set up the PC network connection, see

Windows help on configuring TCP/IP.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

155

6 Working online

6.2 Network settings

Continued

Note

Obtaining an IP address automatically might fail if the PC already has an IP address from another controller or Ethernet device.

To ensure that you get a correct IP address if the PC was previously connected to an Ethernet device, do one of the following:

• Restart the PC before connecting to the controller.

• Run the command ipconfig /renew from the command prompt after connecting the PC to the controller.

Remote network connection

To enable a connection to a controller on a remote subnet or over the local network, the relevant network traffic must be allowed through any firewalls between the PC and the controller.

The firewalls must be configured to accept the following TCP/IP traffic from the PC to the controller:

• UDP port 5514 (unicast)

• TCP port 5515

• Passive FTP

All TCP and UPD connections to remote controllers are initiated by the PC, that is the controller only responds on the given source port and address.

Firewall settings

The firewall settings are applicable for both the Online and Offline modes.

The following table describes the necessary firewall configurations: en0900001008_Network_protocols

Note

RobotStudio uses the current Internet Options, HTTP, and proxy settings to retrieve latest public information on the Robotics products and activities

(RobotStudio News).

Connecting to the controller

1 Make sure the PC is connected to the controller's service port and that the controller is running.

2 On the File menu, click Online and then select One Click Connect.

3 Select the controller in the Online tab

Continues on next page

156

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.2 Network settings

Continued

4 Click Request Write access.

If the controller is in mode

Auto

Manual

Then

You will now get Write Access if it is available.

A message box on the FlexPendant will allow you to grant remote Write Access to RobotStudio Online.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

157

6 Working online

6.3 User Authorization

6.3 User Authorization

Overview

This section describes the controller's User Authorization System (UAS), which restricts what different users are allowed to do with the robot. This is for protecting data and functionality from unauthorized use.

The user authorization is managed by the controller, which means that the UAS settings remain for the controller regardless of which system it is running. It also means that the UAS settings apply to all tools for communicating with the controller, like RobotStudio or the FlexPendant. The UAS settings defines the users and groups that can access the controller, and what actions they are granted access to.

For procedures, see

User Accounts on page 396 .

Users

UAS users are accounts with which persons log on to the controller. Furthermore, the users are added to groups to which access grants are given.

The users are defined in the controller by a user name and a password. For logging on to a controller, the user must type in a defined user name with a correct password.

A user can either have the state activated or deactivated in the UAS. When a user is deactivated it is not possible to log on to the controller using that account. It is the UAS administrator that activates and deactivates the users.

The Default user

All controllers have a default user named Default User with a publicly known password robotics. The Default User cannot be removed and the password cannot be changed. However, the user having the grant Manage UAS settings can modify the controller grants and application grants of the Default User.

Groups

In UAS, groups are defined sets of grants for accessing the controller. To the groups you then add the users who shall have the grants defined by the group.

A good practice is to create groups that resembles the professions that work with the robots in your organization. For example, you can create groups for administrators, programmers and operators.

The Default group

All controllers have a default group named Default Group, to which all grants are given and to which the default user belongs. This group cannot be removed, but it can be changed by the user having the grant Manage UAS settings.

Continues on next page

158

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.3 User Authorization

Continued

Note

There is a risk changing the group membership of the default user. If you by mistake clear the Default User check box or any Default Group grant, you will get a warning. Make sure that there is at least one user defined that has the grant

Manage UAS settings. If the Default group and no other group have the grant

Manage UAS settings, you may lose your ability to manage users and groups.

Grants

Grants are permissions to perform actions or access data on the controller. You use the grants by giving them to groups, to which you then add the users who shall have the grants.

Grants may be either controller grants or application grants. Depending on the actions that you will perform, you may need several grants. For procedures, see

UAS Grant Viewer on page 401 .

Controller grants

Controller grants are validated by the robot controller and apply to all tools and devices accessing the controller.

Application grants

Application grants are used by a specific application, for example the FlexPendant, and will only be valid using that application. Application grants can be added by additional options and used in customer applications.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

159

6 Working online

6.4.1 System Builder Overview

6.4 The System Builder

6.4.1 System Builder Overview

Overview

This section describes how you create, build, modify and copy systems to run on virtual and real controllers. These systems may even be converted to boot media and downloaded to a real controlller.

The system points out the robot models and options to use; it also stores configurations and programs for the robots. Therefore, it is good practice to use a unique system for each station even if the stations use the same basic setup.

Otherwise, changes in one station may accidently overwrite data used in another station.

About virtual and real systems

The system you run on virtual controllers can either be a real system built on real

RobotWare keys or a virtual system built on virtual keys.

When using real systems, the RobotWare keys define which options and robot models shall be used, thus helping you to configure the system correctly. Real systems can be run both on virtual controllers and real IRC5 controllers.

When using virtual keys, all options and robot models are available, which is useful for evaluation purposes, but requires more configuration when creating the system.

Systems built on virtual keys can only be run on virtual controllers.

Prerequisites

Creating a system entails applying a predefined template to a station, reusing an existing system or letting RobotStudio propose a system based on a layout.

To create a system, the following conditions must be met:

• The RobotWare media pool must be installed on your PC.

• You must have a RobotWare key for the system, if creating a system to run on a real controller. The RobotWare key is a license key that determines which robot models to use and which RobotWare options to run on the controller. The license key is delivered with the controller.

• If you want to create a system for virtual use only, you can use a virtual key instead. Virtual keys are generated by the wizard. When using virtual keys, you select the robot models and options to use in the Modify Options section of the wizard.

• Downloading to the real controller requires a direct connection from your computer to the service or Ethernet port of the controller.

Administering systems

Systems can be administered from the System Builder dialog box in the following ways:

• View system properties, see

Viewing system properties on page 162

.

• Build a system, see

Building a new system on page 163 .

Continues on next page

160 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

6 Working online

6.4.1 System Builder Overview

Continued

• Modify or delete a system, see

Modifying a system on page 167

.

• Copy a system, see

Copying a system on page 171

.

• Create a system from backup, see

Creating a system from backup on page 172 .

• Download a system to a controller, see

Downloading a system to a controller on page 173

.

• Create boot media, see

Creating boot media on page 174

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

161

6 Working online

6.4.2 Viewing system properties

6.4.2 Viewing system properties

Overview

All systems you create with the System Builder are stored locally on your computer.

It is recommended that you store them in one or more dedicated system directories.

Viewing system properties

To view system properties and add comments, follow these steps:

1 In the System Builder dialog box, select a system from the Systems box.

If necessary, in the System directory list, you can navigate to the folder in which your systems are stored

2 The system properties are then displayed in the System Properties box.

Optionally, type a comment in the Comments box, and click Save.

162

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.4.3 Building a new system

6.4.3 Building a new system

Overview

The New Controller System Wizard, used for building a new system, is launched from the System Builder.

Starting the wizard

To start the wizard, follow these steps:

1 Click System Builder to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the Actions group, click Create New. This starts the wizard.

3 Read the information on the welcome page and click Next.

Specifying the name and location

To determine where on your computer to store the system you are creating, follow these steps:

1 In the Name box, enter a name for the system you are creating.

2 In the Path box, enter the path to the system directory in which you will store the system.

You can also click the Browse button and browse to the system directory.

3 Click Next.

Entering the RobotWare keys

The RobotWare keys determine which RobotWare versions and parts to use in the system.

Creating a system to run on either IRC5 controllers or virtual controllers requires at least two keys: one for the controller module and one for each drive module in the cabinet. The keys are delivered together with the controller.

For creating a system to run on virtual controller only (for example, in Virtual IRC5), you can use virtual keys. Virtual keys give access to all options and robot models, but limits the use of the system to virtual controllers only.

To enter the key for the controller module, follow these steps:

1 In the Controller Key box, enter the controller key. You can also click Browse and browse to the key file. If creating a system for virtual use only, select the Virtual Key check box, and the controller key will be generated by the wizard.

2 In the Media Pool box, enter the path to the media pool. You can also click

Browse and browse to the folder.system

3 In the RobotWare Version list, select which version of the RobotWare you want to use. Only RobotWare versions that are valid for the used key are available.

4 Click Next.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

163

6 Working online

6.4.3 Building a new system

Continued

Entering the drive keys

To enter the keys for the drive modules:

1 In the Drive Key box, enter the key for the drive module. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the key file. If you used a virtual controller key, a virtual drive key is already generated by the wizard.

2 Click the right arrow button next to the Drive Key box. The key now appears in the Added drive key list.

For real systems the drive key determines the connected robot model. For virtual systems you select the robot model in the Modify Options page. The default model is IRB140.

3 If you have a MultiMove system, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each drive key to add.

If you have a MultiMove system, make sure that the keys are numbered in the same way as their corresponding drive modules are connected to the controller module. Use the up and down arrows to rearrange the drive keys, if necessary.

4 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.

If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.

If you want to modify options, or add options, parameter data or additional files to the home directory, click Next.

Adding additional options

Here you can add options, such as external axes and dispense applications, that are not included in the basic system. Options require a license key and must be first imported to the media pool. To add additional options, follow these steps:

1 In the Key box, enter the option key. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the option's key file.

2 Click the Arrow button.

The option that the key unlocks is now displayed in the Added Options list.

Note

If several versions of an additional option exists, only the latest version can be selected. To use an older version, remove the other versions of the additional option from the Mediapool.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all options you want to include.

4 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.

If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.

If you want to modify options, or add parameter data or additional files to the home directory, click Next.

Continues on next page

164

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.4.3 Building a new system

Continued

Modifying options

Here you can set up and configure the options in your system. For virtual systems, you also select the robot models to use. To modify any options, follow these steps:

1 In the Option tree, expand the option folders to the level where you find the option you want to modify.

Only the options unlocked by the used keys are available.

2 Modify the option.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all options you want to modify.

4 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.

If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.

If you want to add parameter data or additional files to the home directory, click Next.

Adding parameter data

Parameter data is stored in the parameter data files (.cfg files). Each parameter topic has its own parameter file. You can add only one parameter file for each topic.

To add parameter data, follow these steps:

1 In the Parameter data box, enter the path to the folder for the parameter data files. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.

2 In the list of parameter data files, select the file you want to include and press the Arrow button. Repeat for all files you want to include.

The included parameter data files will now appear in the Added parameter

data files list.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each parameter data file you want to add.

3 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.

If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.

If you want to add additional files to the home directory, click Next.

Adding files to the home directory

You can add any type of file to the system’s home directory. When the system is loaded to a controller, these files will also be loaded. To add files to the system's home directory, follow these steps:

1 In the Files box, enter the path to the folder for the files you want to include.

You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.

2 In the list of files, select the file to add and click the Arrow button. Repeat for all files you want to add.

The added files will now appear in the Added files list.

3 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.

If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.

If you want to read a summary before you create the system, click Next.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

165

6 Working online

6.4.3 Building a new system

Continued

Completing the New Controller System Wizard

To complete the wizard, follow these steps:

1 Read the system summary.

2 If the system is OK, click Finish.

If the system is not OK, click Back and make modifications or corrections.

166

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.4.4 Modifying a system

6.4.4 Modifying a system

Overview

The Modify Controller System Wizard, used to modify existing systems, is launched from the System Builder.The wizard helps you with tasks like changing robots, adding and removing external axes and other options. A system that is running must be first shut down before modification.

Starting the wizard

To start the wizard when creating a new station:

1 If the system is currently running, on the Controller menu, point to Shutdown and then click Shutdown.

2 On the Controller menu, click System Builder to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the System directory list, enter or browse to the system directory. Select a system from the list beneath, review the system properties and add and save any comments.

4 In the Actions group, click Modify. This starts the wizard.

5 Read the information on the welcome page and click Next.

Modifying the program revision

The RobotWare versions that are available for the system are determined by the controller key. The key is essential to the system and cannot be modified.

To use another RobotWare version than the available ones, create a new system with another key.

To optionally modify the program revision, follow the appropriate step or steps:

1 To keep the current RobotWare version, select Yes and then click Next .

2 To replace the current RobotWare version, Select No, replace it..

3 In the Media pool box, enter the path to the media pool. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.

4 In the New program revision box, select which version of RobotWare you want to use. Only RobotWare versions that are valid for the RobotWare key are available.

5 Click Next.

Adding or removing drive keys

The drive key corresponds to the drive modules in your controller. For MultiMove systems, you have one drive module (and one key) for each robot. The keys for your system are delivered together with the controller.

the system is created with a vritual controller key, virtual drive keys are generated by the wizard. when you have added one virtual drive key for each robot, you select which robot to use for each key on the Modify Options page.

To optionally add or remove the keys for the drive modules, follow these steps:

1 To add a key for a drive module, enter the key in the Enter Drive Key box.

You can also click the Browse button and browse to the key file.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

167

6 Working online

6.4.4 Modifying a system

Continued

2 Click the right arrow button. The key now appears in the Added drive key list.

If you have a MultiMove system, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each drive key to add.

3 To remove a drive module, select the corresponding key in the Added drive

key list and click Remove drive key.

If you have a MultiMove system, repeat step 3 for each drive key to remove.

4 If you have a MultiMove system, make sure that the keys are numbered in the same way as their corresponding drive modules are connected to the controller module. Use the up and down arrows to rearrange the drive keys, if necessary.

5 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.

If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.

If you want to modify options, parameter data or add files to or remove files from the home directory, click Next.

Adding or removing additional options

To optionally add or remove additional options:

1 To add an addtional option, in the Enter Key box, enter the option key. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the option's key file.

2 Click the Arrow button.

The option that the key unlocks is now displayed in the Added Options list.

Note

If several versions of an additional option exists, only the latest version can be selected. To use an older version, remove the other versions of the additional option from the Mediapool.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all options you want to include.

4 To remove an additional option, iIn the Added options list, select the option you want to remove.

5 Click Remove.

6 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.

If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.

If you want to modify parameter data or add files to or remove files from the home directory, click Next.

Modifying options

To optionally modify any options, follow these steps:

1 In the Option tree, expand the option folders to the level where you find the option you want to modify.

Only the options unlocked by the used keys are available.

Continues on next page

168

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.4.4 Modifying a system

Continued

2 Modify the option.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all options you want to modify.

4 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.

If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.

If you want to modify parameter data or add files to or remove files from the home directory, click Next.

Adding or removing parameter data

Parameter data is stored in the parameter data files (.cfg files). each parameter topic has its own parameter file. You can add only one parameter file for each topic.

To addor remove parameter data, follow these steps:

1 To add parameter data, in the Parameter data box, enter the path to the folder for the parameter data files. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.

2 In the list of parameter data files, select the file you want to include and press the Arrow button. Repeat for all files you want to include.

The included parameter data files will now appear in the Added parameter

data files list.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each parameter data file you want to add.

3 To remove parameter data, in the Added parameter data files list, select the parameter data file to remove.

4 Click Remove.

5 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.

If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.

If you want to add to or remove files from the home directory, click Next.

Add files to or remove files from the home directory

You can add any type of file to the system’s home directory, or remove files from it. When the system is loaded to a controller, these files will also be loaded. To optionally add files to or remove files from the system's home directory, follow these steps:

1 To add files, in the Files box, enter the path to the folder for the files you want to include. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.

2 In the list of files, select the file to add and click the Arrow button. Repeat for all files you want to add.

The added files will now appear in the Added files list.

3 To remove files, in the Added files list, select the file to remove.

4 Click Remove.

5 Choose whether you want to create the system as it is now, or to continue with the wizard.

If you want to create the system as it is now, click Finish.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

169

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

6 Working online

6.4.4 Modifying a system

Continued

If you want to read a summary before you create the system, click Next.

Complete the Modify Controller System wizard

To complete the wizard, follow these steps:

1 Read the system summary.

2 If the system is OK, click Finish.

If the system is not OK, click Back and make modifications or corrections.

Result

Modifications will take effect when the wizard is completed.

If the system has been downloaded to a controller, it must be downloaded again before the modifications will take effect on the controller.

If the system is used by a virtual controller, it must be I-started for the changes to take effect.

Deleting a system

To delete a system, follow this steps:

1 From the System Builder dialog box, select the system and then click Delete.

170

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.4.5 Copying a system

6.4.5 Copying a system

Copy a system

To copy a system, follow these steps:

1 From the System Builder dialog box, select the system and then click Copy to bring up a dialog box.

2 Enter a name for the new system and a path, and then click OK.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

171

6 Working online

6.4.6 Creating a system from backup

6.4.6 Creating a system from backup

Overview

The Create System from Backup Wizard, which creates a new system from a controller system backup, is launched form the System Builder. In addition, you can change the program revision and options.

Starting the wizard

To start the wizard, follow these steps:

1 From the System Builder dialog box, click Create from Backup. This starts the wizard.

2 Read the information on the welcome page and click Next.

Specifying the name and location

To specify the destination folder, follow these steps:

1 In the Name box, enter a name for the system you are creating.

2 In the Path box, enter the path to the system directory in which you will store the system.

You can also click the Browse button and browse to the system directory.

3 Click Next.

Locating the backup

To locate a system from backup, follow these steps:

1 In the Backup folder box, enter the path to the backup folder. Alternatively, click the Browse button to browse to it. Click Next.

2 In the Media Pool box, enter the path to the media pool containing the appropriate RobotWare program. Confirm the backup information that now appears in the wizard. Click Next.

172

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.4.7 Downloading a system to a controller

6.4.7 Downloading a system to a controller

Overview

All systems you access from the System Builder are stored on your computer. If you wish to run a system on a robot controller, you must first load it to the controller, which then requires a restart.

Load a system

To load a system to a controller, follow these steps:

1 From the System Builder dialog box, select a system and then click Download

to Controller to bring up a dialog box.

2 Specify the Destination Controller for the system.

You can select by using the...

Select controller from list option

Specify IP address or controller name

option

Use service port option

if...

the controller has been detected automatically.

your PC and the robot is connected to the same network.

You can only use the controller name in

DHCP networks.

your PC is directly connected to the controller's service port.

3 Optionally, click Test Connection to confirm that the connection between the computer and the Controller is OK.

4 Click Load.

5 Answer Yes to the question Do you want to restart the controller now?

Yes

No

Cancel

The controller restarts immediately and the downloaded system starts automatically.

The controller does not restart immediately.

To start using the downloaded system, you have to: a perform a C-start or an X-start b select the system manually

The downloaded system is removed from the controller.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

173

6 Working online

6.4.8 Creating boot media

6.4.8 Creating boot media

Overview

Boot media is an entire system which the System Builder packs to a single file and commonly stores on a hard disk or USB memory. The controller then accesses the file through its Ethernet port or USB port, respectively.

Creating boot media

To create boot media, follow these steps:

1 From the System Builder dialog box, create a new system. For creating a new system, see

Building a new system on page 163

.

2 From the System Builder dialog box, select a new system or an existing system and then click Boot Media.

3 In the Path box, enter the path to the folder where you want to store the boot media file. Alternatively, browse to the location.

4 Click OK.

Result

To load the boot media system to a controller, first connect it and then restart the controller with the advanced restart method X-start.

174

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.4.9.1 A MultiMove system with two coordinated robots

6.4.9 Examples using the System Builder Offline

6.4.9.1 A MultiMove system with two coordinated robots

Overview

In this example we will use the System Builder to create a coordinated offline system with one IRB2400 and one IRB1600 robot to use in a new RobotStudio station.

Starting the New Controller System Wizard

To create a system like the one described above, follow these steps:

1 Click System Builder to bring up the dialog box.

2 In the dialog box, click Create New to bring up the New Controller System

Wizard.

3 Read the welcome text, and click Next to continue to the next page.

Entering the name and path

1 In the Name box, enter the name of the system. The name must not contain blank spaces or non-ASCII characters.

In this example, name the system MyMultiMove.

2 In the Path box, enter the path for the folder to save the system in, or click the Browse button to browse to the folder or create a new one.

In this example, save the system in C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial

IT\Robotics IT\RobotStudio\ABB Library\Training Systems.

3 Click Next to continue to the next page.

Entering the controller key

1 Select the Virtual key check box. A virtual controller key now appears in the

Controller Key box. In this example we will use the default media pool and

RobotWare version.

2 Click Next to continue to the next page.

Entering drive keys

1 Click the Right Arrow button next to the Enter Drive key box twice to create one drive key for each robot.

2 Click Next to continue to the next page.

Adding options

1 This system does not require any additional option keys. Click Next and continue to the next page of the wizard.

Modifying options

When creating robot systems from real robot keys, the key sets the options. But since we are using a virtual key, we have to set the options manually.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

175

6 Working online

6.4.9.1 A MultiMove system with two coordinated robots

Continued

To set the options necessary for a MultiMove, follow these steps:

1 Scroll down to the RobotWare / Motion Coordination 1 group and select the

MultiMove Coordinated check box.

2 Scroll down to the RobotWare / I/O control group and select the Multitasking and the Advanced RAPID check boxes.

3 Scroll down to the DriveModule1 / Drive module application group and expand the ABB Standard manipulator option. Select the IRB 2400 Type A option, manipulator variant IRB 2400L Type A.

4 Scroll down to the DriveModule2 / Drive module application group and expand the ABB Standard manipulator option. Select the IRB 1600 option, manipulator variant IRB 1600-5/1.2.

5 Click Finish and the system will be created.

176

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.4.9.2 A system with support for one robot and one positioner external axis

6.4.9.2 A system with support for one robot and one positioner external axis

Overview

In this example we will use the System Builder to create an offline system to use in a new RobotStudio station with one IRB1600 robot and one IRBP 250D positioner external axis.

Prerequisites

When creating systems for positioner external axes, you need the media pool and the license key file for that specific positioner. In this example we will use a media pool and license key file for a demo positioner.

Paths to files and folders assume that RobotStudio and the RobotWare media pool have been installed at their default locations on Windows XP. If not, adjust the paths accordingly.

Starting the New Controller System Wizard

To create a system like the one described above, follow these steps:

1 Click System Builder to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the dialog box, click Create New to bring up the New Controller System

Wizard.

3 Read the welcome text, and click Next to continue to the next page.

Entering the controller key

1 Select the Virtual key check box. A virtual controller key now appears in the

Controller Key box. In this example we will use the default media pool and

RobotWare version.

2 Click Next to continue to the next page.

Entering drive keys

1 Click the Right Arrow button next to the Enter Drive key box to create one drive key for the robot.

2 Click Next to continue to the next page.

Adding options

This is where we point out the key file for the positioner.

1 Next to the Enter key box, click the browse button and select the key file.

In this example, browse to and select the file extkey.kxt in the folder

C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics

IT\MediaPool\3HEA-000-00022.01.

Tip

In the MediaPool folder media pools for several standard positioners are installed. They are named by the positioner’s article number, with a suffix that indicates if it is configured for single-robot or MultiMove systems.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

177

6 Working online

6.4.9.2 A system with support for one robot and one positioner external axis

Continued

2 Click the Right Arrow button next to the Enter key box to add the key for the positioner.

3 Click Next and continue to the next page of the wizard.

Modifying options

When creating robot systems from real robot keys, the key sets the options. But since we are using a virtual key, we have to set the options manually. To set the options necessary for a positioner, follow these steps:

1 Scroll down to the RobotWare / Hardware group and select the 709-x

DeviceNet check box.

This option is for the communication between the controller and the track external axis.

2 Scroll down to the DriveModule1 / Drive module application group and expand the ABB Standard manipulator option. Select the IRB 1600 option.

This option sets the robot to an IRB 1600-5/1.2.

3 Scroll down to the DriveModule1 > Drive module configuration group; select the Drive System 04 1600/2400/260 option; expand the Additional axes

drive module group and select the R2C2 Add drive option.

a Expand the Drive type in position Z4 group and select the 753-1 Drive

C in pos Z4 option b Expand the Drive type in position Y4 group and select the754-1 Drive

C in pos Y4 option c Expand the Drive type in position X4 group and select the755-1 Drive

C in pos X4 option

This option adds drive modules for the positioner axes.

Note

When using the latest drive system, do the following:

Scroll down to the DriveModule1 > Drive module configuration group; select the Drive System 09 120/140/1400/1600 Compact option; expand the Power supply configuration group and select 1-Phase Power supply or 3-Phase Power supply (as applicable) > Additional axes drive module

> Additional drive a Expand the Drive type in position X3 group and select the Drive

ADU-790A in position X3 option b Expand the Drive type in position Y3 group and select the Drive

ADU-790A in position Y3 option c Expand the Drive type in position Z3 group and select the Drive

ADU-790A in position Z3 option

4 Click Finish and the system will be created. When starting the system in a

RobotStudio station, you have to set up the system to load a model for the positioner and to get the motions to work properly. See

Placing external axes on page 98

for more information.

178

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.4.9.3 Options settings for systems with positioners

6.4.9.3 Options settings for systems with positioners

Overview

This is an overview of the RobotWare options to set when creating a system for positioner external axes. Note that besides setting the RobotWare options, you must add an additonal option key for the positioner.

Media pools and option keys for the positioners

If you have the media pool and option key for your positioner, you can use these files.

If not, media pools for standard positioners are installed with RobotStudio. The path to these media pools in a default installation is: C.\program files\ABB Industrial

IT\Robotics IT\MediaPool. In this folder a media pool for each positioner is located.

These are named by the article number of the positioner, with a suffix that indicates if it is configured for a single-robot or a MultiMove system.

In the Add additional options page of the System Builder, you should add the option for the positioner by opening the mediapool folder for the positioner to add and selecting the extkey.kxt file.

Options for positioners in single-robot systems

When adding a positioner to a single-robot system, the positioner will be added to the same task as the robot. Below, the options to set on the Modify Options page of the System Builder for such a system are listed:

RobotWare > Hardware > 709-x DeviceNet > 709-1 Master/Slave Single

• Optionally, for using the system with ArcWare also add RobotWare >

Application arc > 633-1 Arc

DriveModule 1 > Drive module configuration > Drive System 04

1600/2400/260 > RC2C Add drive > 753-1 Drive C in pos Z4 > 754-2 Drive

T in pos Y4 > 755-3 Drive U in pos X4

Options for positioners in MultiMove robot systems

When adding a positioner to a MultiMove robot system, the positioner shall be added to a task of its own (thus you also have to add a drive key for the positioner).

Below, the options to set on the Modify Options page of the System Builder for such a system are listed:

RobotWare > Hardware > 709-x DeviceNet > 709-1 Master/Slave Single

RobotWare > Motion coordinated part 1 > 604-1 MultiMove Coordinated

Optionally, expand the MultiMove Coordinated option and select process options for the robots.

• Optionally, for using the system with ArcWare, add RobotWare > Application

Arc > 633-1 Arc

DriveModule 1 > Drive module configuration > Drive System 04

1600/2400/260 > RC2C Add drive > 753-1 Drive C in pos Z4 > 754-2 Drive

T in pos Y4 > 755-3 Drive U in pos X4. For the other drive modules, no additional axes should be configured.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

179

6 Working online

6.5 Handle I/O

6.5 Handle I/O

Overview

The I/O system

The I/O system of a controller consists of I/O buses, I/O units and I/O signals. The

I/O buses are the controller's connections for I/O units (for instance I/O boards) and the I/O units contain channels for the actual signals.

The I/O buses and units are displayed in the robot view, as child nodes under each controller and the I/O signals are displayed in the I/O window.

I/O signals

I/O signals are used to communicate between the controller and external equipment, or to change variables within a robot program.

Input signals

Input signals notify something for the controller, for instance a feeder belt can set an input signal when it has positioned a work piece. The input signal can then be programmed to start a specific part of the robot program.

Output signals

Simulated signals

A simulated signal is a signal that is manually given a specific value that overrides the actual signal. Thus simulated signals might be useful for testing robot programs without activating or running equipment.

Virtual signals

The controller uses output signals to notify that a specified condition has been fulfilled. For instance, after the robot has finished its sequence, an output signal can be set. This signal can then be programmed to start a feeder belt, update a counter or trigger any other action.

Virtual signals are signals that are not configured to belong to a physical I/O unit.

Instead, they reside inside the controller's memory. A common use for virtual signals is to set variables and store changes in a robot program.

Procedures

The I/O system handles input and output signals to and from the controller. Below are the parts of the system described, as well as common types of signals.

The I/O system window is used to view and set previously configured signals, and to activate and deactivate I/O units.

For using the I/O system window, see

Inputs / Outputs on page 365 .

For adding a signal, see

Add Signals on page 376

.

180

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.6 Configure systems

6.6 Configure systems

Configuring system parameters

System parameters may be configured as follows:

• To view topics, types, instances and parameters

• To edit the parameters of an instance

• To copy and paste instances

• To add and delete instances

• To load and save complete configuration files to and from controllers

When working with configurations, the following tools, see

Configuration editor on page 374

, are useful:

Tool

The Configuration

Editor

Use

With the Configuration Editor you work with the types and instances of a specific topic.

The Instance Editor With the Instance Editor, you specify the values of the parameters in the instances of system parameter types.

Note

To edit system parameters, you must have write access to the controller.

Terms

System parameters The sum of all parameters that configure the system, these are divided into topics and types.

Topic A collection of parameters relating to a specific area, and the highest level in the system parameter structure. Examples are Controller,

Communication and Motion.

Type

Instance

Parameter

Configuration file

A set of parameters for a specific configuration task. A type can be seen as a pattern describing the construction and properties for the parameters included in the task. For instance, the type Motion System defines which parameters shall be used for configuring a motion system.

An actualization of a type, an instance is a specific set of parameters with unique values created from a type pattern. In the Configuration

Editor, each row in the Instance list is an instance of the type selected in the Type list.

A property to set when configuring the robot system.

Contains all public parameters of a specific topic.

Viewing configurations

1 To view the topics of a controller, from the Offline/Online tab, expand the

Configuration node for the controller.

All topics in are now displayed as child nodes to the Configuration node.

2 To view the types and instances of a topic, double-click the topic node for the topic to view.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

181

6 Working online

6.6 Configure systems

Continued

The Configuration Editor is now opened, listing all types of the topic in the

Type name list. In the Instance list, each instance of the type selected in the

Type name list is displayed as row. The parameter values of the instances are displayed in the columns of the instance list.

3 To view detailed parameter information for an instance, double-click the instance.

The instance editor now displays the current value, restrictions and limits of each parameter in the instance.

Editing parameters

You can either edit the parameters of one single instance, or you can edit several instances at one time. Editing several instances at one time is useful when you want to change the same parameter in several instances, like when moving signals from one I/O unit to another.

1 In the Offline/Online tab, expand the Controller and the Configuration node and double-click the topic that contains the parameters to edit.

This opens the Configuration Editor.

2 In the Type name list of the Configuration Editor, select the type that the parameter to edit belongs to.

The instances of the type is now displayed in the Instance list of the

Configuration Editor.

3 In the Instance list, select the instances to edit and press the Enter Key. To select several instances at once, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting.

The Instance Editor is now displayed.

4 In the Parameter list of the Instance Editor, select the parameter to edit and change the value of the parameter in the Value box.

When editing several instances at one time, the parameter values you specify will be applied to all instances. For parameters that you do not specify any new value, each instance will keep its existing value for that parameter.

5 Click OK to apply the changes to the configuration database of the controller.

For many parameters, the changes will not take affect until the controller is restarted. If your changes require a restart, you will be notified of this.

You have now updated the controller's system parameters. If the changes require a restart of the controller, the changes will not take affect until you do this. If you are going to make several changes, you can wait with the restart until all changes are done.

Continues on next page

182

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.6 Configure systems

Continued

Adding instances

With the Configuration Editor, you can select a type and create a new instance of it. For example, adding a new instance of the type Signal creates a new signal in the system.

1 In the Offline/Online tab, expand the Controller and the Configuration node and double-click the topic that contains the type of which you want to add an instance.

This opens the Configuration Editor.

2 In the Type name list of the Configuration Editor, select the type of which you want to add an instance.

3 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and click Add type (the word type is replaced by the type you selected previously).

You can also right-click anywhere in the configuration editor and then select

Add type from the shortcut menu.

A new instance with default values is added and displayed in the Instance

Editor window.

4 If required, edit the values.

5 Click OK to save the new instance.

The values in the new instance are now validated. If the values are valid, the instance is saved. Otherwise, you will be notified of which parameter values to correct.

For many instances, the changes will not take affect until the controller is restarted. If your changes require a restart you will be notified of this.

You have now updated the controller's system parameters. If the changes require a restart of the controller, the changes will not take affect until you do this. If you are going to make several changes, you can wait with the restart until all changes are done.

Copying an instance

1 In the Offline/Online tab, expand the Controller and the Configuration node and double-click the topic that contains the instance to copy.

This opens the Configuration Editor.

2 In the Type name list of the Configuration Editor, select the type of which you want to copy an instance.

3 In the Instance list, select one or several instances to copy.

If you select several instances and they don't have the same value for all parameters, these parameters will have no default values in the new instances.

4 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and click Copy Type (the word type is replaced by the type you selected previously).

You can also right-click the instance to copy and then select Copy Type from the shortcut menu.

A new instance with the same values as the one you copied is added and displayed in the Instance Editor window.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

183

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

6 Working online

6.6 Configure systems

Continued

5 Change the name of the instance. If required, also edit the other values.

6 Click OK to save the new instance.

The values in the new instance are now validated. If the values are valid, the instance is saved. Otherwise, you will be notified of which parameter values to correct.

For many instances, the changes will not take affect until the controller is restarted. If your changes require a restart you will be notified of this.

You have now updated the controller's system parameters. If the changes require a restart of the controller, the changes will not take affect until you do this. If you are going to make several changes, you can wait with the restart until all changes are done.

Deleting an instance

1 In the Offline/Online tab, expand the Controller and the Configuration node and double-click the topic that contains the type of which you want to delete an instance.

This opens the Configuration Editor.

2 In the Type name list of the Configuration Editor, select the type of which you want to delete an instance.

3 In the Instance list, select the instance to delete.

4 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and then click Delete type

(the word type is replaced by the type you selected previously).

You can also right-click the instance to delete and then select Delete type from the shortcut menu.

5 A message box is displayed, asking if you want to delete or keep the instance.

Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete it.

For many instances, the changes will not take affect until the controller is restarted. If your changes require a restart you will be notified of this.

You have now updated the controller's system parameters. If the changes require a restart of the controller, the changes will not take affect until you do this. If you are going to make several changes, you can wait with the restart until all changes are done.

Save one configuration file

The system parameters of a configuration topic can be saved to a configuration file, stored on the PC or any of its network drives.

The configuration files can then be loaded into a controller. They are thereby useful as backups, or for transferring configurations from one controller to another.

1 In the Offline/Online tab, expand the Configuration node and select the topic to save to a file.

2 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and select Save System

Parameters.

You can also right-click the topic and then select Save System Parameters from the shortcut menu.

Continues on next page

184

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.6 Configure systems

Continued

3 In the Save As dialog box, browse for the folder to save the file in.

4 Click Save.

Saving several configuration files

1 In the Offline/Online tab, select the Configuration node.

2 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and click Save System

Parameters.

You can also right-click the configuration node and then click Save System

Parameters.

3 In the Save System Parameters dialog box, select the topics to save to files.

Then click Save.

4 In the Browse for Folder dialog box, browse for the folder to save the files in, and then click OK.

The selected topics will now be saved as configuration files with default names in the specified folder.

Loading a configuration file

A configuration file contains the system parameters of a configuration topic. They are thereby useful as backups, or for transferring configurations from one controller to another.

When loading a configuration file to a controller, it must be of the same major version as the controller. For instance, you cannot load configuration files from an

S4 system to an IRC 5 controller.

1 In the Offline/Online tab, select the Configuration node.

2 On the Controller menu, point to Configuration and select Load Parameters.

You can also right-click the configuration node and then select Load

Parameters from the context menu.

This opens the Select mode dialog box.

3 In the Select mode dialog box, select how you want to combine the parameters in the configuration file to load with the existing parameters:

If you want to then

replace the entire configuration of the topic with the one in the configuration file.

select Delete existing parameters before

loading

add new parameters from the configuration file to the topic, without modifying the existing ones.

click Load parameters if no duplicates add new parameters from the configuration file to the topic and update the existing ones with values from the configuration file. Parameters that only exist in the controller and not in the configuration file will not be changed at all.

click Load parameters and replace du-

plicates

4 Click Open and browse to the configuration file to load. Then click Open again.

5 In the information box, click OK to confirm that you want to load the parameters from the configuration file.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

185

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

6 Working online

6.6 Configure systems

Continued

6 When the loading of the configuration file is finished, close the Select mode dialog box.

If a restart of the controller is necessary for the new parameters to take affect, you will be notified of this.

186

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.7 Handle events

6.7 Handle events

Overview

An event is a message that notifies you that something has happened to the robot system, be it merely a change in operation mode or a severe error that calls for your immediate attention. If the event requires any action from you, this is stated in the event.

Events are displayed in the event logs of the FlexPendant and RobotStudio.

The event log keeps you informed of system status, allowing you to:

• view controller events.

• filter events.

• sort events.

• get detailed information about an event.

• save event log files on your PC.

• clear event records.

Event Log list

The event log list consists of all events matching your filter settings, with the following information for each event:

Type

Code

Title

Category

Seq. Number

Date and Time

The event type is an indication of the severity of the event.

The event code is a number that identifies the event message.

The event title is a short event description.

The event category is an indication of the source of the event.

The sequential number indicates the chronological order of the event.

Date and time is when the event occurred.

When you select an event in the list, detailed information will appear to the right.

Event type

The event type is an indication of the severity of the event.

There are three types of events:

Event type

Information

Warning

Error

Description

A normal system event, such as starting and stopping programs, change of operating mode, motors on/off and so on.

Information messages never require any action from you, but can be useful for error tracking, statistics collecting or monitoring user triggered event routines.

An event that you need to be aware of, but not so severe that the process or

RAPID program needs to be stopped. Warnings, however, often indicate underlying problems that sooner or later must be solved.

Warnings must sometimes be acknowledged.

An event that prevents the robot system from proceeding. The running process or RAPID program cannot continue, but is stopped.

All errors must be acknowledged. Most errors also require some immediate action from you in order to solve the problem.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

187

6 Working online

6.7 Handle events

Continued

Note

This information is also indicated by color: blue for information, yellow for warning and red for an error which needs to be corrected in order to proceed

Event code

The event code is a number that identifies the event message. Together with the event date and time each event has a unique identity.

Event title

The event title is a short description of the event.

Event category

Sequential number

The sequential number indicates the chronological order of the event; the higher the number the more recently the event occurred.

Date and time

The category is an indication of the source of the event.

Category

Common

Operational

System

Hardware

Program

Motion

I/O & Communication

User

Internal

Process

Cfg

Display

All recent events.

Events related to changes in operation or operating mode.

Events related to the current system.

Events related to controller hardware.

Events related to the running process applications and RAPID programs.

.

Events related to the movement of robots or other mechanical units

Events related to input and output signals, serial or network communication and process buses.

Custom messages that have been programed into RAPID programs.

Internal low-level controller errors for ABB service personnel.

Events related to Industrial Processes options., such as Spot, Arc and Dispense.

Errors in a configuration file.

Depending on how the system is configured, additional categories may exist.

Date and time indicate exactly when the event occurred. Along with the event code, this timestamp guarantees that each event has a unique identity.

Event description

When you select an event in the list, detailed information about it will be displayed to the right. This includes a description, and when appropritate also consequences, causes and suggested actions to solve the problem.

Continues on next page

188

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

6 Working online

6.7 Handle events

Continued

Overview

The Event Log automatically logs all controller events once it is started. By default, events are displayed in the chronological order specified by Seq Numbers.

Note

Any modifications to the list you see will never affect the event log of the controller. What you see is just a copy.

Managing events

1 In the Robot View Explorer, select a system.

2 Double-click the Events node.

To sort events

To filter events

To clear the event log

To save all events to a single log file on the computer

Click the header for the column you want to sort by. To switch between ascending and descending sorting, click the header once again.

In the Category list select the event category you want displayed.

Click Clear.

This will not affect the event log of the robot controller. It might still be impossible, however, to retrieve all events from a cleared record once again, as the oldest ones may have been erased from the controller hard disk due to lack of space. It is therefore recommended to save the record to a log file before clearing.

Check the Log to file check box.

If it remains checked, the log file will be updated with new events as they occur.

To save events of one or several categories to files on the computer

Click Save and then make your category choice. Specify the location for the log file(s) in the Browse For Folder dialog and then click OK.

If you select All when selecting categories, a log file for each event category will be created.

Retrieving controller events

To clear the list and retrieve all existing events from the robot controller:

1 Optionally, save the existing Event Log record.

2 Select whether you want the list to be updated when new events occur , or if you are only interested in viewing events that have already occurred.

To ...

say no to automatic updates when new events occur

...then...

get automatic updates when new events occur check the Auto Update check box. (Checked by default.) clear the Auto Update check box.

3 Click Get to clear the current list, fetch and display all events that are currently stored in the controller log files.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

189

This page is intentionally left blank

7 The File menu

7.1 Overview

7 The File menu

7.1 Overview

Overview

The File menu contains the options to create new station, create new robot system, connect to a controller, save station as viewer, and RobotStudio options.

The following table lists the various options available in the File menu:

Options

Save / Save As

Open

Close

Recent

New

Print

Share

Online

Help

Options

Exit

Description

Saves a station.

Opens a saved station.

Closes a station.

Displays recently accessed stations.

Creates a new station. See

New Station on page 192 .

Prints the contents of the active window.

Shares data with others.

Pack and Go on page 194

Unpack and Work on page 195

Station Viewer on page 196

Connects to a controller.

Add Controller on page 383

Imports and Exports controller.

Creates and works with robot system.

Building a new system on page 163

Import Options on page 390

Displays information on installing and licensing RobotStudio. See

Installing and Licensing RobotStudio on page 38 .

Displays information on RobotStudio Options. See

Options on page 198 .

Closes RobotStudio.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

191

7 The File menu

7.2 New Station

7.2 New Station

Creating an empty station

1 On the File menu, click New and select Empty Station from Create a new

Station.

2 In the Empty Station group, click Create. A new empty station is created.

Creating a station with Robot Controller

1 On the File menu, click New and select Station with Robot Controller.

2 In the Select Template System list, either select an appropriate template or click Browse to select one.

3 In the System group, enter a name and location, and then click Create.

Creating a station with existing Robot Controller

1 On the File menu, click New and select Station with existing Robot

Controller.

2 In the Select System Pool list, select a folder.

3 In the Systems Found list, select a system, and then click Create.

192

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

7 The File menu

7.3 Screenshot

7.3 Screenshot

Prerequisites

For optimal results, first configure the options, see

Options:General:Screenshot on page 199 .

Capturing the screen

1 On the File menu, click Print and select Screenshot.

If the image is saved to file, this is displayed in the output window.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

193

7 The File menu

7.4 Pack and Go

7.4 Pack and Go

Packing a station

1 On the File menu, click Share and select Pack & Go to open the Pack & Go

Wizard.

2 On the Welcome to the Pack & Go Wizard page, click Next.

3 On the Destination page, click Browse and specifiy the destination directory of the package. Click Next.

4 On the Libraries page, select one of the three options. Click Next.

5 On the Systems page, select Include backups of all robot systems checkbox. Optionally, select Include a media pool for additional options checkbox. Click Next.

6 On the Ready to pack page, review the information and then click Finish.

7 On the Pack & Go finished page, review the results and then click Close.

194

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

7 The File menu

7.5 Unpack and Work

7.5 Unpack and Work

Unpacking a station

1 On the File menu, click Unpack & Work to open the Unpack & Work Wizard.

2 On the Welcome to the Unpack & Work Wizard page, click Next.

3 On the Select package page, click Browse and Select the Pack & Go file

to unpack and Select the directory where the files will be unpacked. Click

Next.

4 On the Controller Systems page, select the RobotWare version and click

Browse to select the path to the Media Pool. Optionally, select the check box to automatically restore backup. Click Next.

5 On the Ready to unpack page, review the information and then click Finish.

6 On the Unpack & Work finished page, review the results and then click

Close.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

195

7 The File menu

7.6 Station Viewer

7.6 Station Viewer

Overview

The Station Viewer can playback a station in 3D on computers that do not have

RobotStudio installed. It packages the station file together with files needed to view the station in 3D. It can also play recorded simulations.

Prerequisites

• Works on Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista, and Windows 7

• .NET Framework 2.0 must be installed on the playback computer

Creating and loading a Station Viewer

1 To create a Station Viewer, on the File menu, click Share and select Save

Station as Viewer

2 Specify a file name and save as .exe file.

NOTE! Select the option Show comments on startup and add text in the box to view the comment when the Station Viewer is started.

NOTE! To save the simulation as Station Viewer,

• On the Simulation Control group, click Play and select Record to

Viewer. See

Running a simulation on page 332 .

3 To load a Station Viewer, double-click the package (.exe) file on the target computer.

The results are displayed in the Output window and the embedded station file is automatically loaded and presented in a 3D view.

NOTE! You can open any station created in RobotStudio 5.12 with the Station

Viewer. You can pan, rotate, and navigate in the graphical viewer.

Configuring user settings of a Station Viewer

To configure the user settings of a Station Viewer, on the File menu, click Options.

Command Buttons

Apply

Reset

Default

Click this button to save all options in the current page.

Click this button to reset to the settings you had before this session all values that you have changed on the current page.

Click this button to reset to their default values all settings on the current page.

Options:General:Appearance

Select application language

Select the language to be used.

NOTE! The default language is the same as that of the target user's operating system if available, otherwise it is English.

Select color theme

Select the color to be used.

Continues on next page

196

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Simulation

7 The File menu

7.6 Station Viewer

Continued

Options:General:Graphics

Select API to use for 3D graphics

Background color

Select the low-level API to be used for rendering 3D graphics.The default value is Direct3D, but OpenGL might be faster or stabler.

NOTE! No need to restart when changing this option.

Select the color from the color theme, or from the color stored in the stations.

When you run a simulation, the movements and visibility of objects are recorded.

This recording is optionally included in the Station Viewer.

Simulation control buttons are enabled when the Station Viewer contains a recorded simulation.

Following are the Simulation control buttons:

Play

Stop

Reset

Run mode

Process time

Starts or resumes simulation playback

Stops simulation playback

Resets all objects to their initial state and process time display to zero

Select to run the simulation once or continuously

Displays the current simulation time

NOTE! If the simulation executes a VSTA macro, it is not reflected when playing back the simulation in the Station Viewer.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

197

7 The File menu

7.7 Options

7.7 Options

Common buttons

Apply

Reset

Default

Click this button to save all options in the current page.

Click this button to reset to the settings you had before this session all values that you have changed on the current page.

Click this button to reset to their default values all settings on the current page.

Options:General:Appearance

Select application language

Select color theme

Display Position Edit boxes with

Red/Green/Blue background

Select the language to be used.

Select the color to be used.

Select the check box if you want to display the position boxes in the modify dialog boxes with colored background. Default value: selected.

Options:General:Licensing

View installed license keys

Click to view the license keys per feature, version, type, expiration date and status.

Activation Wizard

Click to activate RobotStudio license.

RobotStudio user experience program

• I want to help improve

RobotStudio

• I do not want to participate right now

Select this option to participate in the user experience report.

NOTE!

• For RobotStudio Basic users, it is mandatory to participate in the user experience report.

• For RobotStudio Premium users, you can choose to participate in the user experience report .

Options:General:Units

Quantity

Unit

Display decimals

Edit decimals

Select the quantity for which you want to change the units.

Select the unit for the quantity.

Enter the number of decimals that you want to be displayed.

Enter the number of decimals that you want when modifying.

Options:General:Advanced

Enable Windows Error

Reporting

Select this check box to send error data directly to a Microsoft server to be downloaded and analyzed by ABB support.

Available only on Windows XP or later.

Number of undo/redo steps

The number of operations that can be undone or redone.

Lowering this value can decrease memory usage.

Show acknowledge dialog box when deleting objects

Warns when deleting objects.

Show acknowledge dialog box when deleting targets and corresponding move instructions

Warns when deleting targets and move instructions.

Continues on next page

198

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

7 The File menu

7.7 Options

Continued

Warn about running Virtual Controller processes on startup

Warns of orphaned VC processes.

Options:General:Files & Folders

User Project Folder

...

To browse for your project folder, click the browse button.

Automatically create document subfolders

Select this check box to enable the creation of individual subfolders for document types.

Enable Autosave

Enter the path to your project folder. This will be the folder displayed in the open and save dialog boxes in RobotStudio.

Select the check box to automatically save the station with defined intervals. Default value: cleared

Interval

Specify the interval between the savings when using Autosave in this box.

Clear Recent Stations and

Controllers

Clears the list of recently accessed stations and controllers

Document Locations

Launches the Document Locations dialog box. For more information, see

The Document Manager window on page 60

.

Options:General:Screenshot

Entire application window

Select this option to capture the entire application.

Active document window

Select this option to capture the active document window, typically the graphics window.

Copy to clipboard

Select this check box to save the captured image to the system clipboard.

Save to file

Location

...

File name

The file suffix list

Select this check box to save the captured image to file.

Specify the location of the image file. The default location is the "My Pictures" system folder.

Browse for the location.

Specify the name of the image file. The default name is "Robot-

Studio" to which is added a date.

Select the desired file format. The default format is JPG.

Options:General:Screen Recorder

Framerate

Same as window

Limit resolution

Maximum width

Maximum height

Output file format

Video compression

Specify the framerate in frames per second.

Select this option to use the same resolution as in the graphics window.

Select this option to scale down the resolution.

Specify the maximum width in pixels.

Specify the maximum height in pixels.

Select the output file format. The default format is AVI.

NOTE! You can also save the output format as WMV and MP4.

Select the video compression format.

NOTE! DivX format is not supported.

Start recording after

Stop recording after

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Select this option to start recording after the specified time.

Select this option to stop recording after the specified time.

Continues on next page

199

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

7 The File menu

7.7 Options

Continued

Options:Robotics:Editor

Wrap long lines

Text styles

Text color

Select this check box if you want to wrap long lines.

Specify the appearance of the various text classes.

Specifies the text color of the editor.

Options:Robotics:Rapid

Show dialog when warning for globally defined workobjects

Select this check box if you want RobotStudio to display a warning when there are workobjects with the same name that have been declared as in other tasks. Default value: selected.

Show synchronize dialog box after loading program

/module

Select this check box if you want the synchronize dialog box to be displayed when you have loaded a program or a module.

Default value: selected.

Show notification that default data is used

Select this check box if you want to be notified that wobj0 and/or tool0 is active and will be used in the current action.

Default value: selected.

Show synchronization notification

Default value: selected.

Set as active when creating tooldata

Select this check box if you want newly created tooldata to be set as active. Default value: selected.

Set as active when creating workobjects

Select this check box if you want newly created workobjects to be set as active. Default value: selected.

Options:Robotics:Synchronization

Use default synchronization locations

Converting data, such as target to Workobject, shall use the default behavior for synchronization locations. Default value: selected.

Show default synchronization locations notification

Notifies of the behavior above. Default value: selected.

Declaration default locations

Specify the locations for corresponding objects when synchronizing to the VC.

Options:Robotics:Mechanism

Approach Vector

Travel Vector

Enable configuration check for jump to target/move instruction

Select the approach vector. Default value: Z.

Select the travel vector. Default value: X.

Select this check box if you want to enable the configuration check configurations when jumping to target or move instructions. When selected and a target does not have a validated configuration assigned, you will be asked to set one. When cleared, the configuration closest to the current one is used.

Default value: selected.

Options:Robotics:Virtual Controller

Always on top

Enable transparency

Select this check box if you want to have the virtual FlexPendant always on top. Default value: selected.

Select this check box if you want parts of the virtual FlexPendant to be transparent. Default value: selected.

Continues on next page

200

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

7 The File menu

7.7 Options

Continued

Logging

Show virtual Operator

Window

When the controller is warm started,

• Select this check box to log the console output to "console.log" in the controller directory

• Select this check box to log the console ouput to a console window

Select this check box to enable the Operator window feature.

Default value: Disabled.

Options:Online:Authentication

Recent Users

Remove/Remove All

Enable Automatic Logoff

Timeout

Lists the recent users.

Click these buttons to remove one or all recent users, respectively.

Select the check box if you want to log off automatically.

Determines the length of the session before being automatically logged off.

Options:Online:Online Monitor

Update Rate (s)

Singularities

Updates the rate.

Revolute Joint Limits Sets the revolution limit for joints.

Linear Joint Limits Sets the linear limit for joints.

Sets the singularities.

Options:Graphics:Renderer

Select API to use for 3D graphics

Select the low-level API to be used for rendering 3D graphics.

The default value is OpenGL, but Direct3D might be faster or stabler.

Options:Graphics:Appearance

Background color

Gradient

Show floor

Color

Transparent

Show UCS Grid

Grid Space X

Grid Space Y

Click the colored rectangle to change the background color.

Select the check box if you want to display the background color in gradient style. Default value: cleared.

Select the check box if you want the floor (at z=0) to be displayed. Change the floor color by clicking the colored rectangle.

Default values: selected.

Click the colored rectangle to change the color of the floor.

Select the check box if you want the floor to be transparent.

Default values: selected.

Select the check box if you want the UCS grid to be displayed.

Default value: selected.

Change the UCS grid space in the X coordinate direction by entering the requested value in the box. Default value: 1000 mm (or equivalent in other units).

Change the UCS grid space in the Y coordinate direction by entering the requested value in the box. Default value: 1000 mm (or equivalent in other units).

Show coordinate system

Select the check box if you want the coordinate systems to be displayed. Default value: selected.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

201

7 The File menu

7.7 Options

Continued

Options:Graphics:Performance

Detail level

Select if the detail level is to be Auto, Fine, Medium or Coarse.

Default value: Auto.

Cull back-facing triangles

Select the check box if you want to ignore the back-facing triangles. Default value: selected.

Culling back-facing triangles improves the graphics performance but may give unexpected display if surfaces in models are not faced correctly.

Enable twosided lighting

Cull objects smaller than

Select the check box if you want to enable two-sided lighting.

Default value: cleared.

Select the size in pixels under which objects will be disregarded. Default value: 2 pixels.

Store model data on graphics card (recommended)

Select the check box if you want to store the model data on a graphics card. Default value: cleared.

Storing model data on a graphics card improves graphics performance, but causes stability problems for some hardware combinations.

The settings you make here are generic for all objects in RobotStudio. With the

Graphic Appareance dialog box you can, however, override some of these settings for single objects.

Options:Graphics:Behavior

Navigation sensitivity

Selection radius (pixels)

Selection highlight

Select the navigation sensitivity when using the mouse movements or navigation buttons by clicking the bar and dragging it into position. Default value: 1.

Change the selection radius (that is, how close the mouse cursor click must be to an item to be selected) by entering the requested pixel value in the box. Default value: 5.

Set if the selected object shall be distinguished in the Graphics window by a color, by an outline or not at all. Default value: color.

Highlight color

Click the colored rectangle to change the highlight color.

Activate selection preview

Select the check box to enable temporarily highlighting of items that may be selected when the mouse cursor passes over them.

Default value: selected.

Show local coordinate system for selected objects

Select the check box to show the local coordinate system for the selected objects. Default value: selected.

Options:Graphics:Geometry

Normal Tolerance

Surface Tolerance

Curve Tolerance

Enter the maximum deviation of surface normals in the Fine,

Medium or Coarse boxes. Default values (in deg): Fine: 10,

Medium: 22.5, Coarse: 45 (or equivalent in other units).

Enter the maximum spatial deviation of surfaces in the Fine,

Medium or Coarse boxes. Default values (in deg): Fine: 2,

Medium: 10, Coarse: 50 (or equivalent in other units).

Enter the maximum spatial deviation of curves in the Fine,

Medium or Coarse boxes. Default values (in deg): Fine: 0.2,

Medium: 1, Coarse: 5 (or equivalent in other units).

Continues on next page

202

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

7 The File menu

7.7 Options

Continued

Options:Simulation:Collision

Perform collision detection

Stop simulation at collision

Log collisions to Output window

Log collisions to file:

Select this check box if you want the collisions to be logged to the output window. Default value: selected.

Select this check box if you want to log the collisions to a file.

Browse for the file to log in by clicking the browse button. Default value: cleared.

Enable fast collision detection

Select this check box to enhance the performance by detecting collisions between geometrical bounding boxes instead of geometrical triangles. This might result in falsely reported collisions, since the triangles are the true geometry and the bounding boxes always are larger. All true collisions will, however, be reported. The larger the object, the greater the number of false collisions that are likely to be detected.

View

Click this button to open the log file specified in the file box in

Notepad.

Clear

...

Select if collision detection is to be performed during simulation or always. Default value: During simulation.

Select this check box if you want the simulation to stop at a collision. Default value: cleared.

Click this button to delete the log file specified in the file box.

Click this button to browse for the file in which you want to log the collisions.

Options:Simulation:Virtual Time

Virtual Time mode- Free run

This option makes RobotStudio always use the free run mode.

NOTE! Simulations created using the Smart Component are now supported with VC in this mode. As a result, FlexPendant and ScreenMaker applications can be executed on the Flex-

Pendant together with Smart Component simulations.

Virtual Time mode - Time

Slice

This option makes RobotStudio always use the time slice mode.

Options:Simulation:Accuracy

Simulation speed

As fast as possible

Simulation timestep

Sets the simulation speed relative to real time. You can define the simulation speed to a maximum of 200%

Select this check box to run the simulation as fast as possible.

NOTE! When you select this option, the simulation speed slider is disabled.

Specifies the simulation timestep.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

203

This page is intentionally left blank

8 The Home Tab

8.1 Overview

8 The Home Tab

8.1 Overview

The Home tab

The Home tab contains the controls required for building stations, creating systems, programming paths and placing items.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

205

8 The Home Tab

8.2 ABB Library

8.2 ABB Library

About this button

With this button, you can choose robots, positioners and tracks from their respective galleries.

206

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.3 Import Library

8.3 Import Library

About this button

With this button, you can import equipment, geometries, positioners, robots, tools and training objects to your station libraries.

Importing a library

Use this procedure for importing library files to a station:

1 On the Home menu, click Import Library and select one of the following controls:

• Equipment

• User Library

• Documents

• Locations

• Browse for Library

Note

You can also import component xml files (*.rsxml) to your station.

2 Click Equipment to import predefined ABB mechanism libraries.

3 Click User Library to select the user defined libraries.

4 Click Documents to open the Document Manager window. See .

The

Document Manager window on page 60

5 Click Locations to open the Document Locations window. See

Document

Locations window on page 65

.

6 Click Browse for Library to select the saved library files.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

207

8 The Home Tab

8.4.1 Robot System

8.4 Robot System

8.4.1 Robot System

About this button

With the Robot System button, you can either create a system from layout or template, choose an existing system, or select a system from a robot gallery and setup a conveyor tracking mechanism.

Creating a system from layout

1 Click From Layout to bring up the first page of the wizard.

2 In the Name box, enter the name of the system.

3 In the Location box, enter the path to the folder where the system will be stored. Alternatively, click Browse and browse to the folder.

4 In the Media Pool box, enter the path to the media pool. Alternatively, click

Browse and browse to the folder.

5 In the RobotWare Version list, select the version of RobotWare you want to use.

6 Click Next.

7 In the Mechanisms box, select the mechanisms that you want to include in the system.

8 Click Next.

The wizard now proposes a mapping of the mechanisms to a specific motion task, in accordance with the following rules:

• Only one TCP robot is allowed per task.

• Up to six motion tasks may be added, but only four TCP robots can be used, and they must be assigned to the first four tasks.

• The number of tasks may not exceed the number of mechanisms.

• If the system contains one TCP robot and one external axis, they will be assigned to the same task. It is, however, possible to add a new task and assign the external axis to it.

• If the system contains more than one TCP robot, any external axes will be assigned to a separate task. It is, however, possible to move them to other tasks.

• The number of external axes in a task is limited by the number of available drive modules in the cabinet (one for large robots, two for medium, three for small).

NOTE! If only one mechanism was selected in the previous page, this page will not be shown.

Tasks can be added and removed using the respective buttons; mechanisms can be moved up or down using the respective arrows. To map the mechanisms to tasks, follow this step:

9 Optionally, make any edits in the mapping, and then click Next.

Continues on next page

208

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.4.1 Robot System

Continued

The System Option page appears.

10 On the System Option page, you have the option to align Task Frame(s) with the corresponding Base Frame(s).

• For single robot system, select the checkbox to align task frame with base frame:

• For MultiMove Independent system, select the check box to align task frame with base frame for each robot.

• For MultiMove Coordinated system, select the robot from the drop down list and select the check box to align task frame with base frame for the selected robot.

11 Verify the summary and then click Finish.

If the system contains more than one robot, the number of tasks and the baseframe positions of the mechanism should be verified in the System

Configuration window.

Adding a template system

1 Click From Template to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the Select Template System list, either select an appropriate template or click Browse and browse to one.

3 In the Libraries group, select whether to import libraries or to use the existing station libraries.

4 In the System group, enter a name and location, and then click OK.

Adding an existing system

1 Click Existing to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the Select System Pool list, select a folder.

3 In the Systems Found list, select a system.

4 In the Libraries group, select whether to import libraries or to use the existing station libraries.

5 Click OK.

Selecting a system from a robot gallery

1 Click Quick System to bring up a gallery, and then click the appropriate robot.

Setting up a conveyor

1 Click Setup.

2 In the Part Sequence tab, select Part from Available Parts.

The right arrow button is enabled.

3 Click right arrow button to move the Part to Parts moved by Conveyor list.

4 Click up and down arrow buttons to move the selected part in Parts moved

by Conveyor list.

5 In the Part Tracking tab, select Part from Parts moved by Conveyor list.

6 Select CNV1 from the Mechanical Unit list.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

209

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

8 The Home Tab

8.4.1 Robot System

Continued

7 Select a workobject from the Workobject list.

8 Click Add. The workobject appears in the list.

NOTE! If the same workpiece is tracked by more than one robot, add a pair of workobject for each robot that tracks the workpiece. This procedure has to be repeated for each workpiece that should be tracked.

9 Click OK.

10 Activate the Conveyor Mechanical Unit (CNV1). See

Activate Mechanical

Units on page 331

Removing objects from conveyor

1 Click Setup.

The Conveyor Setup dialog box appears.

2 In the Part Sequence tab, select Part from the Parts moved by Conveyor list

The left arrow button is anabled.

3 Click left arrow to remove the part from the Parts moved by Conveyor list to Available Parts list.

210

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.4.2 External Axis Wizard

8.4.2 External Axis Wizard

Overview

The ABB IRC5 controller controls standard ABB motor units and gear units using the controller system configuration files that ABB supplies and maintains for such standard ABB units. These factory shipped configuration files are applicable to units used in isolation. ABB also provides controller system configuration files for certain standard external equipment such as workpiece positioners and robot tracks.

Prerequisites

• Configure a running system with the required extra drives and drive modules.

You can use the System Builder’s New Controller System Wizard, for building the system. For more information, see

Building a new system on page 163

.

• Build the station and ensure that all mechanisms to be configured are modeled and inserted in the station layout at the correct locations. For information about creating a new station, see

Workflow for building a new station on page 73 .

• Use the Mechanism Modeling functionality to define custom kinematic mechanisms. Define the geometry and kinematics of the external axis device.

For more information, see

Create Mechanism on page 310 .

Using the External Axis Wizard

1 From the Robot System menu, click External Axis Wizard.

The first page of the wizard appears. It lists the the previously defined mechanisms (including robots) in the Mechanisms box.

2 From the Mechanisms box, select the mechanisms to include in the system.

Note

When adding mechanisms ensure that the controller frame and the mechanism frame are equal. If not, a warning dialog Frames are not equal appears. The following actions are available:

Update Mechanism - Click this to assign the mechanism's frame values to the controller’s frame for correct calculation and configuration.

Add Locked Axis - Click this to add an additional locked axis. This is a dummy axis with frame definition. This dummy axis is added to the controller configuration and also to the RobotStudio mechanism. You cannot jog this additional axis, but it can be saved in the configuration for future use.

Ignore - Click this to proceed without making any changes. You can save the configuration but the simulation in RobotStudio will not be correct. This option is not recommended.

3 Click Next.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

211

8 The Home Tab

8.4.2 External Axis Wizard

Continued

The mechanisms along with their joints are listed.

4 To connect and configure a motor unit or gear unit for every joint, select the joint.

The following configuration details and their default values are displayed:

• Mechanical Unit

• Motor Unit

• Drive Unit

• Link

• Logical Axis

• Board

• Transmission

• Node

Note

Changing these default configuration values is not recommended.

For more information about connecting and configuring the motor units or gear units, see

Configuring Gear Units on page 212

and

Configuring Motor Units on page 213 .

5 To use Activation Relay, select Activation Relay.

For more information about using Activation Relay, see the System

Parameters manual.

6 Click Next.

The Finish page comes up.

7 To save the configuration to a file, click Save.

The configured kinematics of external axis devices are saved to a configuration file.

8 To load the saved configuration to the system on exiting from the wizard, select the Load Configuration to System check box.

9 Click Finish to exit the wizard.

Use the saved configuration files to assemble a complete controller system configuration according to specification. When a system is configured, the MOC.cfg

file with a subset for the external equipment is saved and a virtual controller is started for verification.

Configuring Gear Units

Begin by allocating the controller connections for gear units (MTD or MID) included in the selection

There can be 0-3 gear units connected to a SMB box.

In RobotStudio each gear unit is represented as a separate mechanism. If several gear units are attached in series the kinematics of this new mechanism is determined by the attachments between the gear units.

Continues on next page

212

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.4.2 External Axis Wizard

Continued

The base frame will correspond to the calibration frame of the first mechanism in the chain. The kinematics will then be calculated as the Denavit Hartenberg parameters between the following axes in the chain. The following combinations are possible:

• 1 gear unit will be configured as a Single in the controller.

• 2 or 3 gear units in series will be configured as a Robot in the controller.

Configuring Motor Units

After gear units have been configured, next examine custom mechanisms.

If one or more custom mechanisms are included in the selection, the type of motor unit driving each joint has to be specified. There can be a maximum of 3 motor units driving custom mechanisms, connected to the controller. How the motor units are connected depends on the number of gear units in the previous step.

For each joint in custom mechanisms the size of the motor unit and the gear ratio has to be decided. The default is maximum size (MU400) and gear ratio

-transm_joint 50.

The controller kinematics configuration follows the scheme for gear units:

• 1 motor unit will be configured as a Single in the controller.

• 2 or 3 motor units in series will be configured as a Robot in the controller.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

213

8 The Home Tab

8.5 Import Geometry

8.5 Import Geometry

Importing geometry

1 On the Home menu, click Import Geometry and select one of the following controls:

• User Geometry

• Browse for Geometry

2 Click User Geometry to select the user defined geomtery.

3 Click Browse for Geometry to browse to the folder where the geometry is located.

For predefined geometries, click the Geometry icon to the left in the dialog box.

4 Select the required geometry and click Open.

If you want the geometry to move with another object, attach it to the requested object, see

Attach to on page 424

.

To modify the detail level for import of geometries, see

Options on page 198 .

214

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.6.1 Frame

8.6 Frame

8.6.1 Frame

Creating a frame

1 Click Frame.

2 In the dialog box, specify the positions for the frame.

Reference

Frame Position

Frame Orientation

Set as UCS

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the frame position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the

Frame Position boxes.

Specify the coordinates for the frame orientation.

Select this check box to set the created frame as the user coordinate system.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

215

8 The Home Tab

8.6.2 Frame from Three Points

8.6.2 Frame from Three Points

Creating a frame from three points

1 Click Frame from Three points to bring up a dialog box.

2 Decide how you want to specify the frame:

To specify the frame using Select

X, Y and Z coordinates, a point on the X axis and a point in the X-Y plane

Position

two points on the X axis and one point on the Y axis

Three Point

3 If you select Position:

• Enter the Position for the object.

• Enter the Point on X axis for the object.

• Enter the Point on X-Y plane for the object.

• Click Create.

4 If you select Three Point:

• Enter the First Point on X axis for the object. This is the point closest to the frame’s origin.

• Enter the Second Point on X axis for the object. This is the point further away in the positive X direction.

• Enter the Point on Y axis for the object.

• Click Create.

The Create Frame From Three Points dialog box

Position

Frame Position

Point on X axis

Point on X-Y plane

Three Point

First Point on X axis

Second Point on X axis

Point on Y axis

Select this option if you want to create the frame by using a position and two points.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the frame position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Frame

Position boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point on

X axis boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point on

X-Y plane boxes.

Select this option if you want to create the frame by using three points.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the First Point

on X axis boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Second

Point on X axis boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point on

Y axis boxes.

Continues on next page

216

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Set as UCS

8 The Home Tab

8.6.2 Frame from Three Points

Continued

Select this check box to set the created frame as the user coordinate system.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

217

8 The Home Tab

8.7 Workobject

8.7 Workobject

Creating a workobject

1 Click Workobject to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the Misc Data group, enter the values for the new workobject.

3 In the User Frame group, do one of the following:

• Set the position of the user frame by entering values for the Position

x, y, z and the Rotation rx, ry, rz for the workobject by clicking in the

Values box.

• Select the user frame by using the Frame by points dialog box.

4 In the Object Frame group you can reposition the object frame relative to the user frame by doing any of the following:

• Set the position of the object frame by selecting values for Position x,

y, z by clicking in the Values box.

• For the Rotation rx, ry, rz, select RPY (Euler XYX) or Quaternion, and enter the rotation values in the Values dialog box.

• Select the object frame by using the Frame by points dialog box.

5 In the Sync Properties group, enter the values for the new workobject.

6 Click Create. The workobject will be created and displayed under the Targets node under the robot node in the Paths&Targets browser.

The Create Workobject dialog box

Name

Specify the name of the workobject.

Robot holds workobject

Select whether the workobject is to be held by the robot. If you select True, the robot will hold the workobject. The tool can then either be stationary or held by another robot.

Moved by mechanical unit

Select the mechanical unit that moves the workobject. This option is applicable only if Programmed is set to False.

Programmed

Position x, y, z

Rotation rx, ry, rz

Frame by points

Select True if the workobject is to use a fixed coordinate system, and False if a movable (that is, external axes) will be used.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Position boxes.

Specify the rotation of the workobject in the UCS.

Specify the frame position of the user frame.

Position x, y, z

Rotation rx, ry, rz

Frame by points

Storage type

Module

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Position boxes.

Specify the rotation of the workobject.

Specify the frame position of the object frame.

Select PERS or TASK PERS. Select the Storage TypeTASK

PERS if you intend to use the workobject in multimove mode.

Select the module in which to declare the workobject.

218

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.8 Tooldata

8.8 Tooldata

Creating tooldata

1 In the Layout browser, make sure the robot in which to create the tooldata is set as the active task.

2 Click Tooldata to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the Misc Data group:

• Enter the Name of the tool.

• Select whether the tool is to be held by the robot in the Robot holds

tool list.

4 In the Tool Frame group:

• Define the Position x, y, z of the tool.

• Enter the Rotation rx, ry, rz of the tool.

5 In the Load Data group:

• Enter the Weight of the tool.

• Enter the Center of gravity of the tool.

• Enter the Inertia of the tool.

6 In the Sync Properties group:

• In the Storage type list, select PERS or TASK PERS. Select TASK

PERS if you intend to use the tooldata in MultiMove mode.

• In the Module list, select the module in which to declare the tooldata.

7 Click Create. The tooldata appears as a coordinate system in the graphics window.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

219

8 The Home Tab

8.9.1 Teach Target

8.9 Target

8.9.1 Teach Target

Teaching a target

To teach a target, follow these steps:

1 In the Layout browser, select the workobject and tool for which you want to teach the target.

2 Jog the robot to the preferred position.

NOTE: To jog a robot linearly, its VC must be running.

3 Click Teach Target.

4 A new target will be created in the browser, under the active workobject node.

In the graphics window a coordinate system will be created at the TCP position. The configuration of the robot at the target will be saved.

220

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.9.2 Create Target

8.9.2 Create Target

Creating a target

1 In the Layout browser, select the workobject in which you want to create the target.

2 Click Create Target to bring up a dialog box.

3 Select the Reference coordinate system you want to use to position the target:

If you want to position the target Select

absolute in the world coordinate system of the station

World

Work Object

relative to the position of the active workobject in a user-defined coordinate system

UCS

4 In the Points box, click Add New and then click the desired position in the graphics window to set the position of the target. You can also enter the values in the Coordinates boxes and click Add.

5 Enter the Orientation for the target. A preliminary cross will be shown in the graphics window at the selected position. Adjust the position, if necessary.

To create the target, click Create.

6 If you want to change the workobject for which the target is to be created, expand the Create Target dialog box by clicking the More button. In the

WorkObject list, select the workobject in which you want to create the target.

7 If you want to change the target name from the default name, expand the

Create Target dialog box by clicking the More button and entering the new name in the Target name box.

8 Click Create. The target will appear in the browser and in the graphics window.

NOTE: The created target will not get any configuration for the robot axes.

To add the configuration values to the target, use either ModPos or the

Configurations dialog box.

NOTE: If using external axes, the position of all activated external axes will be stored in the target.

The Create Target dialog box

Reference

Position

Orientation

Add

Modify

Select the reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the position in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Position boxes.

Specify the orientation of the target.

Click this button to add a point and its coordinates to the Points list.

Click this button to modify an already defined point, after you have selected it in the Points list and entered new values.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

221

8 The Home Tab

8.9.2 Create Target

Continued

Points

More/Less

Target name

Workobject

The target points. To add more points, click Add New, click the desired point in the graphics window, and then click Add.

Click this button to expand or collapse parts of the create target dialog box.

Here you can change the name of the target you are creating.

It is visible only when the create target dialog box is expanded.

Here you can change the workobject in which the target is to be created. It is visible only when the create target dialog box is expanded.

222

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.9.3 Create Jointtarget

8.9.3 Create Jointtarget

Creating a jointtarget

1 Click Create Jointtarget to bring up a dialog box.

2 If you want to change the default name of the jointtarget, enter the new name in the Name box.

3 In the Axes Values group, do as follows:

• For the Robot axes, click the Values box and then click the down arrow.

The Joint Values dialog box will be displayed. Enter the joint values in the boxes and click Accept.

• For the Joint axes, click the Values box and then click the down arrow.

The Joint Values dialog box will be displayed. Enter the joint values in the boxes and click Accept.

4 Click Create. The jointtarget will appear in the browser and in the graphics window.

The Create Jointtarget dialog box

Name

Robot axes

External axes

Storage Type

Module

Specify the name of the jointtarget.

Click the Values list, enter the values in the Joint values dialog box and click Accept.

Click the Values list, enter the values in the Joint values dialog box and click Accept.

Select the Storage TypeTASK PERS if you intend to use the jointtarget in multimove mode.

Select the module in which you want to declare the jointtarget.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

223

8 The Home Tab

8.9.4 Create Targets on Edge

8.9.4 Create Targets on Edge

Overview

Targets on Edge creates targets and move instructions along the edges of the geometric surface by selecting target points in the graphics window. Each point on a geometric edge has certain properties that can be used to position robot targets relative to the edge.

Creating targets on edge

1 On the Home tab, click Target and select Create Targets on Edge.

The Targets on Edge dialog box appears.

Note

The selection mode in graphics window is automatically set to Surface, and the snap mode is set to Edge.

2 Click on the surface of the body or part to create target points.

The closest point on the adjacent edge is calculated and added to the list box on as target points Point 1, Point 2 ....

Note

When an edge is shared between two surfaces, the normal and tangent directions depend on the surface selected.

3 Use the following variables to specify how a target is related to a point on the edge.

Select...

Vertical offset

Lateral offset to...

specify the distance from the edge to the target in the surface normal direction.

specify the distance from the edge to the target perpendicular to the edge tangent.

Approach angle

specify the angle between the (inverse) surface normal and the approach vector of the target.

Reverse travel direction

specify if the travel vector of the target is parallel or inversely parallel to the edge tangent.

Note

For each target point, a preview of the approach and travel vectors are displayed as arrows and as a sphere representing the point on the edge in the graphics window. The preview of the arrows are updated dynamically once the variables are modified.

4 Click Remove to remove the target points from the list box.

Continues on next page

224

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.9.4 Create Targets on Edge

Continued

5 Click More to expand the Create Targets on Edge dialog box and to choose the following advanced options:

Use...

Target name

Task

Workobject to..

change the target name from the default name to a new user defined name select the task for which to add targets.

By deafult, active task in the station is selected.

select the workobject for which you want to create the targets on edge

Insert Move Instructions in

create Move instructions in addition to targets, which will be added to the selected path procedure.

The active process definition and process template will be used.

6 Click Create.

The target points and Move instructions (if any) are created and are displayed in the Output window and graphics window.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

225

8 The Home Tab

8.10 Empty Path

8.10 Empty Path

Creating an empty path

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select the folder in which you want to create the path.

2 Click Empty Path.

3 To set the correct motion properties for the targets, select the active process in the Change Active Process box in the Elements toolbar.

4 NOTE: If the active template is set to MoveAbsJoint:

• A target that is dragged into a path will be converted into a jointtarget

(recognized by a different icon on in the browser).

• Jointtargets and their instructions can only use wobj0 and tool0.

• One target can not be used as different types, for example, MoveJoint, but must be deleted and re-created.

• When the target has been synchronized with the virtual controller, the jointtarget values will be calculated and inserted in the RAPID program.

226

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.11 AutoPath

8.11 AutoPath

Overview

AutoPath helps in generating accurate paths (linear and circular) based on CAD geometry.

Prerequisites

You need to have a geometric object with edges, curves, or both.

Creating autopath

Use this procedure to generate an autopath:

1 In the Home tab, click Path and select AutoPath.

The AutoPath dialog box appears.

2 Select the edge or curve of the geometric object for which you want to create an autopath.

The selection is listed as edges between <Start> and <End> in the graphic window.

Note

• If in a geometric object, you select curve (instead of an edge), then all the points that results in the selected curve are added as edges to the list in the graphic window.

• Ensure you always select continuous edges.

3 Click Remove to delete the recently added edge from the graphic window.

Note

To change the order of the selected edges, select Reverse checkbox.

4 You can set the following Approximation Parameters:

Select or enter values in

MaxDist(mm)

MinDist(mm)

ChordDev(mm)

MaxRadius(mm)

Linear

Circular

Constant

to

Set the maximum distance between generated points.

Set the minimum distance between the generated points. That is, points closer than the minimum distance are filtered.

Set the maximum deviation from the geometric description allowed for the generated points.

Determines how large a circle radius has to be before considering the circumference as a line. That is, a line can be considered as a circle with infinite radius.

generate a linear move instruction for each target.

generate circular move instructions where the selected edges describe circular segments.

generate points with a constant, Max Dist, distance.

5 Click Create to generate a new autopath.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

227

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

8 The Home Tab

8.11 AutoPath

Continued

A new path is created and move instructions are inserted for the generated targets as set in the Approximation parameters.

Note

The targets are created in the active workobject.

6 Click Close.

228

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.12 MultiMove

8.12 MultiMove

Overview

For browsing between the pages of the MultiMove window, click the tabs in the navigation pane. By default the tabs are arranged in an order that corresponds to the typical workflow:

Setup tab

System Config

Select System

System

Enable

Type

Here you select the system that contains the robots to program.

Each robot in the system is presented in its own row in this grid. In the columns you make the settings as described below.

Select this check box to use the robot in the MultiMove program.

Specify if the robot holds the tool or the work piece.

Displays the name of the robot.

Path Config

Start Position

Robot

Update

Paths

Enable

Click this button to update the paths in the grid if any of the paths have been changed. The button turns red if a change has been detected and an update is necessary.

Each path in the station is presented in its own row in this grid. In the columns you make the settings as described below.

Select this check box for the paths to use for the program.

Order

Displays the order in which the paths will be executed. To change the order, use the lists in the path column for rearranging the rows in which the paths appear.

Sets the path to be executed here.

Path

Select Robot that other shall jump to

When creating a new start position, select a robot that the other will try to reach here.

Apply

Jumps the other robots to the new start position.

Motion Behavior tab

This is used for specifying constraints and rules for how the robots shall move relative to each other. The default setting is no particular constraints, which results in the fewest joint movements. However, changing the motion behavior might be useful for:

• Locking the orientation or position of the tool.

• Optimizing cycle time or reachability by allowing tolerances.

• Avoiding collisions or singularity by restricting joint motions.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

229

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

8 The Home Tab

8.12 MultiMove

Continued

Both Joint Influence and TCP Constraints restrict the robot’s motions. Changes in these settings might result in lower performance or situations where it is impossible to find proper solutions. The weight values for Joint Weights and TCP Constraints set how much the setting for each joint or TCP direction shall affect the robots relative to each other. It is the difference between the weight values that matters, not the absolute values. If contradicting behaviors have been set, the one with the lowest weight value will win.

Tool Tolerance, instead of restricting, enables more motions. Therefore, tolerances may improve cycle and process times and enhance the reachability of the robots.

Tolerances, too, have weight value; here is set how much the robots shall use the tolerance. A low value indicates that the tolerance will be used a lot, while a high value means that the robots will try to avoid using the tolerance.

The joint influence controls the balance of how much the robots will use their joints.

Decreasing the weight value for one axis will restrict the motion for this axis, while increasing it will promote motion on this axis relative to alternative axes.

The TCP constraints control the position and orientation of the tool. Enabling a

TCP constraint will decrease the motion of the tool and increase the motion of the work piece.

The tool tolerances control the allowed deviation between the tool and the work piece. By default, tolerances are not enabled, which means that no deviation is allowed. Enabling a tolerance, if applicable, might improve motion performance.

For example, if the tool is symmetric around its Z axis, you can enable the Rz tolerance without affecting the accuracy of the generated paths.

The tool offset sets a fixed distance between the tool and the paths.

Joint Influence

Select Robot

TCP Constraints

Joints for Robot

Axis

Influence

Active TCP

Enable

Pose

Value

Select the robot’s joints to constrain in this box.

Displays the robot’s joints and their constraint weights. Each joint is presented in its own row.

Displays which axis the constraint affects.

Specify how much the motion for the axis is constrained. 0 means a locked axis, while 100 means no constraint relative to default constraint values.

This grid displays the position and rotations of the TCP together with their constraint weights.

Select this check box to activate the constraint for this TCP pose.

Displays the TCP pose that is affected by the constraint.

Specify the pose value to constrain at.

Either type the value, or click the Pick from TCP button to use the values of the current TCP position.

Continues on next page

230

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.12 MultiMove

Continued

Influence

Tool Tolerance

Enable

Pose

Value

Influence

Tool Offset

Enable

Pose

Offset

Specify how much the motion for the

TCP value is constrained. 0 means a locked TCP at this pose, while 100 means no constraint relative to default constraint values.

Select this check box to activate the tolerance for this tool pose.

Displays the tool pose that is affected by the constraint.

Specify the pose value to apply the tolerance around.

Specify the size of the tolerance. 0 means no deviation is allowed, while

100 means all deviations are allowed.

Select this check box to activate the offset for this tool pose.

Displays the tool pose that is affected by the offset setting.

Specify the value of the offset here.

Create Paths tab

This tab is used for creating RobotStudio paths for the MultiMove robots. The created paths will accord with the motions displayed during the most recently played test simulation.

With the settings group you set up the MultiMove properties that connect the tasks for the tool robot and work piece robot to each other.

With the WP robot settings group you set up the properties for the task that will be generated for the work piece robot.

The generate path group contains the button that creates the paths.

Settings

Start ID

WP robot settings

ID step index

Sync ident prefix

Task list prefix

Path Prefix

Target Prefix

WP Workobject

Specify the first ID number for the synchronization of the instructions for the robots.

Specify the gap between the succeeding ID numbers.

Specify a prefix for the syncident variable, which connects the sync instructions in the tasks for the tool robot and the work piece robot with each other.

Specify a prefix for the tasklist variable, which identifies the tasks for the tool robot and work piece robot to synchronize.

Specify a prefix for the generated paths.

Specify a prefix for the generated targets.

Specify the work object to which the targets generated for the work piece robot shall belong.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

231

8 The Home Tab

8.12 MultiMove

Continued

WP TCP

Generate

Paths

Create paths

Specify which tool data the work piece robot shall use when reaching its targets.

Clicking this button generates paths in RobotStudio for the latest tested motions according to the settings specified.

MultiTeach tab

With this tab you teach complete synchronized move instructions for the robots in the MultiMove program.

Settings

Teach

Path Prefix

Target Prefix

Start ID

ID step index

Sync ident prefix

Task list prefix

Select type of Sync instruction

Setup

MultiTeach Information

MultiTeach

Specify a prefix for the paths to create.

Specify a prefix for the generated targets here.

Specify the first ID number for the synchronization of the instructions for the robots.

Specify the gap between the succeeding ID numbers.

Specify a prefix for the syncident variable, which connects the sync instructions in the tasks for the tool robot and the work piece robot with each other.

Specify a prefix for the tasklist variable, which identifies the tasks for the tool robot and work piece robot to synchronize.

Select the type of synchronization to use.

Coordinated implies that all move instructions are synchronized for the robots.

Semicoordinated implies that the robots work independently at some times and wait for each other at other

(like when repositioning the work piece).

For detailed information about the coordination types, see the Application manual - Multimove.

Select the robots for teaching targets.

This grid also displays the workobjects and tools that will be used for the targets.

Displays a hierarchal tree which contains the created move instructions.

The tree is organized the same way as the tree in the Layout browser.

Creates move instructions for the robots selected in the settings to their current positions. The created move instructions are immediately inserted at their correct places in the Multi-

Teach Information tree.

Continues on next page

232 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Test tab

Done

8 The Home Tab

8.12 MultiMove

Continued

Confirms the creation of the instructions.

RobotStudio’s MultiMove window has a page with commands for testing multimove programs. Its default placement is at the bottom of the MultiMove window.

The status group displays the status of the simulation, that is, whether the current settings have been tested or if errors have occurred.

In addition to the status group, information from the virtual controller is also displayed in RobotStudio’s Output window during simulation.

Play

<< < > >>

Settings

Play

Simulation speed

Stop at end

Simulate Online

Jumps the robots, respectively, to the previous and next targets in paths.

The double arrow buttons jump several targets at once, while the single arrow buttons jump one target for each click.

Click this button to move the robots along the paths.

Play also has a list box in which you can activate the following commands:

Save current position: Saves the current start position. Since the calculated motions are based on the robot start position saving the start position is useful when testing alternative solutions.

Restore saved position: Moves the robots back to the saved start positions.

Restore last closed loop posi-

tion: Moves the robots back to the list used start position.

Close loop: Finds a suitable start position based on the robots’ current positions and prepares the calculation of movements.

Calculate: Calculates and executes the movements.

Sets the speed at which the simulation is performed.

Select this check box to make the simulation stop after running the paths one time. If cleared, the simulation will continue playing over and over until it is stopped manually.

Select this check box to run the simulation as the movements are calculated.

This is useful for troubleshooting purposes, since it displays and reports targets the robot cannot reach.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

233

8 The Home Tab

8.12 MultiMove

Continued

Cancel on error

Watch Close Loop

Select this check box to stop the simulation if an error occurs. Cancel on errors is recommended to use when simulate online is used to minimize the number of error messages once the first error is identified.

Select this check box to display the search for a suitable start position in the graphics window.

Clear the check box to jump the robots to the start position when it is found.

The MultiMove configure system wizard

The MultiMove configure system wizard guides you through configuring robots and workobjects for MultiMove system. If the workobjects are not configured correctly when the MultiMove functions are started, you will be asked whether to run the wizard. You can also start it manually from the Tools page of MultiMove.

The wizard contains four pages, the information pane at the bottom indicates the current page.

Workpiece robot

Tool robots

Workobjects

Result

The workpiece robot page contains a list in which you select the robot that holds the workpiece.

Only one robot can be set up as workpiece robot. If your station has several robots that hold the workpiece, set up one of them as workpiece robot and the other as tools robots, and create paths for these robots in which they only hold the workpiece.

The tool robots page contains a list in which you select the robots that operate on the work piece.

All robots selected as tools robots will be coordinated to the workpiece robot. Any robot of the system that is selected neither as workpiece robot or tool robot will not be coordinated.

The Workobjects page contains a box for each tool robot in which you specify the workobject in which the targets for the

MultiMove paths shall be created. The wizard will attach this workobject to the workpiece robot, for enabling MutliMove.

Either type in a name for a new Workobject to create in the box, or select the Use existing WorkObject check box and then select one from the list.

The Result page displays a summary of the station configuration.

Either click Done to finish or Previous to go back and change the setup.

Note

The wizard will not help you configure the RobotWare system correctly. If the correct options are not used you will not be able to synchronize generated

MultiMove paths to the virtual controller, even if you can use the MultiMove functions in RobotStudio.

The Analyze path tool

This tool checks whether existing paths are coordinated correctly for MultiMove.

Continues on next page

234

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.12 MultiMove

Continued

The analyzer opens in a window of its own and contains three pages. The information pane at the bottom indicates the current page.

Select Paths

Enable

Analyze

Report

Task

Path

Analyze

Select to include the task in the analysis.

Displays the name of the task.

Select the path to analyze for the current task.

Click this button to start the analysis.

OK. The paths are compatible in the specified aspect.

reportok reportin

Information. The paths are not fully compatible in the specified aspect, but the robot program may still be executable.

Error. The paths are not compatible in the specified aspect, and the robot program is not executable.

reporter

The Recalculate ID tool

This is one of the tools for working manually with MultiMove programs. It sets new sync ID arguments to the move instructions in a MultiMove path. By using the tool with the same start ID and ID step index on all paths that shall be synchronized, you can be sure that the IDs match if all paths contain the same number of move instructions.

Title

Start ID

ID Step index

Displays the name of the path to recalculate IDs for.

Sets the number of the first ID in the path.

Sets the size of the step to increase the ID number for each move instruction.

Only update instructions that has ID defined

Select this check box to recalculate only those IDs for instructions that have existing IDs.

Clear this check box to also create IDs for instructions that have no IDs (for example, if you have added new move instructions that shall be coordinated).

The Only update instruc-

tions between SyncMove

On/Off check box.

Select this check box to affect only those move instructions that belong to already synchronized parts of the path.

Clear this check box to update IDs for instructions in all parts of the path.

The Convert path to MultiMove path tool

This is one of the tools for working manually with MultiMove programs. It adds sync ID arguments to all move instructions in the path and, optionally,

SyncMoveOn/Off instructions, thus preparing an ordinary path for MultiMove use.

You use the tool on one path a time, so for creating a MultiMove program, you convert one path for each robot and then create a tasklist and syncidents which you add to the Sync instructions.

Title

Displays the name of the path to recalculate IDs for.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

235

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

8 The Home Tab

8.12 MultiMove

Continued

Start ID

ID Step index

Sets the number of the first ID in the path.

Sets the size of the step to increase the ID number for each move instruction.

Add SyncMove On/Off before and after

Select this check box to add instructions that start and stop the synchronization.

The Create Tasklist tool

This is one of the tools for working manually with MultiMove programs. It creates a variable of the RAPID data type tasks

, which identifies the tasks that will be synchronized. In each S yncMoveOn or

WaitSyncTask instruction, you then specify which tasklist to use.

Tasklist name

Specifies the name of the tasklist.

Tasks that will be included

Select the check box for each task to include in the list.

The Create Syncident tool

This is one of the tools for working manually with MultiMove programs. It creates a variable of the RAPID data type

SyncIdent

, which identifies the sync instructions that shall be synchronized.

Syncident name

Specifies the name of the

SyncIdent variable to create.

Tasks that SyncIdent will be created in

Select the check box for each task to use this Syncident in.

236

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.13 Teach Instruction

8.13 Teach Instruction

Teaching a move instruction

1 In the Layout browser, make sure the settings for active robot, workobject, tool, motion type and path are appropriate for the move instruction to create.

2 Jog the robot to the desired location. If jogging the robot using the freehand mode, you can also use snap modes for snapping its TCP to objects in the station.

3 Click Teach Instruction. A move instruction is now created last in the path.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

237

8 The Home Tab

8.14 Move Instruction

8.14 Move Instruction

Creating a move instruction and a corresponding target

To create a move instruction, follow these steps:

1 Click Move Instruction to bring up a dialog box.

2 Select the Reference coordinate system for the move instruction.

3 Enter the Position to reach for the move instruction by clicking Add New in the Coordinates box and then click the required to-points in the graphics window. You can also enter the values in the Coordinates boxes and click

Add.

4 Enter the Orientation for the move instruction.

5 By clicking the More/Less button, you can expand or collapse the Create

Move Instruction dialog box. When the dialog box has been expanded, you can change the Target name and the Work object to which the target (with the move instruction) will belong.

6 Click Create to create the move instruction. The move instruction will appear under the path node as a reference to the target.

The Create Move Instruction dialog box for jointtarget movements

Name

Robot axes

External axes box

Storage Type

Module

Here you can change the name of the target you create when creating the move instruction.

Specify the joint values for the robot. Select the box and click the list to set the values.

Specify the joint values for external axes, if any exist in the station. Select the box and click the list to set the values.

Click this button to expand or collapse parts of the create move instruction dialog box.

Specify the module in which the jointtarget shall be declared.

238

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.15 Action Instruction

8.15 Action Instruction

Creating an action instruction

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select where to insert the action instruction.

To insert the action instruction

at the beginning of a path after another instruction

Select

the path the proceeding instruction

2 Right click Path and select Insert Action Instruction.

The Create Action Instruction dialog box appears.

3 From the Instruction Templates list, select the action instruction to create.

4 Optionally, modify instruction arguments in the Instruction Arguments grid.

For detailed information about the arguments for each instruction, see the

Action Instruction on page 239

.

5 Click Create.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

239

8 The Home Tab

8.16 Instruction Template Manager

8.16 Instruction Template Manager

Overview

The Instruction Template Manager is used to add support for instructions other than the default set that comes with the RobotStudio.

For example, a robot controller system with the RobotWare Dispense option has specialized move instructions related to glueing like DispL and DispC. You can manually define the instruction templates for these using the Instruction Template

Manager. The instruction templates are exported to XML format and reused later.

RobotStudio has pre-defined XML files that are imported and used for robot controller systems with the appropriate RobotWare options.These XML files has both the Move and Action instructions.

NOTE! It is recommended to use RobotStudio ArcWelding PowerPac while using

RobotWare Arc.

The instruction template supports the following Robotware options:

• Cap (Continuous Application Process)

• Disp (Dispense)

• Trigg (Fixed Position Events)

• Spot Pneumatic

• Spot Servo

• Spot Servo Equalizing

• Paint xx0600003320

Item

1

Description

Buttons for importing, exporting and validating.

Continues on next page

240

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.16 Instruction Template Manager

Continued

5

6

7

3

4

Item

2

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Description

The instruction template tree. This hierarchal tree set organizes the templates.

Templates are always the lowest level nodes. For details about specific nodes in the tree, see item 5 and below.

Brief description for editing and creating instruction templates.

The Instruction grid. All arguments and settings for the object selected in the tree are displayed here. Only white boxes are editable. Red values indicate that the values are invalid.

The Instruction templates top node. Here you can see to which task the templates belong.

The Action instructions node contains everything related to action instruction templates.

An Action instruction description node, here represented by the Set DO instruction, defines the arguments that can be set for the action instruction templates of that kind.

You can create action instruction descriptions for all action instructions known by the system running on the virtual controller.

An Action instruction template node, here represented by Default, contains instances of the action instruction descriptions, with defined values for the arguments.

The Move instructions node contains everything related to move instruction templates.

The Move instruction descriptions node contains all move instructions descriptions for the task.

If the description for an instruction is not present in the list, right-click this node to add it. You can create move instruction descriptions for all move instructions known by the system running on the virtual controller.

A Move instruction description node, here represented by the MoveAbsJ node, defines the arguments that can be set for the move instruction templates of that kind.

Unlike action instructions, instruction templates related to a certain move instruction descriptions are not stored in child nodes under the description, due to a more complex hierarchy.

The Process definitions node, which gathers all process definitions, contains sets of process templates which in turn contain instruction templates optimized for specific processes.

A Process definition node, here represented by the generic Move process, contains sets of process templates which in turn contain instruction templates optimized for specific processes.

A Process template node, here represented by the generic Default process, contains sets of move instruction templates with argument values optimized for specific processes.

A process template can hold one move instruction template for each move instruction type defined by a move instruction description.

A Move instruction template node, here represented by MoveJ, contains instances of move instruction descriptions with argument values customized for specific processes.

Importing a template

1 Click Import to bring up the Open File dialog box.

2 Select the file to import, and click OK.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

241

8 The Home Tab

8.16 Instruction Template Manager

Continued

Exporting a template

1 Select an exportable node in the tree view and click Export to bring up the

Save File dialog box.

2 Click OK.

Validating the templates

1 Select a node in the tree view and click Validate.

Any invalidity will be reflected by the icons and ToolTips of the respective node and reported in the Output window.

242

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.17.1 Task

8.17 Settings

8.17.1 Task

Selecting a Task

Select a task from the Task drop-down list. The selected task indicates active task, to which new workobjects, tooldata, target, empty path or path from curve will be added.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

243

8 The Home Tab

8.17.2 Workobject

8.17.2 Workobject

Selecting a Workobject

Select a workobject from the Workobject drop-down list. The selected workobject indicates active workobject, to which new targets and move instructions are added.

244

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.17.3 Tool

8.17.3 Tool

Selecting a Tool

Select a tool from the Tool drop-down list. The selected tool indicates active tool, to which move instructions are added.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

245

8 The Home Tab

8.18.1 Move

8.18 The Freehand Group

8.18.1 Move

Moving an item

1 In the Layout browser, select the item you want to move.

2 Click Move.

3 In the graphics window, click one of the axes and drag the item into position.

246

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.18.2 Rotate

8.18.2 Rotate

Rotating an item

1 In the Layout browser, select the item you want to rotate.

2 Click Rotate.

3 In the graphics window, click one of the rotational rings and drag the item into position.

If you press the ALT key while rotating, the item will snap 10 degrees at a time.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

247

8 The Home Tab

8.18.3 Jog Joint

8.18.3 Jog Joint

Jogging the joints of a robot

1 In the Layout browser, select the robot you want to move.

2 Click Jog Joint.

3 Click the joint you want to move and drag it to the preferred position.

If you press the ALT key when jogging the joints of the robot, the robot will move 10 degrees at a time. If you press the f key, the robot will move 0.1

degree at a time.

248

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.18.4 Jog Linear

8.18.4 Jog Linear

Jogging the TCP of a robot

1 In the Layout browser, select the robot you want to move.

2 In the Freehand group, click Jog Linear. A coordinate system will be displayed at the TCP of the robot.

3 Click the axis you want to move and drag the TCP to the preferred position.

If you press the f key while jogging the robot linearly, the robot will move with a smaller step size.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

249

8 The Home Tab

8.18.5 Jog Reorient

8.18.5 Jog Reorient

Reorienting the TCP rotation

1 In the Layout browser, select the robot you want to reorient.

2 In the Freehand group, click Jog Reorient.

An orientation ring appears around the TCP.

3 Click the orientation ring and drag the robot to rotate the TCP to the preferred position.

The X, Y, and Z orientation appears with units.

Note

If you press the ALT key while reorienting, the robot moves by 10 units and if you press the F key, it moves by 0.1 unit.

Note

The behavior of orientation differs with the different reference coordinate system (World, Local, UCS, Active Workobject, Active Tool).

250

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.18.6 MultiRobot Jog

8.18.6 MultiRobot Jog

Jogging robots in multirobot mode

1 In the Freehand group, click MultiRobot Jog. Select the robots to be jogged from the list of available robots.

2 Select the jogging mode, jog one of the robots and the other ones will follow the movement.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

251

8 The Home Tab

8.19 The 3D View group

8.19 The 3D View group

Overview

The 3D View group helps you to choose view settings, control graphics view and create new views, and to show/hide the selected targets, frames, paths, parts, and mechanisms. The following options are available:

• 3D Settings

• Show/Hide

• View

3D Settings

You can select the following different view settings of the graphics window.

Setting

Frame Size

• Large

• Medium

• Small

Projection

• Orthographic

• Perspective

Representation

• Surface

• Wireframe

• Both

• Hidden-line removal

Description

To view the frame in large, medium and small sizes.

To view the orthographic and perspective view of the object.

To view the objects as a surface, wireframe, both surface and wireframe, by removing hidden lines.

Show/Hide

You can either show or hide the following options:

• Target Names

• Frame Names

• Path Names

• All Targets/Frames

• All Paths

• All Parts

• All Mechanisms

View

You can control the graphics view and create new views.

Setting

View All

Description

To view all the objects in the station.

Continues on next page

252

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Setting

View Orientation

New View

Create Viewpoint

Create Markup

8 The Home Tab

8.19 The 3D View group

Continued

Description

To view the objects in the following different orientations.

• Front

• Back

• Right

• Left

• Top

• Bottom

Adds a new View tab in the graphics window.

Stores the location and direction of a virtual camera in the 3D environment. For more information, see

Viewpoint on page 254 .

Creates text markup. For more information, see

Markup on page 256 .

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

253

8 The Home Tab

8.20 Viewpoint

8.20 Viewpoint

Overview

A Viewpoint stores the location and direction of a virtual camera in the 3D environment. It stores points of interest in a station and to create camera movements during simulation.

Creating Viewpoint

You can create a viewpoint in a station in two ways:

1 In the Home tab, click View and select Create Viewpoint.

2 In the Layout browser, right-click the station and select Create Viewpoint.

A viewpoint is created and displayed (as an eye icon) in the layout browser to the left.

NOTE! The position and direction of the Viewpoint can also be visualized as an arrow in the 3D graphics.

NOTE! By default, the newly created viewpoints are not visible and cannot be selected by clicking on the graphics.

Viewpoint functions

In the Layout browser, right-click Viewpoint to perform these function:

Function

Move to Viewpoint

Set to current

Visible

Delete

Rename

Description

Moves the active 3D view to the location stored in the viewpoint

Modifies the viewpoint to the current location and direction of the active 3D view.

NOTE! This action cannot be undone.

Toggles the visibility of the viewpoint 3D representation

NOTE! This action cannot be undone.

Deletes the viewpoint

NOTE! This action cannot be undone.

Renames the viewpoint

NOTE! This action cannot be undone.

Move to Viewpoint

You can also move active 3D view to the location stored in the Viewpoint using

Event manager.

1 Create a viewpoint. See

Creating Viewpoint on page 254

.

2 Add an event. See

Event Manager on page 324

The Create new event dialog box appears.

3 Select Simulation under Activation and Simulation time under Event trig

type. Click Next.

4 Set the activation time. Click Next.

5 Select Move to Viewpoint from Set Actio type. Click Next.

Continues on next page

254

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

8 The Home Tab

8.20 Viewpoint

Continued

6 Select the viewpoint from select Viewpoint and set the transition time.

7 Click Finish.

NOTE! Move to viewpoint function is also executed when replaying the simulation in a Station Viewer.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

255

8 The Home Tab

8.21 Markup

8.21 Markup

Overview

A markup is a text box displayed in the 3D graphics. It is similar to the temporary text shown when performing measurement or freehand movement, but it is part of the station.

The markup is displayed as a node in the layout browser and remains so when the station is saved. It appears as text bubble pointing to a position in the graphics window.

Creating Markup

Markup functions

In the Layout browser, right-click Markup to perform the following functions:

Function

Visible

Modify Markup

Attach to

Detach

Delete

Rename

Description

Shows or hides the markup in the 3D graphics.

Modifies the Markup properties.

Attaches the markup to another graphical object.

Detaches the attached markup.

Deletes the markup.

Changes the name of the markup object.

Modify Markup

Use this procedure to create markup to an object

1 In the Home tab, click View and select Create Markup.

The Create Markup dialog box appears.

Note

Alternatively, in the Layout browser, right-click the station and select Create

Markup for the dialog box to appear.

2 In the Markup Text field, enter a name for the markup text.

3 Select Always on top if you want to display the text on top.

4 Click Create.

Use this procedure to modify the markup properties:

1 In the Layout browser, right-click the markup and select Modify Markup.

The Modify Markup dialog box appears.

2 Modify the markup text, pointer position or text position.

3 Click Apply for the changes to take effect.

4 Click Close.

256

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.1 Overview

9 The Modeling Tab

9.1 Overview

The Modeling tab

The Modeling tab contains the controls for creating and grouping components, creating bodies, measurements and CAD operations.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

257

9 The Modeling Tab

9.2 Component Group

9.2 Component Group

Creating a component group

1 Click Component Group. The Group node will be displayed in the Layout browser.

2 Click the objects to add to the group. Drag them to the Group node.

258

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.3 Empty Part

9.3 Empty Part

Creating an empty part

1 Click Empty Part. The Part node will be displayed in the Layout browser.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

259

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.1 Smart Component

9.4 Smart Component

9.4.1 Smart Component

Overview

Smart Component is a RobotStudio object (with or without a 3D graphical representation) that has the behavior which can be implemented by code-behind and/or aggregation of other Smart Components.

Terminology

The following table describes the different terminologies that you come across when working with Smart Component.

Term

Code behind

[Dynamic] property

[Property] binding

[Property] attributes

[I/O] signal

[I/O] connection

Aggregation

Asset

Definition

A .NET class associated with a Smart Component that can implement custom behavior by reacting to certain events, for example simulation time steps and changes in property values.

An object attached to a Smart Component that has value, type and certain other characteristics. The property value is used by code behind to control the behavior of the Smart Component.

Connects the value of one property to the value of another property.

Key-value pairs that contain additional information about a dynamic property, for example value constraints.

An object attached to a Smart Component that has a value and a direction (input/output), analogous to I/O signals on a robot controller. The signal value is used by code behind to control the behavior of the Smart Component.

Connects the value of one signal to the value of a different signal.

The process of connecting several Smart Components using bindings and/or connections in order to implement a more complex behavior.

Data object contained in a Smart Component. Uses include code behind assembly and localized resources.

260

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.2 Smart Component Editor

9.4.2 Smart Component Editor

Overview

The Smart Component Editor allows you to create, edit, and aggregate Smart

Components using a graphical user interface. It is an alternative to using the xml based library compiler.

Layout of a Smart Component Editor

It onsists of an icon, the name, the description for the component wherein the description can be modified by typing in the text box, and a combo box.

The combo box specifies the language for editing localized strings (captions and descriptions) in the component. The default language is always English, even if the application language is different. For more information, see

Assets on page 263 .

The Smart Component Editor consists of the following tabs:

The Compose tab on page 262

The Properties and Bindings tab on page 265

The Signals and Connections tab on page 268

The Design tab on page 271

Opening a Smart Component Editor

1 Click Smart Component or select Edit Component from the context menu.

The Smart Component Editor window appears.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

261

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.3 The Compose tab

9.4.3 The Compose tab

Overview

The Compose tab consists of the following:

Child components on page 262

Saved States on page 263

Assets on page 263

Child components

It is a list box that displays all the objects contained by the component. Objects connected to a library have an overlay that indicates that the objects are locked.

Smart Components are displayed first followed by other type of objects.

If an object is selected from the list, the following commands are displayed in the right panel:

Command

Add component

Edit parent

Disconnect from library

Export to XML

Description

Adds a child object to the component from the list.

You can select a built-in base Smart Component, a new empty

Smart Component, a library from file or a geometric part from file.

NOTE!

• Base components are organized as sub-menus based on the usage. For example, Signals and Properties,

Sensors, Actions and so on.

• Recently used base components are listed at the top.

For more information about base Smart Component, see

Basic

Smart Components on page 272 .

Sets the context of the Editor to the parent of the component that is currently being edited. If the parent is the station, see

Station Logic on page 330 .

Disconnects the selected object from library, allowing it to be edited.

Opens a dialog box where you can export and save the component definition along with its properties as an *.rsxml file

Right-click on the selected object to display the following context menu items

Item

Edit

Delete

Show in Browser

Set as Role

Properties

Description

Sets the context of the Editor to the selected child object.

Deletes the child object.

Indicates if the object should be displayed in the Layout browser.

Sets the object as the Role of the component. The Smart

Component will inherit certain characteristics of the Role object.

For example, attaching a component with a tool as Role to a robot will cause a ToolData to be created.

Opens the Property editor dialog box for the object. See

Property Editor on page 288 .

Continues on next page

262

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.3 The Compose tab

Continued

Saved States

The state of the component can be saved to be restored later. The state contains selected modifiable aspects of the component and its child components at the time when the state was saved. The following commands are available:

Command

Save Current State

Restore Selected State

Details

Delete

Description

Opens the Save Current State dialog box. See

Save Current

State on page 263 .

Restores the component to the selected state.

Opens a window that displays detailed information about the selected state.

Deletes the selected state.

Save Current State

1 In the Name text box, enter a name for the state. If a state with the same name already exists, you will be asked to overwrite the existing state.

2 In the Description text box, enter the description for the state.

3 In the Values to save, select the value to be saved.

4 Select the check box to save the state of all child components.

Note

When working on a station level,

• In the Values to save, you can also select certain Virtual Controller values in the saved states.

• You need not select the option Recursive as the state of the station is always saved.

For more information, see

Station Logic on page 330 .

Assets

The assets contained in the component are displayed as grid.

The following commands are available:

Command

Add Asset

Set Icon

Update All Assets

View

Save

Delete

Description

Opens a dialog box and allows you to browse and select any file as an asset.

Opens a dialog box and allows you to browse and select an image that represents a Smart Component.

Replaces the data of all the assets with the data of the corresponding file on the disk. If the file is not available, a warning message is displayed in the output window.

Opens the selected asset in the associated program

Opens a dialog box and allows you to save the selected asset.

Deletes the selected asset.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

263

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.3 The Compose tab

Continued

Note

The text resources (descriptions) for properties and signals are stored in an asset called Resources.<language-id>.xml. If this is deleted, the texts for that language will be empty and the default (English) will be used. The default language when authoring a component is always English, regardless of the application language.

264

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.4 The Properties and Bindings tab

9.4.4 The Properties and Bindings tab

Overview

The Properties and Bindings tab consists of the following:

Dynamic Properties on page 265

Property Bindings on page 266

Dynamic Properties

The dynamic properties contained in the component are displayed in a grid.

The following commands are available

Command

Add Dynamic Property

Expose Child Property

Edit

Delete

Description

Opens the Add Dynamic Property dialog box. See

Add or Edit

Dynamic Property on page 265 .

Opens the Expose Child Property dialog box. See

Expose Child

Property on page 266 .

Opens the Edit Dynamic Property dialog box for the selected property.

Deletes the selected property.

Add or Edit Dynamic Property

The Add Dynamic Property dialog box allows you to create a new dynamic property or edit an existing property.

The following controls are available:

Control

Property Identifier

Description

Read-only

Property Type

Property Value

Attributes

Description

Specifies an identifier for the property. The identifier must be alphanumeric, start with a letter and must be unique.

Detailed description of the property.

Indicates if the property value should be possible to modify in

GUI such as the Property Editor.

Specifies the type of the property from a list of allowed types.

Specifies the value of the property. The control is updated when you change the property type and/or attributes.

Allows you to add, remove, and modify property attributes.

The following lists the available attributes:

• MinValue

• MaxValue

• Quantity

• Slider

• AutoApply

NOTE! Numeric attributes are specified in SI units.

NOTE: When editing an existing property, the Identifier and Type controls are locked and cannot be modified. If the input is valid the OK button is enabled, allowing the you to add or update the property. If not, an error icon is displayed.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

265

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.4 The Properties and Bindings tab

Continued

Expose Child Property

The Expose Child Property dialog box allows you to add a new property and bind to an existing property in a child object. The new property will have the same type and attributes as the child property.

The following controls are available:

Control

Property Identifier

Description

Identifier of the new property. By default, this is the same as the identifier of the selected child property.

Specifies the direction of the property binding

Binding Direction

Source or Target Object

Specifies the child object for which to expose a property.

Source or Target Property

Specifies the child property.

Property Bindings

The property bindings contained in the component are displayed in a grid.

The following commands are available:

Command

Add Binding

Add Expression Binding

Edit

Delete

Description

Opens the Add Binding dialog box.

Opens the Add Expression Binding dialog box.

Opens the Edit Binding or Edit Expression Binding dialog box, depending on the type of binding selected.

Deletes the selected binding.

Add or Edit Binding

The Add Binding dialog box allows you to create or edit a property binding.

The following options are available:

Control

Source Object

Source Property

Target Object

Target Property

Allow cyclic binding

Description

Specifies the owner of the source property.

Specifies the source of the binding.

Specifies the owner of the target property.

Specifies the target of the binding.

NOTE! Only properties of the same type as the source property type are listed.

Allows the target property to be set two times in the same context, which otherwise generates an error.

NOTE! The target list box, besides dynamic properties also displays some common properties such as object transform that can only be used as target and not as source.

Add or Edit Expression Binding

The Add Expression Binding dialog box allows you to specify a mathematical expression as the source of a property binding.

Continues on next page

266

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.4 The Properties and Bindings tab

Continued

The following controls are available:

Control

Expression

Target Object

Target Property

Description

Specifies the mathematical expressions.

The following lists the allowable mathematical expressions:

Allowed operators: +, - (unary and binary) *, /, ^ (power),

Sin(), Cos(), Sqrt(), Atan() and Abs().

Allowed operands: Numeric constants, PI, and Numeric dynamic properties on the current smart component and any child smart components.

NOTE! The text box has the IntelliSense-like funtionality which allows you to select from the available properties. If the expression entered in the text box is invalid, an error icon is displayed.

Specifies the owner of the target property.

Specifies the target of the binding.

NOTE! Only numeric properties are listed.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

267

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.5 The Signals and Connections tab

9.4.5 The Signals and Connections tab

Overview

The Signals and Connections tab consists of the following:

I/O Signals on page 268

I/O Connections on page 269

I/O Signals

The I/O Signals contained in the component are displayed in a grid.

The following commands are available:

Command

Add I/O Signals

Expose Child Signal

Edit

Delete

Description

Opens the Add I/O Signals dialog box.

Opens the Expose Child Signal dialog box.

Opens the Edit Signal dialog box.

Deletes the selected signal.

Add or Edit I/O signals

The Add I/O Signals dialog box allows you to edit an I/O signal, or add one or more

I/O signals to the component.

The following controls are available:

Control

Type of Signal

Signal Base Name

Signal Value

Description

Auto-reset

Number of Signals

Start Index

Step

Minimum

Maximum

Description

Specifies the type and direction of the signal.

The following are the available types of signals:

• Digital

• Analog

• Group

Specifies the name of the signal.

The name must contain an alphanumeric character and start with a letter (a-z or A-Z).

NOTE! If more than one signal is created, numeric suffixes specified by Start Index and Step are added to the names.

Specifies the initial value of the signal.

Text that describes the signal. When creating multiple signals, all will have the same description.

Specifies that a digital signal should have transient behavior.

NOTE! This applies to digital signals only. Indicates that the signal value is automatically reset to 0.

Specifies the number of signals to create.

Specifies the first suffix when creating multiple signals.

Specifies the suffix interval when creating multiple signals.

Specifies the minimum value for an analog signal.

NOTE! This applies to Analog signal only.

Specifies the maximum value for an analog signal.

NOTE! This applies to Analog signal only.

Continues on next page

268

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.5 The Signals and Connections tab

Continued

Control

Hidden

Read only

Description

Indicates if the property should not be visible in GUI such as the Property Editor and I/O Simulator.

Indicates if the property value should be possible to modify in

GUI such as the Property Editor and I/O Simulator.

NOTE! When editing an existing signal, only the Signal Value and Description can be modified, while all other controls are locked.

If the input is valid,OK is enabled allowing you to create or update the signal. If not, an error icon is displayed.

Expose Child signal

The Expose Child Signal dialog box allows you to add a new I/O signal that is connected to a signal in a child object.

The following controls are available:

Control

Signal Name

Child Object

Child Signal

Description

Specifies the name of the signal to be created. By default, it is the same as the name of the selected child signal.

Specifies the object for which to expose a signal.

Specifies the child signal.

I/O Connections

The I/O Connections contained in the component are displayed in a grid.

The following controls are available:

Control

Add I/O Connection

Edit

Manage I/O Connections

Delete

Move Up or Move Down

Description

Opens the Add I/O Connection dialog box.

Opens the Edit I/O Connection dialog box.

Opens the Manage I/O Connections dialog box.

Deletes the selected connection.

Sorts by moving the selected connections up and down the list.

Add or Edit I/O Connection

The Add I/O Connection dialog box allows you to create an I/O connection or edit an existing connection.

The following controls are available:

Control

Source Object

Source Signal

Target Object

Target Signal

Description

Specifies the owner of the source signal.

Specifies the source of the connection. The source must either be an output from a child component, or an input to the current component.

Specifies the owner of the target signal.

Specifies the target of the connection. The target must be of the same type as the source, and either an input to a child component or an output from the current component.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

269

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.5 The Signals and Connections tab

Continued

Control

Allow cyclic connection

Description

Allows the target signal to be set two times in the same context, which would otherwise generate an error.

Manage I/O Connections

The Manage I/O Connections dialog box displays a graphical view of the I/O connections of the component.

It allows you to add, remove, and modify connections. Only digital signals are displayed.

The following controls are available:

Control

Source / Target Signals

Connections

Logic Gates

Add

Remove

Description

Lists the signals used in the connections, source signals to the left and target signals to the right. Each signal is specified by the owner object and the signal name.

Displays connections as an arrow from source to target

Specifies a logic operator and a delay time. It performs digital logic on input signals.

Add Source - Adds a source signal to the left.

Add Target - Adds a target signal to the right.

Add Logic Gate - Adds a logic gate at the center

Removes the selected signal, connection or logic gate.

Managing I/O connections

Use this procedure to add, remove, and create new I/O connections:

1 Click Add and select Add Source or Add Target or Add Logic Gate to add a source signal or target signal or logic gate respectively.

2 Move the cursor towards the Source Signal until a cross hair appears.

3 Click and drag the left mouse button towards the logic gate to create a new

I/O connection.

4 Select the signal, connection, or logic gate and click Remove to delete.

270

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.6 The Design tab

9.4.6 The Design tab

Overview

The Design tab displays a graphical view of the structure of the component. It includes the child components, internal connections, properties and bindings. The

Smart Component can be organized on the viewing screen and their viewing position will be stored with the station.

Note

This tab requires.NET Framework 3.5 SP1to be installed, if not a blank page is displayed.

Using the Design tab

You can do the following in the Design tab:

Action

Move child components and their positions.

Description

• Click Auto Arrange to organize the components coherently.

• Use the Zoom slider to zoom the view.

Select a component from the graphical view.

Connections and bindings are color coded and highlighted to avoid confusion.

NOTE! By default, Show Bindings, Show Connections, and

Show unused check-box are selected.

• De-select Show Bindings check-box to hide the bindings.

• De-select Show Connections check-box to hide the connections.

• De-select Show unused check-box to hide the unused components.

Create connections and bindings

1 Select the source signal or property. The cursor is displayed as a pen.

2 Drag and drop the cursor on the target signal or property.

If the target is valid, a connection and binding is created.

If the target is invalid, the cursor changs to "not allowed" symbol.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

271

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Overview

The base components represent a complete set of basic building block components.

They can be used to build user defined Smart Components with more complex behavior.

This lists the basic Smart Components available and are described in the following sections:

Signals and Properties on page 272

Parametric Primitives on page 276

Sensors on page 278

Actions on page 280

Manipulators on page 282

Other on page 284

Signals and Properties

LogicGate

The signal Output is set by the logical operation specified in Operator of the two signals InputAand InputB, with the delay specified in Delay.

Properties

Operator

Delay

Description

The logical operator to use.

The following lists the various operators:

• AND

• OR

• XOR

• NOT

• NOP

Time to delay the output signal.

Signals

InputA

InputB

Output

Description

The first input.

The second input.

The result of the logic operation.

LogicExpression

Evaluates a logic expression.

Properties

String

Operator

Description

The expression to evaluate.

The following lists the various operators:

• AND

• OR

• NOT

• XOR

Continues on next page

272

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

LogicMux

LogicSplit

LogicSRLatch

Converter

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Description

Contains the result of the evaluation.

Signals

Result

Output is set according to: Output = (Input A * NOT Selector) + (Input B * Selector)

Signals

Selector

InputA

InputB

Output

Description

When low, the first input is selected.

When high, the second input is selected.

Specifies the first input.

Specifies the second input.

Specifies the result of the operation.

The LogicSplit takes Input and sets OutputHigh to the same as Input, and OutputLow as the inverse of Input.

PulseHigh sends a pulse when Input is set to high, and PulseLow sends a pulse when Input is set to low.

Signals

Input

OutputHigh

OutputLow

PulseHigh

PulseLow

Description

Specifies the input signal.

Goes high (1) when input is 1.

Goes high (1) when input is 0.

Sends pulse when input is set to high.

Sends pulse when input is set to low.

TheLogicSRLatch has one stable state.

• When Set=1, Output=1 and InvOutput=0

• When Reset=1, Output=0 and InvOutput=1

Signals

Set

Reset

Output

InvOutput

Description

Sets the output signal.

Resets the output signal.

Specifies output signal.

Specifies Inverse output signal.

Converts between property values and signal values.

Properties

AnalogProperty

DigitalProperty

GroupProperty

BooleanProperty

Description

Converts to AnalogOutput.

Converts to DigitalOutput.

Converts to GroupOutput.

Converts from DigitalInput and to DigitalOutput.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

273

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Signals

DigitalInput

DigitalOutput

AnalogInput

AnalogOutput

GroupInput

GroupOutput

VectorConverter

Description

Converts to DigitalProperty.

Converted from DigitalProperty.

Converts to AnalogProperty.

Converted from AnalogProperty.

Converts to GroupProperty.

Converted from GroupProperty.

Converts between Vector3 and X, Y,and Z values.

Properties

X

Y

Z

Vector

Description

Specifies the X-value of Vector.

Specifies the Y-value of Vector.

Specifies the Z-value of Vector

Specifies the vector value..

Expression

The Expression consists of numeric literals (including PI), parentheses, mathematical operators +,-,*,/,^ (power) and mathematical functions sin, cos, sqrt, atan, abs. Any other strings are interpreted as variables, which are added as additional properties. The result is displayed in Result.

Signals

Expression

Result

NNN

Description

Specifies the expression to evaluate.

Specifies the result of evaluation.

Specifies automatically generated variables.

Comparer

The Comparer compares First value with Second value, using Operator. Output is set to 1 if the condition is met.

Properties

ValueA

ValueB

Operator

Description

Specifies the first value.

Specifies the second value.

Specifies the comparison operator.

The following lists the various operators:

• ==

• !=

• >

• >=

• <

• <=

Signals

Output

Description

True if the comparison evaluates to true, otherwise false.

Continues on next page

274

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Counter

Count is increased when the input signal Increase is set, and decreased when the input signal Decrease is set. Count is reset when the input signal Reset is set.

Properties

Count

Description

Specifies the current count.

Signals

Increase

Decrease

Reset

Description

Adds one to the Count when set to True.

Subtracts one from the Count when set to True.

Resets the Count to zero when set to high.

Repeater

Pulses Output signal Count number of times.

Properties

Count

Description

Number of times to pulse Output.

Signals

Execute

Output

Description

Set to high (1) to pulse Output Count times.

Output pulse.

Timer

The Timer pulses the Output signal based on the given interval.

If Repeat is unchecked, one pulse will be triggered after the time specified in

Interval. Otherwise, the pulse will be repeated at the interval given by Interval.

Properties

StartTime

Interval

Repeat

Current time

Description

Specifies the time to pass before the first pulse.

Specifies the simulation time between the pulses.

Specifies if the signal should be pulsed repeatedly or only once.

Specifies the current simulation time.

Signals

Active

Output

Description

Set to True to activate the timer, and False to deactivate it.

Sends pulses at the specified time intervals.

StopWatch

The StopWatch measures time during simulation (TotalTime). A new lap can be started by triggering the Lap input signal. LapTime shows the current lap time. The time is only measured when Active is set to 1. The times are reset when the input signal Reset is set.

Properties

TotalTime

LapTime

AutoReset

Description

Specifies the accumulated time.

Specifies the current lap time.

If true, TotalTime and LapTime will be set to 0 when the simulation starts.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

275

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Signals

Active

Reset

Lap

Description

Set to True to activate the stop watch, and False to deactivate it.

Resets Total time and Lap time when set to high.

Starts a new lap.

Parametric Primitives

ParametricBox

The ParametricBox generates a box with dimensions specified by length, width, and height.

Properties

SizeX

SizeY

SizeZ

GeneratedPart

KeepGeometry

Description

Specifies the length of the box in the X-axis direction.

Specifies the length of the box in the Y-axis direction.

Specifies the length of the box in the Z-axis direction

Specifies the generated part.

False to remove the geometry data from the generated part.

This can make other components such as Source execute faster.

Signals

Update

Description

Set to high (1) to update the generated part.

ParametricCircle

The ParametricCircle generates a circle with a given radius.

Properties

Radius

GeneratedPart

GeneratedWire

KeepGeometry

Description

Specifies the radius of the circle.

Specifies the generated part.

Specifies the generated wire object.

False to remove the geometry data from the generated part.

This can make other components such as Source execute faster

Signals

Update

Description

Set to high (1) to update the generated part.

ParametricCylinder

The ParametricCylinder generates a cylinder with the dimensions given by Radius and Height.

Properties

Radius

Height

GeneratedPart

KeepGeometry

Description

Specifies the radius of the cylinder.

Specifies the height of the cylinder.

Specifies the generated part.

False to remove the geometry data from the generated part.

This can make other components such as Source execute faster.

Continues on next page

276 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Description

Set to high (1) to update the generated part.

Signals

Update

ParametricLine

The ParametricLine generates a line with a given end point or a given length. If either of them is changed, the other one will be updated accordingly.

Properties

EndPoint

Length

GeneratedPart

GeneratedWire

KeepGeometry

Description

Specifies the end point for the line.

Specifies the length of the line.

Specifies the generated part.

Specifies the generated wire object.

False to remove the geometry data from the generated part.

This can make other components such as Source execute faster.

Signals

Update

Description

Set to high (1) to update the generated part.

LinearExtrusion

The LinearExtrusion extrudes SourceFace or SourceWire along the vector given by Projection.

Properties

SourceFace

SourceWire

Projection

GeneratedPart

KeepGeometry

Description

Specifies the face to extrude.

Specifies the wire to extrude.

Specifies the vector to extrude along.

Specifies the generated part.

False to remove the geometry data from the generated part.

This can make other components such as Source execute faster.

CircularRepeater

The CircularRepeater creates a number of given copies of Source around the center of the SmartComponent with a given DeltaAngle.

Properties

Source

Count

Radius

DeltaAngle

Description

Specifies the object to copy.

Specifies the number of copies to create.

Specifies the radius of the circle.

Specifies the angle between the copies.

LinearRepeater

The LinearRepeater creates a number of copies of Source, with the spacing and direction given by Offset.

Properties

Source

Description

Specifies the object to copy.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

277

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Properties

Offset

Count

MatrixRepeater

Description

Specifies the distance between copies.

Specifies the number of copies to create.

The MatrixRepeater creates a specified number of copies in three dimensions, with the specified spacing of the object in Source.

Properties

Source

CountX

CountY

CountZ

OffsetX

OffsetY

OffsetZ

Description

Specifies the object to copy.

Specifies the number of copies in the X-axis direction.

Specifies the number of copies in the Y-axis direction.

Specifies the number of copies in the Z-axis direction.

Specifies the offset between the copies in the X-axis direction.

Specifies the offset between the copies in the Y-axis direction.

Specifies the offset between the copies in the Z-axis direction.

Sensors

CollisionSensor

The CollisionSensor detects collisions and near miss events between the First object and the Second object. If one of the objects is not specified, the other will be checked against the entire station. When the Active signal is high and a collision or a near miss event occurs and the component is active, the SensorOut signal is set and the parts that participate in the collision or near miss event are reported in the first colliding part and second colliding partof the Property editor.

Properties

Object1

Object2

NearMiss

Part1

Part2

CollisionType

Description

The first object to check for collisions.

The second object to check for collisions.

Specifies the near miss distance.

The part of First object that has a collision.

The part of Second object that has a collision.

• None

• Near miss

• Collision

Signals

Active

SensorOut

Description

Specifies if the CollisionSensor is active or not.

True if there is a NearMiss or Collision.

Continues on next page

278

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

LineSensor

The LineSensor defines a line by the Start, End, and Radius. When an Active signal is high, the sensor detects objects that intersect the line. Intersecting objects are displayed in the ClosestPart property and the point on the intersecting part that is closest to the line sensors start point is displayed in the ClosestPoint property.

When intersection occurs the SensorOut output signal is set.

Properties

Start

End

Radius

SensedPart

SensedPoint

Description

Specifies the start point.

Specifies the end point.

Specifies the radius.

Specifies the part that intersects the line sensor.

If several parts intersect, then the one closest to theStart point is listed.

Specifies the point on the intersecting part, closest to the Start point.

Signals

Active

SensorOut

Description

Specifies if the LineSensor is active or not.

True if the sensor intersects with an object.

PlaneSensor

The PlaneSensor defines a plane by Origin, Axis1, and Axis2. When the Active input signal is set the sensor detects objects that intersect this plane. Intersecting objects are displayed in the SensedPart property and when intersection occurs the SensorOut output signal is set.

Properties

Origin

Axis1

Axis2

SensedPart

Description

Specifies the origin of the plane.

Specifies the first axis of the plane.

Specifies the second axis of the plane.

Specifies the part that intersects the PlaneSensor.

If several parts intersect, then the one listed first in the Layout browser is selected.

Signals

Active

SensorOut

Description

Specifies if the PlaneSensor is active or not.

True if the sensor intersects with an object.

PositionSensor

The PositionSensor monitors the position and orientation of an object.

NOTE! The position and orientation of an object is updated only during the simulation.

Properties

Object

Reference

ReferenceObject

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Description

Specifies the object to monitor.

Specifies the reference coordinate system (Parent or Global).

Specifies the reference object, if Reference is set to Object.

Continues on next page

279

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Properties

Position

Orientation

ClosestObject

Description

Specifies the position of the object relative to Reference.

Specifies the orientation (Euler ZYX) relative to Reference.

The ClosestObject defines a Reference object or a Reference point. When the

Execute signal is set, the component finds the ClosestObject, ClosestPart, and the

Distance to the reference object, or to the reference point if the reference object is undefined. If RootObject is defined, the search is limited to that object and its descendants. When finished and the corresponding properties are updated the

Executed signal is set.

Properties

ReferenceObject

ReferencePoint

RootObject

ClosestObject

ClosestPart

Distance

Description

Specifies the object to get the closest object to.

Specifies the point to get the closest object to.

Specifies the object whose children to search.

Empty means entire station.

Specifies the object closest to Reference object or Reference point.

Specifies the part closest to Reference object or Reference point.

Specifies the distance between the Reference object and the

Closest object.

Signals

Execute

Executed

Description

Set to True to find the Closest part.

Sends a pulse when completed.

Actions

Attacher

The Attacher will attach Child to Parent when the Execute signal is set. If the Parent is a mechanism, the Flange to attach to must also be specified. When the input

Execute is set, the child object is attached to the parent object. If Mount is checked, the child will also be mounted on the parent, with the Offset and Orientation specified. The output Executed will be set when finished.

Properties

Parent

Flange

Child

Mount

Offset

Orientation

Description

Specifies the object to attach to.

Specifies the Index of mechanism flange to attach to.

Specifies the object to attach.

If true, the object to attach mounts on the attachment parent.

Specifies the position relative to the attachment parent when using Mount.

Specifies the orientation relative to the attachment parent when using Mount.

Continues on next page

280

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Signals

Execute

Executed

Description

Set to True to attach.

Sends a pulse when completed.

Detacher

The Detacher will detach the Child from the object it is attached to when the Execute signal is set. If Keep position is checked, the position will be kept. Otherwise the child is positioned relative to its parent. When finished, the Executed signal will be set.

Properties

Child

KeepPosition

Description

Specifies the object to detach.

If false, the attached object is returned to its original position.

Signals

Execute

Executed

Description

Set to True to remove the attachment.

Sends a pulse when completed.

Source

The Source property of the source component indicates the object that should be cloned when the Execute input signal is received. The parent of the cloned objects is specified by the Parent property and a reference to the cloned object is specified by the Copy property. The output signal Executed signifies that the clone is complete.

Properties

Source

Copy

Parent

Position

Orientation

Transient

Description

Specifies the object to copy.

Specifies the copied object.

Specifies the parent to the copy.

If not specified, the copy gets the same parent as the source.

Specifies the position of the copy relative its parent.

Specifies the orientation of the copy relative its parent.

Marks the copy as transient if created during simulation. Such copies are not added to the undo queue and are automatically deleted when the simulation is stopped. This is used to avoid increased memory consumption during simulation.

Signals

Execute

Executed

Description

Set to True to create a copy of the object.

Sends a pulse when completed.

Sink

The Sink deletes the object referenced by the Object property. Deletion happens when the Execute input signal is received. The Executed output signal is set when the deletion is finished.

Properties

Object

Description

Specifies the object to remove.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

281

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Signals

Execute

Executed

Show

Description

Set to True to remove the object.

Sends a pulse when completed.

When the Execute signal is set, the object referenced in Object appears. When finished, Executed signal will be set.

Properties

Object

Description

Specifies the object to show.

Signals

Execute

Executed

Description

Set to True to show the object.

Sends a pulse when completed.

Hide

When the Execute signal is set, the object referenced in Object will be hidden.

When finished, Executed signal will be set.

Properties

Object

Description

Specifies the object to hide.

Signals

Execute

Executed

Description

Set to True to hide the object.

Sends a pulse when completed.

Manipulators

LinearMover

The LinearMover moves the object referenced in the Object property with a speed given by the Speed property in the direction given by the Direction property. The motion starts when the Execute input signal is set and stops when Execute is reset.

Properties

Object

Direction

Speed

Reference

ReferenceObject

Description

Specifies the object to move.

Specifies the direction to move the object.

Specifies the speed of movement.

Specifies the coordinate system in which values are specified.

It can be Global, Local, or Object.

Specifies the reference object, if Reference is set to Object.

Signals

Execute

Description

Set to True to start move the object, and False to stop.

Continues on next page

282

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Rotator

Positioner

PoseMover

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

The Rotator rotates the object referenced in the Object property with an angular speed given by the Speed property. The axis of rotation is given by CenterPoint and Axis. The motion starts when the Execute input signal is set and stops when the Execute is reset.

Properties

Object

CenterPoint

Axis

Speed

Reference

ReferenceObject

Description

Specifies the object to rotate.

Specifies the point to rotate around.

Specifies the axis of the rotation.

Specifies the speed of the rotation.

Specifies the coordinate system in which values are specified.

It can be Global, Local, or Object.

Specifies the object which are relative to CenterPoint and Axis, if Reference is set to Object.

Signals

Execute

Description

Set to True to start rotating the object, and False to stop.

The Positioner takes an Object, Position, and Orientation as properties. When the

Execute signal is set the object is repositioned in the given position relative to the

Reference. When finished the Executed output is set.

Properties

Object

Position

Orientation

Reference

ReferenceObject

Description

Specifies the object to position.

Specifies the new position of the object.

Specifies the new orientation of the object.

Specifies the coordinate system in which values are specified.

It can be Global, Local, or Object.

Specifies the object which are relative to Position and Orientation, if Reference is set to Object.

Signals

Execute

Executed

Description

Set to True to start move the object, and False to stop.

Set to 1 when operation is completed.

The PoseMover has a Mechanism, a Pose, and Duration as properties. When the

Execute input signal is set the mechanism joint values are moved to the given pose. When the pose is reached the Executed output signal is set.

Properties

Mechanism

Pose

Duration

Description

Specifies the mechanism to move to a pose.

Specifies the Index of the pose to move to.

Specifies the time for the mechanism to move to the pose.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

283

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Signals

Execute

Pause

Cancel

Executed

Executing

Paused

JointMover

Description

Set to True, to start or resume moving the mechanism.

Pauses the movement.

Cancels the movement.

Pulses high when the mechanism has reached the pose.

Goes high during the movement.

Goes high when paused.

The JointMover has a Mechanism, a set of Joint Values and a Duration as properties. When the Execute input signal is set the mechanism joint values are moved to the given pose. When the pose is reached the Executed output signal is set. The GetCurrent signal retrieves the current joint values of the mechanism.

Properties

Mechanism

Relative

Duration

J1 - Jx

Description

Specifies the mechanism to move to a pose.

Specifies if J1-Jx are relative to the start values, rather than absolute joint values.

Specifies the time for the mechanism to move to the pose.

Joint values.

Signals

GetCurrent

Execute

Pause

Cancel

Executed

Executing

Paused

Description

Retrieve current joint values.

Set to True to start moving the mechanism.

Pauses the movement

Cancels the movement

Pulses high when the mechanism has reached the pose.

Goes high during the movement.

Goes high when paused.

Other

GetParent

The GetParent return the parent object of the input object. The executed signal is triggered if a parent is found.

Properties

Child

Parent

Description

Specifies the object to whose parent is to be found.

Specifies the parent of the child

Signals

Output

Description

Goes high (1) if the parent exists.

Continues on next page

284

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

GraphicSwitch

Switches between two parts, either by clicking on the visible part in the graphics or by setting and resetting the input signal.

Properties

PartHigh

PartLow

Description

Displayed when the signal is high.

Displayed when the signal is low.

Signals

Input

Output

Description

Input signal.

Output signal.

Highlighter

The Highlighter temporarily sets the color of the Object to the RGB-values specified in Color. The color is blended with the original color of the objects as defined by

Opacity When the signal Active is reset, Object gets its original colors.

Properties

Object

Color

Opacity

Description

Specifies the object to highlight.

Specifies the RGB-values of the highlight color.

Specifies the amount to blend with the object's original color

(0-255).

Signals

Active

Description

True sets the hightlight. False restores the original color.

Logger

Prints a message in the output window.

Properties

Format

Message

Severity

Description

Format string.

Supports variables like {id:type}, where type can be d (double), i (int), s (string), o (object)

Formatted message.

Message severity: 0 (Information), 1 (Warning), 2 (Error).

Signals

Execute

Description

Set to high (1) to print the message.

MoveToViewPoint

Moves to the selected viewpoint in the given time, when the input signal Execute is set. The output signal Executed is set when the operation is completed.

Properties

Viewpoint

Time

Description

Specifies the viewpoint to move to.

Specifies the time to complete the operation.

Signals

Execute

Description

Set to high (1) to start the operation.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

285

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Signals

Executed

ObjectComparer

Description

Goes high (1) when the operation is completed.

Determines if ObjectA is the same as ObjectB.

Properties

ObjectA

ObjectB

Description

Specifies the object to compare.

Specifies the object to compare.

Signals

Output

Description

Goes high if the objects are equal.

Queue

The Queue represents a FIFO (first in, first out) queue. The object in Back is added to the queue when the signal Enqueue is set. The front object of the queue is shown in Front. The object in Front is removed from the queue when the signal Dequeue is set. If there are more objects in the queue, the next object is shown in Front. All objects in the queue are removed from the queue when the signal Clear is set.

If a transformer component (such as LinearMover) has a queue component as its

Object, it will transform the contents of the queue, rather than the queue itself.

Properties

Back

Front

Queue

NumberOfObjects

Description

Specifies the object to enqueue.

Specifies the first object in queue.

Contains unique IDs of the queue’s elements.

Specifies the number of objects in the queue.

Signals

Enqueue

Dequeue

Clear

Delete

DeleteAll

Description

Adds the object in Back to the end of the queue.

Removes the object in Front from the queue.

Removes all objects from the queue.

Removes the object in Front from the queue and from the station.

Clears the queue and removes all objects from the station

SoundPlayer

Plays the sound specified by Sound Asset when the input signal Execute is set.

The asset must be a .wav file

Properties

SoundAsset

Description

Specifies the sound file that should be played. Must be a .wav

file.

Signals

Execute

Description

Set to high to play the sound.

Continues on next page

286

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

StopSimulation

Random

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.7 Basic Smart Components

Continued

Stop a running simulation when the input signal Execute is set.

Signals

Execute

Description

Set to high to stop the simulation.

Random generates a random number between Min and Max in Value when Execute is triggered.

Properties

Min

Max

Value

Description

Specifies minimum value.

Specifies maximum value.

Specifies a random number between Min and Max.

Signals

Execute

Executed

Description

Set to high to generate a new random number.

Goes high when the operation is completed.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

287

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.8 Property Editor

9.4.8 Property Editor

Overview

The Property editor is used to modify the values of dynamic properties and I/O signals for a Smart Component. By default, the Property editor is displayed as a tool window to the left.

Each dynamic property is represented by a control. The type of control that is displayed depends on the property type and property attributes.

Properties with the Hidden flag set to true are not displayed. Read-only properties cannot be modified but are only displayed.

The values are validated according to the property attributes. If an invalid value is entered, an error icon is displayed next to the control and the Apply button is disabled.

If you set the AutoApply attribute of a property to true, the value is applied whenever you change the value in the control. You can apply the values of other properties by clicking the Apply button. If the component has no properties without

AutoApply, then the Apply button will never be enabled.

You can toggle the value of a digital signal by clicking the control. Similarly, you can change the value of an analog or group signal by entering the new value in the text box.

Opening the Property editor

You can open the Property editor dialog box in any one of the following ways:

• Right-click context menu for a Smart Component and select Properties.

• Launches automatically when the Smart Component Editor is started.

• Launched when you add a base component. See

Basic Smart Components on page 272

.

288

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.9 The Simulation Watch window

9.4.9 The Simulation Watch window

Overview

The Simulation Watch allows you to monitor the values of dynamic properties and

I/O signals in Smart Components. It specifies the simulation that should be paused when a value changes or meets a condition.

Layout of the Simulation Watch window

The Simulation Watch window by default takes the lower tab area in the RobotStudio

GUI.

The window contains a list view of four columns with one row for each watch item:

Watch item

Break

Object

Property/Signal

Value

Description

Specifies the Simulation break point and Break Condition.

For more information, see

Setting Breakpoints on page 290 .

Specifies the object that owns the property or signal (for station signals the name of the station is displayed).

Specifies the watched property or signal.

Specifies the current value of the property or signal.

Adding and Deleting the Watch items

Use this procedure to add or delete a watch item.

Note

As a prerequisite, you should add smart component, its properties and signals.

For more information, see

Smart Component Editor on page 261 .

1 In the Simulation Watch window, right-click and select Add to display the

Add submenu.

The Add submenu displays a recursive view of all the smart components, their properties and signals. The top level submenu displays the station signals.

Note

Watch items that are already watched are not displayed in the recursive view.

2 From the Add submenu, select property or signal to add a single property or signal of a component.

3 From the Add submenu, select Add all to add all the properties and signals of a component.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

289

9 The Modeling Tab

9.4.9 The Simulation Watch window

Continued

4 In the Simulation Watch window, right-click on the row of the watch item and select Delete to delete one or more watch items.

Note

The Watch items are saved in the station and are restored when the station is opened.

Setting Breakpoints

You can set the breakpoint in one of the following ways:

1 To set the simulation breakpoint, select the check box next to a watch item.

Note

By default, the simulation is paused whenever the value of the property or signal changes.

2 In the Simulation Watch window, right-click on the row of the watch item and select Break Condition.

The Break Condition dialog box appears.

• Set the simulation to paused, when the value meets a certain logical condition. The condition can be viewed in the Break column of the

Watch window.

• When a breakpoint is reached, the simulation is paused which is indicated by both the Play and Stop buttons being enabled.

• If the Simulation Watch window is hidden behind the other windows, it is brought to the front and the text of the corresponding watch item turns red.

Note

• Break condition can be specified only for the properties of numeric and string types, and not for the object types.

• After the current simulation time step is completed, all the remaining

Smart component events are executed before the simulation is actually paused.

290

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.5 Solid

9.5 Solid

Creating a solid

1 Click Solid and then click the type of solid you want to create to bring up a dialog box.

2 Enter requested values in in the dialog box and click Create. For detailed information about the specific dialog box for the curve to create, see below:

The Create Box dialog box

D

C

A xx060000

Reference

Corner Point (A)

B

Orientation

Length (B)

Width (C)

Height (D)

The Create Box from 3-Points dialog box

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the corner point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Corner Point boxes, or type the position. The corner point will be the local origin of the box.

If the object shall be rotated relative to the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.

Specify the box dimension along its X axis.

Specify the box dimension along its Y axis.

Specify the box dimension along its Z axis.

C

B xx060001

Reference

A

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

291

9 The Modeling Tab

9.5 Solid

Continued

Corner Point (A)

Point on diagonal of XY-

plane (B)es

This point will be the local origin of the box.

Either type the position, or click in one of the boxes and then select the point in the graphics window.

This point is the the corner, diagonal to the local origin. It sets the X and Y directions of the local coordinate system, as well as the dimension of the box along these axes.

Either type the position, or click in one of the boxes and then select the point in the graphics window.

Indication Point Z-axis (C)

This point is the corner above the local origin, It sets the Z direction of the local coordinate system, as well as the dimension of the box along the Z axis.

Either type the position, or click in one of the boxes and then select the point in the graphics window.

The Create Cone dialog box

C

A

B xx060002

Reference

Base Center Point (A)

Orientation

Radius (B)

Diameter

Height (C)

The Create Cylinder dialog box

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Base Center

Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the cone.

If the object shall be rotated relative to the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.

Specify the radius of the cone.

Specify the diameter of the cone.

Specify the height of the cone.

C

B

A xx060003

Continues on next page

292

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Reference

Base Center Point (A)

Orientation

Radius (B)

Diameter

Height (C)

The Create Pyramid dialog box

9 The Modeling Tab

9.5 Solid

Continued

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Base Center

Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the cylinder.

If the object shall be rotated relative to the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.

Specify the radius of the cylinder.

Specify the diameter of the cylinder.

Specify the height of the cylinder.

C

A

B xx060004

Reference

Base Center Point (A)

Orientation

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Base Center

Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the pyramid.

If the object shall be rotated relative to the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.

Center to Corner Point (B)

Either type the position, or click in the box and then select the point in the graphics window.

Height (C)

Specify the height of the pyramid.

Number of Sides

Specify the number of sides of the pyramid. The maximum number of sides is 50.

The Create Sphere dialog box

B

B

A xx060005

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

293

9 The Modeling Tab

9.5 Solid

Continued

Reference

Center Point (A)

Radius (B)

Diameter

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the sphere.

Specify the radius of the sphere.

Specify the diameter of the sphere.

294

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.6 Surface

9.6 Surface

Creating a surface

1 Click Surface and then click the type of solid you want to create to bring up a dialog box.

2 Enter requested values in in the dialog box and click Create. For detailed information about the specific dialog box for the curve to create, see below:

The Create Surface Circle dialog box

A

B xx060006

Reference

Center Point (A)

Orientation

Radius (B)

Diameter

The Create Rectangle dialog box

Select the Reference coordinate system, to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the circle.

If the object shall be rotated relative to the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.

Specify the radius of the circle.

Specify the diameter of the circle.

C

A

B xx060007

Reference

Start Point (A)

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Start Point boxes, or type the position. The start point will be the local origin of the rectangle.

Continues on next page

295

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

9 The Modeling Tab

9.6 Surface

Continued

Orientation

Length (B)

Width (C)

The Create Surface Polygon dialog box

If the object shall be rotated relative the reference coordinate system, specify the rotation.

Specify the length of the rectangle.

Specify the width of the rectangle

A

B xx060008

Reference

Center Point

First Vertex Point

Vertices

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes, or type the position. The center point will be the local origin of the polygon.

Either type the position, or click in one of the boxes and then select the point in the graphics window.

Specify the number of the vertices here. The maximum number of vertices is 50.

The Create Surface from Curve dialog box

Select Curve from graphics

Select a curve by clicking it in the graphics window.

296

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.7 Curve

9.7 Curve

Creating a curve

1 Click Curve and then click the curve you want to create to bring up a dialog box.

2 Enter requested values in in the dialog box and click Create. For detailed information about the specific dialog box for the curve to create, see below:

The Create Line dialog box

xx050034

Reference

Start point (A)

End Point (B)

The Create Circle dialog box

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the start point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Start Point boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the end point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the End Point boxes.

xx050035

Reference

Center point (A)

Orientation

Radius (A-B)

Diameter

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes.

Specify the orientation coordinates for the circle.

Specify the radius of the circle.

Alternatively, specify the diameter.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

297

9 The Modeling Tab

9.7 Curve

Continued

The Create Three Points Circle dialog box

xx050036

Reference

First Point (A)

Second Point (B)

Third Point (C)

The Create Arc dialog box

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the first point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the First Point boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the second point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Second Point boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the third point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Third Point boxes.

xx050037

Reference

Start Point (A)

Mid Point (B)

End Point (C)

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the start point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Start Point boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the second point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Mid Point boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the end point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the End Point boxes.

Continues on next page

298

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.7 Curve

Continued

The Create Elliptical Arc dialog box

xx050038

Reference

Center Point (A)

Major Axis End Point (B)

Minor Axis End Point (C)

Start Angle (α)

End Angle (β)

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the end point for the major axis of the ellipse in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Major Axis End Point boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the end point for the minor axis of the ellipse in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Minor Axis End Point boxes.

Specify the start angle for the arc, measured from the major axis.

Specify the end angle for the arc, measured from the major axis.

The Create Ellipse dialog box

xx050039

Reference

Center Point (A)

Major Axis End Point (B)

Minor Radius (C)

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of the Center Point boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the end point for the major axis of the ellipse in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Major Axis End Point boxes.

Specify the length of the minor axis of the ellipse. The minor radius will be created perpendicular to the major axis.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

299

9 The Modeling Tab

9.7 Curve

Continued

The Create Rectangle dialog box

xx050040

Reference

Start Point (A)

Orientation

Length (B)

Width (C)

The Create Polygon dialog box

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the start point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Start Point boxes.

The rectangle will be created in the positive coordinate directions.

Specify the orientation coordinates for the rectangle.

Specify the length of the rectangle along the x axis.

Specify the width of the rectangle along the y axis.

xx050041

Reference

Center Point (A)

First Vertex Point (B)

Vertices

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the center point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Center Point boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the first vertex point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the First Vertex

Point boxes. The distance between the center point and the first vertex point will be used for all vertex points.

Specify the number of points to be used when creating the polygon. The maximum number of vertices is 50.

Continues on next page

300

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.7 Curve

Continued

The Create Polyline dialog box

xx050042

Reference

Point Coordinates

Add

Modify

List

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Specify each node of the polyline here, one at a time, by either typing the values, or by clicking in one of these boxes, and then selecting the point in the graphics window to transfer its coordinates.

Click this button to add a point and its coordinates to the list.

Click this button to modify an already defined point, after you have selected it in the list and entered new values.

The nodes of the polyline. To add more nodes, click Add New, click the desired point in the graphics window, and then click

Add.

The Create Spline dialog box

xx050043

Reference

Point Coordinates

Ad

Modify

List

Select the Reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Specify each node of the spline here, one at a time, by either typing the values, or by clicking in one of these boxes, and then selecting the point in the graphics window to transfer its coordinates.

Click this button to add a point and its coordinates to the list.

Click this button to modify an already defined point, after you have selected it in the list and entered new values.

This nodes of the spline. To add more nodes, click Add New, click the desired point in the graphics window, and then click

Add.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

301

9 The Modeling Tab

9.8 Border

9.8 Border

Creating a curve

1 Click Border and then click the border you want to create to bring up a dialog box.

2 Enter requested values in in the dialog box and click Create. For detailed information about the specific dialog box for the border to create, see below:

The Create Border Between Bodies dialog box

To use the create border between bodies command, the station must contain at least two objects.

xx050044

First Body

Second Body

Click in this box and then select the first body in the graphics window.

Click in this box and then select the second body in the graphics window.

The Create Border Around Surface dialog box

To use the create border around surface command, the station must contain at least one object with a graphical representation.

xx050045

Select Surface

Click in this box and then select a surface in the graphics window.

Continues on next page

302

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.8 Border

Continued

The Create Border From Points dialog box

To use the create border from points command, the station must contain at least one object.

en050000

Selected Object

Point Coordinates

Add

Modify

List

Click in this box and then select an object in the graphics window.

Specify the points that define the border here, one at a time, by either typing the values, or by clicking in one of these boxes, and then selecting the point in the graphics window to transfer its coordinates.

Click this button to add a point and its coordinates to the list.

Click this button to modify an already defined point, after you have selected it in the list and entered new values.

The points that define the borders. To add more points, click

Add New, click the desired point in the graphics window, and then click Add.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

303

9 The Modeling Tab

9.9 Intersect

9.9 Intersect

The Intersect dialog box

A xx060009

Keep Original

Intersect... (A)

...and (B)

B

Select this check box to keep the original bodies when creating the new body.

Select the body from which you want to make an intersection

(A) by clicking it in the graphics window.

Select the body with which you want to make an intersection

(B) by clicking it in the graphics window.

A new body will be created based on the common area between the selected bodies A and B.

304

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.10 Subtract

9.10 Subtract

The Subtract dialog box

A xx060010

Keep Original

Subtract... (A)

...with (B)

B

Select this check box to keep the original bodies when creating the new body.

Select the body from which you want to subtract (A) by clicking it in the graphics window.

Select the body you want to subtract (B) by clicking it in the graphics window.

A new body will be created based on the area of body A subtracted with the common volume between body A and B.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

305

9 The Modeling Tab

9.11 Union

9.11 Union

The Union dialog box

A xx060011

Keep Original

Union... (A)

...and (B)

B

Select this check box to keep the original bodies when creating the new body.

Select the body that you want to unify (A) by clicking it in the graphics window.

Select the body that you want to unify (B) by clicking it in the graphics window.

A new body will be created based on the areas of the two selected bodies A and B.

306

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.12 Extrude Surface or Curve

9.12 Extrude Surface or Curve

Extruding a surface or curve

1 From the selection level toolbar, select Surface or Curve, as appropriate.

2 In the graphics window, select the surface or curve you wish to extrude. Click

Extrude Surface or Extrude Curve, as appropriate. The Extrude Surface or

Curve dialog box opens below the Modeling browser.

3 For extrusion along a vector, fill in the values.

For extrusion along a curve, select the Extrude Along Curve option. Click the Curve box, and select the curve in the Graphics window.

4 If you wish the form to appear as a surface model, clear the Make Solid check box.

5 Click Create.

The Extrude Surface or Curve dialog box

Surface or Curve

Extrude Along Vector

From Point (mm)

To Point (mm)

Extrude Along Curve

Curve

Denotes the surface or curve to be extruded.

To select the surface or curve, first click in the box, then select the surface or curve in the graphics window.

Enables extrusion along a specified vector.

The start point of the vector.

The end point of the vector.

Enables extrusion along a specified curve.

Denotes the curve used as a sweep path.

Make Solid

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G xx0600003076

To select the curve, first click the box, then the curve in the graphics window.

Select this check box to convert the extruded form into a solid.

307

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

9 The Modeling Tab

9.13 Line from Normal

9.13 Line from Normal

Creating a line from normal

1 Click Surface Selection.

2 Click Line to Normal to bring up a dialog box.

3 Click on a face to select it in the Select Face box.

4 In the Length box, specify a length for the line.

5 Optionally, select the Invert Normal check box to invert the direction of the line.

6 Click Create.

308

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.14 The Measure Group

9.14 The Measure Group

Tip

Make sure to select the appropriate snap mode and selection levels before making your measurements.

Measuring distances or angles

1 Click the type of measurement you want to use:

To measure the

distance between two points you select in the graphics window.

Select

Point to point

angle defined by three points you select in the graphics window.

The first point to select is the converging point, thereafter you shall select one point on each line.

Angle

diameter, with the circle defined by three points you select from the graphics window.

Diameter

closest distance between two objects you select in the graphics window.

Minimum distance

The mouse pointer will turn into a ruler when you have activated any of the measurement functions.

2 In the graphics window, select the points or objects to measure between.

Information about the measuring points is displayed in the Output window.

The results will be displayed in the Measurements tab in the Output window when all points have been selected.

3 Optionally, repeat step 3 for making a new measurement of the same type.

Tip

You can also activate and deactivate the measurement functions from the measurement toolbar.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

309

9 The Modeling Tab

9.15 Create Mechanism

9.15 Create Mechanism

Create a new mechanism

1 Click Create Mechanism.

The Mechanism Modeler opens in create mode.

2 In the Mechanism Model Name box, enter a mechanism name.

3 From the Mechanism Type list, select a mechanism type.

4 In the tree structure, right-click Links, and then click Add Link to bring up the Create Link dialog box.

A suggested name appears in the Link Name box.

5 In the Selected Part list, select a part (which will be highlighted in the graphics window) and click the arrow button to add the part to the Parts list box.

The Selected Part list then automatically selects the next part, if any more are available. Add these, as required.

6 Select a part in the Parts list box, enter any values in the Selected Parts group boxes, and then click Apply to Part.

Repeat for each part, as required.

7 Click OK.

8 In the tree structure, right-click Joints, and then click Add Joint to bring up the Create Joint dialog box.

A suggested name appears in the Joint Name box.

9 Complete the Create Joint dialog box, and then click OK.

10 In the tree structure, right-click Frame/Tool Data, and then click Add

Frame/Tool to bring up the Create Frame/Tool dialog box.

A suggested name appears in the Frame/Tool Data name box.

11 Complete the Create Frame/Tool dialog box, and then click OK.

The validity criteria for the Frame/Tool node are as follows:

12 In the tree structure, right-click Calibration, and then click Add Calibration to bring up the Create Calibration dialog box.

13 Complete the Create Calibration dialog box, and then click OK.

14 In the tree structure, right-click Dependency, and then click Add Dependency to bring up the Create Dependency dialog box.

15 Complete the Create Dependency dialog box, and then click OK.

16 If all nodes are valid, compile the mechanism, see

Compiling a mechanism on page 311

.

Create Conveyor mechanism

1 Click Create Mechanism.

The Mechanism Modeler opens in create mode.

2 In the Mechanism Model Name dialog box, enter a mechanism name.

3 From the Mechanism Type list, select Conveyor.

4 From the Selected Part list, select Part.

Continues on next page

310 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

9 The Modeling Tab

9.15 Create Mechanism

Continued

5 In the Position of Calibration frame list, enter the base frame values relative to the local origin of the selected graphic component.

6 In the Conveyor length box, enter the length of the conveyor.

The Compile Mechanism button is enabled.

7 In the Attachment Points box, set the Pitch and Count value.

8 Click Add to create new attachment points.

9 Click Compile Mechanism, to compile the mechanism. See

Compiling a mechanism on page 311

.

10 In the Layout browser, right-click the conveyor mechanism and select Save

As Library. Close the station.

11 Build a new system. See

Building a new system on page 163

.

NOTE! On the Modify Options page of the System Builder, scroll down to the Motion coordination part 3 group and select 606-1 Conveyor Tracking check box.

12 Create new station using this new system. See

Robot System on page 208

.

NOTE! After starting the system, when asked to select the library for the conveyor mechanism browse and select the already saved library.

Compiling a mechanism

When compiling, a new mechanism, created in the create mode of the Mechanism

Modeler, is added to the station with the default name "Mechanism_" followed by an index number.

When compiling, an existing editable mechanism, modified in the modify mode of the Mechanism Modeler, is saved without any poses, joint mapping ot transition times.

To compile a mechanism, follow these steps:

1 To compile a new or edited mechanism, click Compile Mechanism.

The mechanism is inserted into the active station. The link parts are cloned with new names, but the corresponding links will update their part references.

When the Mechanism modeler is closed, these cloned parts will be removed.

2 The Mechanism Modeler now switches to modify mode. To complete the mechanism, see below.

Completing or modifying a mechanism

To complete the modeling of a mechanism, follow these steps:

1 If the values in the Joint Mapping group are correct, click Set.

2 Configure the Poses grid. To add a pose, click Add and then complete the

Create Pose dialog box. Click Apply, followed by OK.

To add a pose, click Add and then complete the Create Pose dialog box.

Click Apply, followed by OK.

To edit a pose, select it in the grid, click Edit, and then complete the Modify

Pose dialog box. Click OK.

To remove a pose, select it in the grid and then click Remove.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

311

9 The Modeling Tab

9.15 Create Mechanism

Continued

3 Click Edit Transition Times to edit transition times.

4 Click Close.

The Create Mechanism dialog box

Mechanism Model Name

Mechanism Type

Tree structure

Compile Mechanism

Specifies the model name of the mechanism.

Specifies the mechanism type.

The components of the mechanism in a tree structure. The tree structure will not be visible unless the mechanism is editable.

Each node (link, joint, frame, calibration and dependency) can be edited in its own dialog box, see below.

Click this button to compile the mechanism. This button will not be visible unless the mechanism is editable and the mechanism model name is valid.

The Create Conveyor Mechanism dialog box

Mechanism Model Name

Mechanism Type

Selected Part

Position of Calibration frame

Conveyor Length

Attachment Points

Compile Mechanism

Specifies the model name of the conveyor mechanism.

Specifies the diffrent mechanism types.

Specifies the part to be selected for the conveyor.

Specifies the baseframe value relative to the local origin of the selected graphic component.

Specifies the length of the conveyor.

Specifies the conveyor position to attach the workpieces.

Click this button to compile the mechanism. This button will not be visible unless the mechanism is editable and the mechanism model name is valid.

The Create/Modify Link dialog box

A link is a moving component of a mechanism. Selecting a link node will highlight it in the graphics window.

Link Name

Selected Part

Set as BaseLink

Specifies the name of the link.

Specifies the parts to add to the Part list box.

The BaseLink is where the kinematical chain begins. This must be the parent of the first joint. A mechanism may have only one BaseLink.

Adds a selected part to the Part list box.

xx060000

Remove Part

Click this button to remove a selected part from the Part list box.

Continues on next page

312

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.15 Create Mechanism

Continued

Selected Part

Part Position

Part Orientation

Apply to Part

This group manipulates the transform of the selected part.

Specify the position of the part.

Specify the orientation of the part.

Click this button to apply the settings to the part.

The Create/Modify Joint dialog box

A joint is the axis where two links move in relation to each other, rotationally or prismatically. Selecting a joint node will display a yellow-green line in the graphics window.

Joint Name

Joint Type.

Parent Link

Child Link

Active

Joint Axis

First Position

Second Position

Jog Axis

Limit Type

Joint Limits

Min Limit

Max Limit

Joint Limits

Variable Limits

Specifies the name of the joint.

Specifies the joint type. The default option is Rotational.

Changing the Joint Type clears the Joint Limits below.

Specifies the parent link, usually the first joint of the mechanism.

Specifies the child link. To be valid, the parent and child links may not be identical to each other, and the pair must be unique.

Select this check box to make the joint active. An active joint is one that a user can move, while an inactive joint is a slave to an active joint.

This group specifies the axis around or along which the child moves.

Specify the start point of the axis vector.

Specify the end point of the axis vector.

Demonstrates how the child link moves along its axis.

Specifies the limits in each direction to which a joint may move.

The options are Constant, Variable and No.

This group is visible in Constant or Variable mode.

Specifies the minimum joint limit.

Specifies the maximum joint limit.

This group is visible in Constant or Variable mode.

In Variable mode, variable limit points may be added as an advanced way of delimiting the area of movement.

xx060012

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

313

9 The Modeling Tab

9.15 Create Mechanism

Continued

Adds a selected point to the Point list box.

left-cli

Remove

Click this button to remove a selected point from the Point list box.

The Modify Frame/Tool Data dialog box

A frame/tool data node determines the link and location of a frame.

Frame/Tool Data name

Belongs to Link

Position

Orientation

Select values from target/Frame

Specifies the name of the frame or tool data.

Specifies the link to which the frame or tool belongs.

Specify the position of the transform.

Specify the orientation of the transform.

Select this box to select the values from a target or frame, which is selected in the box beneath the check box.

Tool Data

Mass

This group is visible if the mechanism is a tool.

Specifies the mass of the tool.

Center of Gravity

Specify the center of gravity of the tool.

Moment of Inertia lx, ly, lz

Specify the moment of inertia of the tool.

The Create Calibration dialog box

A calibration contains transforms for calibrating the joints. Two calibrations cannot share the same joint.

Specifies the joint to be calibrated.

Calibration belongs to

Joint

Position

Orientation

Specify the position of the transform.

Specify the orientation of the transform.

The Create Dependency dialog box

A dependency is a relationship between two joints, by either a factor or a complex formula.

Joint

Specifies the joint whose motion will be controlled by other joints.

Use LeadJoint and factor

Select this option to specify a lead joint and factor.

LeadJoint

Factor

Use Formula

Specifies the lead joint.

This list holds a double which denotes the extent to which the lead joint will control the main joint.

Select this option to enter a formula in the box.

Continues on next page

314

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.15 Create Mechanism

Continued

The Modify Mechanism dialog box

The Modify Mechanism dialog box contains the objects found in the Create

mechanism dialog box, as well as the following:

Joint Mapping

Set

Poses

Add

Edit

Remove

Set Transition Times

These boxes handle the joint mapping of the mechanism. When editing, the mechanism must be disconnected from its library.

The values must be integers from 1 – 6 in ascending order.

Click this button to set the joint mapping.

Displays the poses and their joint values.

Selecting a pose will move the mechanism to it in the graphics window.

Click this button to bring up the Create Pose dialog box for adding a pose.

Click this button to bring up the Modify Pose dialog box for editing a selected pose.

A SyncPose cannot be edited unless the mechanism is disconnected from its library.

Click this button to remove the selected pose.

A single SyncPose cannot be removed.

Click this button to edit the transition times.

The Create/Modify Pose dialog box

Pose Name

Home Pose

Launch Joint Jog Tool

Use Current

Reset Values

Joint Values

Specifies the name of the pose. If the pose is a SyncPose, this box is not editable.

The names "HomePosition" and "SyncPosition" are disallowed.

Select this box to specify the home pose of the mechanism. If selected, the non-editable pose name will be "HomePose".

Click this button to bring up the joint jog tool.

Click this button to set the current joint values in the Joint

Values group.

Click this button to reset the joint values in the Joint Values group to what they were when the dialog box was opened.

Specify the joint values of the pose.

The Set Transition Times dialog box

The Set Transition Times dialog box is designed like a distance table in a road atlas. The default values are zero.

From Pose

To Pose

Specifies the start of the transition for the named pose.

Specifies the end of the transition for the named pose.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

315

9 The Modeling Tab

9.16 Create Tool

9.16 Create Tool

Creating a tool

You can create a robot hold tool by using the Create Tool Wizard. The wizard allows you to easily create a tool from an existing part or by using a dummy part to represent a tool. To create a tool complete with tooldata, follow these steps:

1 Click Create Tool.

2 In the Tool Name box, enter a tool name and choose one of the following options:

Option

Use Existing

Use Dummy

Action

Select one of the existing parts from the list. The selected part will represent the tool graphics.

The selected part must be a single part. Parts with attachements cannot be selected.

A cone will be created to represent the tool.

3 Continue entering the Mass of the tool, the Center of Gravity and the Moment

of Inertia Ix, Iy, Iz, if these values are known. If you do not know the correct values, the tool can still be used for programming motions, but this data must be corrected before running the program on real robots or measuting cycle times.

Tip! If the tool is built from materials with a similar density, you can find the center of gravity by clicking the tool model using the Center of gravity snap mode.

4 Click Next to go the next page of the wizard.

5 In the TCP Name box, enter a name for the Tool Center Point (TCP). The default name is the same as the name of the tool. If creating several TCPs for one tool, each TCP must have a unique name.

6 Enter the position of the TCP relative to the world coordinate system, which represents the tool mounting point, by any of the methods below:

Method Description

Read values from existing target or frame

Click in the Values from Target/Frame box, then select the frame either in the graphics window or the

Paths&Targets browser.

Enter position and orientation manually.

In the Position and Orientation boxes, type the values.

NOTE: If Use Dummy Part is selected, the position value can not be 0,0,0. At least one coordinate has to be > 0 in order for a cone to be created.

7 Click the arrow right button to transfer the values to the TCP(s): box.

If the tool shall have several TCPs, repeat steps 5 to 7 for each TCP.

8 Click Done. The tool will be created and appear in the Objects browser and in the graphics window.

Continues on next page

316

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

9 The Modeling Tab

9.16 Create Tool

Continued

Creating tooldata for an existing geometry

To create tooldata for an existing geometry, follow these steps:

1 Make sure the robot in which to create the tooldata is selected.

2 Click Create Tool and select Use Existing and the imported tool from the list.

3 Enter the requested data in the boxes in the Create Tool Wizard.

4 Attach the tool by dragging it to the robot.

What to do next

To make the tool ready to use, do one of the following:

• To make the robot hold the tool, attach the tool to the robot.

• In the graphics window, check the position and orientation of the TCP. If it is incorrect, modify the values in the tool frame part of the tooldata.

• To simplify future usage of the created tool, save it as a library. On the File menu, click Save As Library. Browse to the folder where you want to store the tool component, enter a name for the tool component and click Save.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

317

This page is intentionally left blank

10 The Simulation Tab

10.1 Overview

10 The Simulation Tab

10.1 Overview

The Simulation tab

The Simulation tab contains the controls for setting up, configuring, controlling, monitoring and recording simulations.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

319

10 The Simulation Tab

10.2 Create Collision Set

10.2 Create Collision Set

Overview

A collision set contains two groups, Objects A and Objects B, in which you place the objects to detect any collisions between them. When any object in Objects A collides with any object in Objects B, the collision is displayed in the graphical view and logged in the output window. You can have several collision sets in the station, but each collision set can only contain two groups.

Creating a collision set

1 Click Create Collision Set to create a collision set in the Layout browser.

2 Expand the collision set and then drag one of the objects to the ObjectsA node to check for collisions.

If you have several objects you want to check for collisions with objects in the ObjectsB node, for example, the tool and the robot, drag all of them to the ObjectsA node.

3 Drag the objects to the ObjectsB node to check for collisions.

If you have several objects you want to check for collisions with objects in the ObjectsA node, for example, the work piece and the fixture, drag all of them to he ObjectsB node.

320

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.3 Simulation Setup

10.3 Simulation Setup

Overview

The Simulation Setup dialog box is used to perform the following two main tasks.

• Setting up the sequence and entry point in the robot program

• Creating simulation scenarios for different simulated objects

Prerequisites

To set up a simulation, the following conditions must be met:

• At least one path must have been created in the station.

• The paths to be simulated must have been synchronized to the virtual controller.

The Setup Simulation dialog box

The Setup Simulation dialog box consits of the following two tabs,

• Program Sequence

• Simulation Scenarios

Program Sequence

From this tab, you can perform the combined task of configuring the program sequence and program execution such as entry point, and running the execution mode.

The Program Sequence tab consists of the following:

Select Active Tasks

Execution Sequence

<Task Name>

<-

X arrow up arrow down

Available Procedures

Displays all running IRC5 controllers in the station along with the tasks.

Displays the procedures in the main entry routine of the task.

The sequence of the procedures shows the sequence of execution.

Click the arrow left button to transfer the selected procedure to the Main Sequence box.

The procedure will be added last to the sequence.

Click this button to remove the selected procedures or sequences from the Main sequence box.

Click the arrow up button to move the sequence up in the list in the Main Sequence box or in the Available Procedures box.

Click the arrow down button to move the sequence down in the list in the Main Sequence box or in the Available Proced-

ures box.

Displays all procedures available in the controller.

These procedures can be added to the execution sequence.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

321

10 The Simulation Tab

10.3 Simulation Setup

Continued

Entry point

Run mode

The task starts its execution in the routine specified by the

Entry point. You can setup several simulations at the same time.

1 Click Entry point, the Select entry point dialog box appears.

2 Click Select entry point for drop down to select the routine to be used as entry point . By default, the value is set to main.

3 Click Select module drop down to select the module in the task.By default, the value is set to Module1.

4 Click OK.

You can change the run mode between continuous and single cycle mode by toggling the radio buttons.

Continuous : In this mode, the main routine is executed over and over again until you stop the program.

Single : In this mode, the main routine is executed once and thereafter the program is stopped.

Simulation Scenarios

From this tab, you can create simulation scenarios containing different simulated objects and connect each scenario with a predefined state to ensure that the correct state is applied to all project objects before running the scenario.

If you want to simulate a specific part or segment of the cell where not all simulated objects in the cell are included, you can set up a new scenario and add only the objects needed for simulation.

The Simulation Scenarios tab consists of the following:

Scenarios

Simulated object

Saved State

Lists all station scenarios. By default, atleast one scenario is created when you create a station.

Select the check box to make the scenario active. Active scenarios cannot be deleted and there should always be one active scenario.

Add : Click Add to create a new scenario.

Remove : Click Remove to delete the selected scenario.

Click the scenario in the list view to rename it.

Displays all objects that can be part of a simulation.

NOTE! Objects that utilize simulation time can be part of a simulation. For example, Virtual Controllers and Smart Components.

When you create a new scenario, all objects are selected by default.

When you set the scenario to active and start the simulation, you can connect a saved state for each scenario and restore this state to all objects that are part of the state.

NOTE!

• The Saved State drop down contains all saved states in the station, as well as the entries with no state. By default, no state is connected to the scenario.

For more on Saved states, see

Saved States on page 263

.

Setting up a simulation

1 Click Simulation Setup to bring up the Setup Simulation dialog box.

2 From the Program Sequence tab, select the tasks to be active during simulation in the Select Active Tasks box.

Continues on next page

322

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.3 Simulation Setup

Continued

3 Select the run mode as either Continuous or Single Cycle.

4 In the Main Sequence box, select the execution sequence of the procedure in the tasks main entry routine.

5 From the Available Procedures list, transfer the procedures to be active in the simulation to the Main Sequence box by selecting them and clicking the left arrow button between the lists. (This creates a procedure call in the main procedure).

6 To start the simulation from procedure other than the actual Main procedure, click Entry point and set the entry point and module. By default, entry point is set to Main and module as Module1.

7 Click Apply to set the simulation. If you click OK, the simulation will be set and the dialog box will be closed.

Creating simulation scenarios

1 Click Simulation Setup to bring up the Setup Simulation dialog box.

2 From the Simulation Scenarios tab,

• Click Add to create a new scenario in the Screnarios box.

• Click Remove to delete the selected scenario from the Scenarios box.

NOTE! When you create a new scenario, by default, all objects are selected in the Scenarios box.

3 Select a saved state for the scenario from the Saved State drop down.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

323

10 The Simulation Tab

10.4 Event Manager

10.4 Event Manager

Creating an event

1 Click Event Manager.

2 Click Add to open the New Event Wizard.

3 Complete the New Event wizard to create the event.

Event manager main parts

eventman

Part

1

2

3

4

Description

The Task pane.

Here you create new events, or copy or delete existing events selected in the Event grid.

The Event grid.

Displays all events in the station. Here you select events to edit, copy or delete.

The Trigger editor.

Here you edit the properties of the events trigger. The upper part of the trigger editor is the same for all triggers, and the lower part adapts to the selected trigger type.

The Action editor.

Here you edit the properties of the events action. The upper part of the action editor is the same for all actions, and the lower part adapts to the selected action type.

The task pane parts

Part

Add

Delete

Copy

Refresh

Export

Import

Continues on next page

324

Description

Starts the Create New Event Wizard.

Deletes the event selected in the Event grid.

Copies the event selected in the Event grid.

Refreshes the Event manager.

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.4 Event Manager

Continued

The event grid columns

In the event grid, each row is a an event and the columns in the grid display their properties.:

Column

Activation

Trigger Type

Trigger System

Trigger Name

Trigger Parameter

Description

Displays whether the event is active or not.

On = The action is always carried out when the trigger event occurs.

Off = The action is not carried out when the trigger event occurs.

Simulation = The action is only carried out if the trigger event occurs when running a simulation.

Displays the type of condition that triggers the action.

I/O signals changed = Changes a digital I/O signal.

I/O Connection = Simulates the behavior of a Programmable

Logic Controller (PLC).

Collision = Starts or ends a collision or near-miss between objects in a collision set.

Simulation time = Sets the activation time.

Note: The Simulation time button is enabled once the activation is set to Simulation.

The trigger type cannot be changed in the trigger editor. If you want another trigger type than the current one, create a completely new event.

When the trigger type is I/O Signal Trigger, this column displays to which system the signal used as trigger belongs.

A dash (-) signifies a virtual signal.

The name of the signal or collision set used as trigger.

Displays the condition of the event under which triggering occurs.

0 = The I/O signal used as trigger switches to false.

1 = The I/O signal used as trigger switches to true.

Started = A collision starts within the collision set used as trigger.

Ended = A collision ends within the collision set used as trigger.

Near miss started = A near-miss starts within the collision set used as trigger.

Near miss ended = A near-miss ends within the collision set used as trigger.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

325

10 The Simulation Tab

10.4 Event Manager

Continued

Column

Action Type

Action System

Action Name

Action Parameter

Time

Description

Displays the action type that occurs in conjunction with the trigger

I/O Signal Action = Changes the value of a digital input or output signal.

Attach Object = Attaches an object to another.

Detach Object = Detaches an object from another.

Turn On/Off Simulation Monitor = Toggles the simulation monitor of a specific mechanism.

Turn On/Off Timer = Toggles the process timer.

Move Mechanism to Pose = Moves the selected mechanism to a predefined pose and thereafter sends a station signal.

Activates or deactivates the process timer.

Move Graphical Object = Moves a graphical object to a new position and orientation.

Show/Hide Graphical Object = Shows or hides the graphical object.

Do Nothing = No action occurs.

Multiple = The event triggers multiple actions, either all at once or one at a time, each time the trigger is activated. Each action can be viewed in the action editor.

When the action type is Change I/O, this column displays the system to which the signal to change belongs.

A dash (-) signifies a virtual signal.

Displays the name of the signal to change, when the action type is Change I/O.

Displays the condition after the action has occurred.

0 = The I/O signal will be set to false.

1 = The I/O signal will be set to true.

On = Turns the process timer on.

Off = Turns the process timer off.

Object1 -> Object2 = Displays the object to which another will be attached when the action type is Attach object.

Object1 <- Object2 = Displays the object from which another will be detached when the action type is Detach object.

Ended = A collision ends within the collision set used as trigger.

Near miss started = A near-miss starts within the collision set used as trigger.

Near miss ended = A near-miss ends within the collision set used as trigger.

Multiple = Signifies multiple actions.

Displays the time when the event trigger was executed.

Continues on next page

326

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.4 Event Manager

Continued

The trigger editor parts

In the trigger editor you set the properties of the trigger. The upper part of the editor is common for all types of triggers, and the lower part adapts to the trigger type at hand.

Parts common to triggers

Part

Activation

Comments

Description

Sets whether the event is active or not.

On = The action is always carried out when the trigger event occurs.

Off = The action is not carried out when the trigger event occurs.

Simulation = The action is only carried out if the trigger event occurs when running a simulation.

Text box for comments and notes about the event.

Parts specific to I/O signal triggers

Part

Active Controller

Signals

Trigger Condition

Description

Select the system to which the I/O to use as a trigger belongs.

Displays all signals that can be used as triggers.

For digital signals, sets whether the event shall trigger when the signals are set as true or false.

For analog signals, which are only available for station signals, the event shall trigger under any of the following conditions:

Greater than, Greater/Equal, Less than, Less/Equal, Equal

to, Not equal to.

Parts specific to I/O connection triggers

Part

Add

Remove

Add >

Remove

Delay (s)

Parts specific to Collision triggers

Part

Collision Type

Description

Opens a dialog box for adding an activator signal to the Activator Signals pane.

Removes a selected activator signal.

Opens a dialog box for adding an operator symbol to the Connections pane.

Removes a selected operator symbol.

Specifies the delay in seconds.

Collision set

Description

Set the kind of collision to use as trigger.

Started = Triggers when a collision starts.

Ended = Triggers when a collision ends.

Near miss started =Triggers when a near-miss starts.

Near miss ended = Triggers when a near-miss ends.

Select the collision set to use as trigger.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

327

10 The Simulation Tab

10.4 Event Manager

Continued

The action editor parts

In the action editor you set the properties of the actions for the event. The upper part of the editor is common to all types of actions, and the lower part adjusts to the selected action.

Parts common to all actions

Part

Add Action

Remove Action

Cyclic

Added Actions

Arrow

Description

Adds a new action that occurs when the triggering condition fulfills. You can add several different actions that either are performed at once or one at a time each time the event triggers.

The following types of actions are available:

Change I/O = Changes the value of a digital input or output signal.

Attach object = Attaches an object to another.

Detach object = Detaches and object from another.

Turn On/Off Timer = Activates or deactivates the process timer.

Do Nothing = No action occurs (might be useful for manipulating sequences of actions).

Removes the action selected in the Added Actions list.

When selected, the actions are performed one at a time each time the trigger occurs. When all actions in the list have been performed, the event will restart with the first action in the list.

When cleared, all actions are performed at once every time the trigger occurs.

Lists all actions of the event, in the order they will be executed.

Rearranges the order in which the actions are executed.

Parts specific to I/O Actions

Part

Active Controller

Signals

Action

Description

Displays all systems of the station. Select the system to which the I/O to change belongs.

Displays all signals that can be set.

Sets whether the event shall set the signals to true or false.

If the action is connected to an I/O Connection, this group will not be available.

Parts specific to Attach actions

Part

Attach object

Attach to

Update position / Keep

position

Flange index

Offset Position

Description

Select an object in the station to attach.

Select the object in the station to attach to.

Update position = Moves the local origin of the attached object to the attachment point of the other object when making the attachment. For mechanisms, the attachment point is the TCP or the flange; for other objects, it is the local origin.

Keep position = Keeps the current position of the object to attach when making the attachment.

If the mechanism you attach the object to has several flanges

(attachments points), select the one to use.

Optionally, specify an offset between the objects when making the attachment

Continues on next page

328 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

10 The Simulation Tab

10.4 Event Manager

Continued

Part

Offset Orientation

Description

Optionally, specify an offset between the objects when making the attachment

Parts specific to Detach actions

Part

Detach object

Detach from

Parts specific to Turn On/Off Timer actions

Part

Turn On/Off Timer

Description

Select an object in the station to detach.

Select the object in the station to detach from.

Parts specific to Turn On/Off Simulation Monitor actions

Part

Mechanism

Turn Simulation Monitor

On/Off

Description

Selects the mechanism.

Sets whether the action shall start or stop the simulation monitor function.

Description

Sets whether the action shall start or stop the process timer.

Parts specific to Move Mechanism to Pose actions

Part

Mechanism

Pose

Description

Selects the mechanism.

Selects between SyncPose and HomePose.

Station signal to set when

Pose reached

Lists the station signals that are sent after the mechanism reaches its pose.

Add Digital

Remove

Click this button to add a digital signal to the grid.

Click this button to remove a digital signal from the grid.

Parts specific to Move Graphical Object actions

Part

New Orientation

Description

Graphical Object to Move

Select a graphical object in the station to move.

New Position

Sets the new position of the object.

Sets the new orientation of the object.

Parts specific to Show/Hide Graphical Object actions

Part

Graphical Object

Show/Hide

Description

Select a graphical object in the station.

Sets whether the object is shown or hidden.

Parts specific for a Call VSTA Macro action

Part

Available Macros

Description

Displays all available macros in the station.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

329

10 The Simulation Tab

10.5 Station Logic

10.5 Station Logic

Introduction to Station Logic

The Station Logic has some of the characteristics of a Smart Component. It can be used to work with these characteristics on the station level.

The Station Logic editor consists of the following tabs similar to that of a Smart

Component editor:

• Compose

• Properties and Bindings

• Signals and Connections

• View

For more information on the characteristics of a Smart Component editor, see

Smart Component on page 260 .

Opening Station Logic

You can launch Station Logic in any of the following two ways:

• In the Simulation tab, click Reset and select Manage States.

• In the Layout browser, right-click the station and select Station Logic.

Differences between Station Logic and Smart Component

The following table lists some of the differences while working with Station Logic and a Smart Component:

Smart Component Station Logic

The Editor window consists of a text box displaying the description of the component that is used for modifying the text.

The Editor window do not have the description text box wherein the description can be modified.

The Compose tab has the following options:

• Child components

• Saved States

• Assets

The Compose tab has the following options:

• Child components

• Saved States

The Properties and Bindings tab has the following options:

• Dynamic Properties

• Property Bindings

The Properties and Bindings tab has the following options:

• Property Bindings

In the Signals and Connections tab, when working with Add or Edit I/O Connections, you do not have the option of selecting the

VCs in the station from the the Source Object and Target Object list.

You can create connections to and from I/O signals in a VC.

In the Signals and Connections tab, when working with Add or Edit I/O Connections, you have the option of selecting the VCs in the station from the the Source Object and

Target Object list.

330

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.6 Activate Mechanical Units

10.6 Activate Mechanical Units

To activate or deactivate mechanical units manually

1 Click Activate Mechanical Units to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the Activate Mechanical Units dialog box, select the check boxes for the mechanical units to set as active. When activating a mechanical unit that shares a common drive unit, the other mechanical unit sharing that drive unit will be deactivated automatically.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

331

10 The Simulation Tab

10.7 Simulation Control

10.7 Simulation Control

Running a simulation

1 Click Enable Process Timer to activate the process timer.

2 In the Simulation Control group,

Click...

Play/Resume

Play and select Record

to Viewer

Pause/Step

to...

start and resume the simulation.

• The Pause button is enabled once you start the simulation

• The Play button is changed to Resume once you pause the simulation.

• Click Resume to resume the simulation.

start the simulation and to record it to a Station Viewer.

The Save As dialog box appears where the simulation is saved.

pause and step the simulation.

• The Pause button is changed to Step once you start the simulation.

• Click Step to run the simulation in steps.

NOTE! You can set the simulation timestep. See

Options:Simulation:Accuracy on page 203 .

Reset

reset the simulation to its initial state. See

Resetting simulation on page 332

.

Note

The Record to Viewer option is a special recording mode that allow simulations created using Smart Components to be viewed in the Station

Viewer.

Resetting simulation

1 In the Simulation Control group, click Reset to reset the simulation.

2 Click Reset and select Save Current state to store states of objects and VCs to be used in a simulation scenario. For more information, see

Save Current

State on page 263

.

3 Click Reset and select Manage states to launch Station Logic. For more information, see

Station Logic on page 330 .

332

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.8 I/O Simulator

10.8 I/O Simulator

Setting I/O signals using the I/O Simulator

1 Click I/O Simulator. This opens the I/O simulator.

2 If the station contains several systems, select the appropriate one in the

Select System list.

3 In the Filter list and I/O Range list, make selections that display the signals to set. Depending on the filter used, you might also set a filter specification.

4 To change the value of a digital I/O signal, click it.

To change the value of an analog signal, type the new value in the value box.

The I/O Simulator window

With RobotStudio’s I/O simulator you view and manually set existing signals, groups and cross-connections during program execution, thus making it possible to simulate or manipulate the signals.

The I/O simulator displays the signals for one system at a time in groups of 16 signals. For handling large sets of signals, you can filter which signals to display and also create custom lists with favorite signals for quick access.

io_overv

Part

1

2

Description

Select System. Select the system whose signals you want to view.

Filter type. Select the type of filter to use.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

333

10 The Simulation Tab

10.8 I/O Simulator

Continued

4

5

6

7

Part

3

Types of signal filters

Filter

Board

Group

User List

Digital Inputs

Digital Outputs

Analog Inputs

Analog Outputs

Description

Filter Specification. Select the filter for limiting the signal display. For example, if Board is set as filter type, then you select the board whose signals you want to view.

Inputs. Displays all input signals that pass the applied filter.

If more than 16 signals pass, only 16 signals at a time are displayed. Then use the I/O range list to select the signals to view.

Outputs Displays all output signals that pass the applied filter. If more than

16 signals pass, only 16 signals at a time are displayed. Then use the I/O

range list to select the signals to view.

Edit Lists. Click this button to create or edit lists of favorite signals.

I/O Range. When more than 16 signals pass the filter, use this list to select the range of signals to display.

Description

Displays all signals on a specific board. To select a board, use the Filter Specification list.

Displays all signals that belong to a specific group. To select a group, use the Filter Specification list.

Displays all signals in a favorite list. To select a list, use the

Filter Specification list.

Displays all digital input signals of the system.

Displays all digital output signals of the system.

Displays all analog input signals of the system.

Displays all analog output signals of the system.

Signal icons

Digital signal with value 1.

value 1

Digital signal with value 0.

value zero

The cross in the upper right corner indicates that the signals are a cross-connection.

cross connection

The -1 in the upper right corner indicates that the signal is inverted.

inverted

Value box for groups or analog signals.

value box

334

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.9 Monitor

10.9 Monitor

The TCP Trace tab

Enable TCP Trace

Trace length

Trace Color

Alert color

Clear Trace

The Alerts tab

Select this check box to activate tracing of the TCP path for the selected robot.

Specify the maximum length of the trace in millimeters.

Displays the color of the trace when no alerts are activated. To change the color of the trace, click the colored box.

Displays the color of the trace when any of the alerts defined on the Alerts tab exceeds a threshold value. To change the color of the trace, click the colored box.

Click this button to remove the current trace from the graphics window.

Enable Simulation Alerts

Select this check box to activate simulation alerts for the selected robot.

Log Alerts to Output Window

Select this check box to see a warning message when a threshold value is exceeded. If TCP trace is not enabled, this is the only display of the alert.

TCP Speed

TCP Acceleration

Wrist Singularity

Joint Limits

Specify the threshold value for TCP speed alerts.

Specify the threshold value for TCP acceleration alerts.

Specify how close joint five can be to zero rotation before alerting.

Specify how close each joint can be to its limits before alerting.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

335

10 The Simulation Tab

10.10.1 Signal Setup

10.10 Signal Analyzer

10.10.1 Signal Setup

Overview

This feature allows you to configure the signals to be saved for the next simulation.

The signals are recorded from the controller information stream and are stored in the station.

Layout of Signal Setup

The Signal Setup window displays all the signals available for recording. It also displays the signals selected for recording.

The Signal Setup window has the following options:

• Select Signals view

• Current Setup view

• Refresh

Select Signals view

Displays all the available source signals. By default, the source tree is expanded.

In the source tree, you can select the check-box and add the signal to the Current

Setup view.

The signals are organized in a hierachical tree structure. You can expand or collapse the nodes (except the signal nodes which are at the lowest level) either from the context menu or double-click the node.

Current Setup view

Displays all the selected signals.

You can do the following from the Current Setup view:

• Right-click the signal and select Delete to remove the signal.

Refresh

The Signal Setup window, by default, will be updated automatically, if a signal is added or removed. However, in some cases, a manual refresh may be needed.

In the Signal Setup window, click Refresh to ensure all signals are displayed in the window.

Setting up the signals

Use this procedure to configure the signals to be saved for the next simulation:

1 Load a station with system. See New Station on page 192

.

2 In the Simulation tab, click Signal Analyzer and select Signal Setup.

The Signal Setup window appears.

3 In the Select Signals view, select the signals to be configured and stored for simulation.

The selected signals are added in the Current Setup window.

4 In the Current Setup view, right-click Station Database and select Enabled.

Continues on next page

336 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

10 The Simulation Tab

10.10.1 Signal Setup

Continued

This ensures that all selected signals will be recorded whenever a simulation is running.

Note

• Disabling the station database will stop the recording but stores the configuration and all completed recordings in the station.

Note

• You can analyze the recorded signals. See

Signal Analyzer on page 338

.

• You can organize the saved signal data. See

History on page 341 .

• Disable signal recording as soon as the analysis is completed to avoid the station file size to increase.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

337

10 The Simulation Tab

10.10.2 Signal Analyzer

10.10.2 Signal Analyzer

Overview

This feature helps to display and analyze signal data.

Using the Signal Analyzer

Use this procedure to analyze the recorded signal data:

1 Set up the signals to be analyzed. See

Setting up the signals on page 336 .

2 Record signal data by running a simulation. See

Setting up the signals on page 336 .

3 In the Simulation tab, click Signal Analyzer.

The Signal Analyzer window appears.

Note

• If the station does not contain any saved signal data, you will then have to setup the signals to analyze and record by running a simulation. See

Signal Setup on page 336

.

• You can organize the saved signal data. See

History on page 341 .

Layout of Signal Analyzer

The following figure shows the layout of the Signal Analyzer en1100000034_Layout_SignalAnalyzer

1

2

3

4

5

Toolbar

Digital signal values

Analog signal values

Events

Signals table

Displays a toolbar with options to configure and to work with the Signal Analyzer.

Displays a colored bar representing a segment where the signal is set.

Displays analog and numeric signal values.

Displays discrete events, such as EventLog messages.

Displays information about all recorded signals for the current data session.

Continues on next page

338

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.10.2 Signal Analyzer

Continued

Toolbar

The toolbar displays the following options:

Option

Drop-down list

Timer slider

Zoom in/out buttons

Live data button

Crosshair

Auto scale button

Line marker button

Save button

Description

For selecting the signal recording to be displayed. These signals are also available in Signal History. See

History on page 341 .

For moving the time forward and backward.

For zooming in / out the time axis.

For enabling data to be shown live, that is, as recorded during a simulation.

For displaying the crosshairs following the mouse.

For enabling / disabling vertical axis autoscaling.

For displaying the line markers for each sample in the analog

/ numeric graph.

For exporting the data to a file.

The data can be saved in Microsoft Excel 2007 format and tab delimited text format.

Digital signal values

It displays one row per digital signal, showing the signal state over time. A solid colored bar indicates the signal is set (value=1), otherwise the signal is cleared

(value=0). The signal name is displayed to the left.

NOTE! Move the mouse over the colored bars to view additional information like the time stamps when the signal was set and reset.

Analog signal values

It displays a 2D line graph for each analog signal. It consists of the following:

• Left-side vertical axis

• Horizontal axis displaying time in seconds

• Plot area displaying the signal graphs

• Optional right-side vertical axis.

NOTE! You can configure the individual signals can be configured to use the right-side vertical axis scale from the signals table at the bottom of the window.

This axis is hidden by default.

NOTE! The following actions can be performed in this segment:

• Scale the vertical axes: If you select the autoscale button in the toolbar, then the vertical axes will automatically scale to ensure that the line graphs are visible. You can modify the vertical scale using the mouse if the cursor is over the axis value area. This automatically deselects the autoscale button.

• Pan and Zoom time axis: If the cursor is over the central, main area of the plot, then you can scale, pan, and zoom the time axis using the mouse.

Events

It displays one row per selected event category. Each event is indicated with a diamond shaped icon. Click this icon to display a popup with more information about the event.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

339

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

10 The Simulation Tab

10.10.2 Signal Analyzer

Continued

Signals table

Displays information about each recorded signal. This enables you to configure settings for each signal such as color, visibility, whether to use left or right vertical axis and so on.

340

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.10.3 History

10.10.3 History

Overview

This feature displays and helps in organizing saved signal recordings of the current

RobotStudio station.

Layout of Signal History

You can do the following from the Signal History window:

• Click the column header to sort the history in ascending or descending order.

• Click the drop-down to group the history as View By Today or View by Order.

Organizing the Signal History

Use this procedure to organize the signal history:

1 Create a saved signal data in the station. See

Setting up the signals on page 336 .

2 In the Simulation tab, click Signal Analyzer and select History.

The Signal History window with all the stored signal history elements are displayed.

Note

The signal history elements in the Signal History window is updated automatically whenever the signals are setup and the simulation is started

/ stopped.

3 In the Signal History window, right-click a history element and select:

Analyze: To open the Signal Analyzer window.

Export: To save selected history elements to a file.

Delete: To remove the selected signal recording permanently.

Rename: To rename the signal recording.

Note

Disable signal recording as soon as the analysis is completed to avoid the station file size to increase.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

341

10 The Simulation Tab

10.11 AutoPlace WorkObject

10.11 AutoPlace WorkObject

Overview

This feature provides the best optimal solution for the path placement and targets within the defined workobject grid. This minimizes the cycle time and increases the productivity of robot cell.

Prerequisite

You should have a VC running with a robot task and a sequence of move instructions in a path ready for simulation.

Note

You cannot use AutoPlaceWorkObject feature on the default 'wobj0'.

Using AutoPlace WorkObject

The following procedure describes the AutoPlace WorkObject feature in

RobotStudio:

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select the path for which the AutoPlace

WorkObject functionality is to be used.

2 Right-click and select AutoPlace WorkObject.

The AutoPlaceWorkObject dialog box appears and the workobjects used in the selected path is displayed in the graphics window.

3 Enter the values in StepSize and X, Y, and Z to set the grid range.

A preview of the allowable range appears as a box in the graphics window.

4 Click Initialize once the grid values are set.

Note

• The workobject locations with non-reachable targets are removed and are displayed as red in the graphics window.

• The workobject locations with reachable targets are displayed as green in the graphics window. It displays the grid distance X, Y and Z and process time.

5 Select a row from the grid view.

The corresponding frame is highlighted in the graphics window.

6 Right-click the selected row and select Remove from the context menu.

This helps you analyze and remove the alternatives from the grid view.

Continues on next page

342

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.11 AutoPlace WorkObject

Continued

7 Click Execute.

Note

• The alternatives listed in the grid view are evaluated by adjusting the workobjects accordingly and running a simulation.

• The evaluated solutions are updated with process time continuously in the grid view. When the last solution is evaluated, the solutions are sorted in the descending order of process time.

• In case, you want to interrupt the evaluation process, click Break.

8 You can now do one of the following:

• Double-click a row (evaluated solution) from the grid view to test run the solution.

• Click Apply to apply the evaluated solution.

• Click Cancel.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

343

10 The Simulation Tab

10.12 Record Movie

10.12 Record Movie

Prerequisites

For optimal results, first configure the options, see

Options:General:Screen

Recorder on page 199 .

Recording the screen

1 In the Record Movie group, click Record application to capture the entire application window, or Record graphics to capture just the graphics window.

2 When you are done, click Stop Recording. A dialog box appears in which you may choose to save the recording or discard it.

3 Click View Recording to playback the latest capture.

Recording the simulation

1 In the Record Movie group, click Record Simulation to record the next simulation to a video clip.

2 When you are done, click Stop Recording.

The simulation is saved in a default location which is displayed in the output window.

3 Click View Recording to playback the recording.

The recording of simulation starts when you click Play in the Simulation tab.

Note

Record Simulation gives better output quality than Record application or Record

graphics.

344

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.13.1 Conveyor Tracking

10.13 Conveyor Tracking Mechanism

10.13.1 Conveyor Tracking

Overview

Conveyor tracking is the function where the robot follows a workobject mounted on a moving conveyor.

This section describes how to create a conveyor, add and remove objects to and from the conveyor, create targets during tracking, and simulate conveyor.

For more information, see the Application manual - Conveyor tracking.

Conveyor tracking mechanism

This procedure describes the workflow for making a conveyor tracking system work in RobotStudio.

1 Create a conveyor mechanism. See

Create Conveyor mechanism on page 310 .

2 Setup the conveyor. See

Setting up a conveyor on page 209 and

Encoder Unit on page 414

.

NOTE! To setup a conveyor tracking station with two robots working on the same conveyor. See

Setting up a conveyor tracking station with two robots working on the same conveyor on page 75 .

3 Jog the conveyor as well as the robot and teach some targets. See

Mechanism Joint Jog on page 442

.

4 Simulate the conveyor. See

Conveyor Simulation on page 346

.

5 Remove objects from conveyor. See

Removing objects from conveyor on page 210 .

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

345

10 The Simulation Tab

10.13.2 Conveyor Simulation

10.13.2 Conveyor Simulation

Running a conveyor simulation

1 Create Action Instructions. See

Action Instruction on page 239

.

NOTE! Create the following five action instructions along with Move instructions:

ConfL\Off,ActUnit CNV1,WaitWObj Workobject_1,

DropWObjWorkobject_1 and DeactUnit CNV1

.

The following program is an example showing how the sequence of instructions appears:

Continues on next page

346 action_i

NOTE! If an error occurs while executing the program, the controller reaches

Guard state. In this state, RobotStudio cannot execute the program during the next simulation. To recover from this state, open the Control Panel and switch to Manual Mod and then to Auto Mode.

For more information, see Application manual - Conveyor Tracking.

2 Synchronize to VC. See

Synchronize to VC on page 406

.

3 Set up the Simulation. See

Simulation Setup on page 321 .

4 Click Simulation.

The Conveyor Simulation dialog appears.

5 In the Conveyor Speed box, set the speed during simulation.

NOTE! To move the conveyor in the backward direction, select the Reverse check box.

6 Click Apply.

7 Click Play to run the simulation.

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

10 The Simulation Tab

10.13.2 Conveyor Simulation

Continued

NOTE! The conveyor speed and direction can be changed while running the simulation.

Note

To jump the conveyor back to the start position, click Reset. This button remains enabled as long as the station has at least one conveyor.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

347

This page is intentionally left blank

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.1 Overview

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.1 Overview

The Online and Offline tabs

The Online tab contains the controls for managing the real controller whereas the

Offline tab contains the controls for synchronization, configuration and tasks assigned to the virtual controller.

The Online and Offline tabs can be broadly classified into the following three categories:

• Common features in Online and Offline tabs

• Online specific features

• Offline specific features

For more information on working with the Online tab, see

Working online on page 153

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

349

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.1 Events

11.2 Common features in Online and Offline tabs

11.2.1 Events

The Event Log tab

event-re

Parts

Continues on next page

350

1 Category

This list contains the following different event categories.

NOTE! The default category Common includes all categories.

• Common

• Operational

• System

• Hardware

• Program

• Motion

• IO & Communication

• User

• Internal

• Process

• Configuration

• RAPID

2 Auto Update

This checkbox is checked by default, meaning that new events will appear in the list when they occur. Clearing the checkbox disables this automatic update. Checking it again, however, will fetch and display the events missed while it was cleared.

3 Clear

This button clears the current event record. This does not affect the event log of the controller, which can be retrieved again by clicking the Get button.

4 Get

This button retrieves and displays all events currently stored in the controller.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.1 Events

Continued

5 Save

This button saves the event records of the selected event categories to log files on the computer.

6 Log to file

This checkbox enables all events currently in the Common Event Log to be saved to a log file on the computer. If it remains checked the log file will be updated with all new events as they occur.

7 Event Information

This box displays information about the event selected in the event list.

8 Event Record

The event record is shown as a list of events of a selected category. The severity of the event is indicated by color: blue for information, yellow for warning and red for an error which needs to be corrected in order to proceed.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

351

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.2 RAPID editor

11.2.2 RAPID editor

Buttons on the RAPID editor toolbar

The table below describes the buttons on the RAPID editor toolbar:

Button Description

Start

Starts the execution of all normal RAPID tasks in the system.

xx060013

Stop

Stops the execution of all normal RAPID tasks in the system.

xx060014

Step over

Starts and executes one statement in all normal tasks in the system.

xx060015

Step in

Starts and executes into a routine, while stopping at the beginning of the routine.

xx060016

Step out

Executes all remaining statements of the current routine, and stops after the call to the current routine.

xx060017

Ignore breakpoints

Ignores all breakpoints during simulation.

xx060018

Toggle breakpoint

Toggles a breakpoint at the cursor.

xx060019

Apply changes

Applies the changes to the module in the program editor to the system and also checks the program.

xx060020

Print

Prints the contents of the program editor.

xx060021

About RAPID Editor

The RAPID editor enables you to view and edit programs loaded into the controller program memory. With the RAPID editor you edit the RAPID code of the program's modules. Each module you open will appear in a program editor window of its own, where you type in the code. For more information, see

Using the RAPID editor on page 135

.

Continues on next page

352 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.2 RAPID editor

Continued

RAPID Editor functions

RAPID editor has the following functions:

• Cut, copy, paste and drag and drop - supports clipboard handling of rich text.

• Undo and redo - supports undo and redo operations.

• Go To Line - navigates to a specific line within the Editor using a keyboard shortcut.

• Selection modes - possibility to select text by character, row and column.

• Line numbers - appears in the left margin of the editor.

• Keyboard shortcuts - see

Keyboard shortcuts on page 70

.

Programming functions

The RAPID Editor has the following RAPID specific functions.

Function

Syntax coloring

Parameter Info

Pick list

Complete word

Select Routine

Description

Writes each part of the code with a specific color, based on its syntactic function in RAPID.

Helps to quickly recognize words and misspellings.

The automatic coloring of the text is based on the syntax of the RAPID language.

You can change the text color of the RAPID editor. For more information, see

Options:Robotics:Editor on page 200

.

Shows available parameters in a tool tip for the RAPID instructions you type.

Helps to type in a procedure or function call in the editor by showing all the optional and required arguments that must be specified.

Helps to navigate through a hierarchy of small code snippets which can be inserted at the insertion position.

Automatically completes the keyword by predicting the keyword or identifier that you want to type in without you actually typing.

Is a combo box containing all routines in the RAPID module of the editor.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

353

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.3.1 New Module

11.2.3 RAPID File Management

11.2.3.1 New Module

Creating a new RAPID module

1 Click New Module to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the Module name field, enter a module name.

3 Select either Program or System as the Module type.

4 Select one of the following options:

If you select...

NOSTEPIN

READONLY

VIEWONLY

then the module...

cannot be entered during stepwise execution.

cannot be modified.

cannot be modified, but the attribute can be removed.

5 Click Create.

354

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.3.2 Load Module

11.2.3.2 Load Module

Loading a RAPID module

1 Click Load Module to bring up a dialog box.

2 Browse to the location of the module to be loaded to your station and click

Open.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

355

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.3.3 Save Module As

11.2.3.3 Save Module As

Saving a module

1 Click Save Module As to bring up a dialog box.

2 Browse to the location of the module to be loaded to your station and click

Save.

356

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.3.4 Load Program

11.2.3.4 Load Program

Loading a RAPID program

1 Click Load Program to bring up a dialog box.

2 Browse to the location of the program to be loaded to your station and click

Open.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

357

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.3.5 Save Program As

11.2.3.5 Save Program As

Saving a program

1 Click Save Program As to bring up a dialog box.

2 Browse to the location where you want to save your program, and click Save.

358

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.4 Rapid Tasks

11.2.4 Rapid Tasks

Prerequisites

You must also be logged on to the controller as a user who has either of the grants

Full access or Execute program.

Different states

The following table shows different states when actions are not possible in the

Task Window:

If...

RobotStudio gives a message that informs the user that...

the user does not have the grant Execute program or Full access the operation is not possible.

the user changes from manual mode to automatic mode, or vice versa, the user loses the write access and the operation is not possible.

the motors are in off state the Start operation is not possible.

The safety system of the controller

It is not possible to override the controller’s safety system, that is, you cannot stop a background task (Static and SemiStatic) that has the TrustLevel set to another value than NoSafety.

For detailed information about the different TrustLevel values, see Technical reference manual - system parameters.

The Task window

The Task window is divided in two parts, one left part with functionality (1) to operate the task(s) and one right part (2) with the task list and information about the tasks.

taskwind

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

359

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.4 Rapid Tasks

Continued

3

4

If the prerequisites are met, you can operate the task, such as start and stop the task, move the program pointer to main and set the run mode. This part will be opened as default when you open the Task Window, but you can hide this part.

The following table describes the different buttons in the functionality part:

The show/hide button. Shows/hides the functionality part.

The start button. Starts the selected tasks.

Note! You can start Normal tasks, but you can only start a Static or SemiStatic task if the TrustLevel is set to NoSafety.

8

9

5

6

7 xx020000

Danger!

When starting a task, the manipulator axes may move very quickly and sometimes in unexpected ways! Make sure no personnel is near the manipulator arm!

The stop button. Stops the selected tasks.

Note! You can stop Normal tasks, but you can only stop a Static or SemiStatic task if the TrustLevel is set to NoSafety.

The Move PP to Main button. Moves the program pointer to Main. Applies to all selected tasks.

The Task names check box. Selected check box indicates that the task will be operated.

The Select buttons. Select All or None of the tasks.

The Run Mode buttons. Set run mode to Continuous or Single cycle.

The Run Mode indicates the mode of the controller.

Task Name

Task in Foreground

Type

Mech. Unit

Run Mode

Program Name

Module Name

Routine Name

The task name.

Which task that is in the foreground, for example main.

Gives indirectly the priority.

Normal/Static/SemiStatic:

• Normal: The task reacts on START/STOP requests. The task is stopped when an emergency stop occurs. The

TrustLevel for the Normal task corresponds to the Trust-

Level NoSafety.

• Static: At warm start of the controller, the task restarts at the current position.

• SemiStatic: The task restarts from the beginning at all warm starts of the controller.

Default value is SemiStatic.

Note!

If the type of task is Static or SemiStatic, the following is valid only for the Task Window : If the TrustLevel is set to NoSafety, the task can be stopped by the stop button on the Task Window.

If the TrustLevel is set to SysFail, SysHalt or SysStop, the task cannot be stopped.

If the task has robot specific instructions, this specifies which robots they are valid for.

Continuous or single cycle.

The name of the program in the specific task.

The current module name.

The current routine name.

Continues on next page

360

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.4 Rapid Tasks

Continued

State Ready/Running/Stopped:

• Ready: The program has no PP (program pointer). To get a PP to the program, click the Move PP to main button.

• Running: The program is running.

• Stopped: The program has stopped.

You can operate the task list as following:

• All columns can be adjusted in the standard windows way - drag or double-click between the column headers.

• If all the columns do not fit into the window, a horizontal scroll bar will occur.

• If all the tasks do not fit into the window, a vertical scroll bar will occur.

• You can sort the task information in all columns by clicking the column heading.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

361

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.5 Adjust Robtargets

11.2.5 Adjust Robtargets

Overview

This feature helps in recalculating and changing the robtarget data (tooldata and workobject data) while maintaining the joint angles of the robot. The robtarget data related to the specified source tooldata and workobject will be adjusted for usage with the new tooldata and workobject.

Prerequisites

• You should have a controller (virtual or real) running with one or more modules containing procedures with a sequence of move instructions expressed with a defined tool and workobject.

• You should have RobotStudio Premium license to use this feature.

Note

Inline targets, arrays, event records, and offsets are not supported. Relative tool is also not supported. Circular move instruction (MoveC) is supported.

Using Adjust Robtargets

The following procedure describes the Adjust Robtargets feature in RobotStudio:

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select the module or task to be updated.

2 Right-click and select Adjust Robtargets.

The Robtargets Adjust dialog box appears.

Note

Alternatively, from the Offline or Online tab, select Adjust Robtargets to launch the Robtargets Adjust dialog box.

3 Select task from the Task drop-down list and module from the Module drop-down list.

Note

In the Module drop-down list, you can either select a particular module or

<ALL> to update.

4 Select the source robtarget data (that is, the data defined in the selected task) from Old tool data and Old wobjdata drop-down list.

5 Select the destination robtarget data (that is, new tooldata and workobject) from New tool data and New wobjdata drop-down list.

6 Click Execute.

Execute will be enabled only if source robtarget data (that is, old tooldata and workobject) and destination robtarget data (that is, new tooldata and workobject) are different.

Continues on next page

362

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Limitations

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.5 Adjust Robtargets

Continued

7 The module searches for move instructions that use tool or workobject and recalculates the robtarget data for the new tooldata and workobject.

Note

For example, a Select "tool0" as the source tool and "wobj0" as the source workobject b Select "toolb" as the new tool and "wobjb"as the new workobject.

c Click Execute.

Robtargets of "tool0" and 'wobj0" will be replaced with new robtargets which corresponds to the same robot configuration (all joint angles will be the same) but with the new tool "toolb" and "wobjb".

Note

By default, the Update instruction checkbox is selected. The robtargets of the source tool or workobject is also changed to the new tool or workobject.

If the Update instruction checkbox is not selected, then the robtargets of the source tool or workobject is not changed and are only recalculated for new tool or workobject.

If a robtarget is used more than once but with different tools or workobjects, then a message Target is referenced is dispayed in the output window.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

363

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.6 RAPID Profiler

11.2.6 RAPID Profiler

Overview

This helps to analyze the execution times on procedure level, identify critical procedures and report RAPID execution.

Prerequisites

• You should have RobotStudio Premium license to use this feature.

• You should have a controller with one or more executable tasks running.

Using RAPID Profiler

Depending on the RobotWare version, the RAPID Profiler is executed in one of the following methods.

• For controller systems with RobotWare versions prior to 5.14, the RAPID instructions SpyStart and SpyStop must be inserted at the RAPID execution start and end, respectively. When the program is run, a Spy log file is generated. You can open the file for analysis by the RAPID Profiler. Use the

RAPID Profiler menu option Browse for Spy log to open the log file. For more about Spy instructions, see Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions,

Functions and Data types.

NOTE! When the RAPID Profiler is used to analyze a log file, there is no information about in which procedure the SpyStart command is executed. The triggering procedure defaults to <SpyStart Procedure>.

• For RobotWare version 5.14 or later, the log file can be generated automatically. Activate the RAPID Profiler and run the program of the controller. When the program execution stops, the results are presented to the user.

The following procedure describes the RAPID Profiler feature in RobotStudio:

364

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.7 Inputs / Outputs

11.2.7 Inputs / Outputs

The I/O system window

From the I/O system you can view and set input and output signals.

Parts

en0900000926_IO_window

1 The Name column

This column shows the name of the signal. The name is set by the I/O unit's configuration and cannot be changed from the I/O system.

2 The Type column

This column shows which type of signal it is, by using any of the abbreviations described below. The signal type is set by the I/O unit's configuration and cannot be changed from the I/O system.

Abbreviation

DI

DO

AI

AO

GI

GO

Description

Digital input signal

Digital output signal

Analog input signal

Analog output signal

Group of signals, working as one input signal

Group of signals, working as one output signal

3 The Value column

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

365

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.7 Inputs / Outputs

Continued

This column shows the value of the signal. The value can be changed by double-clicking the signal row.

4 The Logical State column

This column shows whether the signal is simulated or not. When a signal is simulated, you specify a value that overrides the actual signal. Changing the logical state by turning the simulation on or off can be done from the I/O system.

5 The Unit column

This column shows to which I/O unit the signal belongs. This is set by the

I/O unit's configuration and cannot be changed from the I/O system.

6 The Bus column

This column shows to which I/O bus the signal belongs. This is set by the

I/O bus' configuration and cannot be changed from the I/O system.

7 The Information column

This column shows which signals will not be updated.

366

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.8 ScreenMaker

11.2.8 ScreenMaker

Overview

ScreenMaker is a tool in RobotStudio for developing custom screens. It is used to create customized FlexPendant GUIs without the need to learn Visual Studio development environment and .NET programming.

For more information on ScreenMaker, see

The ScreenMaker tab on page 473

.

Prerequisites

To use ScreenMaker, you should have:

• RobotStudio with Premium license.

• RobotWare FlexPendant Interface option enabled. See

Testing on Virtual controller/Real controller on page 367 .

• Microsoft .NET Compact Framework 2.0 installed.

For more information on the system requirements, hardware requirements, and the supported Operating Systems, see RobotStudio Release Notes.

Testing on Virtual controller/Real controller

RobotWare FlexPendant Interface option is required for ScreenMaker applications.

NOTE! RobotWare PC Interface option is required only when using ScreenMaker for Robots on a LAN (to get the data from the controller, bind, and deploy). If there is no PC Interface option, service port can be used to design and deploy screens.

en0900000723_WithPCInterface

PC Interface option is needed

en0900000724_WithoutPCInterface

PC Interface option is not needed

Launching ScreenMaker

You can launch ScreenMaker either from the Offline tab or from the Online tab.

1 In the Offline or Online tab, click ScreenMaker.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

367

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.8 ScreenMaker

Continued

The ScreenMaker appears as a tab in the RobotStudio ribbon.

2 Click ScreenMaker tab to launch ScreenMaker.

If launched from the Offline tab...

If launched from the Online tab...

the connection to all connected VCs can be estabished.

the connection to all connected real controllers can be established.

the option Online appears in the Project context menu. Select this option to switch from Offline mode to Online mode.

the option Offline appears in the Project context menu. Select this option to switch from Online mode to Offline mode.

Note

For more information, see

Managing ScreenMaker projects on page 487

.

368

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.9 Restart

11.2.9 Restart

Restarting a VC in Offline mode

1 In the Layout browser, select the controller to restart.

2 Click Restart and then select one of the following options:

Warmstart

I-start

P-start

Restarts the VC and activates the changes made to the system.

Restarts the VC with the current system and the default settings.

Restarts the VC with the current system and reinstalls

RAPID.

Restarting a real controller in Online mode

1 In the Layout browser, select the controller to restart.

2 Click Restart and then select one of the following options:

Warmstart

Advanced

Restarts the real controller and activates the changes made to the system.

The controller can be restarted with the following advanced restart options:

I-start

P-start

X-start

C-start

B-start

For more information, see

Advanced restart options on page 85

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

369

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.10.1 Backing up a system

11.2.10 Backup and Restore

11.2.10.1 Backing up a system

Overview

When backing up a system you copy all the data needed to restore the system to its current state:

• Information about software and options installed on the system.

• System's home directory and all its content.

• All robot programs and modules in the system.

• All configuration and calibration data of the system.

Prerequisites

Creating a Backup

To create a backup, follow these steps:

1 In the Online or Offline browser, select the system you want to backup.

2 Click Backup and select Create Backup.

The Create Backup dialog box appears.

3 Enter a new backup name and specify a location for the backup, or keep the default ones.

4 Click Backup.

The progress of the backup is displayed in the Output window.

Result

To backup a system you must have:

• Write access to the controller

• Logged on to the controller with appropriate grants. For more information, see

User Authorization on page 158

.

When the backup is complete you will have a folder with the name of the backup in the specified location. This folder contains a set of subfolders which all together comprises the backup:

Folder

Backinfo

Home

Rapid

Syspar

Description

Contains information necessary for re-creating the system's software and options from the mediapool.

Contains a copy of the system’s home directory content.

Contains one subfolder for each task in the system’s program memory. Each of these task folders contains separate folders for program modules and system modules.

Contains the system's configuration files.

Continues on next page

370

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.10.1 Backing up a system

Continued

CAUTION

If the content of the Backup folder is changed, it is not possible to restore the system from backup.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

371

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.10.2 Restoring a system from backup

11.2.10.2 Restoring a system from backup

Overview

When restoring a system from backup, the current system gets the same content as when the backup was performed. Restoring a system replaces the following contents in the current system with the content from the backup:

• All RAPID programs and modules in the system.

• All configuration and calibration data of the system.

NOTE! The system's home directory and all its content are copied from the backup to the current system.

Prerequisites

To restore a system you must have:

• Write access to the controller.

• Logged on to the controller with appropriate grants. For more information, see

User Authorization on page 158

.

Restoring a system

Note

Before proceeding, make sure that the system from the backup is compatible with the controller you are restoring.

To restore a system, follow these steps:

1 In the Online or Offline browser, select the system you want to restore.

2 Click Backup and select Restore Backup.

The Restore from Backup dialog box appears.

3 In the Restore from Backup dialog box, select which backup to use for restoring the system.

4 Click Restore.

The progress of the restore appears in the Output window. The controller is automatically restarted to load the restored system.

If the system from the backup does not originate from the controller you are restoring, you get the following message about the mismatch.

en0900001061_Mismatch

372

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.11 System Builder

11.2.11 System Builder

Functions of the System Builder

For procedures using the various functions of the System Builder, see

System

Builder Overview on page 160

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

373

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.12 Configuration editor

11.2.12 Configuration editor

Configuration editor

From the Configuration Editor you view and edit the system parameters of a specific topic in a controller. The Instance Editor is a complementary editor with which you edit the details of a type instance (a row in the Configuration Editor's instance list).

The Configuration Editor has a direct communication with the controller. This means that changes you make are applied to the controller as soon as you complete the command.

With the Configuration Editor, including the Instance Editor, you can:

• view types, instances, and parameters

• edit instances and parameters

• copy and paste instances within a topic

• add and delete instances

Layout of the Configuration Editor

configu2

1 The Type name list displays all available configuration types for the selected topic. The list of types is static. This means you cannot add, delete or rename types.

2 The Instance list displays all system parameters of the type selected in the

Type name list. Each row in the list is an instance of the system parameter type. The columns show each specific parameter and its value for each instance of the parameter type.

The Configuration editor has the following options:

• Controller

• I/O

• Communication

• Motion

• Man-machine communication

• Add Signals

Continues on next page

374

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Controller

IO en0900000994_Controller

Communication en0900000995_IO

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.12 Configuration editor

Continued en0900000993_Communication

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

375

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.12 Configuration editor

Continued

Motion en0900000997_Motion

Man-machine information

Add Signals en0900000996_MMI en0900000992_AddSignals

Type of Signal

Continues on next page

376

Defines the type of signal.

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.12 Configuration editor

Continued

Signal Base Name

Assigned to Unit

Defines the name for one or more signals.

Defines the I/O unit to which the signal belongs.

Signal Identification Label Optionally, offers filtering and sorting based on this category.

Number of Signals

Start Index

Defines the number of signals to add in a range

Defines the index (number) to start the range with.

Step

Unit Mapping Start

Defines the number which the index should increase with.

Defines the bits in the I/O memory map of the assigned unit to which the signal is mapped.

Optionally, offer filtering and sorting based on this category.

Category

Access Level Defines the write access to I/O signals for categories of I/O controlling clients connected to the robot controller.

Specifies the I/O signal value to be used at the start.

Default Value

Value at System and Power

Failure

Specifies whether the output I/O signal should keep its current value or take the I/O signal's default value in case of system failure or at a power fail.

Store Value at Power Failure

Specifies if the I/O signal should be set to the value stored in the permanent memory pool or not at the start.

Invert Physical Value Applies an inversion between the physical value of the signal and its logical representation in the system.

NOTE! You must have write access to the controller to be able to open the add signal window.

Layout of the Instance editor

instance

1 The Parameter list displays the parameters and their value for the open instance.

2 The Value box displays the type of parameter and the value of the parameter.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

377

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.12 Configuration editor

Continued

3 The Restriction box displays the restrictions for the parameter. The restrictions hasve to be fulfilled to update the controller database.

4 The Limits box displays the limits for the parameter.

Icon Description

Editable parameter editable

Parameter that is not applicable for this instance and therefore not editable.

non-appl

Parameter that is read-only.

readonly

378

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.13 Load Parameters

11.2.13 Load Parameters

Prerequisite

You must have write access to the controller.

Loading a configuration file

1 In the Online and Offline browser, select the system and expand the

Configuration node.

2 Click Load Parameters to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the dialog box, select how you want to combine the parameters in the configuration file to load with the existing parameters:

If you want to...

then select...

replace the entire configuration of the topic with the one in the configuration file.

Delete existing parameters before loading

add new parameters from the configuration file to the topic, without modifying the existing ones.

Load parameters if no duplicates

add new parameters from the configuration file to the topic and update the existing ones with values from the configuration file. Parameters that only exist in the controller and not in the configuration file will not be changed at all.

Load parameters and replace duplicates

4 Click Open and browse to the configuration file to load. Then click Open again.

5 In the information box, click OK to confirm that you want to load the parameters from the configuration file.

6 When the loading of the configuration file is finished, close the Select mode dialog box.

If a restart of the controller is necessary for the new parameters to take affect, you will be notified of this.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

379

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.14 Save Parameters

11.2.14 Save Parameters

Overview

The system parameters of a configuration topic can be saved to a configuration file, stored on the PC or any of its network drives.

The configuration files can then be loaded into a controller. They are thereby useful as backups, or for transferring configurations from one controller to another.

File-naming conventions

The configuration files should be named with a name that relates to their corresponding topics. When saving configuration files, the correct name for each file will be suggested by default.

Saving a configuration file

1 In the Offline or Offline browser, select the system and expand the

Configuration node.

2 Click Save Parameters and select the topic to save to a file and click Save.

3 In the Save As dialog box, browse for the folder to save the file in.

4 Click Save.

Saving several configuration files

1 Select the Configuration node.

2 Click Save System Parameters.

3 In the Save System Parameters dialog box, select the topics to save to files.

Then click Save.

4 In the Browse for Folder dialog box, browse for the folder to save the files in.

Then click OK.

The selected topics will now be saved as configuration files with default names in the specified folder.

380

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.15 Safety Configuration

11.2.15 Safety Configuration

Overview

For information on safety configuration, see Application manual - SafeMove and

Application manual - Electronic Position Switches.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

381

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.2.16 RAPID Watch window

11.2.16 RAPID Watch window

Overview

The RAPID Watch window displays the variable status during the program execution. It has the following tabs:

Tab

Name

Value

Type

Source

Description

Displays variable name

Displays variable value

Displays type of datatype

Displays system name

On the RAPID Watch window, right-click to display the following context menu:

Item

Cut

Copy

Paste

Delete Watch

Select All

Clear All

Refresh

Description

Cuts the variable value

Copies the variable value

Pastes the variable value

Deletes the watch item

Selects all the variable value

Clears all the variable value

Updates the variable value

Note

When running a program in continuos execution mode, the contents of RAPID

Watch window does not update until program execution stops.

To manually refresh the variable values, click Refresh from the context menu.

382

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.1 Add Controller

11.3 Online specific features

11.3.1 Add Controller

Connecting to a controller

You can connect to a controller in the following two ways:

• Add Controller - For adding available controllers to the network

• One Click Connect - For connecting to the service port of the controller

Note

To use RobotStudio in Online mode for connecting to a real controller, the controller system must have the option PC-interface.

Add a controller

1 In the Online tab, click Add Controller to bring up a dialog box in which all available controllers are listed.

2 If the controller is not found in the list, type its IP address in the IP Address box, and then click Refresh.

3 Select the controller in the list and click OK.

One Click Connect

It provides an easy way to connect to a robot controller.

The following are the prerequisites:

• Connect the computer to the controller service port.

• Ensure that the network settings on the PC is correct. DHCP should either be enabled or the IP address should have a specific value. For more information on network settings, see

Network settings on page 155 .

1 In the Online tab, click One Click Connect.

Adds the controller connected to the service port in a single step.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

383

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.2 Request Write Access

11.3.2 Request Write Access

Overview

Prerequisites for Write access

You can get Write access to any controller as long as the prerequisites are fulfilled.

When the Controller is in Mode:

This has to be fulfilled:

Auto The Write access must not be taken by any other user.

Manual The remote Write access must be granted on the FlexPendant. For safety reasons, a FlexPendant user can also recall this remote Write access in manual mode.

If the prerequisites are not fulfilled you will be denied, or lose, the Write access.

This means that if you have Write access in auto mode and the controller is switched over to manual mode you will lose the Write access without any warning. This is because the FlexPendant unit by default has the Write access in manual mode, for safety reasons. The same will happen if the remote Write access in manual mode is recalled from the FlexPendant unit.

Result

You need Write access for editing programs and configurations or in any other way to change data on the controller.

The Controller Status window will be updated when the request for Write access is granted.

If the Write access is denied, a message is displayed.

384

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.3 Release Write Access

11.3.3 Release Write Access

Overview

Several users can be logged on to a single controller but only one can have the write access. You can release the write access when you do not need it anymore.

Result

The Controller Status window will be updated when your access right has changed from read/write to read only.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

385

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.4 Authenticate

11.3.4 Authenticate

Overview

The data, functionality, and commands on a controller are protected by a User

Authorization system (also called UAS). The UAS restricts the parts of the system the user has access to. Different users can have different access grants.

You can perform the following functions from the Authenticate menu:

• Login as a Different User

• Log off

• Log off all controllers

• Edit User Accounts

• UAS Grant Viewer

Login as a Different User

1 In the Authenticate menu, click Login as a Different User. The Add new

user dialog box appears.

2 In the User Name box, enter the user name you want to log on as.

3 In the Password box, enter the password for the user name you are logging on as.

4 Click OK.

Note: If you have previously logged on as a different user and wish to revert as default user, click Login as Default User.

Log off

In the Authenticate menu, click Log off to log the user off from the controller.

Login off all controllers

In the Authenticate menu, click Log off to log the user off from all the controllers.

Edit User Accounts

For more information on User Accounts, see

User Accounts on page 396 .

UAS Grant Viewer

For more information on UAS Grant Viewer, see

UAS Grant Viewer on page 401 .

386

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.5 File transfer

11.3.5 File transfer

Overview

You can transfer the files and folders between the PC and a controller through the

File Transfer window.

Prerequisites

The following are the prerequisites to be met:

• The PC must be connected to the same network as the controller, or connected to the service port of the controller.

• You must be logged on to the controller as a user with UAS grants that allows file transferring.

Transferring files and folders

Use this procedure to transfer files and folders between the PC and a controller:

1 On the Online tab, click File Transfer.

The File Transfer window appears.

2 In the PC explorer, browse to the folder from or to which you want to transfer the data.

3 In the Controller explorer, browse to the folder from or to which you want to transfer the data.

4 Select the item to transfer from the list.

To select several items at once, do one of the following:

To select

several adjacent items several non-adjacent items all items in the list

then press

the

SHIFT key and select the first and the last item.

the

CTRL key and select each item.

the keys

CTRL + A

5 When the files and folder to transfer are selected, do one of the following:

To

cut the files copy the files

then press

CTRL + X

CTRL + C

, or click Arrow

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

387

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.5 File transfer

Continued

6 Place the insertion point either in the PC explorer or the Controller explorer and click CTRL + V.

Note

In the PC explorer or Controller explorer window, right-click to view the following context menu:

• Transfer

• One level up

• Open

• Refresh

• Cut

• Copy

• Paste

• Delete

• Remove

388

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.6 FlexPendant Viewer

11.3.6 FlexPendant Viewer

Overview

FlexPendant Viewer is an add-in to RobotStudio that retrieves and displays a screenshot from the FlexPendant. The screenshot is generated automatically at the moment of the request.

Prerequisites

The controller you want to retrieve screen shots from must be added to your robot view.

A FlexPendant must be connected to the controller. If no FlexPendant is currently connected (option Hot plug is installed and the jumper plug is used) then no screen shot can be retrieved.

Using FlexPendant Viewer

1 Make sure you are connected to the controller.

2 Click FlexPendant Viewer.

A screen shot will be displayed in the workspace.

3 To reload the screen shot, click Reload in the workspace.

4 To set an automatic reload period for the screen shot, click on the menu

Tools, point to FlexPendant Viewer and click Configure.

Set the desired reload period and select the check-box Activated. Then click

OK.

Results on the controller

The screenshot will automatically be saved as a file on the controller. When a new request is sent, a new screenshot is generated and saved, overwriting the previous file.

No message will be displayed on the FlexPendant.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

389

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.7 Import Options

11.3.7 Import Options

Importing system options

1 In the Online tab, click Import Options to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the Option source box, enter the path to the folder where the options to import are located. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the folder.

3 In the Media Pool destination box, enter the path to the media pool you want to store the options in. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the media pool folder.

4 Select the options to import and click Import.

To select several options at once, do one of the following:

To select

several adjacent options

then hold down

the SHIFT key and select the first and the last option.

several non-adjacent options the CTRL key and select each option.

5 Click OK.

Removing system options

1 In the Online tab, click Import Options to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the Media Pool destination list, enter the path to the media pool from which you want to delete the options. You can also click the Browse button and browse to the media pool folder.

3 Select the options to delete and click Remove.

To select several options at once, do one of the following:

To select

several adjacent options

then hold down

the SHIFT key and select the first and the last option.

several non-adjacent options the CTRL key and select each option.

4 Click OK.

390

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.8 Properties

11.3.8 Properties

Overview

You can perform the following from the Properties menu:

• Renaming the controller

• Setting the controller date and time

• Setting the Controller ID

• Viewing controller and system properties

• Handling the Device Browser

Renaming the controller

The controller name is an identification of the controller that is independent of the system or the software running on the controller. Unlike the controller ID, the controller name does not have to be unique for each controller.

Note

The controller name must be written with characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin

1) character set.

1 In the Properties menu, click Rename.

The Rename Controller dialog box appears.

2 Enter the new name of the controller in the dialog box.

3 Click OK.

The new name will be activated when the controller is restarted.

You will be prompted to either click Yes to restart the controller immediately or click No to restart later.

Setting the controller date and time

You can either set the date and time to the same as the computer you are working from, or you can specify the date and time manually.

Use this procedure to set the controller date and time:

1 In the Properties menu, click Date and Time.

The Set Date and Time dialog box appears.

2 In the Set Controller’s date and time, click the arrow next to the date and time list to set the date and time of the controller.

Note

Click Get local computer’s time to set the date and time of the controller to the same as the computer you are working on.

Setting the Controller ID

The Controller ID is by default set to the serial number of the controller and is thereby a unique identifier of the controller.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

391

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.8 Properties

Continued

The Controller ID is a unique identifier for the controller and should not be changed.

However, if the hard disk of the controller is replaced, the ID will be lost and you must set it back to the serial number of the controller.

Note

You must Request Write Access to the controller before setting the controller

ID.

1 In the Properties menu, click Controller ID.

The Set Controller ID dialog box appears.

2 Enter the Controller ID and then click OK.

Note

Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 40 characters.

Viewing controller and system properties

You can view the following properties for a controller and its running sytem.

Controller Properties

Boot Application

Controller ID

Controller Name

Installed Systems

Network Connections

System Properties

Control Module

Drive Module #1

Serial Number

System Name

1 In the Properties menu, click Controller and System Properties.

The Controller and System Properties window appears.

2 In the Tree view at the left of the window, browse to the node for which you want to view the properties.

The properties of the selected object are displayed in the Properties list to the right of the window.

Viewing the Device Browser

The Device Browser displays the properties and trends of the various hardware and software devices in a robot controller.

1 In the Properties menu, click Device Browser. The Device Browser window appears.

2 In the Tree view at the left of the window, browse to the node for which you want to view the properties. The properties of the selected object are displayed in the Properties list to the right of the window.

Updating the tree view

1 Press F5, to update the tree view.

Continues on next page

392

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.8 Properties

Continued

Displaying the properties of a device

1 Select a device in the tree view to view its properties or values in the right-hand panel.

Displaying a trend

1 Select a device in the tree view and then double-click any property in the right-hand panel that has a numerical value to bring up a trend view. The trend view collects data at a rate of one sample per second.

Hiding, stopping, starting or clearing a trend

1 Right-click anywhere in the trend view and then click the appropriate command.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

393

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.9 Go Offline

11.3.9 Go Offline

Overview

The main purpose of this feature is to create a new station with a VC similar to the connected real controller. This helps a robot technician to work offline, and not just when connected to the real controller.

Using Go Offline

1 Connect the PC to a real controller.

2 On the Online tab, click Request Write Access.

For more information on Request Write Access, see

Request Write Access on page 384

.

3 Click Go Offline.

The Go Offline dialog box is displayed.

4 Enter a name for the system and browse for the location to save the system.

A new station is created with a VC with the same configuration as the real controller.

Note

Go Offline transfers additional options from on a real controller and installs them on the PC.

394

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.10 Online Monitor

11.3.10 Online Monitor

Overview

This feature allows you to remotely monitor the robot connected to a real controller.

It displays a 3D layout of the connected robot controller and enhances user’s current perception of reality by adding motion visualization augmentation.

Using Online Monitor

The following procedure describes the Online Monitor feature in RobotStudio:

1 Connect the PC to a controller and add the controller. See

Add Controller on page 383 .

2 On the Online tab, click Request Write Access.

For more information on Request Write Access, see

Request Write Access on page 384

.

3 Click Online Monitor.

The 3D view of the mechanical units of the controller system is displayed in the graphics window.

Note

The robot view is refreshed every second with the current jointvalues of all the mechanical units.

Layout of Online Monitor window

It has a graphic button:

• Show Kinematic Limitations

Show Kinematic Limitations

When this button is enabled, information about motion limitations can be obtained.

This enhances user's current perception of reality and provide additional information.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

395

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.11 User Accounts

11.3.11 User Accounts

Overview

All the procedures below require the following steps to be taken before managing the details:

1 In the Online browser, select the controller to which you want to manage a user or group

2 From the Online tab, click Request Write Access to provide write access to the controller.

3 In the Online tab, click Authenticate and select Edit User Accounts, for administering UAS accounts, grants, and groups.

Users tab

With the Users tab you set which users will be able to log on to the controller and which groups the users shall belong to.

Users tab Parts

users-ta

1 The Add button. Opens a dialog box for adding new users.

2 The Edit button. Opens a dialog box for changing the log on name and password of the user.

3 The Delete button. Deletes the selected user account from the controller.

Continues on next page

396

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.11 User Accounts

Continued

4 The Users on this Controller list. Shows the user accounts defined on this controller. The list has two columns:

Column

User

Status

Description

The name of the user account

Shows if the account is activated or deactivated. When deactivated, it is not possible to log on using that account.

5 The Activated/Deactivated item box. Changes the status of the user account.

6 The User’s groups/User’s grants list.

The User’s groups list shows which group(s) the user is a member of. For changing the membership of a group, select or clear the checkbox in front of the group name.

The User’s grants list shows the available grants for the selected User’s group(s). When selecting a grant from the User’s grants list, a description of the selected grant appears.

users-t0

Adding a user

1 On the Users tab, click Add to bring up a dialog box.

2 In the User Name box, enter the user name. Use only characters from the

ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 16 characters.

3 In the Password box, enter the user's password. The password you type in will not be visible. Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 16 characters.

4 In the Retype Password box, enter the user's password again.

5 Click OK to add the new user and close the dialog box.

6 Click OK.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

397

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.11 User Accounts

Continued

Deleting a user

1 On the Users tab, select the user to delete from the Users on this controller list and click Delete.

2 To the question Are you sure you want to remove this user?, answer Yes.

3 Click OK.

Setting up group membership

1 On the Users tab, select the user from the Users on this controller list.

2 In the User’s groups list, select the groups the user shall be a member of.

3 Click OK.

Changing a name or password

1 On the Users tab, select the user to edit from the Users on this controller list and click Edit user.

This opens the Edit dialog box.

2 To change the user name, enter the new name in the User Name box. Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than

16 characters.

3 To change the password, enter the new password in the Password box, then retype the password in the Retype Password box. Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 16 characters.

4 Click OK to save the changes to the user and close the dialog box.

5 Click OK.

Activating or deactivating a user

1 On the Users tab, select the user from the Users on this controller list and click the status text (Activated or Deactivated). An item box appears and you can change the status.

The user's new state is now displayed in the status column of the Users on

this controller list.

2 Click OK.

Exporting a user list

1 On the Users tab, select the user from the Users for this Controller list and click Export.

This opens a Save as dialog box, in which you specify the name and location for the file with the user list.

Importing a user list

1 On the Users tab, select the user from the Users for this Controller list and click Import.

This opens an Open file dialog box, in which you browse to the file with the list to import.

Continues on next page

398

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.11 User Accounts

Continued

When you have selected the file, the ImportOptionsForm dialog appears.

Select ...

Delete existing users and groups before importing

Advanced options

Description

Earlier groups and users will be deleted.

A new dialog appears.

Import users but don’t replace duplicates means that you will not replace the existing users.

Import users and replace duplicates means that you will replace the existing users.

Import groups but don’t replace duplicates means that you will not replace the existing groups.

Import groups and replace duplicates means that you will replace the existing groups.

Adding a group

1 On the Groups tab, click Add.

This opens the Add new group dialog box.

2 In the Group Name box, enter the name of the group. Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 16 characters.

3 Click OK to add the new group and close the dialog box.

4 Click OK.

Renaming a group

1 On the Groups tab, select the group to rename from the Groups on this

controller list and click Rename.

This opens the Rename Group dialog box.

2 In the Group Name box, enter the name of the group. Use only characters from the ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1) character set and no more than 16 characters.

3 Click OK to rename the group and close the dialog box.

4 You will now be asked if you want the users who belong to this group to continue belonging to a group with the old name as well as the new one.

Click

Yes

No

Cancel

To

Let the users of the group be members to groups with both the old and the new name. However, the old group will no longer be defined in the controller's UAS since it is replaced by the new group.

This option might be useful if you plan to recreate the old group, or copy the user's settings to another controller who has the old group defined.

Delete the user's memberships to the old group. This is to just replace the old group name with the new one.

To cancel the change and keep the old group name, with its user's memberships.

5 Click OK.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

399

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.11 User Accounts

Continued

Deleting a group

1 On the Groups tab, select the group to delete from the Groups on this

controller list and click Delete.

2 You will now be asked if you want the users who belong to this group to continue belonging to it though it is not valid.

Click

Yes

No

Cancel

To

Let the users of the group remain members to it even if it is no longer defined in the controller's UAS.

This option might be useful if you plan to recreate the group, or copy the user's settings to another controller who has the group defined.

Delete the user's memberships to the group.

Cancel the change and keep the group, with its user's memberships.

3 Click OK.

Giving grants to a group

1 On the Groups tab, select the group from the Groups on this controller list.

2 In the Controller grants/Application grants list, select the grants to give to the group.

3 Click OK.

400

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.12 UAS Grant Viewer

11.3.12 UAS Grant Viewer

Overview

The UAS Grant Viewer page displays information about the grants provided to the user currently logged in and the groups owning them.

1 In the Authenticate menu, click UAS Grant Viewer. The UAS Grants window appears.

en0900000852_UAS_Grants

Examples of common actions to perform

Action Necessary grants

Rename the controller

(A restart of the controller is necessary)

Modify controller properties

Remote warm start

Change system parameters and load configuration files

Modify configuration

Remote warm start

Install a new system Administration of installed system

Perform a backup

(A restart of the controller is necessary)

Restore a backup

(A restart of the controller is necessary)

Load/delete modules

Create new module.

Edit code in RAPID modules

Save modules and programs to disk

Start program execution from Task Window

Backup and save

Remote warm start

Restore a backup

Remote warm start

Load program

Load program

Edit RAPID code

Backup and save

Execute program

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

401

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.12 UAS Grant Viewer

Continued

Action

Create a new I/O signal, that is, add a new instance of the type Signal

( A restart of the controller is necessary)

Set the value of an I/O signal

Access to controller disks from File Transfer window

Necessary grants

Modify configuration

Remote warm start

I/O write access

Read access to controller disks

Write access to controller disks

Controller grants

Full access

Manage UAS settings

Execute program

Gives access to read and write the UAS configuration, that is to read, add, remove and modify UAS users and groups.

Gives access to perform the following:

• Start/step program (stop is always allowed)

• Move PP to Main

• Execute service routines

Perform ModPos and HotEdit Gives access to perform the following:

• Modify or teach positions in RAPID code (ModPos)

• During execution modify positions in RAPID code as single points or as a path (HotEdit)

• Restore ModPos/HotEdit positions to original

• Modify current value of any RAPID variable

Modify current value

I/O write access

Backup and save

This grant includes all controller grants, also new grants added in future RobotWare versions. The grant does not include any application grants or the Safety Controller configuration grant.

Gives access to modify current value of any RAPID variable.

This grant is a subset of the grant Perform ModPos and

HotEdit.

Gives access to perform the following:

• Set I/O signal value

• Set signal as simulated and remove simulation

• Set I/O unit and bus as enabled/disabled

Gives access to perform a backup and to save modules, programs and configuration files.

Restore a backup

Modify configuration

Load program

Remote warm start

Edit RAPID code

Gives access to restore backup and perform B-start.

Gives access to modify the configuration database, that is to load configuration files, change system parameter values and add/delete instances.

Gives access to load/delete modules and programs.

Gives access to perform warm start and shutdown from a remote location. No grant is required to perform warm start via a local device, as for example the FlexPendant.

Gives access to perform the following:

• Modify code in existing RAPID modules

• Frame calibration (tool, workobj)

• Commit ModPos/HotEdit positions to current values

• Rename program

Continues on next page

402

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.12 UAS Grant Viewer

Continued

Program debug

Decrease production speed

Calibration

Administration of installed systems

Read access to controller disks

Write access to controller disks

Gives access to perform the following:

• Move PP to routine

• Move PP to cursor

• HoldToRun

• Activate/deactivate RAPID tasks

• Request write access from the FlexPendant

• Enable/disable non-motion execution

Gives acces to decrease speed from 100% in Auto mode.

This grant is not required if speed is already below 100%, or controller is in Manual mode.

Gives access to perform the following:

• Fine calibrate mechanical unit

• Calibrate base frame

• Update/clear SMB data

Note! Frame calibration (tool, wobj) requires the grant Edit

RAPID code. Manual offset of mechanical unit calibration data and loading new calibration data from file require the grant Modify configuration.

Gives access to perform the following:

• Install new system

• P-start

• I-start

• X-start

• C-start

• Select System

• Install system from device

This grant gives full FTP access, that is, the grant gives the same rights as Read access to controller disks and Write access to controller disks.

Gives external read access to controller disks. This grant is only valid for explicit disk access, for example with an

FTP client or the File Manager of RoboStudio.

It is possible, for example, to load a program from /hd0a without this grant.

Gives external write access to controller disks. This grant is only valid for explicit disk access, for example with an

FTP client or the File Manager of RoboStudio.

It is possible, for example, to save a program to the controller disk or perform a backup without this grant.

Modify controller properties

Delete log

Gives access to set controller name, controller ID and system clock.

Gives access to delete messages in the controller Event

Log.

Revolution counter update Gives access to update the revolution counter.

Safety Controller configuration Gives access to perform a configuration of the Safety Controller. This is valid only for the PSC-option and is not included in the Full access grant.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

403

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.3.12 UAS Grant Viewer

Continued

Application grants

Access to the ABB menu on

FlexPendant

Value true gives access to the ABB menu on the FlexPendant. This is the default value if a user does not have the grant.

Value false means that the user cannot access the ABB menu when the controller is in Auto mode.

The grant has no effect in Manual mode.

Log off FlexPendant user when switching to Auto mode

A user having this grant is automatically logged off from the FlexPendant when switching from Manual mode to Auto mode.

404

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.4.1 Synchronize to Station

11.4 Offline specific features

11.4.1 Synchronize to Station

Synchronizing to the station

1 In the Offline tab, click Synchronize to Station to bring up a dialog box.

2 Select the paths to be synchronized to the station from the list.

3 Click OK.

The message Synchronization to Station completed is displayed in the

Output window.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

405

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.4.2 Synchronize to VC

11.4.2 Synchronize to VC

Synchronizing to the virtual controller

1 In the Offline tab, click Synchronize to VC to bring up a dialog box.

2 Select the elements to be synchronized to the VC from the list.

3 Click OK.

The message Synchronization to VC completed is displayed in the Output window.

406

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.4.3 Virtual FlexPendant

11.4.3 Virtual FlexPendant

Opening a Virtual FlexPendant

You can open a virtual FlexPendant in one of the following ways:

1 On the Offline tab, click Virtual FlexPendant.

2 Press the keyboard shortcut, CTRL + F5.

Note

The Virtual FlexPendant is applicable while running a virtual controller.

For information on specifying the appearance and placement of virtual

FlexPendant, see

Options on page 198

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

407

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.4.4 Run Mode

11.4.4 Run Mode

Overview

The Run Mode indicates the mode of the controller. It has the following two options

• Continuous

• Single

You can set the run mode of the controller in the following ways:

• On the Offline tab, click Run Mode and then click either Continuous or

Single.

• On the Offline tab, click Rapid Tasks and then select Continuous or Single in the Task window.

• On the Simulation tab, click Simulation Setup and then select Continuous or Single in the Setup Simulation dialog box.

408

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.4.5 Control Panel

11.4.5 Control Panel

The Control Panel dialog box

Operation Mode

Auto

Manual

Manual Full Speed

Motors On

Enable Device

Release Device

Reset Emergency Stop

This group contains the three operational modes of the controller represented by option buttons.

This option corresponds to the Auto mode on the FlexPendant.

Moving between the Auto and Manual Full Speed options must proceed via the Manual option.

This option corresponds to the Manual mode on the FlexPendant.

This option corresponds to the Manual 100% mode on the

FlexPendant.

Moving between the Auto and Manual Full Speed options must proceed via the Manual option.

Click this button to turn on the motors.

In a manual mode, click this button to simulate holding the enabling device to turn on the motors.

In a manual mode, click this button to turn off the motors.

If the controller enters the emergency stop state, click this button to reset the state.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

409

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.4.6 Shutdown

11.4.6 Shutdown

Shutting down a controller

1 In the Online or Offline browser, select the controller to shut down.

2 On the Offline tab, click Shutdown and select either Shutdown to close the connection to the controller or Terminate Virtual Controllers to end all controller processes.

Note

Suppose you want to restart the controller, select Warmstart. For more information on restarting a controller, see

Restart on page 369 .

410

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.4.7 Set Task Frames

11.4.7 Set Task Frames

Modifying Task frame

1 In the Offline tab, click Set Task Frames.

The Modify Task Frames dialog box appears.

2 Set the reference to World, UCS, or Local.

3 Edit the position and orientation of task frames in the Task Frames coordinate box.

4 Click Apply.

To the question, Do you also want to move the Base Frames(s)?

• Click Yes to move the base frame, but keeps its relative placement to the task frame.

• Click No. The following question appears Do you want to update the

controller configuration and restart?. Click Yes to restart the controller and update the base frame configuration of the connected VC.

Note

If there are any stationary RAPID objects (tooldata, workobjects) connected to the robot, the following question appears Do you want to keep the

positioning of all stationary RAPID objects?

• Click Yes to keep all the stationary RAPID objects in their global coordinates.

• Click No to move all the stationary RAPID objects along with the base frame (same coordinates relative to base frame).

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

411

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.4.8 System Configuration

11.4.8 System Configuration

Overview

The system configuration window contains functions for making and viewing advanced system configurations, such as changing controller and baseframe positions, calibrating and setting up external axes.

The left side of the system configuration window contains a hierarchical tree with which you browse to different aspects of the system. The right side contains a property sheet for the aspect selected in the tree. Below are short descriptions of the property sheets for each aspect node of the system configuration.

CAUTION

Changing the system configurations may result in corrupted systems or unexpected robot behaviors. Be sure to understand the effects of the changes before proceeding.

The System node

The system node contains a box with information about the system and a button for loading new parameters (configuration files) to the system.

The task node

The task node has no property page.

The mechanism folder node

The property page of this node contains controls for mapping and setting axis and joints. It is from this page you set up external axes.

The mechanism library node

The property page of this node contains controls for changing the baseframe of the robot or mechanism. Here, too, you specify whether the baseframe is moved by another mechanism (coordinated motion), like a track external axis.

Updating the baseframe position

1 Move the mechanical unit (robot or external axis) to its new location using the ordinary tools for moving and placing objects.

2 In the Offline browser, select the controller for the mechanical unit.

3 Click System Configuration to bring up a dialog box.

NOTE! The System configuration dialog box can also be opened by:

• In the Paths&Targets browser, right-click a station.

• Select Configuration and click System Configuration.

4 Select the node for the mechanical unit in the hierarchical tree. The baseframe property sheet for the robot is now displayed.

Continues on next page

412

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.4.8 System Configuration

Continued

5 Select the baseframe position values to use after restarting the robot.

Select To

Controller values

Stored station values

Reset all changes to the baseframe made since the last time the system was started.

Reset all changes made to the baseframe since the last time the station was saved.

Optionally, you can enter new values in the baseframe coordinate boxes (relative to the controller world coordinate system).

Use current station values

Read and use the current location of the baseframe.

Optionally, you can enter new values in the baseframe coordinate boxes (relative to the controller world coordinate system).

6 Click OK.

Note

For information on adding a track from System Configuration, see

Setting up a system with track motion of type RTT or IRBTx003 manually on page 81

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

413

11 The Online and Offline Tabs

11.4.9 Encoder Unit

11.4.9 Encoder Unit

Configuring an Conveyor Encoder Unit

1 Click Encoder Unit.

The Configure Conveyor Encoder Unit dialog box appears.

NOTE! The Configure Conveyor Encoder Unit dialog box can also be opened by:

• In the Paths&Targets browser, right-click a station.

• Select Configuration and click Encoder Unit.

2 Select CNV1 from the Mechanical Unit list.

3 In the Parameters box, enter the values for Maximum Distance, Minimum

Distance, Queue Tracking Distance and Start Window Width.

Note

If any of the parameter values are changed, the controller must be restarted.

4 Click OK.

5 Click Yes to restart the controller.

414

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

12 The Add-Ins Tab

12.1 Overview

12 The Add-Ins Tab

12.1 Overview

The Add-Ins tab

The Add-Ins tab contains the control for PowerPacs, VSTA and Gearbox Heat

Prediction.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

415

12 The Add-Ins Tab

12.2 Visual Studio Tools for Applications

12.2 Visual Studio Tools for Applications

Building an add-in

1 Click Visual Studio Tools for Applications.

2 Create a new project or open an existing one. Compose or edit as required.

3 To build the add-in, from the Build menu, click Build.

The add-in will be loaded in RobotStudio and appear as a user add-in in the

Add-In browser.

4 Save the project to your hard disk if you want the add-in to remain with the user. Otherwise, open a station, right-click in the Add-In browser and then click Add to Station.

416

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

12 The Add-Ins Tab

12.3 Gearbox Heat Prediction

12.3 Gearbox Heat Prediction

Overview

The Gearbox Heat Prediction Tool is an add-in for RobotStudio which helps predict heat problems in the gearboxes. When the temperature is above a predefined value, you can adjust the cycle to reduce the temperature or order a fan that can cool down the gear.

Robots with compact gearboxes have a risk of getting overheated under certain circumstances. The gearbox temperature is supervised by Service Information

System (SIS). It is a software function within the robot controller, that simplifies maintenance of the robot system. It supervises the operating time and mode of the robot, and alerts the operator when a maintenance activity is scheduled. It also supervises large robots from damaging the motors during high load operations with a safety shutdown.

The temperature supervision is based on an algorithm that predicts the stationary temperature of the gearboxes and motors of the robot. The algorithm predicts the heat based on the character of the robot motion and also the room temperature.

Intensive motion (high average speed and /or high average torque and/or short wait time) will increase the heat of the gearbox and motors.

To avoid overheat, SIS stops the robot if the temperature becomes too high. For large robots, there is an option to add a cooling fan to axis 1, 2 and sometimes axis 3 to allow the robot to run even with a heavy duty program.

Note

Gearbox Heat Prediction is not supported for Tool and External axis.

Prerequisites

1 RobotStudio 5.14.02 or later.

2 RobotWare 5.14.01 or later.

3 RobotStudio station with controller having a programmed cycle that includes payload for the robot.

Calculating the Gearbox Heat

Use the following procedure for predicting the heat generated by the robot:

1 Create a new station or open a saved station. See

New Station on page 192

The Gearbox heat button is now visible in the Add-Ins tab.

2 In the Add-Ins tab, click Gearbox Heat.

The Gearbox Heat Prediction window opens.

3 In the Add-Ins tab, select Enabled to enable the Gearbox Heat Prediction tool .

Note

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

For a manipulator without compact gear, Gearbox Heat Prediction is disabled.

Continues on next page

417

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

12 The Add-Ins Tab

12.3 Gearbox Heat Prediction

Continued

4 Run a simulation. See

Running a simulation on page 332

Continues on next page

418

Note

If the RobotStudio license is expired, the Play button in the Simulation tab will be disabled. As such, you will be unable to run the simulation from the

Simulation tab. In such a scenario, use the Play button which will now be visible in the Gearbox Heat Prediction tab window to run the simulation.

Note

The data is recorded during the simulation only if the Gearbox Heat tool is enabled. After the recording is finished, you can perform another recording or perform a calculation for heat related problems.

5 In Cycles, define the behavior of the cycle for predicting the heat generated by the robot:

Continuous: Select this option if you want the robot to continuously calculate the predictions without waiting time between two consecutive cycles.

Number of cycles per hour: Select this option if you want to manually specify the number of cycles per hour for calculation.

Waiting time between cycles (sec): Select this option to specify the waiting between cycles. Specify the waiting time in seconds.

6 In Ambient Temperature, define the ambient temperature.

• Use the slider to change the temperature.

• Select Use temperature from controller(s) to reset the the ambient temperature.

Note

The ambient temperature used in the calculations should be the same that is used in the configuration of the actual robot in its real environment.

7 Calculate the result in either of the following ways:

• In the Recordings section, either double-click a recording or select a recording and click Calculate.

• In the System section, either double-click a controller or select a controller and click Calculate.

Note

• The Recordings section displays the recordings to be analyzed when

Gearbox Heat Prediction is enabled.

• The System section displays all the available controllers. Data for all controllers are recorded at all times and you can select the controller to be analysed from the list.

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

12 The Add-Ins Tab

12.3 Gearbox Heat Prediction

Continued

The results are displayed for each joint and with fans for the joints that can have fans installed as an option.

Note

The following factors influence the heat accumulated:

• Axis speed

• Payload

• Room temperature (ambient temperature)

• Waiting time (to allow robot to cool down)

Note

The calculated energy is displayed as different heat levels:

Green: Indicates no heat problem

Orange: Indicates it is recommended to install a fan.

Red: Indicates a fan must be installed.

Grey: Indicates it is not possible to calculate the possible energy level for this joint.

Not available: Indicates the joints that cannot have a fan installed.

Note

Recommended action is displayed along with the warning level for each joint.

Joint: Represents the joint.

Without fan: Displays the percentage of heat levels calculated to the corresponding joint without fan.

With fan: Displays the percentage of heat levels calculated to the corresponding joint with fan.

Action: Displays the recommended action.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

419

This page is intentionally left blank

13 The Context Menus

13.1 Add to Path

13 The Context Menus

13.1 Add to Path

Creating a move instruction based on an existing target

1 Select the target for which to create the move instruction.

2 From the Home menu, in the Path Programming group, select the type of move instruction to create.

3 Click Add to Path.

The move instruction will appear under the path node as a reference to the original target.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

421

13 The Context Menus

13.2 Align Frame Orientation

13.2 Align Frame Orientation

The Align Frame Orientation dialog box

Reference

Align Axis

Lock Axis

Specify the frame or target for which you want to align the selected objects here.

The axis you specify here will be aligned as on the reference target/frame for all selected objects.

The axis you specify here will not be changed on the selected objects by the align function, but will keep its orientation.

422

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.3 Align Target Orientation

13.3 Align Target Orientation

Aligning target orientation

1 Select the targets whose orientation you wish to change.

2 Click Align Target Orientation to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the Reference box, specify the target whose orientation you want to use as reference, by first click in the box and then selecting the target either from the graphics view or the Layout browser.

4 In the Align Axis box, select the axis whose orientation you want to copy from the reference target to the selected ones.

5 In the Lock Axis box, select the axis to rotate the target around. The orientation of this axis will not be changed on the targets. For example, if the

Z axis of all targets are orientated normally to the surface of the work piece and you want to keep it this way, you should lock the Z axis.

6 Click Apply.

Tip

You can change the Align and Lock axis and click Apply again to reorientate the targets until you deselect them.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

423

13 The Context Menus

13.4 Attach to

13.4 Attach to

Attaching an object

1 In the Layout browser, right-click the child object, click Attach to and click the parent object in the list.

Attaching an object by drag and drop

1 In the Layout browser, drag the child object to the parent object.

2 In the displayed message, click the corresponding button:

To Click

attach the child object and move it to the attachment point

Yes

attach the child object and keep its position

No

not perform the attachment

Cancel

424

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.5 Configurations

13.5 Configurations

Auto Configuration

Use this procedure for setting the configuration of all targets in the path that are marked as The configuration is not verified :

Note

For all targets in the path, the function will ignore any existing unverified configuration and replaces it with optimal configuration with respect to theconfiguration of the preceeding target.

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, right-click a path, select Configurations and then select Auto Configuration.

The robot now steps through each target in the path and sets the configurations.

Note

• If the first target in the path has no configuration assigned, then the configurations tool appears.

• If the first target has a configuration assigned, then the one assigned will be used.

The result of auto configuration varies depending on the configuration of the first target.

The configuration for targets in the path that have a verified configuration, will not be re-assigned.

Reset Configurations

The configuration data which is a part of the target, when reset, is optimized by

Auto Configuration. As a result ,the target / move instruction icon will change and is marked as The configuration is not verified.

Use this procedure for resetting the configuration:

Note

You can reset the configuration of a path, target, or move instruction.

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, right-click a path, select Configurations and then select Reset Configurations.

Note

To reset the configuration of a target or move instruction,

In the Paths&Targets browser, right-click a target or move instruction, and select Reset Configuration.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

425

13 The Context Menus

13.5 Configurations

Continued

Verify Configurations

Use this procedure for verifying the existing configuration:

Note

Targets and Move instructions marked as The configuration is not verified can be verified with respect to the configuration.

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, right-click a path, select Configurations and then select Verify Configurations.

Note

If the existing configuration is correct, then the move instruction is set as verified.

If the configuration is incorrect, then the target is set as unreachable.

426

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.6 Check Reachability

13.6 Check Reachability

Checking the reachability

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select the task that contains the targets or move instructions to check.

2 Click Reachability to open a dialog box. Make sure that the Check

reachability for targets, paths, move instructions check box is selected.

Optionally, select or clear the Check reachability for targets, paths, move

instructions check box for showing and hiding the reachability display.

3 In the Layout browser, select the objects whose reachability you want to check. If paths are selected, the reachability will be checked for all move instructions in each path.

4 In the Reachability dialog box, click Add.

The frames for the selected objects will now change color based on their reachability status.

Color

Green

Yellow

Red

Means

The object can be reached.

The object can be reached at its current position, but not at its current orientation

The object cannot be reached at its current position.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

427

13 The Context Menus

13.7 Configurations

13.7 Configurations

Manually setting a robot axis configuration for single targets

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select a target and then click Configurations to bring up a dialog box.

2 If more than one configuration solution exist, examine them by clicking them, one at a time.

The position of the robot with the selected configuration will be displayed in the graphics window, and the joint values for the configuration will be displayed in the joint values list below the configurations list.

In most cases, selecting a configuration similar to the previous one is the best choice.

3 Select the configuration to use and click Apply.

428

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.8 Convert Frame to Workobject

13.8 Convert Frame to Workobject

Converting a frame to a workobject

1 In the Layout browser, select a frame.

2 Click Convert Frame to Workobject. The new workobject will appear in the

Paths&Targets browser.

3 Optionally, rename or edit the workobject in any way.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

429

13 The Context Menus

13.9 Convert to Move Circular

13.9 Convert to Move Circular

Prerequisites

At least two targets, the via-point target and the end point target, must have been created.

A path containing at least the via-point target and the end point target, in correct order, must have been created.

Converting to Move Circular

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, expand the path node that contains the move instruction to be converted.

2 Select the move instruction that contains the via-point of the circular motion together with the succeeding move instruction, which will serve as the end point. You can select several instructions by holding down the SHIFT key while clicking the instructions.

3 Click Convert to Move Circular. The two selected move instructions will be converted to a circular move instruction, which includes the via-point and the end point.

Tip

To convert two move instructions to a circular motion, you can also select and right-click both move instructions at once and then click Convert to Circular.

430

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.10 Copy / Apply Orientation

13.10 Copy / Apply Orientation

Copying and applying an orientation

1 In the browser, select the object or target from which to copy the orientation.

2 On the Modify menu, click Copy Orientation.

3 In the browser, select the object or target to which to apply the orientation.

4 On the Modify menu, click Apply Orientation. This can be performed on several targets or a group of selected targets.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

431

13 The Context Menus

13.11 Detach

13.11 Detach

Detaching an object

1 In the Layout browser, right-click the attached object (child) and then click

Detach. The child will be detached from the parent and return to its position before the attachment.

432

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.12 Execute Move Instruction

13.12 Execute Move Instruction

Prerequisites

The move instruction must exist.

A virtual controller must be running for the robot with the move instruction.

Executing a move instruction

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, browse to the motion instruction to execute through the Controller, Tasks and Paths nodes.

2 Click Execute move instruction. The TCP of the active robot will move from the current location to the motion instruction according to the programed motion properties. If the target for the motion instruction does not have a stored configuration, the robot will use the configuration nearest the current one.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

433

13 The Context Menus

13.13 External Axis Interpolation

13.13 External Axis Interpolation

Prerequisites

You need to have a path selected and a robot with external axis configured.

Interpolating external axis

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select a path, right-click and select Interpolate

External Axis.

The Interpolate External Axis dialog box appears.

2 Select the mechanical unit from the Mechanical Unit drop-down list.

3 Select the axis to interpolate from the Axis drop-down list.

4 In the Interpolation drop-down list,

select...

Constant

TCP Offset to...

set a constant value for the axis in each robtarget.

NOTE! You can set the value from the Value drop-down list.

calculate an axis value such that the

• For a linear axis, robot base is translated the offset distance relative to the target along the axis direction.

• For a rotating axis, external axis value is calculated so that the angle between the TCP approach direction and the rotational axis zeroposition is kept constant at the offset angle.

5 Click Apply.

434

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.14 Graphic Appearance

13.14 Graphic Appearance

Overview

With the graphic appearance dialog box you set the graphic properties for an individual object. The settings made here override the generic settings made in the options dialog box. The dialog box contains one view group where you select the part of the object to affect, and three tabs with settings.

Graphic Appearance: The View group

Selection

Select the parts of the object whose appearance you wish to change. When Body or Surface/Curve is selected, you select the object to work with in the preview display.

NOTE! To change the appearance of a part:

1 On the Modify menu, click Graphic Appearance. A color box with the following options appears - Metals, Light colors, medium colors, Dark colors.

2 Select any of the options to change the appearnace.

Graphic Appearance: The Rendering tab

Backface culling

Twosided lightning

Flat shade

Flip normals

Line width

The detail level options

Select this check box to view only the front sides (the direction of the positive normal) of the faces in the model. This improves the graphics performance and indicates the directions of the faces in the model.

Clear this check box to also display the back sides of the faces in the model. This ensures that the model is displayed correctly even if the faces are in the wrong direction. If a model with faces in the wrong direction is used for programming, you might get unpredicted results.

Select this check box to light the object from two sides.

Clear this check box to light the object from one side.

Select this check box to change the appearance of shades.

Click this button to change the direction of all faces on the model.

Specify the width of lines in the object here.

Select the detail level of the model here. Only the levels selected in the Options dialog box when the object was created or imported are available.

Graphic Appearance: The Colors tab

Simple Color

Transparency

The color boxes

Shininess

Click this color box to select another color for the object.

Use this slider to control the transparency of the object.

Set the color of the object for different light situations here.

Specify the reflectiveness of the object here.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

435

13 The Context Menus

13.14 Graphic Appearance

Continued

Graphic Appearance: The Textures tab

Effect

Base texture

Environment map

Normal/Bump Map

Blend with material

Swap u/v

Modify

Normalize

Flip

Stretch

Shrink

Shift <

Shift>

Specifies the type of graphic effect to be used on the selected part.

• Basic : Simple texturing/environment mapping or just a solid color.

• Anisotropic: Brushed metal effect simulating an anisotropic light model

• Bump Mapping: Texture that specifies the bumpiness of the surface

• Parallex Mapping: Improved version of bump mapping

NOTE! Anisotropic, Bump Mapping and Parallex Mapping requires DirectX9-class hardware to be correctly displayed in the

3D window.

Specifies the basic structure of the selected part. It is a standard 24-bit image displayed on a 3D surface.

Provides a highly reflective appearance to the surface.

Specifies a texture that defines the bumpiness of the surface.

NOTE! This option is enabled only during Bump mapping and

Parallex mapping effect.

Select this check box to blend the texture with the colors and properties specified on the Material tab.

Click this button to swap the horizontal and vertical directions of the texture.

Select along which directions the commands listed below shall be applied.

u is the horizontal axis of the texture.

v is the vertical axis of the texture.

Click this button to set the ratio between the dimensions of the object and the texture to 1.

Click this button to invert the coordinates along the selected axes. This is the same as mirroring around the other axis.

Click this button to stretch the texture along the selected axes.

Click this button to shrink the texture along the selected axes.

Click this button to move the texture along the selected axes.

Click this button to move the texture along the selected axes.

436

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.15 Interpolate Path

13.15 Interpolate Path

Reorienting targets in a path by interpolation

1 In the Layout browser or the graphics window, select the path with the targets to reorient.

2 Click Interpolate Path. to bring up a dialog box.

3 With the Interpolate type options, select whether to use Linear or Absolute interpolation.

Linear interpolation distributes the difference in orientation evenly, based on the targets positions along the length of the path. By contrast, absolute interpolation distributes the difference in orientation evenly, based on the targets’ sequence in the path.

4 If using the Select Start/End option, select the start and end targets for the interpolation in the Start target and End target boxes, respectively.

5 Optionally, with the Lock Axis options, select an axis to lock.

6 Click Apply.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

437

13 The Context Menus

13.16 Invert

13.16 Invert

Inverting the direction of a face

1 Right-click in the Modeling browser, point to Filter and make sure that both

Show Bodies and Show Faces are selected.

2 In the Modeling browser, expand the node for the object and browse down to and select the face which direction you want to invert.

3 In the Modeling browser, expand the node for the object and browse down to and select the face whose direction you want to invert.

4 Click Invert. If the option backface culling is activated, the face will now shift from visible to not visible, or the other way around, depending on from which direction you view the face. If backface culling is deactivated, there will be no visible indication that the direction of the face has been inverted.

438

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.17 Jump to Target

13.17 Jump to Target

Jumping to a target

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, browse to the target to jump to through the

Controller, Tasks and WorkObjects nodes.

2 Click Jump to target.

If the target has a valid configuration for the robot axes stored, the active

TCP of the robot will immediately be positioned at the target. If no valid configuration is stored, the Select Robot configuration dialog box is displayed.

3 In the Select Robot Configuration dialog box, select a suitable configuration solution and click Apply. The selected configuration is now stored with the target.

Note

You can deactivate the configuration check when jumping to targets. The robot will then use the configuration solution closest to the current one when reaching the target. For more information, see

Options on page 198

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

439

13 The Context Menus

13.18 Linked Geometry

13.18 Linked Geometry

Overview

The Linked Geometry feature allows you to load geometry from a shared repository.

If the source file is updated, then the station will be updated with a single click.

Adding Link

You can add a link to a geometry in two ways:

1 In the Home tab, click Import Geometry to open a dialog box.

Select the option Link to Geometry.

2 In the Layout browser, right-click an existing part in the station and select

Add Link.

A dialog box opens where you can select the CAD file to be linked.

Editing Link

To edit an existing link:

1 In the Layout browser, right-click an existing part in the station.

2 Select the option Link to Geometry and click Edit Link.

Deleting Link

To delete an existing link:

1 In the Layout browser, right-click an existing part in the station.

2 Select the option Link to Geometry and click Delete Link.

Updating Linked Geometry

To update a linked geometry:

1 In the Layout browser, right-click an existing part in the station, component group or the station.

2 Select the option Link to Geometry and click Update Linked Geometry.

The update result is displayed in the output window.

NOTE! When you select a component group or a station, all linked geometries within the group or station is updated.

NOTE! If the timestamp on the file is newer than the timestamp stored in the station, all corresponding parts will be updated from the source location.

440

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.19 The Library Group

13.19 The Library Group

Modifying a library component

1 In the Layout browser, select the library you wish to modify.

2 Click Disconnect Library.

3 Select the library and then make any modifications to it.

4 Select the modified library, and then click Save As Library.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

441

13 The Context Menus

13.20 Mechanism Joint Jog

13.20 Mechanism Joint Jog

Jogging the joints of a robot

1 In the Layout browser, select the robot.

2 Click Mechanism Joint Jog to bring up a dialog box.

3 Each row in the Jog Joints dialog box represents a joint of the robot. Jog the joints either by clicking and dragging the bar at each row, or by using the arrows to the right of each row.

Set the length of each step in the Step box.

The Mechanism Joint Jog dialog box

Joint

Cfg

TCP

Step

External Axis

Lock TCP

External axes joint

Move the joints of the objects by dragging the slider on the row corresponding to each joint. Alternatively, click the buttons to the right of the row, or type a value.

The current configuration value.

The current position of the TCP.

Specify the length of the joint movements for each click of the buttons to the right of each joint row.

If the robot uses external axes, you can select an axis to jog from this list. The external axes must belong to the same task as the object you are jogging for occurring in this list. If no external axes are present in the same task, this list is not available.

Select this check box to reposition the robot according to the jogging of the external axis.

For track-external axes the robot will reposition so that the TCP is locked relative to the world coordinate system.

For positioner-external axes the robot will reposition so that the position of the robot’s TCP is locked relative to the attachment point of the positioner. The robot will move with the positioner the same way as when using multi-robot jog.

If no external axes are present in the same task, this check box is not available.

Move the joint of the external axes by dragging the slider on the row corresponding to each joint. Alternatively, click the buttons to the right of the row, or type a value.

If no external axes are present in the same task, this check box is not available.

Jogging a conveyor

1 Create Empty Path. See

Empty Path on page 226

.

2 In the Layout browser, select the conveyor.

3 Right-click Conveyor Mechanism and select Mechanical Joint Jog.

The Joint Jog dialog box appears.

4 Jog the conveyor by moving the slider and click Teach Instruction.

A move instruction is added to the path.

Continues on next page

442

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.20 Mechanism Joint Jog

Continued

Note

When you jog the conveyor mechanism, objects on the conveyor are also moved.

• If you jog the conveyor mechanism beyond the maximum distance, the workobject will be dropped.

• If you jog the conveyor mechanism beyond the zero position, the workobject that belongs to the first part is attached to the conveyor attachment point.

If the workobject is dropped in Teach Mode, you can jog the conveyor backwards to connect it again.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

443

13 The Context Menus

13.21 Mechanism Linear Jog

13.21 Mechanism Linear Jog

Jogging the TCP of a robot by using the Linear Jog dialog box

1 In the Layout browser, select the robot.

2 Click Mechanism Linear Jog to bring up a dialog box.

3 Each row in the Linear Jog dialog box represents a direction or rotation for the TCP. Jog the TCP along the preferred direction or rotation, either by clicking and dragging the bar at each row, or by using the arrows to the right of each row.

4 From the Reference list, you can select the coordinate system that you want to jog the robot relative to.

5 In the Step box, specify the step movement per deg/rad.

444

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.22 Mirror Path

13.22 Mirror Path

The Mirror Path dialog box

Duplicate

Replace

X-Y, X-Z and Y-Z

Reference

Select Frame

Flip axis X/YZ

Keep orientation

Mirror Robot Configuration

More / Less

New path name

Target prefix

Receiving robot

Receiving work object

Select this option to keep the existing path when mirroring.

Select this option to remove the existing path after mirroring.

Select the plane to mirror the path around with these options.

The plane is defined by the selected axes and position of the reference coordinate system selected below.

Select the frame or coordinate system to define the mirror plane in.

To use another frame than any of the predefined ones, select

Select Frame from the list and specify the frame in the box below.

If Select Frame is used as Reference frame, specify the frame to use here by first clicking in the box and then selecting the frame from the graphics window or the Layout browser.

Select one of these options to mirror the orientation of the targets. When any of these are selected, the robot will approach the targets in a mirrored way.

The axis you select will change the most for achieving the mirrored orientation, while the other one will be kept as near to its current direction as possible.

The axis that is set to the robot’s approach vector cannot be selected.

Select this option to keep the orientation of the targets. When selected, the robot will go to the mirrored position, but approach the target from the same direction as for the original target.

Select this option to also mirror the robot axis configuration for the targets. Selecting this option will mirror the robot’s motions completely.

For using this option, the following conditions must be met:

• The Reference frame must be set to Baseframe.

• The Mirror plane must be set to X-Z.

• The tool of each move instruction must have its TCP in the X-Z plane of tool0.

• All targets in the path must have robot axis configuration set.

• The virtual controller must be running.

Click this button to show or hide the commands for naming and location of generated targets and paths.

Specify the name of the path that will be generated by the mirroring here.

Specify a prefix for the targets that will be generated by the mirroring here.

Specify the robot task in which the new targets and path shall be created.

Specify the work object in which the new targets shall be created.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

445

13 The Context Menus

13.23 Mirror

13.23 Mirror

Mirroring a part

1 In the Layout browser, select the part to mirror and right-click.

2 Select Mirror and then click one of the following options from the context menu:

select...

Mirror YZ

Mirror ZX

Mirror XY to create a new part..

around YZ plane around ZX plane around XY plane

Note

The mirror feature is applicable only to objects of type body and part that contains geometry. Parts and and bodies that are imported without geometry cannot be mirrored. See

Libraries, geometries and CAD files on page 34 .

For information on mirroring a path, see

Mirror Path on page 445 .

446

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.24 Modify Curve

13.24 Modify Curve

Extending a curve with a straight line in the direction of the curve’s tangent

1 Click Modify curve to bring up a dialog box.

2 Select Extend as modify method and then click the curve segment, close to the appropriate vertex.

Note that when you rest the pointer over the curve the endpoint closest to the pointer is highlighted. This is the endpoint that will be selected for extension when you click the curve.

3 In the Distance from endpoint box, enter the length of the extension. In the graphics window a yellow line displays a preview of the extension.

4 Click Apply.

Joining curves

1 Click Modify curve to bring up a dialog box.

2 Select Join as modify method and then click the curves to join in the graphics window. The curves may be either intersecting or adjacent to be joined.

The Selected curves list displays the curves that will be joined. To remove a curve from the list, select the list entry and press the DEL key.

3 In the Tolerance list, enter a value in millimeters. Adjancent curves whose end points lie within the tolerance will be valid for the operation.

4 Click Apply.

Projecting curves on a surface

1 Click Modify curve to bring up a dialog box.

2 Select Project as modify method and then click the curves to project in the graphics window.

Note that when you rest the pointer over the curve, the projection direction is displayed. The project direction is always the negative Z direction of the

User Coordinate System. To change the projection direction, create a new frame with the desired orientation and set it as user coordinate system.

The Selected curves list displays the curves that will be projected. To remove a curve from the list, select the list entry and press the DEL key.

3 Click in the Target bodies list and then click the bodies to project on in the graphics window. The bodies must be in the projection direction and be big enough to cover the projected curves.

To remove a bodies from the list, select the list entry and press the DEL key.

4 Click Apply. A new curve will now be created in a new part, wrapped around the surface of the selected bodies.

Reversing curves

1 Click Modify curve to bring up a dialog box.

2 Select Reverse as modify method and then click the curves to reverse in the graphics window.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

447

13 The Context Menus

13.24 Modify Curve

Continued

Note that when resting the pointer over a curve, the current direction of the curve is displayed by yellow arrows.

The Selected curves list displays the curves that will be reversed. To remove a curve from the list, select the list entry and press the DEL key.

3 Click Apply. The curves will now be reversed.

Splitting a curve

1 Click Modify curve to bring up a dialog box.

2 Select Split as modify method and then click the curve at the point to split at. Only open curves can be split.

Note that when you rest the pointer over the curve, point of the split is highlighted. This point is affected by the current snap mode setting.

3 Click Apply. The curve will now be split to two separate curves in the same part.

Trimming a curve

1 Click Modify curve to bring up a dialog box.

2 Select Trim as modify method and then click the curve segment to trim.

Note that when you rest the pointer over the curve, the closest vertices are highlighted. The segment between these points will be trimmed.

3 Click Apply. The selected part of the curve will now be removed.

Generic content of the Modify Curve dialog box

Extend

Join

Project

Reverse

Split

Trim

Extend a curve at any vertex with a straight line in the direction of the curve’s tangent.

Join two or more curves into one. The original curves will be deleted when joining curves.

Project a curve onto a surface or a body, creating a new curve on the target part.

Reverse the direction of curves.

Split a curve in two bodies. Only open curves can be split.

Cut a segment of a curve between intersection or end points.

Continues on next page

448

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Extend-specific information

Selected curve

13 The Context Menus

13.24 Modify Curve

Continued

Display the name of the curve to extend. Select the curve by clicking it in the graphics window.

Note that when you rest the pointer over the curve the endpoint closest to the pointer is highlighted. This is the endpoint that will be selected for extension when you click the curve.

extensio

Endpoint to extend

Distance from endpoint

Display the position of the endpoint to extend. To change the endpoint, select the curve again, but click it closer to the other endpoint.

Type the length of the extension here. You can also click a point in the graphics window to set the length.

A yellow line indicates the length of the extension.

Join-specific information

Selected curves

Tolerance

extensi0

Display the names of the curves to join. Select the curves by clicking them in the graphics window. To remove a curve from the list, select the list entry and press the DEL key.

The curves may be either intersecting or adjacent to be joined.

Specifies the distance within which the end points of adjacent curves may lie to be joined.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

449

13 The Context Menus

13.24 Modify Curve

Continued

Project-specific information

Selected curve

Display the name of the curves to project. Select the curves by clicking them in the graphics window.

Note that when you rest the pointer over the curve the projection direction is displayed. The project direction is always the negative Z direction of the User Coordinate System. To change the projection direction, create a new frame with the desired orientation and set it as user coordinate system.

Target bodies

Reverse-specific information

Selected curves

project

Display the name of the bodies to project the curve on. Select the bodies by first clicking in the box and then clicking the bodies in the graphics window.

Display the names of the curves to reverse. Select the curves by clicking them in the graphics window.

Note that when resting the pointer over a curve the current direction of the curve is displayed by yellow arrows.

reverse

Continues on next page

450

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Split-specific information

Selected curve

13 The Context Menus

13.24 Modify Curve

Continued

Display the name of the curve to split. Select the curve by clicking it in the graphics window.

Note that when you rest the pointer over the curve, the point where the split will be is highlighted. This point is affected by the current snap mode setting.

Point on curve

Trim-specific information

Selected curve

splitpre

These boxes show the position of the split point. To change the split point, select the curve again, but click another part of it.

Display the name of the curve to trim. Select the curve by clicking it in the graphics window.

Note that when you rest the pointer over the curve the closest vertexes are highlighted. It is the segment between those points that will be cut.

First section endpoint

trim

Trim only works on single curves with intersection points. If you want to trim a curve that intersects with another curve, first join the two curves.

Display the position of the first trimming point.

Second section endpoint

Display the position of the second trimming point.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

451

13 The Context Menus

13.25 Modify External Axis

13.25 Modify External Axis

Modifying external axis positions in targets

1 Select the targets (one or several) you want to modify, either in the Layout browser or in the graphics window. If you select several targets, the values you specify will be applied to all selected targets.

2 Click Modify External Axis to bring up a dialog box.

3 Edit the values of the axis by performing any of the following:

Action

Type a new position value for an axis

Jog the axis to the new position

Description

In the Eax column, select the value of the external axis you want to edit, and enter the new value.

Use the arrow buttons to the left of the Joint Values column for jogging the axis. Then click the right arrow button between the Joint values column and the Eax column to transfer the current joint value to the Eax value.

4 Click Apply.

The Modify External Axis dialog box

<

>

value box

<-

->

Eax

Jog the joint of the external axis corresponding to each row by clicking the < button.

Jog the joint of the external axis corresponding to each row by clicking the > button.

Enter the axis value for the corresponding joint of the external axis in the value box.

With the arrow left button, you transfer the value from the Eax box to the corresponding value box.

With the arrow right button, you transfer the value from the value box to the corresponding Eax box.

Specify the value of the corresponding joint of the external axis.

452

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.26 Modify Instruction

13.26 Modify Instruction

Modifying an instruction

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select the instruction you want to modify. If you want to apply the same properties to several instructions, press the

CTRL key and select them.

2 Click Modify Instruction to bring up a dialog box.

3 For move instructions, select joint or linear motion in the Motion type list.

4 In the Instruction Argument group, modify the values for the instruction.

For details about each argument, see the selected instruction in the RAPID

Reference Manual. For an overview of the arguments for move instructions, see below.

5 When you have finished modifying, click Apply.

Arguments for move instructions

The table below is an overview of common arguments for move instructions. For detailed information about the arguments, see the selected instruction in the RAPID

Reference Manual.

To set the

subsequent instructions to be executed at once.

Use

\Conc

destination target for the instruction target.

speed for the tool center point, the tool reorientation and external axes.

ToPoint

Speed

velocity of the TCP in mm/s directly in the instruction (it will be substituted for the corresponding speed data).

\V

total time in seconds during which the robot moves (it will be substituted for the corresponding speed data).

\T

size of the generated corner path.

Zone

position accuracy of the robot TCP directly in the instruction

(the length of the path will be substituted for the corresponding zone specified in the zone data).

\Z

tool used for the movement (the TCP of this tool will be positioned at the destination target).

\Tool

workobject to which the robot position in the instruction belongs.

\Wobj

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

453

13 The Context Menus

13.27 Modify Mechanism

13.27 Modify Mechanism

The Modify Mechanism dialog box

See

The Modify Mechanism dialog box on page 315

.

454

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.28 Modify Tooldata

13.28 Modify Tooldata

Modifying tooldata

1 In the Layout browser, select the tooldata you want to modify.

2 Click Modify Tooldata to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the Misc Data group:

• Modify the Name of the tool.

• Select if the tool is to be held by the robot in the Robot holds tool list.

4 In the Tool Frame group:

• Modify the Position x, y, z of the tool.

• Modify the Rotation rx, ry, rz of the tool.

5 In the Load Data group:

• Enter a new Weight for the tool.

• Modify the Center of gravity for the tool.

• Modify the Inertia for the tool.

6 In the Sync Properties group:

• In the Storage type list, select PERS or TASK PERS. Select TASK

PERS if you intend to use the tooldata in MultiMove mode.

• In the Module list, modify the module in which to declare the tooldata.

7 Click Apply.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

455

13 The Context Menus

13.29 Modify Workobject

13.29 Modify Workobject

Modifying a workobject

1 In the Layout browser, select the workobject you want to modify.

2 Click Modify Workobject. to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the Misc Data group, modify the values for the workobject:

• Enter a Name for the workobject.

• In the Robot holds workobject list, select True or False. If you select

True, the robot will move the work piece instead of the tool.

• In the Moved by mechanical unit list, select the mechanical unit with which the robot movements are coordinated. This setting is only valid when Programmed has been set to False.

• In the Programmed list, select True or False. True means that the workobject will use a fixed coordinate system, and False that a movable coordinate system (that is, coordinated external axes) will be used.

4 In the User Frame group, do one of the following:

• Modify the user frame by entering values for the Position x, y, z and the Rotation rx, ry, rz for the workobject. Click in one of these boxes, and then click the position in the graphics window to transfer the values.

• Modify the user frame by using the Frame by points dialog box, see

Frame from Three Points on page 216

.

5 In the Object Frame group, do one of the following:

• Modify the object frame by selecting values for Position x, y, z and

Rotation rx, ry, rz for the workobject.

• Modify the object frame by using the Frame by points dialog box.

6 In the Sync Properties group, modify the values for the workobject:

• In the Storage type list, select PERS or TASK PERS. Select TASK

PERS if you intend to use the workobject in MultiMove mode.

• In the Module list, select the module in which to declare the workobject.

7 Click Apply.

Note

If you change the position of a workobject that is used in a program, you have to synchronize the affected paths to the virtual controller; otherwise, the program will not be updated.

456

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.30 Move Along Path

13.30 Move Along Path

Prerequisites

At least one path must have been created in the station.

A virtual controller must be running for the robot to move along the path.

Moving along a path

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select the path to move along.

2 Click Move along path. In the graphics window, the robot will move along the path.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

457

13 The Context Menus

13.31 Move to Pose

13.31 Move to Pose

Prerequisites

At least one joint position must be defined.

Only one mechanism may be selected at a time.

Moving to a pose

1 In the Layout browser, select one mechanism to move.

2 Click Move to Pose and then click one of the available poses. In the graphics window, the mechanism will move to the pose.

458

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.32 Place

13.32 Place

Placing an item

1 Select the item you want move.

2 Click Place and then click one of the commands to bring up a dialog box.

If you want to move the item Choose

from one position to another without affecting the orientation of the object.

Select the axes to be affected.

One Point

according to the relationship between a start and a finish line.

The object will move to match the first point, then it will rotate to match the second point.

Two Points

according to the relationship between a start plane and a finish plane.

The object will move to match the first point, then it will rotate to match the third point.

Three Points

from one position to a target or frame position and simultaneously change the orientation of the object according to the frame orientation.

The position of the object changes according the orientation of the to-point coordinate system.

Frame

from one frame of reference to another

Two Frames

3 Set the reference coordinate system you want to use.

4 Click the points in the graphics window to transfer values to the from-point boxes to the to-point boxes. For detailed information, see the tables below.

5 Click Apply.

The Place Object by One Point dialog box

Reference

Primary Point - From

Primary Point - To

Translate along these axes

Select the reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary

Point - From boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary

Point - To boxes.

Select whether the translation is to be performed along the X,

Y or Z axis, or several of the axes.

The Place Object by Two Points dialog box

Reference

Select the reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

459

13 The Context Menus

13.32 Place

Continued

Primary Point - From

Primary Point - To

Point on X-Axis - From

Point on X-Axis - To

Translate along these axes

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary

Point - From boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary

Point - To boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the x axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point

on X-Axis - From boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the x axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point

on X-Axis - To boxes.

Select whether the translation is to be performed along the X,

Y or Z axis, or several of the axes.

The Place an Object by Three Points dialog box

Reference

Primary Point - From

Primary Point - To

Point on X-Axis - From

Point on X-Axis - To

Point on Y-Axis - From

Point on Y-Axis - To

Translate along these axes

Select the reference coordinate system to which all positions or points will be related.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary

Point - From boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the primary point in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Primary

Point - To boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the x axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point

on X-Axis - From boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the x axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point

on X-Axis - To boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the y axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point

on Y-Axis - From boxes.

Click in one of these boxes, and then click the point on the y axis in the graphics window to transfer the values to the Point

on Y-Axis - To boxes.

Select whether the translation is to be performed along the X,

Y or Z axis, or several of the axes.

The Place Object with Frame dialog box

Select Frame

Specify the name of the frame with which you want to place the object.

The Place by Two Frames dialog box

From

To

Select the frame object (For example, Target, Workobject,

Tooldata or Frame) from this dropdown list to set the From point of moving the object.

Select any of the frame object (For example, Target, Workobject, Tooldata or Frame) from this dropdown list to set the To point of moving the object.

460

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.33 Remove Unused Targets

13.33 Remove Unused Targets

Removing unused targets

1 In the Paths&Targets browser, select either the Controller node or the Task node from which you wish to remove the unused targets, and then click

Remove Unused Targets.

2 To the question Are you sure you want to remove unused targets?, answer

Yes. All targets that not are used by any move instructions are now removed.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

461

13 The Context Menus

13.34 Rename Targets

13.34 Rename Targets

Renaming targets

1 In the Paths & Targets browser, select the targets to rename.

To rename all targets in one or several paths, select the paths that contain the targets.

2 Click Rename targets to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the Target Prefix box, enter a text string to precede the target numbers.

4 Optionally, in the Increment box and the Start with box, change the numbering series for the target names.

5 Optionally, in the Target Suffix box, enter a text string to follow the target numbers.

6 Click Apply.

462

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.35 Reverse Path

13.35 Reverse Path

The commands

Simple

Here you reverse only the target sequence. The new path will keep the move instruction for each path segment and just reverse the programed positions.

Advanced

xx050046

Note that move instructions are not changed, just the targets. Even the MoveAbsJ instruction to the joint target is preserved, but placed last.

Both target sequence and move instructions are reversed in a way that corresponds to recording the robot movements and playing the movie backwards. For example, if the robot used a linear motion to move from a target, it will use a linear motion to move to the target after the reversal.

xx050047

Note that the move instructions have changed together with the targets. For example, in the original path, a joint motion was used to reach target 20 and a linear motion to leave it. After the reversal there is a linear motion to the target and joint motion from it.

Also, note that the jointtarget has been converted into an ordinary target; otherwise, it would not be possible to program a linear motion to that position.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

463

13 The Context Menus

13.36 Rotate

13.36 Rotate

Rotating an item

1 Select the item you want to rotate.

2 Click Rotate to bring up a dialog box.

3 Select the reference coordinate system you want to use:

If you want to move the item

relative to its own coordinate system relative to the user-defined system

Select

absolute in the coordinate system of the station

World

relative to the coordinate system of its parent

Parent

Local

UCS

relative to an axis defined by two points

User defined axis

relative to a target reference frame

NOTE! Available only for targets.

Target Reference Frame

4 Specify the rotation of the item in the Rotate around x, y, z by first clicking in one of the boxes, and then click the center position in the graphics window to transfer the values.

5 If you have selected the coordinate system User defined axis, specify the

Axis start point x, y, z and the Axis end point x, y, z.

6 Specify the Rotation of the item and the axis around which the rotation is to occur.

7 Click Apply.

464

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.37 Rotate Path

13.37 Rotate Path

Rotating a paths

1 In the Layout browser or the graphics window, select the paths to rotate.

2 Click Rotate path to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the Reference frame list, select the frame to rotate the paths around.

Select

World

Baseframe

UCS

Select Frame

To

rotate around the station’s world coordinate system rotate around the robot’s baseframe rotate around a frame or target that previously has been set to User Coordinate System.

rotate around an existing target or frame other than the listed ones. When using Select Frame, specify the frame to rotate around further down.

4 If Selected frame was selected in the Reference frame list, specify a frame or target in the text box by clicking in the box and then selecting the frame in the graphics window.

5 With the Rotation axis options, select the axis of the frame to rotate around.

6 In the Rotation angle box, enter the rotation.

7 Click Apply.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

465

13 The Context Menus

13.38 Set Local Origin

13.38 Set Local Origin

Setting the origin of the local coordinate system

1 If the object you want modify is a library component, first disconnect it from the library.

2 In the Layout browser or the graphics window, select the part to modify.

3 Click Set Local Origin to bring up a dialog box.

4 In the Set Local Origin dialog box, select the reference coordinate system you want to use:

If you want to move Select

relative to the part’s current local coordinate system

Local

relative to the coordinate system of its parent

Parent

absolute in the coordinate system of the station

World

relative to a user-defined coordinate system

UCS

5 In the Position X, Y, Z boxes, either type the new position or, select it by first clicking in one of the value boxes and then clicking the point in the graphics window.

6 Type the Orientation.

7 Click Apply.

466

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.39 Set Normal to Surface

13.39 Set Normal to Surface

Setting the target orientation normal to a surface

1 In the Paths & Targets browser, select the target to modify.

2 Click Set Normal To Surface to bring up a dialog box.

3 On the Selection Level toolbar, set the selection level.

• To align the target to a specific surface, set the selection level to

surface.

• To align the target to a specific point at the surface, set the selection level to part.

4 In the graphics window, click the reference surface. This will transfer the name of the part or surface to the Surface box.

5 In the Approach Direction, click the button for the axis to be used as the approach direction.

6 To set the distance between the surface and the target in the approach direction, specify an Offset value.

7 Click Apply.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

467

13 The Context Menus

13.40 Set Position

13.40 Set Position

Positioning an item

1 Select the item you want to move.

2 Click Set Position to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the Set Position dialog box, select the reference coordinate system you want to use:

If you want to move the item

relative to its own coordinate system relative to the coordinate system of its parent

Select

Local

Parent

absolute in the coordinate system of the station

World

relative to a user-defined coordinate system

UCS

relative to a target reference frame

NOTE! Available only for targets.

Target Reference Frame

4 In the Position X, Y, Z boxes, either type the new position, or select it by first clicking in one of the value boxes and then clicking the point in the graphics window.

5 Specify the Orientation for the item.

6 Click Apply.

468

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.41 Tool Compensation

13.41 Tool Compensation

Offsetting a path to compensate for tool radius

1 In the Paths&Targets browser or the graphics window, select the path.

2 Click Tool Compensation to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the Distance box, enter the size of the compensation (normally, the tool radius).

4 Using the Direction options, select whether the new path shall be on the left or the right side of the current path.

5 Click Apply.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

469

13 The Context Menus

13.42 Translate Path

13.42 Translate Path

Translating a path

1 In the Paths&Targets browser or the graphics window, select the paths to translate.

2 Click Translate path to bring up a dialog box.

3 In the Reference frame list, select the coordinate system to use as reference for moving the paths.

Select

World

Base Frame

UCS

Select Frame

Point to Point

To

move relative to the origin of the world coordinate system move relative to the origin of the robot’s baseframe move relative to the origin of a frame or target that previously has been set to User Coordinate System.

move relative to the origin of an existing target or frame other then the listed ones. When using Select Frame, specify the frame to use further down.

move the path from one point to another without specifying any coordinate system.

4 If Select frame was selected in the Reference frame list, specify a frame or target in the text box by clicking in the box and then selecting the frame from the graphics window.

5 In the Translation vector box, specify the distance to move the path along the X, Y and Z axes of the reference frame.

Translation vector is applicable only if a reference frame is used. If Point to

Point is used as reference, specify the start and end points for the translation, instead. To do this, click in one of the boxes for the point to specify and then select the point in the graphics window, or type the coordinates of the point.

6 Click Apply.

470

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

13 The Context Menus

13.43 View Robot at Target

13.43 View Robot at Target

Viewing a robot at a target

1 Click View Robot at Target.

2 Select a target, either in the Paths&Targets browser or in the graphics window.

3 The robot will be shown at each selected target whenever a target is selected.

By stepping through the targets in the browser, it will be easy to see how the position of the robot changes.

4 To turn the function off, click the command again.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

471

13 The Context Menus

13.44 View Tool at Target

13.44 View Tool at Target

Viewing a tool at a target

1 Click View Tool at Target and select the tool you want to view at the target.

2 Select a target, either in the Paths&Targets browser or in the graphics window. You can also multiselect targets to show several copies of the tool.

A copy of the tool will be shown at the selected target. By stepping through the targets in the browser, it is easy to see how the tool orientation changes.

3 To turn the function off, click the command and clear the check box.

472

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.1 Overview

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1 Introduction to ScreenMaker

14.1.1 Overview

What is ScreenMaker?

ScreenMaker is a tool in RobotStudio for developing custom screens. It is used to create customized FlexPendant GUIs without the need to learn Visual Studio development environment and .NET programming.

Why ScreenMaker?

A customized operator interface on the factory floor is the key to a simple robotic system. A well-designed custom operator interface presents the right amount of information at the right time and in the right format to the user.

GUI concepts

xx0800000226

A GUI makes it easier for people to work with industrial robots by presenting a visual front end to the internal workings of a robotic system. For FlexPendant GUI applications, the graphical interface consists of a number of screens, each occupying the user window area (the blue box in the figure above) of the

FlexPendant touch screen. A FlexPendant screen is then composed of a number of smaller graphical components in a design layout. Typical controls (sometimes

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

473

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.1 Overview

Continued referred as widgets or graphic components) include buttons, menus, images, and text fields.

A user interacts with a GUI application by:

• Clicking a button

• Selecting from a menu

• Typing a text in a text box

• Scrolling

An action such as clicking a button is called an event. Whenever an action is performed, an event is sent to the GUI application. The exact content of an event is solely dependent on the graphic component itself. Different components trigger different types of events. The GUI application responds to the events in the order generated by the user. This is called event-driven programming, since the main flow of a GUI application is dictated by events rather than being sequential from start to finish. Due to the unpredictability of the user’s actions, one major task in developing a robust GUI application is to ensure that it works correctly no matter what the user does. Of course, a GUI application can, and actually does, ignore events that are irrelevant.

The event handler holds sets of actions to be executed after an event occurs.

Similar to trap routines in the RAPID program, the event handler allows the implementation of application-specific logic, such as running a RAPID program, opening a gripper, processing logic or calculating.

In summary, from a developer’s point of view, a GUI consists of at least two parts:

• the view part: layout and configuration of controls

• the process part: event handlers that respond to events

Modern GUI development environments often provide a form designer, a (What

You See Is What You Get ) WYSIWYG tool to allow the user to select, position and configure the widgets. As for event handlers, typically the developer must use a special programming language recommended by the development environment.

Continues on next page

474

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

FlexPendant concepts

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.1 Overview

Continued xx0800000228

Running Windows CE, the ABB FlexPendant has limited CPU power and memory compared to a PC. A custom GUI application must therefore be placed in the designated folders on the controller hard drive before being loaded. Once loaded, it can be found in the ABB menu as seen in the figure above. Clicking the menu item will launch the GUI application.

As the robot controller is the one actually controlling the robot and its peripheral equipment by executing a RAPID program, a GUI application needs to communicate with the RAPID program server in order to read and write RAPID variables and set or reset I/O signals.

It is essential for RAPID programmers to understand that there are two different levels controlling a work cell: an event-driven GUI application running on the

FlexPendant, and a sequential RAPID program running in the controller. These reside on different CPUs and use different operating systems, so communication and coordination are important and must be carefully designed.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

475

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.2 Development environment

14.1.2 Development environment

Overview

This section presents an overview of the ScreenMaker development environment.

Ribbon

en0900000584_DevelopmentScreen

1

2

3

4

5

Parts

Ribbon

Project explorer

Design area

Output window

ToolBox / Properties

Description

Displays group of icons organized in a logical sequence of functions. See

Ribbon on page 476

.

Shows the active screen project and lists the screens that are defined in the project. For more information, see

Managing ScreenMaker projects on page 487

.

Layout to design the screen with the available controls.

For more information, see

Form designer on page 493

.

Displays information about the events that occur during

ScreenMaker development.

Displays a list of available controls. For more information.

see

ToolBox on page 478 .

Contains the available properties and events of the selected control(s). The value of the properties can either be a fixed value or a link to an IRC5 data or an Application

Variable. For more information, see

Properties window on page 480 .

The ScreenMaker ribbon tab contains a group of icons organized in a logical sequence of functions that facilitates the user in managing ScreenMaker projects.

The Ribbon is categorized into the following groups:

Group

Project

Description

Facilitates the user to manage ScreenMaker project. See

Managing ScreenMaker projects on page 487

.

Continues on next page

476

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Arrange

Group

Add

Build

Controller

Arrange

Diagnosis

Close

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.2 Development environment

Continued

Description

Facilitates the user to add screen and application variables.

See

Managing screens on page 488

and

Managing application variables on page 492 .

Facilitates the user to build a project. See

Building a project on page 491

.

Facilitates the user to connect and deploy to the controller.

See

Connecting to controller on page 490

and

Deploying to controller on page 491

.

Facilitates the user to resize and position the controls on the design area. See

Arrange on page 477

.

Facilitates the user to detect problems in the project and providing a diagnostic solution. See

ScreenMaker Doctor on page 499 .

Facilitates the user to close a project.

This toolbar displays icons for resizing and positioning controls on the design area.

NOTE: The icons are enabled once you select a control or group of controls on the design area.

en0900000592_Layout_toolbar

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

477

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.2 Development environment

Continued

ToolBox

ToolBox acts a container for holding all the available controls that can be placed on a screen.

en0900000407_ToolBox

The following table displays the GUI controls that can be dragged on to the design area.

Control

ActionTrigger

BarGraph

Button

CheckBox

ComboBox

CommandBar

Description

Allows to run a list of actions when either a signal or rapid data changes

Represents an analog value in a bar

Represents a control that can be clicked.

Provides a simple way to trigger an event, and is commonly used to execute commands. It is labeled either with text or an image.

Allows multiple selections from a number of options. They are displayed as a square box with white space (for unselected) or as a tick mark (for selected).

Represents a control that enables to select items from a list

Combination of a drop-down list and a textbox. It allows you to either type a value directly into the control or choose from the list of existing options.

Provides a menu system for a ScreenForm

Continues on next page

478

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Control

ConditionalTrigger

ControllerModeStatus

DataEditor

Graph

GroupBox

LED

ListBox

NumEditor

NumericUpDown

Panel

PictureBox

RadioButton

RapidExecutionStatus

RunRoutineButton

Switch

TabControl

TpsLabel

VariantButton

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.2 Development environment

Continued

Description

Allows to define conditions while defining action triggers. An action is triggered, if there is any change in value of the data bound.

Displays the mode of the Controller (Auto - Manual)

Represents a text box control that can be used to edit the data.

Represents a control that plots data with lines or bars.

Represents a Windows control that displays a frame around a group of controls with an optional caption.

Is a container used to group a set of graphic components. It usually has a title at the top.

Displays a two states value, like a Digital Signal.

Represents a control to display a list of items.

Allows the user to select one or more items from a list contained within a static, multiple line text box.

Represents a text box control that can be used to edit a number.

When the user clicks it, a Numpad is opened.

Represents a spin box that displays numeric values.

Used to group collection of controls.

Represents a picture box control that displays images.

Allows to select only one of a predefined set of options.

Displays the execution status of the Controller Rapid Domain

(Running - Auto)

Represents a Windows button control that calls a RapidRoutine when clicked

Displays and lets change a two states value, like a Digital

Output Signal.

Manages a set of tab pages.

Very commonly used widget that displays text, a label is usually static, that is, it has nointeractivity. A label generally identifies a nearby text box or other graphic component.

Used to change the values of RAPID variables or Application variables.

Note

For more information on using these controls and their properties, see the section

Development environment on page 476

and the chapterUsing the FlexPendant

SDK of the Application manual - FlexPendant SDK.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

479

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.2 Development environment

Continued

Properties window

A control is characterized by its properties and events. Properties describe the appearance and behavior of the component, while events describe the ways in which a control notifies its internal state change to others. By changing the value of a property, the controls have a different look and feel, or exhibit different behavior.

en0900000408_Properties_Window

1

2

Element Description

Graphical component name panel Displays the selected component, and lists the available components of the active design screen.

Properties window toolbar

3

4

Table panel

Information panel en0900000409_Properties_Window_Toolbar

1 Organizes table panel in categories

2 Organizes table panel alphabetically

3 Displays Properties in table panel

4 Displays Events in table panel

Displays all the properties or events in twocolumns. The first column shows the property or event name, the second shows the value of the property or name of the event handler.

Display information about a property or event.

Continues on next page

480

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.2 Development environment

Continued

Editing the property value

You can edit the property value of a control from the Properties window in three ways:

1 By typing the numerics, strings and text. For example, Location, Size, Name etc.

2 By selecting the predefined values from the list. For example, BackColor,

Font etc.

3 By entering the values in the dialog box. For example, Enabled, States,

BaseValue etc.

Building the user interface

This section describes building the GUIs using the following controls from the

ToolBox.

ActionTrigger

1

2

An action trigger initiates an event, such as making a hidden object visible when an action is performed using a control. It allows to run a list of actions when the property value changes. The property value can be bound to a signal, rapid data, or application variable.

ActionTrigger control can also be used to invoke the application from RAPID.

Use this procedure to add an ActionTrigger control::

Action

Drag an ActionTrigger control from the ToolBox on to the design area.

You can modify the name, set the default value and configure data binding value for a ActionTrigger control.

• To set the values of a property, see

Properties window on page 480

.

• You can set the trigger event for an ActionTrigger to any of the event handler created either from a control or from an Events Manager option. To set up the events, see

Setup Events on page 493 .

• To configure the data binding values, see

Configuring data binding on page 496

.

• To set the application variables, see

Managing application variables on page 492

.

NOTE: An action is not triggered when the screen is launched for the first time, but is triggered when there is a difference in the bound value at any point of time.

This functionality is supported only in RobotWare 5.12.02 or higher.

Example: Consider a signal being bound to the value property. The value of the signal changes at runtime on performing a specific action. The event handler configured for ActionTrigger control gets triggered based on this signal value change.

TpsLabel

TpsLabel is a standard Windows label that displays a descriptive text.

Use this procedure to add a TpsLabel control:

Step

1

Action

Drag a TpsLabel control from the ToolBox on to the design area.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

481

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.2 Development environment

Continued

Step

2

3

Action

You can set the values, setup events, configure data binding values and set the application values for a TpsLabel control.

• To set the values of a property, see

Properties window on page 480

.

• To set up the events, see

Setup Events on page 493

.

• To configure the data binding values, see

Configuring data binding on page 496

.

• To set the application variables, see

Managing application variables on page 492

.

You can set the option Allow Multiple States to true and change the property.

1 Click Allow Multiple States. The StatesEditor dialog box appears.

2 Click the check-box Allow Multi-States, select the properties to change from

Properties For States and click OK.

NOTE!

• The controls Button, PictureBox, and TpsLabel support AllowMultipleStates.

• For more information on how to use AllowMultipleStates, see

Picture object and changing images due to I/O on page 512

.

Panel

Panel is used to group a collection of controls.

Use this procedure to add a Panel control:

Step

1

2

3

Action

Drag a Panel control from the ToolBox on to the design area.

You can add a group of controls to a panel.

You can modify the name, set the default value and binding value for a Panel control.

• To set the values of a property, see

Properties window on page 480

.

• To set up the events, see

Setup Events on page 493

.

• To configure the data binding values, see

Configuring data binding on page 496

.

• To set the application variables, see

Managing application variables on page 492

.

NOTE: Currently only EventHandler, CancelEventHandlers, and MouseEventArgs are supported.

ControllerModeStatus

ControllerModeStatus displays the mode of the controller (Auto - Manual).

Use this procedure to add a ControllerModeStatus control:

Step

1

2

Action

Drag a ControllerModeStatuscontrol from the ToolBox on to the design area.

You can set the values, setup events, configure data binding values, and set the application variables for a ControllerModeStatus control.

• To set the values of a property, see

Properties window on page 480

.

• To set up the events, see

Setup Events on page 493

.

• To configure the data binding values, see

Configuring data binding on page 496

.

• To set the application variables, see

Managing application variables on page 492

.

Continues on next page

482

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.2 Development environment

Continued

Step

3

Action

You can select the image to be displayed when the controller is in Auto mode and in Manual mode.

• Click AutoImage in the Properties window and browse to select the image to be displayed in Auto mode.

• Click ManualImage in the Properties window and browse to select the image to be displayed in Manual mode.

RapidExecutionStatus

RapidExecutionStatus displays the execution status of the Controller Rapid Domain

(Running - Auto). This control is used

Use this procedure to add a RapidExecutionStatus control:

Step

1

2

3

Action

Drag a RapidExecutionStatus control from the ToolBox on to the design area.

You can set the values, setup events, configure data binding values, and set the application values for a RapidExecutionStatus control.

• To set the values of a property, see

Properties window on page 480

.

• To set up the events, see

Setup Events on page 493 .

• To configure the data binding values, see

Configuring data binding on page 496

.

• To set the application variables, see

Managing application variables on page 492

.

You can select the image to be displayed when the Program is running and is stopped.

• Click RunningImage in the Properties window and browse to select the image to be displayed when the Program is running.

• Click StoppedImage in the Properties window and browse to select the image to be displayed when the Program is stopped.

RunRoutineButton

RunRoutineButton represents a Windows button that calls a RapidRoutine when clicked.

Use this procedure to add a RunRoutineButton control:

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Action

Drag a RunRoutineButton control from the ToolBox on to the design area.

Click the smart tag on the RunRoutineButton and select one of the following Run-

RoutineButtonTasks.

• Define Actions before calling Routine

• Select Routine to call

• Define Actions after calling Routine

Click Define Actions before calling Routine to define an action/event before calling the routine.

The Events Panel dialog box appears.

For more information on setting up events, see

Setup Events on page 493

.

Click Define Actions after calling Routine to define an action/event afterre calling the routine.

The Events Panel dialog box appears.

For more information on setting up events, see

Setup Events on page 493

.

Click Select Routine to call.

The Controller Object Binding dialog box appears.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Continues on next page

483

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.2 Development environment

Continued

Step

6

Action

In the Properties window, set the value for the following properties:

• RoutineToCall - Set the routine to be called. Indicates the RAPID Routine that will be called when this button is pressed.

• AllowInAuto - Set to True or False. Indicates if the routine could be called in the Auto mode.

• TextAlign - Set to MiddleLeft and MiddleCenter. Indicates the text alignment.

NOTE:

• You cannot bind RunRoutineButton to built-in Service routines.

• Only user defined procedures with no arguments can be binded.

• Set the PP to task before performing action through RunRoutineButton.

CommandBar

3

4

CommandBar allows you to add menu items in a controlled and organized order.

Use this procedure to add menu items to the CommandBar control:

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Action

Drag a CommandBar control from the ToolBox on to the design area.

The CommandBar appear at the bottom of the screen.

Click the smart tag on the CommandBar and select Add/Remove Items.

The MenuItem Collection Editor window appears.

Click Add.

A new menu item is added and its properties are displayed which can be edited.

NOTE! While editing the menu item, ensure that the property Text is filled. If not, nothing appears on the CommandBar.

To remove the menu item, select the menu item and Click Remove.

Click Close to close the MenuItem Collection Editor window.

To add an event to a menu item, for example menuItem1 on the command bar, use this procedure:

Step

1

2

Action

Go to the Properties window and select menuItem1 from the drop-down list.

Click Events icon and then double-click the Click event. This opens the Events

Panel dialog for the Click event.

Click Add Action from the Events Panel dialog. This opens a sub-list of actions.

Click an action from the sub-list of actions to add it to menuItem1's Click event.

For more information about setting up events, see

Setup Events on page 493 .

VariantButton

The VariantButton control is a simple button control with additional features and properties. Using this control, you can change the values of RAPID or Application variables.

Use this procedure to add the VariantButton control:

Step

1

2

Action

Drag a VariantButton control from the ToolBox on to the design area.

You can perform the following VariantButton tasks from the SmartTag:

• Define Actions before value change

• Define Actions after value change

Continues on next page

484 3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.1.2 Development environment

Continued

Step

3

4

Action

You can set the following VariantButton specific properties from the Properties window:

• Select Increment or Decrement from Behavior drop down. The default behavior of VariantButton is Increment.

• Select StepRate and set the rate at which the value must be varied.

• Select DataType to which the value should be bound and set the value property of the selected datatype.

NOTE! Supports only the RAPID datatypes, Num and Dnum. For more information on data binding, see

Configuring data binding on page 496

.

You can also perform the following common tasks from the Properties windows:

• Set BackColor, ForeColor, Location, and Size of the control.

• Select True or False from the Visible dropdown to hide or unhide the control.

• Select True or False from the Enabled drop down to enable or disable the control.

ConditionalTrigger

The ConditionalTrigger button defines the condition while defining action triggers.

An action will be triggered if there is a change in the value of the data bound.

Use this prcodedure to add the ConditionalTrigger control:

Step

1

2

Action

Drag a ConditionalTrigger control from the ToolBox on to the design area.

You can set the following ConditionalTrigger properties from the Properties window:

• Select the condition to execute from the Condition drop down. The following are the supported conditions AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and EQUAL.

• Select True or False from the Enabled drop down to enable or disable the control.

• Select LHS and RHS and bind the data value to Controller Object or Application Variable. For more information on data binding, see

Data binding on page 496 .

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

485

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.1 Overview

14.2 Managing ScreenMaker projects

14.2.1 Overview

Overview

This chapter describes how to manage projects in ScreenMaker. A complete cycle includes creating, saving, building, connecting, and deploying a ScreenMaker project.

486

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.2 Managing ScreenMaker projects

14.2.2 Managing ScreenMaker projects

Overview

You can manage a project (create, delete, load, or save) either from ScreenMaker ribbon or Context menu.

Creating a new project

Use this procedure to create a new project:

1 Click New from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select New Project.

The New ScreenMaker Project dialog box appears.

Note

You can create a new project either from ScreenMaker installed templates or ScreenMaker custom templates.

2 To create a new project from the ScreenMaker installed templates, a Click Simple Project.

b Enter a name and specify the location for the new project. By default, the new project is saved on C:\My Documents\RobotStudio\My

ScreenMaker Projects.

c Click OK.

d A screen MainScreen(main) is added in the tree view.

3 To create a new project from the ScreenMaker custom templates, a Click Basic, Standard, or Extended.

b Enter a name and specify the location for the new project. By default, the new project is saved on C:\My Documents\RobotStudio\My

ScreenMaker Projects.

c Click OK.

Note

• If you select the template Basic, a project with two screens are created.

• If you select the template Standard, a project with four screens are created.

• If you select the template Extended, a project with six screens are created.

Loading a project or template

Use this procedure to load an existing project or an existing template:

1 Click Open from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Open Project.

The Open Screen Project File dialog box appears.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

487

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.2 Managing ScreenMaker projects

Continued

2 Browse to the location of the project file or template file to be loaded and click Open.

Note

You can also load an existing project using a quick access method.

1 Click Recent from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Recent Projects.

2 Select the project file from the list of most recently opened projects.

Saving a project

To save a project or template, follow this step:

• Click Save from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Save.

To save the existing project or template with a new name, follow this step:

• Click SaveAs from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select SaveAs.

Note

• Project files are saved with the extension *.smk.

• Template files are saved with the extension *.smt.

SaveAs FlexPendant Project

To save the ScreenMaker project as a FlexPendant project, follow this step:

• Click SaveAs FlexPendant Project from the ScreenMaker ribbon and select

Save.

The project is saved with the extension *.csproj which can be opened from Microsoft

Visual Studio.

Closing a project

To close a project, follow this step:

• Right-click Project context menu and select Close Project.

Closing ScreenMaker

To close ScreenMaker, follow this step:

• Click Close ScreenMaker from the ScreenMaker ribbon.

Managing screens

This section describes adding, renaming, deleting, and editing a screen.

Creating a screen

1 Click Screen from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Add Screen.The New Screen dialog box appears.

2 Enter the name of the new screen in Name text box.

3 Click OK

Continues on next page

488

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.2 Managing ScreenMaker projects

Continued

Deleting a screen

1 From the Project tree view, select the screen to be deleted.

2 Right-click and select Delete.

Renaming a screen

1 From the Project tree view, select the screen to be renamed.

2 Right-click and select Rename. The Rename of Screen dialog box appears.

3 Enter the new name in the text box and click OK.

Editing a screen

For information on editing a screen, see

Editing a screen on page 493 .

Changing the Main screen

You have the option to change the main screen.

1 From the Project tree view, select the screen to be changed.

2 Right-click and select Set as Main Screen.

Modifying Project properties

Project properties define the properties of the ScreenMaker project, including how the GUI is loaded and displayed in the FlexPendant.

Use this procedure to modify the project properties:

1 Right-click Project context menu and select Properties.

The Project Properties dialog box appears.

2 In the Display tab under Caption, enter the text in the Caption of the

Application field to edit the caption.

The updated caption appears in the ABB Menu on the right side.

3 In the Display tab under ABB Menu, select the following options,

Option

Left

Right

None

Description

application is visible to the left in the ABB Menu.

application is visible to the right in the ABB Menu.

application is not visible at all in the ABB Menu.

Note

The applications that uses the option None cannot be run on RobotWare releases earlier than 5.11.01.

4 In the Display tab under ABB Menu, browse and select the ABB menu image.

5 In the Display tab under TaskBar, browse and select the TaskBar image.

Note

By default, the Use Default Image and Use Menu Image checkbox is enabled and the deafult image tpu-Operator32.gif is selected.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

489

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.2 Managing ScreenMaker projects

Continued

6 In the Display tab under Startup , select Automatic to load the screen automatically at the Startup.

Note

By default, the start up type is Manual.

7 In the Advanced tab under Run Settings, select Launch virtual FlexPendant

after deploying checkbox.

The virtual FlexPendant will be launched after deploying the ScreenMaker project to the virtual controller.

Note

This feature is not applicable if connected to a real controller.

Connecting to controller

Use this procedure to establish the connection with a controller in both Online mode and Offline mode:

1 Click Connect from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Connect.

The Select a Robot Controller dialog box appears.

Note

Click the Connect dropdown from the ScreenMaker ribbon to directly connect to the controller.

2 Click Refresh to find a list of all the available controllers.

Note

• If the connection with the controller is through Offline mode then all running VCs are listed.

• If the connection with the controller is through Online mode then all connected real controllers are listed.

• By default, the currently connected controller is highlighted and has a small icon before the row as an indicator.

3 Select the controller to be connected from the list and click Connect.

The connection status is displayed in the Project tree view.

Note

• To remove the connection with the controller, click Disconnect from the Project context menu.

• To shift between Online and Offline modes, click Switch to Online

Controller or Switch to Offline Controller from the Project context menu.

Continues on next page

490

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.2 Managing ScreenMaker projects

Continued

Building a project

The result from building the ScreenMaker project is a set of files including DLL file and images. The ScreenMaker project can be compiled into binary format (.dll) that can be deployed on a FlexPendant.

Use this procedure to build a project:

1 Click Build from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Build

The result is displayed in the output window.

Deploying to controller

Use this procedure to deploy a ScreenMaker project to a real controller or virtual controller:

1 Connect to the controller you want to deploy to. See

Connecting to controller on page 490

.

2 Click Deploy from the ScreenMaker ribbon or right-click Project context menu and select Deploy Screen to Controller.

The Download dialog box appears displaying the progress of download. It disappears once the download is successful.

The TpsViewxxxxxx.dll file is downloaded.

3 Restart the controller.

Note

• If a real controller is used, you can reboot the FlexPendant by moving its joystick three times to the right, once to the left, and once towards you.

• If a virtual controller is used, you can reboot the FlexPendant by closing the virtual FlexPendant window.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

491

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.3 Application variables

14.2.3 Application variables

Overview

Application variables, also called temporary variables are created for a ScreenMaker project. During runtime, they reside in the FlexPendant memory. It is used for data sharing and performance improvement. It is similar to a RAPID variable and has a RAPID data type.

Managing application variables

To create, delete, and rename an application variable, follow these steps:

1 In the Project context menu, right-click and select Application Variables.

The Project Application Variables dialog box appears.

2 Click Add and define the name, type and value of the new variable.

3 Select the variable, click Delete to delete a variable.

4 Select the variable, click Rename, enter the new name and click OK to rename a variable.

5 Click Close.

Note

For information on application variable data binding, see

Data binding on page 496

.

492

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.4 Form designer

14.2.4 Form designer

Overview

The Form designer is a tool to edit or design a screen. It allows you to design the screen with the required controls and the design area resembles a FlexPendant screen.

Editing a screen

To edit a screen, follow these steps:

1 Drag a control from the toolbox and drop it on the design area.

The Properties window displays all the properties of the control.

2 Select the control and resize or reposition for configuration.

Note

You can either select a single control or multiple controls:

• Single control : Left-click the control on the design area or select the control from the list in the Properties window.

• Multiple controls: Left-click on the design area, drag the mouse and create a window selecting all the controls.

3 Click the smart tag on the upper right corner of the control to perform the basic tasks of configuration. See

Configuring data binding on page 496 .

Note

You can perform additional configuration by editing the attributes in the

Properties window. See

Development environment on page 476 .

Setup Events

Event handler is a set of actions to be executed after an event occurs.

To set up an event, follow these steps:

1 Select the control for which the event handler is to be defined.

2 Open the Events Panel dialog box in any one of the following ways:

• Double-click the control.

• Right-click the control, select Events Manager, click Add enter the name, and click OK and close.

• Click smart tag and select the task from the list.

• In the Properties window, click Events icon and select the desired event from the list.

3 Click Add Action to add an action from a predefined list of actions.

The following table lists the set of predefined actions:

Screens

• Open Screen

• Close Screen

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

493

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.4 Form designer

Continued

Signals

RapidData

Advanced

• Set a Digital Signal

• Invert a Digital Signal

• Pulse a Digital Signal

• Read a Signal

• Write a Signal

• Reset a Digital Signal

• Read a Rapid Data

• Write a Rapid Data

• Call another Action list

• Call .NET method

• Call Custom Action

4 Select the action from the left window and perform the following:

• Click Delete to delete the action.

• Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order of execution of actions.

5 Click OK.

Note

To delete a user created event handler, do the following:

1 Right-click the control, select Events Manager. The Events Manager dialog box appears.

2 Select the event handler to be deleted from the list and click Delete.

Advanced options

Call another Action List

Existing event handlers from Events Manager can be reused by other controls while defining actions for event. You can call another event handler from an existing event handler.

In the following example, listbox1_SelectedIndexChanged event handler is called from comboBox1_SelectionIndexChanged event handler.

NOTE! Click Show warning message before performing actions checkbox to display a message box before performing these actions.

Call .NET Method

You can import the dlls and add references to the Advanced tab of the Project

Properties dialog box.

Once the references are defined, .NET methods appear in the Project Properties dialog box and can be included in the Actions list which will be executed on performing the desired action.

Double click the method and bind the return value to the application variable.

Continues on next page

494

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.4 Form designer

Continued

Binding can be done only to the application variable. For more information, see

Application variable data binding on page 497 .

Note

ScreenMaker allows you to call static methods of the public classes defined in another DLL. This DLL is usually a class library or a control library. It has the following limitations and the user should be aware of them while using .Net DLLs.

• DLL’s references must be in the same directory in order to load the DLL.

• ScreenMaker provides access only to the static methods which contain basic data types such as string, int, double, boolean, object.

Call Custom Action

You can add an user control to the ScreenMaker toolbox and call a custom method for that control by defining it in the ScreenMaker.dll.config file.

NOTE! Currently Call Custom Action supports only the Graph control.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

495

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.5 Data binding

14.2.5 Data binding

Overview

Data binding is the mechanism that links a GUI property with an external data source such that whenever the data source is updated the GUI property will be updated automatically and vice verse. Databinding has the following three aspects:

• A unidirectional connection means that an update of the data source is reflected by the GUI, or vice versa; a bidirectional connection means that updates to either are reflected by the other.

• A temporal connection can be suspended and resumed at any time.

• A convertable connection negotiates between the different data types or formats between the data source and the GUI property.

A screen has to be linked with data to be useful. There are two ways of linking the data with the GUI properties:

Controller object data binding on page 497

Application variable data binding on page 497

Configuring data binding

Data binding can be configured in the following two ways:

Using smart tag

Smart tags perform basic configuration tasks like binding default GUI property with controller data. The controls that either display or edit information normally have a value property to represent the information. Smart tag binds the value to the controller object.

• On the design area, select the control and click the smart tag. The tasks menu appears.

Click...

to...

Bind Value to a Controller Object bind data to a Controller Object.

For more information, see

Controller object data binding on page 497 .

Bind Value to an Application

Variable binding data to a application variable.

For more information, see

Application variable data binding on page 497 .

Using Binding menu

1 On the design area, select the control.

2 In the Properties window, locate the row from the table for binding the value.

3 Select the property and click the list to display the Binding menu.

Click...

Remove actual binding

Bind to a Controller object

to...

removes the existing data binding.

select available data in the controller for binding.

For more information, see

Controller object data binding on page 497 .

Continues on next page

496

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.5 Data binding

Continued

Click...

to...

Bind to an Application variable select available data in project temporary data store for binding.

For more information, see

Application variable data binding on page 497 .

Configuring data binding for different controls

Almost all the controls defined in the toolbox (except ComboBox and ListBox) have the following two options for binding values:

• Bind to a Controller Object

• Bind to an Application Variable

Binding to an array can be done with the following controls:

• DataEditor

• ComboBox

• ListBox

Control

DataEditor

Description

The default index value is 1. DataEditor is designed in such a way that the default value of the Rapid array starts with 1 and not 0.

ComboBox and ListBox The default index value is -1. You can enter the appropriate index value but cannot bind to a controller object or an application variable.

NOTE!

• You can limit the number of items to be displayed in the

ComboBox and ListBox of an array.

• While using a ComboBox, a RAPID index starts with 1 (1 specifies the first element) and the ComboBox index starts with 0( 0 specifies the first index).

Controller object data binding

Controller object data binding lets you to select the data in the controller for binding.

Use this procedure to set up a binding with controller objects:

1 Select Bind to a Controller Object either using smart tag or binding menu.

The Controller Object Binding dialog box appears.

2 In the Type of Object group, select either Rapid data or Signal data.

3 In the Shared group, select Built-in data only to access shared Rapid data.

NOTE! When you select Built-in data only, the option Signal data and the text box Module are disabled.

4 If you select Rapid data, from the Scope group, select a task and module from the list.

NOTE! When you select Signal data, the Scope group is disabled.

5 In the See list, select the desired data.

Application variable data binding

Application variables are used for data binding in the same way as controller data.

See

Controller object data binding on page 497

.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

497

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.5 Data binding

Continued

Use this procedure to set up a binding with application variables:

1 Select Bind to an Application Variable either using smart tag or binding menu.

The Application Variables Bind Form dialog box appears.

2 Select an application variable and the field to connect.

3 Click Setup Variables to manage the variables.

The Project Application Variables dialog box appears. See

Managing application variables on page 492 .

4 Click OK.

498

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.6 ScreenMaker Doctor

14.2.6 ScreenMaker Doctor

Overview

ScreenMaker Doctor is a diagnostic solution to detect problems in the ScreenMaker project. It helps analyze the project and fix errors such as unused events, broken references, application variables, signals, modules, and rapid data.

Using ScreenMaker Doctor

Use this procedure to launch ScreenMaker Doctor, detect and report issues, and to view causes and soultions:

1 In the ScreenMaker ribbon, click ScreenMaker Doctor.

The ScreenMaker Doctor Wizard opens.

2 Click Next.

The wizard starts detecting issues and are reported in Completed Checks.

NOTE! The issues are categorized as Broken References, Unused Events,

Broken ApplicationVariables, Broken Signals, Broken Modules, and Broken

RapidData.

3 Click View Causes and Solutions to generate a report.

The left hand side of the report displays issues under each category and the right hand side of the report displays the Probable Causes and Solutions for the issues.

Note

ScreenMaker Doctor only detects the missing RAPID and signal data that are bound in ScreenMaker project but do not exist in connected controller. In order to detect the signal data and RAPID, ScreenMaker project should be connected to the controller.

ScreenMaker Doctor does not detect actions that are defined as part of events.

For example: If an action has been defined to Read Rapid Data into Application

Variable.

ScreenMaker Doctor scenarios

The following section describes the different scenarios where in the ScreenMaker

Doctor can be used:

Unused Events

The following section describes the scenario when the ScreenMaker Doctor can be used if an unused event is present in the Screenamker project:

1 Create a ScreenMaker project.

2 Define events for the controls. See Setup events.

3 Define the events Button1_Click and Button2_Click for th controls Button1and

Button2 respectively.

4 Delete the control Button1. The event Button1_Click will still exist. An unused event is created.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

499

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.6 ScreenMaker Doctor

Continued

Broken Reference

The following section describes the scenario when the ScreenMaker Doctor can be used if a broken reference is present in the ScreenMaker project:

1 Create a ScreenMaker project.

2 Define events for the controls. See Setup events.

3 Define the events Button1_Click and Button2_Click for the controls

Button1and Button2 respectively.

4 Define action ScreenOpen - Screen2 for the event Button1_Click.

5 Delete or rename the screen. A broken reference is created.

Broken Application Variables

The following section describes the scenario when the ScreenMaker Doctor can be used if a broken reference is present in the ScreenMaker project:

1 Create a ScreenMaker project.

2 Add an Application variable to the project.

3 Rename or delete the Application variable. No error is reported.

4 An error is reported during the run time.

500

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.2.7 Screen navigation

14.2.7 Screen navigation

Overview

Screen navigation in ScreenMaker follows a tree structure.

Consider the following example,

• To open screen A1, you first have to open Screen A

• To navigate from screen A1 to screen B1, you first have to close screen A1 and then Screen A and navigate from Main Screen through Screen B to screen B1.

• Similarly, to navigate from screen B1 to screen C1, you first have to close screen B1 and Screen B and then navigate from Main Screen through Screen

C to screen C1.

en0900000645_ScreenNavigation

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

501

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.3.1 Overview

14.3 Tutorial

14.3.1 Overview

About this chapter

This chapter is designed as a tutorial to take you through the steps involved in designing a FlexArc Operator Panel.

The FlexArc Operator Panel is a simple arc welding cell, where the robots can perform the following three different jobs.

Job

Produce

Service

Bull’s Eye

Description

Welding the part

Service the welding gun

Calibrate with bull’s eye

The FlexArc Operator Panel displays the following graphic elements:

• Controller Status (controller mode auto or manual and the RAPID execution status)

• Part Status (number of produced parts, the average cycle time per part, and a Reset button)

• Robot jobs (Produce, Service, and Bull’s Eye) and Robot locations (Robot at home position, service location, calibration location, and part location)

• Start and Stop buttons

502 en1000000359_FlexArcOperatorPanel_GUI

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.3.2 Designing the FlexArc operator panel

14.3.2 Designing the FlexArc operator panel

Procedure

Use this procedure to design the FlexArc operator panel:

1

2

3

Action Info

Create a system for the FlexArc operator panel.

For more information about creating a system, see

Creating a system from layout on page 208

.

NOTE! Ensure you select the following options,

• FlexPendant Interface

• PC Interface

Load EIO.cfg and MainModule.mod files.

For more information on loading these files, see

Loading a configuration file on page 379

and

Loading a RAPID module on page 355 .

By default,

• For Windows XP, the files can be found at C:\Documents and

Settings\<user name>\My Documents\RobotStudio\My

ScreenMaker Projects\Tutorial

• For Windows 7, the files can be found at C:\Users\<user name>\Documents\RobotStudio\My ScreenMaker Projects\Tutorial

The following signals are created after loading

EIO.cfg file en1000000464_Tutorial_Signals

4

5

6

Create an empty station in RobotStudio with the system created in the previous step.

For more information about creating a station, see

New Station on page 192 .

Launch ScreenMaker from RobotStudio.

Create a new ScreenMaker project.

For more information, see

Launching

ScreenMaker on page 367 .

For more informaton, see

Creating a new project on page 487 .

1 Enter the project name as Flex-

ArcGUI, and save it in the default location, C:\Users\<user name>\Documents\RobotStudio\My ScreenMaker Projects\Tutorial.

2 A new tab MainScreenis added to the Design Surface.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

503

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.3.2 Designing the FlexArc operator panel

Continued

7

Action

Configure the Project properties.

8 Connect to the controller.

9 Create application variables (temporary variables) and configure them with the following data

Info

To customize how the GUI should appear on the FlexPendant, modify the Project properties. For more information, see

Modifying Project properties on page 489

.

For more information, see

Connecting to controller on page 490 .

The result appears in the output window.

en1000000360_ProjectApplicationVariables

For more information, see

Managing application variables on page 492 .

10 Design the Main Screen.

11

12

Build and Deploy the project.

Open virtual FlexPendant and test the GUI

For more information, see

Designing the screen on page 505 .

For more information, see

Building and deploying the project on page 511 .

• In RobotStudio, press Ctrl+F5 to launch the virtual FlexPendant.

• Click FlexArc operator panel to launch the GUI.

Note

Ensure that you switch the controller to Auto mode and start the RAPID execution.

504

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.3.3 Designing the screen

14.3.3 Designing the screen

Introduction to designing the screen

A major effort in the GUI project development is designing screens. The Form designer in the ScreenMaker allows you to drag controls from the toolbox to the design surface. Using the Properties window, you can resize, position, label, color, and configure the controls.

Designing FlexArc Operator Panel screen

Use this procedure to design the FlexArc Operator Panel screen:

1 Drag a GroupBox control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window.

Property

Location

Size

Title

BackColor

Value

14,45

150,100

Controller Status

LightGray

2 Drag another GroupBox control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window.

Property

Location

Size

Title

BackColor

Value

14,170

150,204

Part Status

LightGray

3 Drag a ControllerModeStatus control from the Controller Data category; place it in the Controller Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

BackColor

Value

19,40

44,44

LightGray

4 Drag a RapidExecutionStatus control from the ControllerData category; place it in the Controller Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

BackColor

Value

80,40

44,44

LightGray

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

505

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.3.3 Designing the screen

Continued

5 Drag a TpsLabel control from the General category; place it in the Part Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

Text

BackColor

Font

Value

16,30

131,20

Parts Produced

LightGray

TpsFont10

6 Drag a NumEditor control from the ControllerData category; place it in the

Parts Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

Value

Value

16,56

116,23

Link to RAPID variable partsReady defined in the module

MainModule.

7 Drag another TpsLabel control from the General category; place it in the Part

Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

Text

BackColor

Font

Value

16,89

131,20

Cycle time/part

LightGray

TpsFont10

8 Drag another NumEditor control from the General category; place it in the

Part Status groupbox created and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

Value

Value

16,115

116,23

Link to RAPID variable cycleTime defined in the module

MainModule.

9 Drag a Button control from the General category; place it in the Part Status group box created and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

Text

Value

33,154

85,34

Reset

Continues on next page

506

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.3.3 Designing the screen

Continued

Perform the following for the Reset button in the Part Status group:

Step Action

1

2

Double-click the button Reset. The Events Panel dialog box appears which is used to define the actions for Events.

In the Events Panel dialog box, click Add Action; point to Rapid Data and select Write a Rapid Data.

The Action Parameters dialog box appears; assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.

T_ROB1.MainModule.partsReady to MyResetValue.Value

Similarly, assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.

T_ROB1.MainModule.cycleTime to MyResetValue.Value

NOTE! Two actions of similar type are needed to perform the Reset action.

One is to reset Rapid variable partsReady to 0, the other is to reset Rapid variable cycleTime to 0.

10 Drag a PictureBox control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

SizeMode

Image

Value

177,28

284,359

StretchImage

FlexArcCell.GIF

Note

You can find the graphic (.GIF ) files at C:\MyDocuments\RobotStudio\My

ScreenMaker Projects\Tutorial\Images.

11 Drag another PictureBox control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

SizeMode

Image

AllowMultipleStates

SlectedStateValue

States

Value

237,31

48,48

StretchImage

RobotAtHome.GIF

True

NOTE! Select Image property from the StatesEditor dialog box

DI_RobotAtHome

Link State{0} to RobotAtHome_gray.GIF

Link State{1} to RobotAtHome.GIF

NOTE! Add AllowMultipleStates option to the PictureBox control. The objective is to have an image that changes when an I/O signal changes.

For more information on how to use AllowMultipleStates for PictureBox control, see

Picture object and changing images due to I/O on page 512 .

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

507

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.3.3 Designing the screen

Continued

Continues on next page

508

12 Drag a Button control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

Text

Font

BackColor

Enabled

Value

486,66

116,105

Start

TpsFont20b

LimeGreen

Link to DI_RobotAtHome

Perform the following for the Start button:

Step Action

1

2

Double-click the button Start or click the Smart tag and select Define Actions when clicked. The Events Panel dialog box appears which is used to define the actions for Events.

In the Events Panel dialog box, click Add Action; point to Rapid Data and select Write a Rapid Data. The Action Parameters dialog box appears.

3 In the Action Parameters dialog box, assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.

T_ROB1.MainModule.JobProduce to JobProduce

13 Drag a Button control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

Text

Font

BackColor

Enabled

Value

486,226

116,105

Stop

TpsFont20b

LimeGreen

Link to DI_PRODUCE

Perform the following for the Stop button:

Step Action

1

2

3

Double-click the button Stop or click the Smart tag and select Define Actions when clicked. The Events Panel dialog box appears which is used to define the actions for Events.

In the Events Panel dialog box, click Add Action; point to Rapid Data and select Write a Rapid Data. The Action Parameters dialog box appears.

In the Action Parameters dialog box, assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.

T_ROB1.MainModule.JobIdle to JobIdle

14 Drag a Button control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Value

274,246

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.3.3 Designing the screen

Continued

Property

Size

Text

Font

Enabled

AllowMultipleStates

SelectedStates

States

Value

111,47

Bull’s Eye

TpsFont14b

Link to DI_RobotAtHome

True

NOTE! Select BackColor property from the StatesEditor dialog box

DI_RobotAtBull'sEye

Link State{0} to Red

Link State{1} to Green

Perform the following for the Bull’s Eye button:

Step

1

Action

Double-click the button Bull’s Eye or click the Smart tag and select Define

Actions when clicked. The Events Panel dialog box appears which is used to define the actions for Events.

2

3

In the Events Panel dialog box, click Add Action; point to Rapid Data and select Write a Rapid Data. The Action Parameters dialog box appears.

In the Action Parameters dialog box, assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.

T_ROB1.MainModule.JobBulls to JobBulls

15 Drag a Button control from the General category; place it on the design surface and set the following values in the Properties window:

Property

Location

Size

Text

Font

Enabled

AllowMultipleStates

SelectedStates

States

Value

274,324

111,47

Service

TpsFont14b

Link to DI_RobotAtHome

True

NOTE! Select BackColor property from the StatesEditor dialog box

DI_RobotAtService

Link State{0} to Red

Link State{1} to Green

Perform the following for the Service button:

Step Action

1

2

Double-click the button Service or click the Smart tag and select Define Actions when clicked. The Events Panel dialog box appears which is used to define the actions for Events.

In the Events Panel dialog box, click Add Action; point to Rapid Data and select Write a Rapid Data. The Action Parameters dialog box appears.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page

509

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.3.3 Designing the screen

Continued

Step Action

3 In the Action Parameters dialog box, assign Rapid data to the following value and click OK.

T_ROB1.MainModule.JobService to JobService

510

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.3.4 Building and deploying the project

14.3.4 Building and deploying the project

Procedure

1 From the ScreenMaker ribbon, click Build.

For more information on building the project, see

Building a project on page 491 .

2 From the ScreenMaker ribbon, click Deploy.

For more information on deploying the project, see

Deploying to controller on page 491

.

3 In RobotStudio, press Ctrl+F5 to launch the Virtual Flexpendant and click

FlexArc Operator Panel to open the GUI.

Note

Ensure that you start the RAPID execution and switch the controller into

Auto mode.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

511

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.4 Frequently asked questions

14.4 Frequently asked questions

How to deploy manually to a Virtual Controller

If for any reason you wish to manually by-pass the Deploy button in RobotStudio and the virtual controller, the following information describes what files are to be moved.

Actions

Location of output files

The files that contain the FlexPendant application from ScreenMaker are found

(for example) in the bin directory under the My ScreenMaker Projects located in the My documents directory of the user.

For example, My Documents\My ScreenMaker Projects\SCM_Example\bin where

SCM_Example is the example ScreenMaker project.

The files in the bin directory are to be copied to a location where the Virtual

FlexPendant can read them during the start of the FlexPendant.

Location where the Virtual FlexPendant reads the files

The recommended location for manually copying the ScreenMaker output files is the location of the virtual controller system.

If the system is created manually from System Builder, it is located in the My

Documents directory.

For example, My Documents\IRB4400_60_SCM_Example\HOME where

IRB4400_60_SCM_Example is the example controller system.

If the system is created by a Pack-and-Go and then restored, it is located in the

RobotStudio\Systems folder.

For example,

MyDocuments\RobotStudio\Systems\IRB4400_60_SCM_Example\HOME where

IRB4400_60_SCM_Example is the example controller system.

Copy files

Copy the files from the ScreenMaker output to the Home directory of the virtual controller system.

Restart the Virtual FlexPendant and the new application will be loaded.

Picture object and changing images due to I/O

The typical user objective is to have an image that changes when an I/O signal changes, this is common for a digital input to affect the state on the FlexPendant.

Actions

This is accomplished by adding an image and allowing the image to have multiple states.

Set AllowMultipleState to TRUE and set the Image state.

Create two states and add images for each state:

The Value property is extremely important. If binding to a digital input then there are two states for the input, 0 and 1. Set the Value property to the value of the

Continues on next page

512

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

14 The ScreenMaker tab

14.4 Frequently asked questions

Continued bound variable. 0 and 1 for digital input. It is also possible to bind to RAPID variables and have multiple states and values for the values in the RAPID variable.

Set the SelectedStateValue property to bind to a controller object:

How to get radio buttons to show state when entering

The objective is to have two radio buttons that controls one digital output. When the screen is loaded, the buttons should show the current state of the output.

Actions

Create a group or a panel and place the two radio buttons on the group or panel.

For button1, set the property default value to True and bind the property to the value of the controller digital output signal.

For button2, do not do any changes.

When the screen is loaded, the state of the two radio buttons is established correctly.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

513

This page is intentionally left blank

Index

Index

3

3D view group, 252

3D settings, 252

Markup, 256

Show/Hide, 252

View, 252

A

ABB library, 206

action instruction

about, 25

Activate RobotStudio

Manual activation, 40

Add Controller, 383

add to path, 421

Adjust Robtargets, 362

alerts

activate, 146

align frame orientation, 422

align target orientation, 423

Application grants, 404

Application Variables, 492 create,delete, rename application variables, 492

FlexPendant memory, 492

RAPID variable, 492

attach to object, 424

Authenticate, 386

Edit User Accounts, 386

Login as a Different User, 386

Log in as Default User, 386

Log off, 386

Log off all controllers, 386

UAS Grant Viewer, 386

auto configuration, 425

AutoPath, 227

AutoPlaceWorkObject, 342

B

Backup, 370 create backup, 370

Back up

restore backup, 372

browser

Layout, 46

Modeling, 49

Paths & Targets, 47

C

CAD file

troubleshoot and optimize, 90

CAD formats

convert, 89

check reachability, 427

collision

detection, 141 sets, 141

configuration

robot axis, 32

configuration editor, 374

instance editor, 377

configuration file, 184

configuration monitoring

about, 33

Configure data binding, 496

Using Binding menu, 496

Using Smart tag, 496

confJ

about, 33

ConfL

about, 33

Connecting a controller, 490

Controller grants, 402

Backup and save, 402

Calibration, 403

Delete log, 403

Edit RAPID code, 402

Execute program, 402

Full access, 402

I/O write access, 402

Manage UAS settings, 402

Modify configuration, 402

Modify controller properties, 403

Modify current value, 402

Program debug, 403

Read access to controller disks, 403

Safety Controller, 403

Write access to controller disks, 403

controller menu, 184

Controller Shutdown, 410

Terminate Virtual Controllers, 410

controller status window, 56

access, 57

controller name, 56 controller state, 56

logged on as, 57

operating mode, 56 program execution state, 56 system name, 56

controller system

create, 160

controller tab, 54

access, 55

controller name, 54 controller state, 54

logged on as, 55

operating mode, 54 program execution state, 54 system name, 54

controller world coordinate system, 28

control panel, 409 enable device, 409 manual full speed, 409 motors on, 409 operation mode, 409 release device, 409 reset emergency stop, 409

convert frame to workobject, 429

coordinate systems, 26

cycle tme

measure, 147

D

data binding

Controller object data binding, 497

Data Binding, 496

Application variable data binding, 497

data declaration, 23

detach, 432

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

515

Index

detecting collision, 142

Development Environment, 476

device browser, 392

E

editor, 135

element

select, 68

Ethernet, 154

event

create, 144

events, 350 event log, 350

external axis

program, 131

F

File transfer, 387

Controller explorer, 388

PC explorer, 388

FlexPendant Viewer, 389

frame

converting to workobject, 104 crerating by points, 104

Frame

create, 215

create from three points, 216

frames, 26

function, 23

G

geometry

troubleshoot and optimize, 90

Getting started window, 45

Go Offline, 394

Grants, about, 159

Grants, give to groups, 400

graphics window, 67

Group, about, 158

group, add, 399

group, add user, 398

group, remove, 400

group, rename, 399

Groups, give grants, 400

H

handle events, 187

date and time, 188 event category, 188 event code, 188 event description, 188

event log list, 187

event title, 188

event type, 187

manage events, 189 retrieve controller events, 189

sequential number, 188

I

I/O

set, 145

I/O system, 365

I/O signals, 180 input signals, 180 output signals, 180 simulated signals, 180 virtual signals, 180

516

import, 87

import geometry, 214

import library, 207

instruction, 23

about, 25

item

select, 68

J

jog

mechanism, 105 robot, 105 several mechanisms, 105

jog reorient, 250

jointtarget

creating, 106

K

keyboard shortcuts, 70

General commands, 70

Program Editor commands, 70

Program Editor hotkeys, 71

Program Editor Intellisense, 70

L

Layout browser, 46

LED, 479

library

troubleshoot and optimize, 90

load module, 355

Load Parameters, 379

local coordinate system

set, 96

local origin

set, 96

M

Manage ScreenMaker project

Close ScreenMaker, 488

ScreenMaker Doctor, 14, 15, 477, 499

Manage ScreenMaker Project, 487

Close project, 488

Create project, 487

Load project, 487

Save project, 488

Manage Screens, 488

Create screen, 488

Delete screen, 489

Edit screen, 489

Rename screen, 489

Managing ScreenMaker Projects

Build project, 491

Markup, 256

MediaPool, 22

Mirror, 446

Modeling browser, 49

Modify project properties, 489

module, 23

move instruction

about, 25

Move instruction

teach, 237

MoveJ

teach, 237

MoveL

teach, 237

MultiMove

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Index

programming workflow, 124

N

near-miss detection, 142

network settings, 155 firewall settings, 155 local network connection, 155 remote network connection, 155 service port connection, 155

new module, 354

NONSTEPIN, 354

READONLY, 354

VIEWONLY, 354

O

object

select, 68

set local origin, 96

troubleshoot and optimize, 90

Offline and Online browser, 50

Online Monitor, 395

operator window, 58 enabling operator window, 58 show virtual operator window, 58

orientations, 111

align target, 113

copy and apply, 114

target normal to surface, 112

unordered, 111

output window, 53 event types, 53

P

pack, unpack, 150

part

set local origin, 96

Password, change for user, 398

path, 108

about, 25

compensating, 109

creating, 108 creating from curve, 108 reversing, 108

rotating, 109

setting axis configuration, 108

translating, 109

Paths & Targets browser, 47

Placing an item, 459

Frame, 459

One Point, 459

Three Points, 459

Two Frames, 459

Two Points, 459

positioner.program, 131

procedure, 23

process time

measure, 147

program, 135

copy, 149

programming

overview, 103

Properties, 391

Device Browser, 392

Renaming the controller, 391

Set controller ID, 391

Set date and time, 391

View controller and system properties, 392

Properties Window

Event Help panel, 480

Graphical Component Name panel, 480

Properties window toolbar, 480

Table panel, 480

Property editor, 288

R

RAPID

concepts, 23

copy program, 149

RAPID editor, 352

RAPID instructions, 115

RAPID Profiler, 364

RAPID task, 359 task window, 359

RAPID Watch window, 382

reachability

test, 122

Release Write Access, 385

remote subnet, 156

Request Write Access, 384

robot

programming overview, 103

Robot system button, 208

adding an existing system, 209 adding a template system, 209 conveyor setup, 209

create system from layout, 208

remove objects from conveyor, 210

RobotWare, 21 license key, 21

RobotWare system, 21

routine, 23

Run mode, 408 continuous, 408 single, 408

S

safety, 18

safety configuration, 381

Screen navigation, 501

service port, 153

set task frame, 411

signals

set, 145

simulate

alerts, 146

create event, 144

measure process time, 147

set signals, 145

TCP trace, 146

simulation, 139, 141

simulation control, 332

Simulation watch, 289

Break condition, 290

station

build workflow, 73

pan, 67 rotate, 67 zoom, 67

station world coordiante system, 26

switch, 479

synchronization, 134 station to VC, 134

VC to station, 134

system

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

517

Index

create, 160

create with positioner, 177

RobotWare, 21

System Builder, 160, 373

about virtual and real systems, 160

building new system, 163

copying system, 171

create boot media, 174

create system from backup, 172

download a system to controller, 173

modify controller system, 167

viewing system properties, 162

System Configuration, 412

controller values, 413 stored station values, 413 used current station values, 413

system parameters, 181

editing parameters, 182

load parameters, 185

save system parameters, 184

T

target, 106

about, 25

creating, 106 modifying, 106 modifying with ModPos, 106

removing unused, 107

renaming, 106 teaching, 106

Targets on Edge, 224

TCP, 26

TCP trace

activate, 146

ToolBox

ActionTrigger, 478

BarGraph, 478

CheckBox, 478

ComboBox, 478

CommandBar, 478

ConditionalTrigger, 479

ControllerModeStatus, 479

DataEditor, 479

Graph, 479

GroupBox, 479

ListBox, 479

NumEditor, 479

NumericUpDown, 479

Panel, 479

PictureBox, 479

RapidExecutionStatus, 479

RunRoutineButton, 479

TabControl, 479

Tool Center Point coordinate system, 26

tooldata, 95 tools, 95

TpsLabel, 479

track

program, 131

trap, 23

U

UAS Grant Viewer, 401

UCS, 31

unpack, 195

User, about, 158

User, add, 397

User, add to group, 398

User, change password, 398

User, change user name, 398

User, enable and disable, 398

User, remove, 398

User account, 396

User tab, 396

user coordinate system, 31

V

VariantButton, 479

viewpoint, 254 create, 254 move to viewpoint, 254 viewpoint functions, 254

Virtual FlexPendant, 407

Virtual FlexPendant operator window, 58

VSTA, 37

W

workobject

creating, 104 modifying, 104

WorkObject, 31

workobjects, 104

world coordinate system, 26

518

© Copyright 2008-2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC032104-001 Revision: G

Contact us

ABB AB

Discrete Automation and Motion

Robotics

S-721 68 VÄSTERÅS

SWEDEN

Telephone +46 (0) 21 344 400 www.abb.com

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement